JP2020110634A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine suppressing decline in motivation for games.SOLUTION: A slot machine is a game machine which performs an internal lottery regarding winning combinations, and which can repeatedly perform a game displaying a game result based on a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine, a main board 409 performs a combination lottery (winning combination lottery) where a winning combination is selected from plural combinations, and performs a control to output external signals, via an external relay terminal plate 131, indicating prescribed information regarding games to an external device capable of communicating with the slot machine.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 48

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning drum type gaming machine (also referred to as “pachi-slot machine” or “slot machine”).

In a conventional conventional spinning-type gaming machine (gaming machine), a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and a part of the plurality of symbols attached to each reel is displayed as a symbol display area. Is provided. In such a gaming machine, when a start operation such as operating a start lever is performed after a predetermined number of gaming values (for example, medals) are multiplied, an internal lottery of the winning combination is performed and the winning combination is won. The reels are controlled based on this. After that, when a stop operation such as operating the reel stop button is performed, each reel is stopped at the stop position based on the winning combination, and the combination of symbols attached to the reel (symbol combination) is shown to the player. .. Then, as a game result, a privilege is given (payment of a gaming value associated with winning of a winning combination, transition to an advantageous gaming state, etc.).

As an advantageous game state in such a gaming machine, in addition to a bonus game accompanying a winning of a bonus combination, an AT game (or RT game or ART game) in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is informed is representative. (For example, patent document 1).

JP, 2004-344496, A

However, according to the conventional gaming machine as described above, there is a problem that the number of games required until the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state tends to increase, and the willingness to continue the game decreases.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in game motivation.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is a gaming machine capable of repeatedly executing a game in which an internal lottery related to a winning combination is executed and a game result based on the result of the internal lottery is displayed, A plurality of winning combination lottery means for executing a winning combination lottery for selecting a winning combination, and an external output means capable of outputting an external signal indicating predetermined information regarding a game to an external device capable of communicating with the gaming machine are provided. The winning combination includes at least a high-frequency winning combination that is relatively easy to select in the winning combination lottery and a low-frequency winning combination that is less likely to be selected than the high-frequency winning combination, and the external signal output by the external output means. Includes at least a consumption medium information signal indicating information based on the number of game media consumed when playing the game, and a game execution signal indicating that the game has been played, and the external output means Outputs the consumption medium information signal corresponding to the game to the external device each time the game is played, while outputting the game execution signal corresponding to the game even if the game is played. And a signal output limiting means capable of limiting

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in game motivation.

It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which a door-type front member is omitted. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. It is a Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 portion of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. 7A is an enlarged view of Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of FIG.8(a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the backboard side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is a front view which abbreviate|omitted the cover body of a wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of a stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of a stopper showing other forms. It is a sectional view of the important section showing the guide structure of a case member. It is a sectional view of the important section showing the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of a symbol variation display device showing another form of a handle. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a main part showing a relationship between a case member and an outer body side stopper. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a symbol variable display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the slot machine. It is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up the power supply device from the bottom. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the outer main body and the power supply device, showing another embodiment. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which decomposes|disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which decomposes|disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line AA of FIG. 33 of the door-shaped front member having a transparent plate attached. It is a disassembled and assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-type front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door type front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the backside which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is a cross-sectional perspective view which cut|disconnected the coupling tool in the longitudinal direction. It is a principal part transverse plan view of the door type front member which shows the example of other hinge metal fittings. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of essential parts showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 42 in the middle of opening. It is a perspective view showing a state where an image display object and a frame member are opened in a model unit. It is a perspective view showing the state where a door type front member was opened with a connecting tool connected. It is a development view in which a symbol row of a reel band is two-dimensionally developed. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the slot machine viewed from the front. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc., which are provided in the slot machine. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination. It is a figure which shows each winning combination and the condition device which is materialized corresponding to each of these winning combinations. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device, the number of medals paid out, and the like. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device, the number of medals paid out, and the like. It is a figure (3) which shows the combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device, the number of payouts of medals, and the like. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of one basic game in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of starting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of game state shift control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the rough process flow of instruction|indication function processing. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows the detailed processing procedure of instruction function generation processing. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows the detailed process sequence of instruction function generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of directions function related processing. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table used in the initial game number addition win/loss lottery. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table used for the initial game number addition game number lottery. It is a figure for explaining a lottery table used for an AT first hit lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is a figure (the 3) for explaining a lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor game number lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for the number of precursor games lottery. It is a figure (the 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the number of precursor games lottery. It is a figure (the 4) for explaining the lottery table used for the number of precursor games lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state transfer lottery A. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for state transition lottery A. It is a figure (the 3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state transfer lottery A. It is a figure for explaining a lottery table used for a special state transition lottery. It is a figure for explaining a lottery table used for a special state game number lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state transfer lottery B. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for state transition lottery B. It is a figure (the 3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state transfer lottery B. It is a figure for explaining the transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation process of each example. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the instruction|indication function display of a 1st example. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the indicatory function display of the 1st example. It is a figure for demonstrating the indicator used by the instruction|indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the instruction|indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the indicatory function display of the 2nd example. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a display of the indication function of a 2nd example. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the display example of the instruction function display in which several display modes were set. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the example of a display of the indication function display in which several display modes were set. It is a figure for explaining an example of a group display in indication function display. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete example of a display of the indicator function of a 1st example. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a display period by various displays. 9 is a timing chart showing another example of display periods by various display devices and the like. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for continuous production generation lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for continuous production generation lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for continuous production content lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the lottery table used for continuous production contents lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the expectation degree display (pattern 1) of a 1st type. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the expectation degree display (pattern 1) of a 1st type. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree display (pattern 2) of a 1st type. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree display (pattern 1) of a 2nd type. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree display (pattern 2) of a 2nd type. It is a figure for explaining a display example when priority display of timing (expectation degree priority display) is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when priority display of timing (instruction function priority display) is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when priority display (expected degree priority display) of a layer is performed. It is a figure for explaining a display example when priority display of a layer (priority display of an indication function) is performed. It is a figure for explaining the expectation degree display which directs the display propriety of a specific mode. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of judgment processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a bonus game end determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by a special display LED. 6 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart (part 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a processing procedure of power failure recovery processing in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing an example (part 1) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing an example (part 2) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing an example (part 3) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing an example (part 4) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing a display period example (No. 1) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. FIG. 125 is a timing chart showing a display period example (No. 2) when the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing a display period example (No. 3) when the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1b. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. It is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. It is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. It is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. It is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1f. FIG. 16 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. It is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows the detailed processing procedure of instruction function generation processing. It is an example of a lottery table used for AT additional lottery. It is an example of a lottery table used for reincarnation lottery. It is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of the number of pre-incarnation games. It is an example of a lottery table used in the number of reincarnation accumulation games lottery. It is an example of a lottery table used in the AT additional lottery at the time of transhipment accumulation. It is an example of a lottery table used in the AT additional lottery at the time of reincarnation release. It is a figure for explaining a game progress at the time of reincarnation production. It is a figure for explaining an example of a liquid crystal display and a reel display at the time of reincarnation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the signal output from an external relay terminal board. It is a figure for demonstrating the information shown by the combination of a classification signal. It is a figure for explaining an example of a data indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the output of the input signal and the payout signal.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-type front member is omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view of the slot machine showing the state, FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of Z1 portion of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of Z1 portion of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 part of FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 13A and 13B are perspective views of the main part of the case member for explaining the temporary holding state of the connector holder, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 15 is a wiring relay member. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a guide structure of a case member, FIG. 22 is a partial perspective view of a symbol variation display device showing another form of a handle, and FIG. 23 shows a relationship between a case member and a stopper on the outer body side. FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reels of the variable display device, FIG. 25 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26, FIG. 28 is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine, and FIG. 29 is a part of the slot machine showing a power supply device. Sectional front view, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the power supply device is looked up from below, FIG. 31 shows another form, a side plate of the outer body and a main part cross-sectional view of the power supply device, and FIG. 32 is another form. 35 is a schematic sectional view of the illuminating device, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-type front member showing a transparent plate and a light-emitting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. 34 is a perspective view of a door-type front member showing a transparent plate in an exploded view. 33A is a sectional view of a door-type front member with a transparent plate, which is equivalent to FIG. 33A-A line, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of a hinge fitting, FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, and FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-type front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-type front member. 41 is a vertical cut of the connecting tool 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a main part of a door-type front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of the door-type front member shown in FIG. Reference numeral 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening/closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened with the connecting tool being connected.

[1. First Embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, and a front side of the outer main body 100, which is laterally opened with a rotating shaft 100a. A door-shaped front member 200 rotatably mounted in a door shape, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by a driving unit, and an opening 401 which is detachable from the outer body 100 and is provided on the front surface. It has a case member 400 and an image display body 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of a bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on top of the side plates 102, 102 to provide a vertically long “mouth” in a front view. It is formed in a letter-shaped frame shape, and a back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape with only the front face opened. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined rearward, and therefore the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearward inclination. Further, in the top plate 103, a plurality (in the embodiment, in the embodiment, in an area facing the upper bar 600 (see imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the game machine installation island in a state where the game machine installation island (not shown) is installed. 4) through holes 132, 132... Are drilled.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
A partition plate 105 in the shape of a shelf plate is provided in the outer main body 100 substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a projecting portion 106 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and has vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends thereof. The side plates 102, 102 are fixedly attached to the inner surfaces thereof, and the vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring processing (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical projection is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-machined in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 to be positioned. Further, at the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, from the medal ejecting device 110 for ejecting a medal, which is a game medium, to the medal tray 201 at the lower front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and from the medal ejecting device 110. An auxiliary storage box 111 for medals for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal ejection device]
The medal discharging device 110 is a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means and a hopper 110b for storing medals attached thereto. A medal discharging port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the drive means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging the overflowed medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the projecting end of the overflow gutter 110d. It should be noted that the medal discharging mechanism of the medal discharging device 110 may employ any known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply device]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where three members of a bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, a side plate 102 on the left side when facing the front, and a back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. There is. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to electric parts such as the medal discharging device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to a mounting portion of the power supply device 112. The mouth 104a is opened.

The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, so that it is easy to find an illegal operation on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112. The device case 112a includes an upper surface plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear surface plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front surface plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear surface plate 112c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. Will be blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is below the guard portion 102b. It is designed to allow one side to sneak in. As a result, even if the one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the guard portion 102b closes the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard part 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly projected to the side plate 102 side, and the tip of the guard part 102b is formed. It is designed to fit in the groove.

As described above, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer main body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, It is easy to incorporate the substrate 112s and the like using the open surface, and the workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach the cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are incorporated into the device case 112a.

A large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g,... Are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a so that heat does not stay inside. .. The device case 112a is raised in a stilt manner by legs 112h, 112h provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-temperature relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment is adapted to communicate with the heat dissipation port 104a of the outer body 100, cold air behind the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a to raise the ventilation space 112i, the height of the leg 112h and the heat dissipation port 104a can be increased. Even if there is a deviation in height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat dissipation port 104a.

[2-1-2-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that projects from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. It is fixed to the outer main body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat dissipation port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

That is, the outline of the heat dissipation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat dissipation port 104a. Further, the projection 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat dissipation port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat dissipation port 104a in order to resist the floating operation of the power supply device 112. It is composed of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 which is inscribed in the vertical side of the heat dissipation port 104a so as to resist the overturning operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat dissipation port 104a. At, the fixation to the right (rollover) is completed. Of course, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted in a direction other than the pulling direction by a simple operation of simply fitting the protrusion 112m.

On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and wood screws 112q are passed through at least one of the through holes 112p to fix to the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted even in the pulling direction, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-power cord
A power cord (not shown) for receiving electric power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. In the past, a bulge portion was provided beside the heat dissipation port 104a and the power cord was pulled out from the bulge portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord will be grounded even if the power cords are bundled. The slot machine 1 may be powered on during manufacturing, and the power cord must be put out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for that, so that the slot machine 1 may be moved on a manufacturing line or between lines. There is a possibility that the power cord may slip on the ground or move under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and get caught.

On the other hand, in the heat dissipation port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is expanded from the upper side thereof to the upper side, and the power cord is pulled out therefrom. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the installation is completed simply by setting the power supply device 112 in the inner corner portion of the outer body 100 and screwing in one wood screw 112q. It is possible to significantly reduce the installation work. Further, according to the present invention, the fixing is completed by screwing on one surface, so that particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to visually recognize and can be surely fixed. .. By the way, conventionally, it is necessary to screw onto a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screw fixing to the back plate 104 is hard to visually recognize, and thus it may be forgotten.

Further, since the heat dissipation port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat dissipation port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra step and cost are hardly generated. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are made to coincide for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the protrusion 112m for mounting can be integrally molded, so that there is almost no cost. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented with almost no cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer body 100, and a wiring relay member 113, which is a core of wiring means described later, is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The back plate 104 is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a ventilation hole 133 for heat radiation is formed above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door type front member]
FIG. 3 shows the front side of the door type front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door type front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side of the front side, and an operation section 202 is provided substantially at the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 includes an insertion slot 203 for inserting medals, and a one-insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) usable in one game and a medal return for returning the medals packed in the medal selector 207 described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command for a medal stored as data in the memory of the main substrate 409 (a discharge command by settlement), and a starting lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300. And, three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c for stopping each reel 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is one example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a known one that switches the flow path by turning on/off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and the flow path is set to the medal gutter 212 side in the game state where the player waits for a medal to be inserted. In addition, in a game state in which the insertion of medals is rejected, such as the insertion of medals exceeding the specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. The medal trough 212 is designed such that its tip end faces the hopper 110b of the medal ejecting device 110 when the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position covering the front surface of the outer main body 100, and the medal selector 207 is inserted from the insertion opening 203. The medals that have flowed through the medal gutter 212 pass through the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the front side medal tray 201, and the medals flowing from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door type front member-transparent window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. It is 214. The transparent window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300 can be seen vertically side by side. The regions of the display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower parts. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the pattern variation display device 300, the positions of the image display body 500 and the pattern variation display device 300 are switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door type front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, rubber-containing methacrylic resin excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical characteristics, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) Is a substantially upside-down trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side with the side facing the player as the front side on the periphery of the three sides (the left and right side sides and the upper side) excluding the bottom side, 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the pattern variable display device 300, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid structure but a shell-like structure having an internal space, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or letters on its surface are incorporated in the internal space thereof.

In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the illustrated shape, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the peripheral edge of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, but may be provided at least on one side.

33 and 34, a reference numeral 218 is a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a, and is a screw threaded through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. It is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 34, which is fitted between the edge members 214b and 214b by (not shown). While the fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration on the outside, the fixing members 218 are different from the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view in FIG. 33) provided in the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door type front member 200, and thus plays a role of a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door type front member 200.

33 to 35, reference numeral 217a is a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b is a reflecting member that supports the light emitting body 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set to have an angle so that the light of the rod-shaped light emitting body 217a is largely reflected toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the configuration in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitting body 217a can be arranged closer to the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it is as if it were a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. , Is advantageous when the light is emitted toward the surroundings. The reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light emitting unit 217 having the above-described configuration can perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of a big hit to the surroundings by turning on during a game, especially when a big hit occurs. By thus providing a highly appealing effect to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won the jackpot, and the gaze of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further enhances the game. In addition, by appealing to the surroundings that a big hit has come out, it is expected that the model will become more popular and the operating rate will be improved.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the plate-shaped bottom side of the door-shaped front member 200 is provided in the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Insert it diagonally from the front side and fit it in a fitting type, and in that state, make the transparent plate 214a upright and bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-type front member 200, and further, of the door-type front member 200. It is fixed by a screw 603 (see FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 shows a main part of the door-shaped front member 200 cut at this time. As is clear from FIG. 35, if the player temporarily detects a foreign substance from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign object to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[3-2. Door type front member-locking device]
On one side of the free end side of the door-type front member 200, a lock device 215 that is opened/closed by using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided.

[4. Pattern change display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and includes, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c that can be individually rotated by a driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are incorporated and housed. It is a well-known one which has a device case 302 for performing a game by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

The device case 302 has a modified hexagonal column shape except for three sides facing the front (player) from an octagonal column that is laid down sideways. The bottom plate 304, the top plate portion 305, and the right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, a bottom plate 304 and a rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front of the apparatus case 302.

Further, the top plate 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a use state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate 305 is laid down. It is designed to be carried around.

The configuration in which the variable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 as described above is closely related to measures for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and thus the opening 401 of the case member 400 is provided with sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it obviously obstructs the insertion/removal of the device case 302 into/from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made variable and is made to lie down on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can easily pass under the reinforcing bar 402. Therefore, only by providing the variable handle 311 on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the opening portion 401 of the case member 400 so as to cross the opening portion 401. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle is protruding from the top plate and it becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar in the opening of the case member.

Although the handle 311 of the embodiment has a structure that swings to change between a standing use state and a lying non-use state, a structure that can change the handle 311 between a use state and a non-use state is used. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314 and 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314 and 314 are provided with retaining portions 315 and 315 made of synthetic resin or leather at both ends. With the structure in which the provided strip-shaped handle 311 is inserted and the center is pulled up from the non-used state shown in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a non-use state lying down.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is provided in a protruding manner on the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the lower handle 316 is grasped to push the device case 302 or By pulling, the case member 400 can be easily taken in and out.

[5. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size that substantially matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is provided upright on the rear edge, and the rear plate 405 and a top plate 406 that covers the upper surfaces of the side plates 404, 404 are formed in a box shape having an opening 401 in the front surface.

In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear face plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plates 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are reinforced by metal. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and metal reinforcing bars 402 that cross the opening 401 are spanned between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. Then, below this reinforcing bar 402, as an installation area for the symbol variable display device 300, and below the reinforcing bar 402 as an installation area for the image display body 500, an opening 401 is further provided. A region surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409, which is a main control board, is mounted on an inner wall surface of a rear face plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub-board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

As shown in FIG. 1, skylights 443 and 443 are formed on the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The skylight portions 443, 443 are divided into two parts with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, and each of them is an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132... Of the outer main body 100. It is located in a region including the intersection and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132... However, the front peripheral edge of the skylight 443 is located near the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found out by groping on the basis of the peripheral edge of the skylight 443, so that the position of the throughhole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylights 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight and further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 are provided on the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as a back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. The bosses 410, 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, while the boss holes 114, 114 on the outer body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. Therefore, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A taper portion 413 is provided at an end portion of the recessed step portion 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side, the taper portion 413 extending in a rearward direction. The taper portion 413 guides the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The fitting with the recessed step portion 412 can be smoothly performed. In this way, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the recessed step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. The rail member 115 in the form of a groove is laid or integrally press-formed on the plate 105, while the wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 so that the wheel 414 rolls in the groove of the rail member 115. Good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally press-formed on the partition plate 105, while flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the collars 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

Further, the case member 400 is fixed to a predetermined position on the partition plate 105, and is stopped by the swing lever type stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23. The stopper 117 is axially attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and two attachments 118 and 118 vertically provided on the top plate 103 as shown in FIGS. 18 and the non-operating posture in which the case member 400 is not engaged with the case member 400 as shown in phantom lines in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is formed into a key shape as shown in FIG. 19 and engages with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

Further, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406 as shown in FIG. It is possible to switch between the operating posture and the non-operating posture from the inside of the case member 400 with the case member 400 being pushed into a predetermined position.

Further, the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole that penetrates the outer body 100 toward the back plate 104 side. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the pattern variable display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 4, 5 and 24, and the lower side of the main substrate 409. And a horizontally long empty space 417 on the upper swash plate 309 (or may be considered as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409) and the back. It functions as an opening that connects the plates 104.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as a “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially middle position of the height of the empty space 417. Further, outside the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, recesses 419 and 419 are formed as wiring passages that pass through to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300, the wiring window 411 will be the reel 301a of the symbol variable display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c, the horizontal plane HL passing through the center of rotation and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height positions of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are set to the lower limit, that is, the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, they are arranged.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of displaying an image, which is composed of at least a liquid crystal display (a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes. The image display body 500 is rotated by the hinge metal fitting 420 by attaching the hinge metal fitting 420 to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the side plate 404 on the left side of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the hatched portion in FIG. 11 for the mounting position). It is supported freely.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back surface side of the image display body 500. Therefore, it becomes possible to integrally configure the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510, the handling becomes easy, and the wiring connecting the both can be omitted, and the wiring work in the case member 400 can be performed. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears so as to project from the inside of the case member 400, so that workability with respect to the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. Since the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, its upper part will be mainly described. The hinge metal fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the member 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a lateral fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf board, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P1 on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e, and a short link is on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the pivoting member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a sideways bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf board, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. Further, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37. A so-called bi-lever mechanism is constructed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c), this both lever mechanism approximates the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory about the rotation axis 100a of the door-type front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. In other words, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotation outside of the image display body 500. The distance from the edge is set to be approximately constant.

The long links 420d and the short links 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h set so as to overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long links 420d). The region 420g is swollen into a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are coaxially aligned with each other and a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) is inserted to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the both lever mechanisms to lock the image display. It is for fixing 500 to the open position.

[6-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 (right side in FIG. 11) opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420. The piece 421 is pivotally mounted, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 11, the tip end thereof engages with the receiving portion 508 provided on the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 becomes rotatable around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, in the state before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while the image is displayed when the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100. The display 500 is unlocked so that it can be rotated.

[6-3. Image Display-Connector]
By the way, since an image display body 500 that can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the inside of the case member 400 is worked. First, the front door member 200 on the front side must be opened, and then the image display body 500 on the rear side must be further opened, which may reduce workability and cause trouble. ..

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to be the same as the rotation direction of the door-type front member 200, and the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-type front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connecting member 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is rotated with the door-shaped front member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one lateral opening operation.

Here, as described above, in the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment, the rotation locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-type front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge metal fitting 420. Although it resembles a rotation locus with the center of rotation as the center of rotation, there is still a relative deviation between the movements of the two. Therefore, in the connector 700 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the fixed sheath member 701 is formed on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500 and slid inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed freely, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) by a stopper shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 is opened and closed together as if the image display body 500 is an accessory of the door-type front member 200 in association with the opening and closing of the door-type front member 200, and both of them are generated at that time. The rod 702 of the connector 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative displacement of the movement.

The maximum protruding length when the rod 702 is most protruded from the rotating outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is as follows when the image display body 500 is at the open position (for example, when the image display body 500 is opened by 90°). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the connector.

Further, the stop shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be vertically movable, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been done. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the biasing force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving the stopper shaft 703 upward and floating the lower end. That is, the stopper shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip end portion of the rod 702 and held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 of the fixed sheath member 701. It is to be housed and held inside, and engages with a hooking wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. The rod 702 is provided with a tab 706 protruding from the side surface thereof in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction. The stopper 704 is unlocked by pinching the tab 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like this. Further, a retaining piece 701a is hung on the bottom surface of the fixed sheath member 701 on the tip side and inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining piece 701a comes into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 is most protruded, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion provided on the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided with a slide-type guide section 402a that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (replaceable) attached to the image display body 500. There is.

By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation loci of the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described expandable rod-type connector 700, and is made by a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting member is a flexible wire or the like, the door-type front member 200 collides with the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-type front member 200 is open at the stage of closing the door-type front member 200, impairing smoothness. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, the image display body 500 may be provided with a biasing means such as a coil spring so as to always bias in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-type front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the connector by the action of the urging force, so that the door-type front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for accompanying the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for the accompanying rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanism as described above, and the single pin 420k as shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

In the structure in which the attaching means of the image display body 500 to the case member 400 has a hinge structure and the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door, the locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above ( When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, it is said that in principle, the case member 400 is kept locked while being attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary such as checking the wiring work space 408. It is possible to select handling, and in that case, important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub-board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, which is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. ..

A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is inserted by a finger passing through the gap 10. You can grab it. Further, a handle port 422 is formed in a front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (reinforcing band 444 between the skylight windows 443, 443), and a finger passing through the handle port 422 causes the top plate 406 to move. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used as the handle port 422 and the gap 10 depending on the handling place and posture. For example, it is better to carry the case member 400 in a bag shape by using the handle port 422 during transportation before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, while the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. As described above, since the handle port 422 is hidden behind the outer main body 100 and the finger does not enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by hooking the finger on the reinforcing member 407 through the gap 10. In addition, the lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 described above is projected at the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the lower handle 316 is pushed or pulled to pull the outer main body 100. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with a screw, and thus the lower handle 316 is provided in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Equal to

[6-4. Image display-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire area of the opening 401 of the case member 400 above the reinforcing bar 402. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 that integrally surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variable display device 300 in a frame shape. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light-emitting source such as an LED, a light-emitting control board that controls the light-emitting source, and a decorative member that is arranged in front of the light-emitting source and can transmit light. Parts are provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described below as a front opening/closing member 90 (see FIG. 44).

[6-4-1. Image Display-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided above and below the back side of the frame member 501, and the illumination device 502 brightly illuminates the symbol of the symbol variable display device 300. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variable display device 300, the light source can be brought close to the symbol variable display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 in such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the illuminating device 502 in the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light amount as compared with the conventional illuminating device.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lighting device 502 exemplified as the embodiment has a strip-shaped substrate elongated in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface of the drawing (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a... ). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in 503, and the lower illuminating device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is covered with, for example, a milky white translucent lid plate 505. The upper illuminating device 502 is arranged with the LED 504 facing downward in the translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section and having a milky white color, for example.

The upper illuminating device 502 is installed so that the illuminating direction is obliquely downward toward the player side, that is, toward the transparent plate 214a side from directly below as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having a relatively strong directivity is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a. It is tilted obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a.

If a rod-shaped light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the illumination device 502, the substrate 503 of FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-shaped or a concave reflection member that encloses the light source, and a direct light is emitted. It may be set so that the center line of the main irradiation area, which is directed by the total sum of the reflected light, obliquely strikes the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. When the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

According to the experiment, when the illumination direction of the illuminating device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the curved specific portions of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and become difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is directed obliquely with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the reel outer peripheral surface is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, 301c It was confirmed that a wide area became bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the illumination device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted to the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused over the entire surface, or the transparent plate 214a is illuminated brightly so that the reel 301a, It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or that they are synergistic.

The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can be applied to the lower illumination device 502, and, of course, can be applied only to the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 32, the upper lighting device 502 of FIG. 4 is arranged on the lower side, and the lower lighting device 502 is arranged on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the lighting device 502 is “lower”. And “bottom” can be read as “top”.

By the way, when the LED is adopted as the light source of the illumination device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven at a low voltage, so that it is driven at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V at operation). The safety is higher than that of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp of (b), the life is longer than that of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp, (c) It is more durable than the cold cathode fluorescent lamp which is a glass tube, and (d) The range of production is possible because of multicolor emission. (E) It is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used in combination with the inverter, and thus has a merit that the load of the hinge metal fitting 420 supporting the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205, 206 and the starting lever 210 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “generic” as a generic name) attached to the outer main body 100, such as the medal emitting device 110, the power supply device 112, and the operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200. It may be referred to as “main body side electric component”) and, for example, the main board 409 or the like in the case member 400 (there may be simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a general term for the case member side electric component). Connected to each other. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening/closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100, the model unit 50 can be replaced. At that time, a rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (case side electric component) and the case member side electric component.

[7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper portion of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two large and small in the embodiment) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as large and small in the embodiment) housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. Sometimes referred to as "connector connection terminal board") 122 and 123.

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120 and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with a connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is mounted in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed movably state, and thus the enlarged view of FIG. It can be moved in the vertical direction, as shown in, and can also be moved in the horizontal direction. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that forms a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 that is connected to the case-member-side electrical components other than the main board 409. It should be noted that the connector 125 and the connector 124 are of a board fixing type that are fixed to a printed board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard ones are used.

Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a wiring duct 129 in the shape of a tunnel that projects to the front of the section.

The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 pass through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or are bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. In this state, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line L in FIG. 1, they are distributed to the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100, and turn substantially vertically in the vicinity of the corners of the side plates 102, 102 and the back plate 104. Through the wiring openings 109 provided in the inner part of the partition plate 105, they are respectively connected to the main body side electric components. Of course, when there is an electric component on the main body side (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in a region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(A) On the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, between the horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the pattern variation display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, The wiring window 411 is formed at a height where the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, the wiring relay member 113 that relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electrical components and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electrical components is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path is formed along the inner surface of the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 for passing wiring.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and from there, connected to the main body side electric component through the wiring path.

In the gaming machine having the above-described components (a) to (d), the main body side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variable display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100. Since it bypasses the wiring path provided along (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)), it is possible to bring the reels 301a, 301b, 301c close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. , The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the main body side wiring 119 passes under the center of the back plate 104 and passes behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. Can be large. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[7-2. Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the end of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 that are connected to the electric components are respectively connected.

The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 substantially at the center and is projected on both sides of the holder main body 429. The wiring relay member 113 includes a well-known button type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nilatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A. The attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support tube 128, and the button type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support tube 128 and locked. Therefore, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 which is a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 are not disconnected.

[7-2-1. Wiring relay board-connectors 425, 427-temporary fixing shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated in the outer body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 425. The 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf plate-shaped member facing the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. Thus, the substantially horizontal bench part 433 on which the connector holder 428 is mounted, the bench side plates 434 erected at both ends of the bench part 433, and the three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. A space is provided between the center one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted therein. The one bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hooking portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by putting a finger on the finger hooking portion 436 and applying a force in the X direction shown by the arrow in FIG. 8B. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and in the bent state, the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger-holding portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be detached as if pressing a button as indicated by arrow Y. You can do it easily.

Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by fitting it between the 435. Of course, even if it is called temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set so as not to come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the work of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425, 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424, 426 collide with the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging yourself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8B→FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is bent outward as described above. If the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 of itself is in contact with the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are the connectors of the wiring relay member 113. Since it fits into 124 and 125 (details of which will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the chain double-dashed lines in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guiding is provided on the bench portion 433, it is sufficient to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 as a supporting base and is separated from the case member and does not come into contact with the outer body 100. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the above description, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(A) an outer body having a box-like shape having a front surface opened and a back surface covered with a back plate, and including a power supply device and other main body side electric parts;
(B) A model unit provided with a pattern variation display device for varying a plurality of symbols in a case member that is detachable from the outer body, and other case member side electric parts,
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body to relay the main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wirings connected to the case member side electric component,
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector,
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder,
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is attached to the outer body. In the state where the model unit is mounted on the outer main body, the connector holder is replaced with a fixing member from the temporary fixing member to connect the connector of the connector holder to the wiring relay member (i) a gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are separately performed. In contrast to this, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. It is possible to automatically connect the connectors by pushing the model unit 50 into the outer body 100. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector coupling portion, which makes the reliability uncertain, and there is a problem in that costly measures are required. is there.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a structure in which one door type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100 and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-type front member is divided into upper and lower two stages and the upper door-type front member is used as a component of the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the connector coupling may become unstable. There is a problem that a new crime prevention structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present invention, one door type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door type front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is connected to the component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when using a low-cost general connector that is used by soldering to a printed circuit board, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and during playing. Further, since only the model unit 50 is the replacement target when changing the model, and the door-type front member 200 is not the replacement target, the burden on the amusement hall for changing the model is reduced.

[7-2-2. Coupling of connectors 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to the one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425, 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at the predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the two independent elements of the connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the difficult problem of “accurate positioning” of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 occurs. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the side of the wiring relay member 113 is not accurate, the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 cannot be collectively coupled. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at a mass production level. As a means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of joining without soldering to a printed circuit board is conceivable, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still heavy.

On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113, which is a board supporting member, are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. The relay member 113 is non-fixedly housed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121, and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (the "orthogonal" here is not strictly 90 degrees). It means that it is about 90 degrees according to the common wisdom of society.) In such a configuration, when the connector 425 and the connector 124 are set as the coupling sights of the connector holder 428, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation occurs. Since it moves for correction, the connector 427 and the connector 125 can be connected.

From the above description, the following technical ideas can be understood.
(1) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with the respective connectors, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these. The other connector group that forms the connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is divided for each connector, and one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is connected to the board support member in the connector coupling direction. A game machine characterized by being attached so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to each other."
(2) “A box-shaped body having a front surface opened and a back surface covered with a back plate, and an outer main body provided with a power supply device and other main body side electric parts, and a plurality of patterns on a case member detachable from the outer main body In order to relay the model variation display device to be changed and other model units provided with case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the ends of the case side wirings, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, another connector group by means of a board-fixing type connector which is paired with each connector of the connector groups of two or more systems and fixedly used on a printed board, A connector connection terminal board attached to a wiring relay member attached to a back plate and having a connector of the other connector group fixed thereto; the connector connection terminal board is divided for each connector; One is fixed to the wiring relay member, and another connector connection terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction."
(3) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with the respective connectors, one connector group is fixed to a substrate supporting member via a connector substrate. At the same time, another connector group paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the connector coupling direction. A game machine characterized by being attached so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to each other."
(4) “A box-shaped body having a front surface opened and a back surface covered with a back plate, and an outer main body provided with a power supply device and other main body-side electric parts, and a plurality of patterns on a case member detachable from the outer main body. In order to relay the model variation display device to be changed and other model units provided with case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the ends of the case side wirings, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, another connector group by means of a board-fixing type connector which is paired with each connector of the connector groups of two or more systems and fixedly used on a printed board, A connector connecting terminal board, which is attached to a wiring relay member attached to a back plate, and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder. At the same time, another connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction."

In the above gaming machine, if the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connectors due to manufacturing errors or the like, Since the non-fixed connector connecting terminal board floats together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is also possible to connect the connectors that are not the connection target. Therefore, it is possible to collectively connect the connectors of a plurality of systems by using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is of a general-purpose and inexpensive type, such as the DIN standard, which is used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is also low.

Further, the connector holder is securely fixed to the wiring relay member by a fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark), and further to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member. On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. .. Therefore, even if relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the department. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is allowed to float and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are set as the coupling reference as in the embodiment, as compared with the opposite configuration, is the connector 425, 124. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that the automatic correction of the misalignment is easier. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are adapted to be coupled to each other before the other connectors 427 and 125, which makes it easy to align the connectors for coupling aiming.

Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (at the peripheral corners of the convex tip ends of the convex connectors 425 and 427 and/or the peripheral corners of the insertion ports of the concave connectors 124 and 125 are shown. If the chamfering is linear or curved, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C improves the connectivity between the connectors.

In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are allowed to move freely as in the embodiment, it is possible to allow either one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to move freely. In that case, the same effect as the above can be obtained. A specific example of such a connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428 is provided with a receiving tube 429a provided with a female screw, while ear pieces 427b having play holes 427a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving tube 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. A play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted in the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer prevents the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the play hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. Further, in the embodiment, the two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back side of the back plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variable display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438, 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are formed near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the pattern variation display device 300 to the main board 409 and the like, and in FIG. 11, the right side face toward the device case 302 of the pattern variation display device 300 ( The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel board 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out from the case member 400 through one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is formed as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is housed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 and connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not drop from the cable groove 437.

However, the main board 409 and the like and the reel board 312 are both electric members on the case member side inside the case member 400, and originally, it is not necessary to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400. The reason why the wiring openings 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are intentionally provided in the case member 400 so that the cable 313 is detoured to the outside is as follows.

The reel board 312 is installed at a non-hinge side of the door-type front member 200 among the side surfaces of the pattern variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space. Is preferred. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-type front member 200, the door-type front member 200 (see FIG. 1) which has been fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. Because they face each other, it is impossible to secure a large working space for inserting and removing the connector.

On the other hand, on the other hand, it is assumed that the connection portion of the substrates (main substrate 409, sub substrate 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel substrate 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or conversely, the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 is detoured to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, it is better to perform the wiring work in a state where the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel substrate 312 is not limited to the wiring cost. There is a margin to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is loosened when the device case 302 is set at a predetermined position, and the looseness of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the amount of pulling out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the inner corner of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can escape the loose part of.

Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, the cable groove 437 is bulged between the inner side of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. The wiring using the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 does not have to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables that traverse the inside of the case member 400.

Besides, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal plate.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a completed product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game arcade, but at this time, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the game machine installation island top bar 600 are made of wood screws or the like as shown in the phantom line in FIG. In the case of stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight portion 443. The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a driver to fixedly connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island. Since a plurality of through-holes 132 are provided, they can be arbitrarily selected and used from among them, if necessary. For example, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper bar 600 can be selected even if the position and size of the upper bar 600 vary. In addition, when the game machine is completely replaced, if the through hole 132 used is changed, it is possible to prevent a problem that a hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper crosspiece 600 (so-called foolish hole).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is cooled by a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. , And through the gap S from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 to the ventilation hole 133 of the back plate 104, and then escapes to the inside of the game machine installation island. At this time, since the wiring relay member 113 is provided between the back plate 104 and the case member 400 and acts like a barrier to block the gap S in a wide range, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked at this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 is blocked. It is positively released to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Design of each reel, design row]
On each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. 46, a symbol string (a total of 21 symbols shown from the array number 0 to the array number 20) configured by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. The reel band (pattern band) in which the symbol () is written is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol arrays described on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed two-dimensionally. In addition, the above-mentioned sequence number is conveniently shown in order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol sequence. Further, in FIG. 46, the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached is shown as a left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached is shown as a middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached is shown as a right reel. In the description of the above, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are also referred to as necessary.

Each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol column in the opening portion 401 (also referred to as a symbol display window, which is hereinafter referred to as a symbol). It is arranged so as to be visible through the display window 401) (see FIG. 47 described next).

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols are "7" symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as "red 7 symbol")", "7" symbol painted in blue (hereinafter " "Blue 7 pattern"), "BAR pattern", "Cherry pattern with cherry pattern", "Watermelon pattern with watermelon pattern", "Replay pattern", "Bell pattern" "Bell design", "designated as "right" (hereinafter referred to as "design")", "designated as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "regular design")" is there. The bell pattern can be divided into a "bell 1 pattern" in which one star is drawn and a "bell 2 pattern" in which two stars are drawn, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

In FIG. 46, the "red 7 symbol" has two array numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one array number 12 in the reel band 321b, and an array number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 symbol" corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. The "BAR symbol" corresponds to one of array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 2 in the reel band 321c. The "cherry symbol" is one of the array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of the array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and the array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. The two correspond. There are five "replay symbols" in the reel band 321a, which are array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, and No. 16·5 corresponds to five of the array numbers 1·5·8·13·17 in the reel band 321c. "Bell 1 pattern" has three array numbers 13, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321a and five array numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, there are three array numbers 9, 12, and 16. The "bell 2 pattern" corresponds to three array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a and two array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. The "watermelon pattern" has three array numbers 9, 14, and 19 on the reel band 321a, two array numbers 4 and 13 on the reel band 321b, and an array number 3 on the reel band 321c.・The four numbers of 6, 11, and 20 correspond. The "significant symbol" corresponds to one of array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The "regular symbol" corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The types of symbols are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these types.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view centering around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 viewed from the front. According to FIG. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed in the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators (corresponding to “various indicators” described later) including lamps and LEDs around the symbol display window 401. Are shown to be located. Then, a part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and the image and the like (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 can be visually recognized by the player. Has become. In the following, each of the above components shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

[9-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols in the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can be visually recognized. From the top of the three positions where this symbol is displayed, "upper row (or upper row position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301a is displayed), "middle row (or middle row position)" (for example, , The position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed) and the "lower stage (or lower position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, in the symbol display window 401, it is possible to display "number of columns x number of reels" symbols. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of 9 symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 from "the number of stages (3) x the number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided on the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be hereinafter unified as a display panel 501) (on the left side as viewed from the symbol display window 401), among which “BET1” and “BET2” are provided. ", BET3" is the BET lamp (bet lamp) 614. The numbers of the BET lamp (the above-mentioned numbers "BET1", "BET2", "BET3" 1, 2 and 3) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number according to the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is 1 bet (the number of medals bet is 1), and "2" is This means that 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2) and "3" correspond to 3 bets (also called MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

The effective sequence is determined according to the number of bets. This "effective line" is also called an effective line. In the following, it will be referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is judged to be displayed as a combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not lined up on any of the activated lines (that is, the predetermined symbol is determined). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not lined up on the activated line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this way, when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not lined up on the activated line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the combination of lost symbols) is displayed.

Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as an example, in a normal game state (general game state) and a bonus internal state, a game with three cards is prescribed or recommended (a prescribed number of three). However, as will be described later, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in a bonus state controlled during the bonus game, a game is played by multiplying two cards (a prescribed number of two cards). In addition, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are two lines, which are a straight upward line (rightward line) and a downward right line (rightward line). Specifically, in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47, a line (that is, a line rising to the right) 623b in which "BAR symbol-replay symbol-sense symbol" is displayed, and "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" Only the two lines of the line (that is, the line that descends to the right) 623a where "" is displayed are valid lines.

The bet number and the effective line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, one or a plurality of straight lines, a mountain line, a V line, or the like. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of active lines may be changed according to the bet number of medals in the game.

The combination of symbols on the activated line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" displayed on the lower right line 623a which is one of the activated lines. Since this combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (re-play combination), the next game is automatically bet without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the activated line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols of the symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" is displayed on the middle line which is not the active line, so that the player can recognize that the replay has been won. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (re-play combination), it is difficult to grasp the winning combination on the activated line at a glance, but it is difficult to grasp the winning combination when viewed from the symbol display window 401 as a whole. As for the other winning combinations, the symbol combinations may be similarly prepared. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only by the activated line, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize the winning of the winning combination when looking at the entire symbol display window 401.

[9-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 47, on the display panel 501, a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be turned on (or blink) according to the gaming state of the slot machine 1 are arranged around the symbol display window 401. There is. Of the plurality of such display devices, various display devices other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting (or blinks) when some trouble, failure, etc. (hereinafter, referred to as “error”) occur during the game of the slot machine 1, and that an error currently occurs. It is a lamp that has the role of notifying players, etc. (including the staff of the hall). In FIG. 47, the character “ERR” is drawn in the vicinity of the error lamp 604 for the error. Since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error only by turning on or blinking the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display the information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the special display LED 612 provided separately. ..

The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 47, the character “REP” is abbreviated for replay in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606.

The start lamp 608 is a lamp having a role of starting lighting (or blinking) when the bet number reaches the MAX bet and urging the player to operate the starting lever 210 (starting operation). In FIG. 47, the word “STR” is abbreviated as “STR” near the start lamp 608.

The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp that has a role of prompting the player to bet by keeping lighting (or blinking) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610, an insert (insertion of game value) is abbreviated and a character “INS” is drawn.

The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored coins when a medal (game value) that can be used by the player is stored by the player inserting a medal or paying out a medal according to the game result. The display has a role of notifying the player of the number of stored medals, and is composed of two laterally arranged 7-segment LEDs (the left side shows the stored number display LED 613a and the right side shows the stored number display LED 613b). For example, when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be used by the player is 50 and the upper limit is stored, "5" is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying "0", the number of stored medals of "50" is displayed so that the player can identify it.

The BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) indicate the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting a medal (game value) is performed with a specified number as an upper limit before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. The display has a role of notifying the betting number (BET number) of the game value in one game by displaying, and includes three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the BET number is 1, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, when the BET number is 2, the BET lamp 614b is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the BET number is the upper limit of 3 (MAXBET). Then, the BET lamp 614a is further turned on, so that all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

It is assumed that the display of these indicators described above is controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game to be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the accumulated payout number of medals in the bonus game, and counting the bonus game are separately provided. Good.

Further, the display device such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the display device can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from "7" (14 or 16 segments), and LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, or the like is used instead of the LED. May be.

[9-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a function of displaying the number of payouts of the medal (game value) when the game result is paid out, thereby displaying the number of payouts of the medal (game value) to the player. The display is composed of two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (a special display LED 612a on the left side and a special display LED 612b on the right side). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out in accordance with the game result, the medals are paid out one by one. By changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15” in total, the player can be notified in real time of the payout status of the gaming value (medal).

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of an instruction function display for displaying the instruction content of the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of the payout number display. Although details of the “instruction function” will be described later, in summary, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the generation of an instruction by the “instruction function” is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 is displayed. Information indicating the pressing position of the reels 301a to 301c and the stopping order (which can be read as the pressing order and the pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed as an instruction function display, and depending on the contents of the display. When the stop operation of the reel 301 is performed, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of an instruction (specifically, lottery related to the instruction function and management of state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function. The main board 409 manages not only the control of the state transition and the state transition but also the indication function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, the display means other than the display destination of the instruction function display (for example, the image display body 500) also indicates the instruction function of the same content. Although it is possible to display, the display may be controlled by a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409. The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub-board 510 is illustrated in FIG.

Explaining in a specific example, when the push order small winning combination (any one of AT1 to AT10) is selected as the winning combination during the AT game, the winning push order small winning combination is controlled under the control of the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110). The instruction content of “appropriate pressing order” corresponding to is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, when the player understands the display content of the indication function display on the special display LED 612, the player can recognize the proper pressing order. On the other hand, the same information as the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 that has received the command indicates “appropriate”. It is possible to display an image showing "pushing order" on the image display body 500 (navigation display). A specific display example of the indication function display will be described later in [11-3-4].

In the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform such an instruction function display in a mode in which any of the display devices on the display panel 501 also has a function (in this example, the special display LED 612 for displaying the payout number is displayed. Be done). That is, on the special display LED 612, the indication function display and the payout number display are performed. For example, by dividing each display period, both can be displayed without confusion. In the present embodiment, the function of displaying the number of payouts is also used, but a display having other functions may also be used, or a display dedicated to displaying the instruction function may be provided.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 lights up to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has the function of displaying error information. Display timings of the indication function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [11-3-5], [11-3-7], and the like.

[10. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like equipped in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for centrally controlling the progress of the game, and a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input/output interface 1116, etc. are mounted on the main board 409. The main board 409 has a function that influences the result of the game (acquisition of the game value), specifically, for example, lottery such as winning, bonus, AT, etc., and control and instruction of the game state based on those lottery results. It manages the determination of instructions by functions and the payout based on winning combinations.

Further, in the slot machine 1, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 48, a door opening detection switch that detects the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. A medal selector internal lever detection sensor provided therein, a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lighted around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are provided. These components are controlled by the main board 409.

The above-described single-sheet insertion buttons 205 and 206, the starting lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, the storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). Thus, the operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409.

Note that, hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as needed. Then, the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c corresponding thereto are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. The devices include the symbol variation display device 300, the medal discharging device 110, and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is a stepping motor, and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing to.

Further, each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has a position sensor 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting a reference position for rotation. Are provided correspondingly (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, it is possible to obtain stop position information of each reel on the main board 409.

The solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed in the medal selector 207. The insertion sensor 207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts the medals, the medal selector 207 is not accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is also invalidated at the same time, so that neither bets nor medals are accumulated by inserting medals.

The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid-out medals one by one in the ejection opening 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been done. Further, the auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a full-medal sensor 111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the medals have exceeded the predetermined number is output to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc. perform an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal accumulation, and inform the player, the hall employee, or the like that the abnormality has occurred (FIG. 111 described later). (Corresponding to "Auxiliary storage full tank error").

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variable display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. Further, a drive signal is input to the medal releasing device 110 from the main board 409 according to the type of a combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and the medal releasing device 110 receives the signal and performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharging device 110 or there is no medal at all, the detection of the number of coins by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 110e outputs an abnormality signal of the payout medal to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 reports that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display body 500 and the like to notify that an abnormality has occurred to the player, the hall employee or the like (see “Payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. 111 described later). Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators through corresponding ports. The lighting and display in can be operated.

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input/output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio system). An amplifier) 1126, a sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls display of the image display body 500, light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the lighting device 502, and the operation of the speaker 512.

Further, when the main board 409 is provided with the external relay terminal board 131, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall through the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board (eg, a sub-board 510) other than the main board 409 may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from the various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various information on the game managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information notifying malfunctions or defects of components of the slot machine 1) are held in a hole. It becomes possible to output to the computer 1200.

The hall computer 1200 is one of the external devices connected to the outside of the slot machine 1 so that the slot machine 1 can communicate with it, and a so-called data display is also included in the external devices. A signal cannot be output from the external device to the slot machine 1, and is limited to output from the slot machine 1 to the external device (one-way communication, one-way communication). The external output of the signal from the slot machine 1 to the external device will be described in detail in [12] and thereafter.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power supply switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only by opening the door-type front member 200. Of these, the power switch 112v is for turning on/off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. .. Further, the reset switch 112u is for canceling an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated together with the setting key switch 112t when changing the setting. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the number of bets on medals has been determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reels 211a, 211b, 211c. When is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stop-controlled, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the activated line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded.

As described above, the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, when all reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, from the display contents (the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the activated line) displayed in the symbol display window 401, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

In addition, in this example, it is described that the number of activated lines is two, but when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of activated lines, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the activated lines. It is determined whether or not there is. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of winning symbol combinations are displayed, the total number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number of coins (for example, 15 coins) can be specified as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per one time. In such a case, when the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple activated lines exceeds the upper limit value, a predetermined number of medals of the upper limit value are paid out and the upper limit value is exceeded. Minutes are truncated. Also, the excess of the upper limit is not divided into subsequent games and paid out.

In the following, when a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the activated lines, a symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as a winning combination) It is said that the combination is complete, or the winning symbol is complete.

The design of the slot machine 1 includes "red 7 design", "blue 7 design", "BAR design", "cherry design", "replay design", "bell 1 design", "bell 2 design", "watermelon design". "," Positive symbol" and "regular symbol" are as already mentioned, but of these, "Red 7 symbol", "Blue 7 symbol" and "BAR symbol" stand out compared to other symbols. Easy and easy to identify. The term “easiness of identification” as used herein refers to the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols, including the state in which the reel is rotating and the state in which the reel is stopped. These symbols are easy to stop and aim at such that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player makes a stop operation from the color and the size of the symbols while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to press). Further, as for “significant pattern” and “regular pattern”, as can be seen from FIG. 46, “justice” can be read in the form of a circle with two patterns of “significant pattern” and “regular pattern”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged adjacent to each other in the vertical direction, and only one reel 301a, 301b, and 301c is arranged.

These symbols are only symbolic symbols by themselves (only one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but by becoming a predetermined combination, they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. .. That is, a predetermined game privilege is awarded. Below, the combination mode of the symbols permitted corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[10-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, a winning combination (including a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50 and 51 to 53. FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of winning combinations. The lottery table (also referred to as a winning value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance. Although details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for a winning combination, and such a lottery is also called an “internal lottery”.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing each winning combination and a condition device that is established corresponding to each winning combination, and is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. In FIG. 50, a blank column in the table means that the conditional device with the corresponding conditional device number is inactive (OFF), and “1” in the table has the corresponding conditional device number. It means that the conditional device operates (ON). 51 to 53 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) showing combinations of symbols corresponding to each condition device and the number of medals paid out, which are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described below has an AT (assist time) function using a push order small winning combination, as an example of the function of the gaming machine. The small push order winning combination corresponds to the winning combinations of “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49, and the bell symbol alignment can be displayed at the time of winning of these winning combinations. Call. In the gaming machine having the AT function, the winning of the AT is determined by the lottery (AT lottery) performed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110), and if the result of the determination is that the AT is won, the AT game is executed. In the AT game, the push order small winning combination is selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery of the winning combination, and the teaching order is given by notifying or notifying the proper pushing order expected to pay out the most medals. The player who has performed the reel stop operation can obtain many medals. On the other hand, during the game period other than the AT game (non-AT), by not teaching or notifying the above-mentioned pushing order, it is possible to make the winning of medals in the proper pushing order uncertain, and to obtain each gaming state. This can make a difference in the expected number of medals and the pace of medal consumption. Such an AT function is an example of an instruction function provided in the slot machine 1, and its detailed processing will be described later.

Further, supplementing the pressing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pressing order (stop order of the reel 301) is "left-middle-right" and "left-". There are 6 types of "right-middle", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left", "right-left-middle", and "right-middle-left". In the following description, the respective pressing orders will be referred to as “forward pressing”, “pinching pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse pinching pressing”, and “reverse pressing”. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the same reel stop control is performed regardless of which pressing order of “middle forward pressing” or “middle reverse pressing” is performed. These two pressing orders may be simply referred to as “medium pressing” without being divided. In this case, there are practically five pressing sequences.

In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as a procedure of a stop operation for stopping the reel 301, when a game in which the pushing order is not taught, such as a period (non-AT) in which the AT game is not performed, , The left reel 301a is first stopped (that is, the reel stop button 211a is first stopped), "left push ("forward push" or "sandwich push")" is recommended, and the middle reel 301b or When a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed, such as by first stopping the right reel 301c, it is possible to take a disadvantageous measure for the player, such as temporarily stopping the AT lottery.

Such a stop result in the slot machine 1 is a reel stop button 211 (individually, reel stop buttons 211a, Depending on the order of pressing (211b, 211c), the appearance of the stop result is different. Such a difference in the mode of the stop result can be realized as follows, for example. That is, as a winning combination corresponding to the “push order bell”, a plurality of types of winning combinations each having a proper pressing order associated therewith (specifically, “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIGS. 49 and 50). Correspondingly, when the winning combination is “AT1”, forward pressing (left/middle/right corresponds to “appropriate pressing order”) is prepared, and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is different. The operation of plural types of condition devices (corresponding to the small items shown in FIG. 50) is allowed. At this time, according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, under the priority control (for example, the "number priority control" or the "symbol combination number priority control") in which the drawing pull-in control for stopping the reel 301 is different. By setting it to be executed, it is possible to change the mode of the stop payout based on the pressing order, and as a result, it is possible to make a difference in the payout number.

Here, "number priority control" means that when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is allowed, the condition device that gives the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is given priority, and the "drawable symbol" Therefore, it refers to the pull-in control in which the symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is pulled onto the effective line and stopped. The "symbol combination number priority control" means that when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, the condition device that maximizes the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by the "drawable symbol" is given priority. However, it refers to the pull-in control in which the symbol corresponding to the condition device is pulled in on the effective line and stopped.

Specifically, for example, when "AT1" which selects "appropriate pressing order" as the winning combination is selected as a winning combination, the condition devices that are allowed to operate are: accessory 1, accessory 4, accessory 6, accessory 7, These are accessory 9, accessory 12, accessory 14, accessory 15, and accessory 17 (see FIG. 50). Here, if the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is “appropriate pressing order (left/middle/right order)”, the pull-in control by the “number priority control” described above is performed and “improper pressing order” is performed. If it is, it is determined that the pull-in control is performed by the above-mentioned “symbol combination number priority control”. At this time, in the case of "appropriate pressing order", the condition device (small article 17) of the 9-card combination having the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is given priority, and the symbol combination of the 9-card combination is drawn on the activated line. On the other hand, in the case of "inappropriate pressing order", the condition device for one-piece combination (small article 9, small article 12, small article 14, small article 15) or the condition for two-piece combination in which the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed is larger than that of the small article 17 The device (small article 1, small article 4, small article 6, small article 7) is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the one-or-two-combination is drawn on the activated line. Thus, when "AT1" is selected as the winning combination, when the reel 301 is stopped in the "appropriate pressing order", nine reels can be won, while in the "improper pressing order", the reel is reeled. When 301 is stopped, it is possible to win a winning combination (one winning combination, two winning combinations) having a smaller payout number than the nine winning combinations.

Note that the symbols that can be drawn onto the activated line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 at the time when the reel stop button 211 is stopped (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames). Up to is allowed), depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), there are a drawable pattern and a non-drawable pattern. As a result, the appearance of the stop result varies depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also preset.

As described above, in the slot machine 1, when the winning combination associated with the “appropriate pressing order” is won, the plurality of condition devices are allowed to operate, and different priority control regarding the drawing pull-in control of the reel 301 is performed. By setting, when the game based on the “appropriate pressing order” is performed, the privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, comparison It is possible to stop at a stop result that can give more medals).

Although not illustrated in FIG. 49 to FIG. 53, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, a push order replay as another push order small win. Hereinafter, such push-order replay will be briefly described. Strictly speaking, the replay combination is not a "small combination" because the gaming value is not paid out even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped on the activated line, but it is included in the "push order small combination" for convenience. .. In addition, since the push order replay is one of the replay roles, no matter which push order or push position the stop operation is performed at the time of winning, the symbol combination of any replay role is always on the effective line. There is no change in that it will be stopped and the replay privilege will be granted.

When using push order replay in the slot machine 1, as in the case of the push order bell described above, multiple types of winning combinations for the push order replay are prepared according to the number of push orders, and further, regarding each push order replay, at the time of winning Prepare a combination of multiple condition devices that are allowed to operate. Then, by setting priority control so that the "specific symbol combination" is stopped when the stop operation is performed for the combination of the plurality of condition devices in the "specific pressing order", the "specification at the time of winning" is specified. It is possible to realize a special replay role that "a specific symbol combination can be revealed when a stop operation is performed in the pushing order of", and by the appearance of the "specific symbol combination", in the symbol display window 401 It is possible to make the stop result in the characteristic mode. Specifically, for example, when the predetermined push order replay is won, only when the stop operation is performed in the "specific push order" of reverse push, "blue 7" is displayed on the predetermined line in the symbol display window 401. It is possible to stop the "specific symbol combination" such that "symbol matching" is displayed.

As an example of a method of using such push-order replay, when the above-mentioned “specific symbol combination (blue 7 symbols in the symbol display window 401)” appears, a gaming privilege other than the payout of gaming value Will be granted (because it is a replay role, no gaming value is paid out). Specific examples of giving the game privilege include adding the number of AT games and shifting to an advantageous state. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game privilege is awarded by winning the push order replay, by instructing the "specific push order" based on the instruction function, "a specific symbol" It is possible to notify the player of a game method that can stop the "combination" and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, when the above-mentioned gaming privilege is not awarded at the time of winning the push order replay, the stop operation is not performed in the "specific push order" (for example, the stop method other than the "specific push order" is instructed). Etc.) is preferred.

The above is the outline of the pushing order small winning combination in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, an AT game using the above-described small push-order combination is taken as an example of a special game advantageous to the player. However, in the slot machine 1, the special game advantageous to the player is an AT game. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be another advantageous game state (for example, bonus game, ART game, RT game, or the like). Further, the AT function is not limited to the AT function using the push order small winning combination, and in addition, for example, the push position small winning combination (the privilege granted based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is changed. It may be an AT function or the like using a winning role).

[10-1-1. Winning type]
First, the lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the gaming state, and FIG. 49 shows a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state as examples of the gaming state in the slot machine 1. Here, the general state is a normal game state in which the bonus game is not being executed and the bonus flag is not established. The bonus internal state is a gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, the second type BB described later) is won by an internal lottery, and the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous game state in which a bonus (specifically, a second-kind BB described later) is won by an internal lottery, and a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed to shift to the bonus. Although FIG. 49 shows two types of BB (second type special accessory) as a bonus, other types of bonuses may be mounted on the slot machine 1, so-called BB bonus, RB. A bonus, a single bonus (SB), etc. may be provided. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a game state corresponding to each bonus, but the detailed description of each game state is omitted because it is the same as that of a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a winning probability (or number of registers) for each winning combination is set for each gaming state, and is prepared in advance corresponding to each gaming state. The internal lottery is performed using the lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device according to the winning combination operates, and the symbol combination corresponding to the operated condition device is displayed on the activated line, which will be described later. Reel stop processing is performed. When any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals based on the winning combination is performed. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the payout number of medals may be set to be different depending on the game state and the number of medals (regulated number) of the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table according to the specified number.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, one condition device and one reel control pattern are in a one-to-one correspondence, so when it is desired to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for one winning combination (see FIG. 50 described later). By doing this, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stop results (symbol combinations displayed on the activated line) for one winning combination.

The winning combination shown in FIG. 49 can be roughly classified into a bonus combination, a small combination, or a replay combination (re-playing combination), and is called a “defeat” when none of the aforementioned combinations is won. Here, "defeat" is not strictly a winning combination. However, when the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is “out”, as in the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is each winning combination shown in FIG. 49, based on the result ( That is, since the subsequent internal processing is set (as if the winning combination “off” has been won), “out” may be included in the winning combination for the sake of convenience.

To briefly describe each, the “bonus combination” is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, “two types BB” corresponds to the bonus combination. The “replay role (replay role)” is a role in which the next game can be executed without reinserting a medal (replay role), and specifically, “replay” corresponds to the replay role. The "small role" is a role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the winning, and specifically, "push order bell", "push order unquestionable bell", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", The “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance eye”, “strong chance eye”, and “strongest eye” correspond to small wins. As described above, the winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 may also be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. In FIG. 49, the number of push-out bells to be paid out is described in a plurality of ways because the number of payouts may differ depending on the stop order and stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, since the winning combinations “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are the Bell combinations that can always stop the Bell symbol regardless of the pressing order, they may be generically called “the pressing order does not matter Bell”. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

Further, “out” means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of “out”, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state). On the other hand, when the bonus internal state is “out”, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may be stopped. However, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the lottery table as shown in FIG. 49 is used, the above-described situation (“out” in the bonus internal state) is set so that it rarely occurs (1 /65535), and since the winning probability of "2nd class BB" which is a bonus combination is extremely low in the first place (1/65535), there is a great chance that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and the bonus game is executed. Low, most gaming states are controlled to general or bonus internal states.

According to FIG. 49, there is a possibility that “out” is selected in the general state (15453/65535), but there is almost no possibility that “out” is selected in the bonus internal state and the bonus state. (1/65535 each). In addition, in the bonus state, the winning probability of the push order bell is set to be significantly lower than that in other gaming states (1/65535), and the winning probability of the push order bell is not set instead of being almost won. It is set high (32059/65535). The push-order bell pays out 9 sheets regardless of the pushing order, whereas the push-order bell does not pay out two or less sheets when the pushing order is improper. Therefore, by allocating the numbers in this way, when the player is controlled to the bonus state (bonus game), the number of medals held by the player can be increased without substantially reducing it.

In addition, the result of the internal lottery is not "out of order", and even if you win any combination (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. Stop operation (operation of pressing reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to be stopped in the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective lines 623a and 623b) within a possible range. If not done, it is not possible to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination on the activated line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, even if one of the winning combinations is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the activated line, the same as when the “out” is selected, In step S6 of FIG. 54, it is determined that the game result is a loss. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game result is lost despite having won any winning combination, the winning combination is not displayed at random, but the symbol combination of “out” is displayed. A predetermined symbol combination (stop result) indicating that the winning based on the winning combination has been eliminated is controlled to be displayed in the symbol display area. Then, the symbol combination (stop result) displayed at the time of such a loss is referred to as "zero (or zero)" below.

Further, in the description of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the expression “bell zero (bell zero)” is used for “push order bell (AT1 to AT10)”. Bell zero is a set of bells (strictly speaking, 9 pieces of bells) due to a stop operation being performed in an improper pushing order when a pushing order bell for which a proper pushing order is determined for each winning combination is elected. It means that the symbol combination of the winning combination of the payouts) is not stopped, and another symbol combination is displayed as if the winning combination of the bells is eliminated. In the case of such a bell zero, the bell zero is displayed as a stop result, and payout (including no payout) less than the original bell alignment is performed. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device numbers 1 to 32 in FIG. 51 is a bell-zero symbol combination, and at this time, the payout number of one or two is set. As described above, the "bell zeroing" is different from the above-described "zeroing" at the time of losing.

In addition, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression “split (separation)” may be used in addition to the above “zero (separation)”. "Bare" is not a "straight line" that is relatively easy for a player to recognize the features of a stop line, but a stop line (so-called) in which seemingly random patterns are combined. It means that it is a "dazzle". That is, the "separation" is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even if it is a separation, it is not always lost, so that the medal may be paid out.

[10-1-2. Winning form of winning role]
The winning combination illustrated in FIG. 49 is a winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity. When a single winning combination is won, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1, a winning combination (simultaneous winning combination) in which a plurality of winning combinations are selected at the same time may be prepared. Such simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected in one lottery opportunity, for example, when a plurality of small winning combinations (for example, a plurality of bell combinations) are simultaneously selected, The bonus role and the small role may be selected at the same time.

When the simultaneous winning combination is selected by the internal lottery, subsequent reel stop control is performed based on simultaneous operation of the condition devices based on the winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. Then, in the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority order (for example, “re-play>small role>bonus” or “re-play>bonus>small role”). Accordingly, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, and the bonus according to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small wins, the method of setting the activated line, etc., control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combinations are won together. Benefits will be paid out according to the winning role of. In any case, the small role is a "non-carried-over part" that can only be won in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game is not carried over to the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, a medal corresponding to the winning combination is not paid out to the winning combination that cannot win the winning game.

Further, in the case where the bonus combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, the combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a duplicate combination. Even when a bonus role and a small winning combination are simultaneously won, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations are activated at the same time as in the case of simultaneous winning between the small winning combinations, and the predetermined priority order (for example, Reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed according to the priority order such as "game>small role>bonus" or "re-play>bonus>small role", and depending on the winning combination. Benefits are paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed in the subsequent games. It can be used as a "carryover". Specifically, the type 2 BB is a "carry-over hand". Further, the replay role and the small role (for example, the Bell role) are “non-carried over roles”. In this way, even when the "carryover combination" and the "non-carrying-out combination" are simultaneously won by the winning of the overlapping combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over combination" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the "carry-over combination" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", when you win another small winning combination, both the "carry-over winning combination" and "another small winning combination" are won. In this case, Since they are selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to overlapping roles.

In the case of simultaneous winning, which combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line is determined based on the priority order setting in the reel stop process.

In the following, the winning combinations roughly classified above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53.

[10-1-3. Bonus part]
The winning combination "2nd type BB" shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus role related to the second type special effect. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, the reel stop process is performed, and the privilege is awarded based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, the symbol combination (“red 7” set) corresponding to the condition device “BB1” is displayed on the activated line, whereby the two-type BB bonus game (BB game) is executed. This bonus game is a game in which the player has an opportunity to concentrate medals over a plurality of games, and in the present embodiment, for example, the prescribed number of games is set to two, and the bonus state is shown in FIG. The bonus game is advanced using the drawn lottery table. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a prescribed upper limit number (for example, 30 games) or when the total number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a prescribed number (for example, 200 games). When the bonus game ends, the gaming state shifts from the bonus state to the general state.

Here, the symbol combination (“Red 7” lineup) corresponding to “2 types BB” is an array that cannot be always drawn onto the activated line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (FIG. 46). However, “2 types BB” is a carry-over role that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding “red 7” symbol combination, which is the symbol combination in the winning game, is not displayed (not aligned), the next game and thereafter. The game is played as a bonus internal state until the winning establishment state is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

Then, when the replay combination or the small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery while the bonus internal state is controlled, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority is “replay (replay role)>small role>bonus”, and at this time, even if the establishment state of the two types BB is maintained as the bonus internal state, the two types BB The opportunity to display the symbol combination is limited to the case where neither the replay role nor the small role is won in the internal lottery (that is, the winning). However, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ratio of deviation in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state is set to be extremely small (1/65535). Therefore, in most games, there is no opportunity to display the symbol combination of the two types BB, and the game state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state.

[10-1-4. Replay role]
The winning combination “replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of replay (re-playing combination). At the time of winning the replay combination, the condition device for replay (refer to FIG. 50, replay 1) operates, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed on the effective line (either line 623a or 623b). Based on this, reel stop processing (step S5 in FIG. 54) described later is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is always displayed on the activated line, and it is determined that the symbol combinations of the replay are complete. As a result, as a privilege of the replay. In the next game, automatic betting is performed without inserting a medal or betting operation (an operation for inserting a stored medal) again, and a replay game in which the same game as the previous game is executed again becomes possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, the medal as the prize is not paid out.

A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to pay out medals and consume new medals (to add new medals) in the next game. In addition, since replay is a winning combination without paying out medals, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency becomes high, there is little disadvantage for the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is about once in 6 to 7 times. As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range. In other words, the winning combination of replay can have a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progress.

Further, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are evenly arranged on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination, and the same replay combination). By setting other symbols (symbols that do not form the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination) from one to a maximum of four, which are arranged between the symbols that form the combination mode of the corresponding symbols, The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination can be arranged without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority of the winning combination displayed is “replay (replay combination)>small combination>bonus”, the condition device for the replay combination and other combinations (small combination and bonus combination) Even if the condition device and the condition device operate at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination is not stopped and displayed.

[10-1-5. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. This bell role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. In this embodiment, several types of bell combinations are prepared, and one example thereof will be specifically described below.

[10-1-5-1. Push order does not matter bell]
First, a description will be given of a push-order-independent bell (common bell) in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) at the time of winning does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

The specific winning combinations of the "pushing order regardless of bell" shown in FIG. 49 are "bell 1" and "bell 2" shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, when “Bell 1” is selected as the winning combination, the condition device for the small article 17 is activated, and when “Bell 2” is selected as the winning combination, the small articles 17 and 18 are selected. Condition device is activated. Here, the condition device for the small articles 17 and 18 is configured such that any corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the reel pushing order and pushing timing (see FIG. 51 and the like). .. Therefore, when such a condition device operates, regardless of the stop order and the stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped and displayed to win the bell combination, and the winning combination. The payout of medals (9 coins) according to the above is given as a privilege.

Referring to FIG. 49, in the general state and the bonus internal state, the winning probabilities of "bell 1" and "bell 2" are relatively low, and can be included in a "low winning combination (rare combination)" described later. On the other hand, in the bonus state, the player wins "Bell 1" or "Bell 2" with a probability of about 50%, which is one of the main winning combinations in the bonus game.

The “bell 1” and the “bell 2” are classified into strong and weak according to the degree of expectation of the privilege that can be given at the time of each winning. The privilege may be, for example, the degree of expectation related to the AT (probability of winning the AT, the probability of winning the AT game, or the like), or the degree of expectation related to transition between gaming states such as a low-probability state and a high-probability state. Specifically, "bell 2" having a lower winning probability is a strong bell, and "bell 1" having a higher winning probability than "bell 2" is a weak bell.

[10-1-5-2. Push order bell]
Next, the push order bell in which the winning degree (winning rate and payout number of medals based on the winning) at the time of winning can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

The winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 are winning combinations of push-order bells that are prepared mainly for surely giving the privilege to the player in the AT game. Each of “AT1” to “AT10” is associated with one of five proper pressing orders (see FIG. 50).

In FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10” are equal, and when they are summed up, the winning probability of “push order bell” is 32000/65535, but the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10” are the same. The respective winning probabilities may be arbitrarily distributed under the condition that the above total value is satisfied. By doing this, it is possible to evenly distribute the winning probabilities with respect to the five proper pressing orders in the “push order bell” (forward pressing, pinching, middle pressing, reverse pressing, and reverse pinching) (probability of winning for each 5 selection bell). Can be made equal), and it is possible to make it difficult for a specific pressing order to be selected in an appropriate pressing order. Specifically, for example, the winning probability of "AT1" to "AT4" in which the left reel 301a is selected as the first stop reel is 2000/65535 as a proper pressing order, and the proper pressing order is other than the left reel 301a (middle If each winning probability of "AT5" to "AT10" in which the reel 301b or the right reel 301c) is selected as the first stop reel is 4000/65535, the left reel 301a is pressed as the first stop reel in an appropriate pressing order. The winning percentage of the forward bell can be made significantly lower than the winning percentage of the pushing bell that makes the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c the first stop reel in the proper pushing order. In such a case, in the normal game in which it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a for the first time, it is possible to suppress the proportion of the push-order bell winning, and to reduce the payout rate in the normal game by an AT game or the like. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game.

As shown in FIG. 50, when “AT1” to “AT10” are selected as a winning combination, a plurality of condition devices of the small items 1 to 16 and the condition device of the small item 17 and the small items 24 to 26 are included. Of these, 0 to 2 of the condition devices are activated at the same time. The symbol combinations and the like corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. It should be noted that each of the small items 1 to 16 is a condition device corresponding to a "bell zero" symbol combination (1 or 2 payouts), and the small item 17 is a "bell combination" symbol combination (9 symbols). It is a condition device corresponding to (payment). Also, the small items 24 to 26 are originally condition devices for weak chances and strong chances, which will be described later, and when the push order bell is elected, even if they are activated, their priority is higher than that of other activated condition devices. By being kept low, the symbol combination corresponding to the small items 24 to 26 is not actually stopped.

Then, with respect to a plurality of condition devices that operate at the same time, different priority controls are set for the drawing pull-in control of symbols based on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211 (individually reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) in the stop operation of the player. This makes it possible to display different stop results depending on whether the pressing order is appropriate or not (unsuitable pressing order). That is, while the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is being performed in an appropriate pressing order corresponding to the winning combination (for example, in the case of AT1, the pressing is normal), the small item 17 is displayed on the basis of the above-mentioned “number priority control”. When the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pushing order until the end, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped on the activated line and 9 coins can be paid out as a privilege. it can. On the other hand, at the stage where the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is performed in an improper pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device other than the accessory 17 is stopped based on the above-mentioned “symbol combination number priority control”. Therefore, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 17 is prevented from being stopped on the activated line, the symbol combination of the bell zero is stopped on the activated line, and the privilege as the bell zero (1 or 2 The payout of one medal) will be given.

According to FIG. 50, “AT1” and “AT2” are the winning combinations of the small-sized pressing order in which the normal pressing order is the normal pressing order, and “AT3” and “AT4” are the correct pressing order for the sandwiching pressing. "AT5" and "AT6" are the winning combinations of the small pressing order, and the "AT5" and "AT6" are the winning combinations of the small pressing order. Is a winning combination of a small pressing order winning combination having an appropriate pressing order, and “AT9” and “AT10” are winning combinations of a small pressing order winning combination having an appropriate pressing order of reverse pinching. Therefore, when FIG. 50 is used, the “pushing order bell” in the present embodiment is a so-called “5” in which the proper pressing order is divided into 5 ways (forward pressing, pinching, middle pressing, reverse pressing, reverse pinching). "Select bell". Of course, such an appropriate push order setting can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the design stage of the game machine, for example, even if it is a three-choice bell based only on the first stop reel. Alternatively, it may be a 6-option bell based on the first stop reel and the second stop reel.

As described above, the push order bells “AT1” to “AT10” are the winning combinations in which the payout of nine medals as if the player has won the bell combination is received only when the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pressing sequence. Yes, if the stop operation is performed in an improper pushing order, it is a winning combination that is given as a "bell zero" and less privilege (payout of one or two medals) than that when the bell is won. ..

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the non-AT state that is not the AT state, it is recommended to press the leftward (forward push or pinch push). Therefore, when a game is played according to the recommended procedure in the non-AT state, the player has won a push order bell (specifically, AT5 to AT10) that has an appropriate push order other than left push (forward push or pinch push). However, you cannot win the Bell role. However, in the AT state, the proper pushing order is taught, and the stop operation according to the teaching contents is allowed, so that the bell combination can be easily won when the pushing order bell is won. In addition, in the non-AT, when the player performs a stop operation different from the recommended procedure and improperly obtains the medals, the AT medal is temporarily stopped, and the overall medal is paid out. The expected value of may be adjusted appropriately.

Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, except when instructed by an instruction function such as AT, when the specific pressing order is not the recommended procedure, the player may perform the stop operation in an arbitrary pressing order, and in such a case, Since there is no recommended procedure, it is not necessary to make adjustments (measures such as temporary suspension of AT lottery) in the case of “unreasonably obtaining a medal by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure” as described above. Become. If a specific pushing order is not the recommended procedure, it is desirable that the winning probabilities for each pushing order in the small pushing order win be the same. By making the winning probabilities for each push order the same, the expected value of the payout can be equalized no matter which push order the game is played, so that the player can enjoy the game with confidence in the desired push order. it can.

[10-1-6. Cherry role]
Next, the cherry winning combination as a winning combination will be described. The cherry role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (two) when winning. In this embodiment, two types of cherry combinations, weak cherry and strong cherry, are prepared. The weak cherry and the strong cherry are mainly provided with a difference in strength depending on the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning probability, winning probability regarding AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description of AT).

As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak cherry" is won, the condition devices for the small items 19 and 20 are activated, and when the "strong cherry" is won, the condition devices for the small items 19 to 21 are activated (each condition device). (See FIG. 52 for the symbol combinations and the like corresponding to). Regarding the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected, a detailed description is omitted, but when the symbol combination based on the small items 19 and 20 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, a weak cherry or strong When it is found that one of the cherries has won, and when the symbol combination based on the accessory 21 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, it means that the strong cherry has been won.

[10-1-7. Watermelon role]
Next, the watermelon role as a winning combination will be described. This watermelon role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals (5) at the time of winning. In this embodiment, two types of watermelon roles are prepared, a weak watermelon and a strong watermelon. A weak watermelon and a strong watermelon are provided with a difference in strength mainly in the degree of expectation regarding AT (the probability of winning the AT, the probability of winning the AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description of the AT).

As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak watermelon" is won, the condition device for the small item 22 is activated, and when the "strong watermelon" is won, the condition devices for the small item 22 and the small item 23 are activated (corresponding to each condition device. (See FIG. 53 for symbol combinations, etc.). Regarding the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected, a detailed description will be omitted, but when the symbol combination based on the accessory 22 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, it is either a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon. It is known that the crab has won, and when the symbol combination based on the accessory 23 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, it is understood that the strong watermelon has won. Supplementally, when a weak watermelon is won, there is a possibility that the watermelon symbols will be lined up on the right-upward line or right-downward line, and when the strong watermelon is won, the watermelon symbols will be lined up and stopped on the middle line. is there.

[10-1-8. Chance]
Next, a chance role as a winning combination will be described. This winning combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (one) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, two types of chance roles, a weak chance and a strong chance, are prepared. The weak chances and strong chances are provided with different strengths mainly in the degree of expectation regarding AT (such as the probability of winning the AT and the probability of winning the AT game) (details will be described later in the description of the AT).

As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak chance" is won, the condition device for the small item 24 is activated, and when the "strong chance" is won, the condition devices for the small item 25 and the small item 26 are activated (for each condition device, For the corresponding symbol combinations, etc., see FIG. 53). Regarding the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected, a detailed description is omitted, but when the symbol combination based on the small items 24 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the player has won the weak chance. When the symbol combination based on the small items 25 and 26 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, it is understood that the player has won the strong chance.

[10-1-9. Strongest]
Next, the strongest winning combination will be described. The strongest prize is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (one) at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 50, when the "strongest" is won, the condition device for the accessory 27 operates. The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 27 cannot be stopped unless the reel stop button 211 is operated at an appropriate pressing timing on the arrangement of the constituent symbols, but the strongest point is due to the operation of an appropriate pressing timing. When winning, the "correct" symbols are displayed together on the middle line.

The winning probability of the strongest is set to a very low probability of 1/65535 (see FIG. 49) in any gaming state, and it can be positioned as a so-called premier role. Then, at the time of winning such a premier winning combination, freeze control may be added when controlling the rotation of the reel 301, so that the player can easily recognize that a special winning combination has been won. , The interest of the player can be increased.

The above is the combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination.

It should be noted that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and the combination mode of the symbols described above. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. Then, the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Further, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily limited to the provision of all winning combinations, and a necessary type of winning combination may be appropriately selected.

For example, a double winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or a replay combination) may be set. Which symbol combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line when such a winning combination is won is controlled by the reel stop process.

Further, instead of the pushing order small winning combination prepared for the AT game, a pushing position small winning combination may be prepared. Although a detailed description is omitted, the pushing position minor combination means that the reel stop button 211 is stopped at an appropriate stop timing (push position) and at an improper stop timing. , A small winning combination showing different winning modes. When such a push position small winning combination is mounted, by teaching or notifying the player so that the proper push position can be easily recognized in the AT game, when the push position small winning combination is won. It is possible for the player to easily win the corresponding combination, and it is possible to obtain many medals.

The player of the slot machine 1 is based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIG. 47), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination and the number of payouts thereof (FIGS. 51 to 53), and the arrangement of the symbols (FIG. 46). In some cases, it is possible to find a game method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination selected by the internal lottery cannot be known. Hereinafter, such a game method is tentatively referred to as "maximum efficiency hitting method". When playing a game with maximum efficiency batting, depending on the reel stop position, it is difficult to draw the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination onto the active line (watermelon role, cherry role , Chance chance, etc.), the reel stop button 211 is pressed and stopped at a specific timing such that the expected payout amount is the maximum payout in consideration of the winning probability and the number of payouts. By performing the pressing operation of the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol aspect, it is possible to pull in symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations and obtain a large amount of payouts. In other words, the maximum-efficiency hitting method can be said to be a playing method that suppresses the loss of winning combinations as much as possible.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 etc.).

FIG. 54 shows the entire processing procedure of one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting is performed to prepare for the game start. Especially when the power is turned on, etc., the connection and operation status of the above-mentioned various devices are checked, and the presence/absence of backup data is checked. If backup data exists, a process to restore the state before power-off To execute. When there is no backup data, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203 or, if there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the one-piece insertion button 205). Then, the operation of the starting lever 210 is awaited. That is, the bet amount for one game is determined, and the BET process is performed until the start lever 210 can be operated. In addition, when the slot machine 1 is a machine for exclusive use of three cards in which the game can be executed by inserting three medals, the one-card insertion button 205 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 that has been in the operation standby state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether or not any winning combination is to be the result of the internal lottery is performed. Execute. This internal lottery process is one of the stages before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start to rotate in the subsequent step S4 are in a stopped state (become stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the activated line. It is allowed to stop.

Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to the AT instruction function (so-called AT navigation). In the instruction function process, not only is the winning of the AT game and the start thereof determined, but also regarding the indication effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the AT game is started, the transition to the indication game in which the indication effect is executed. Etc. are also determined, and during the AT game, AT navigation is performed to teach the player the pressing order and the like. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 57 and the like.

In the instruction function process of this example, the central control of the AT function including the sign of the AT game (lottery for AT winning, determination of the number of AT games, execution of AT game, transition of gaming state, display of instruction function, etc.) Are managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, the sub-board 510 manages the auxiliary control related to the AT function (navigation display in the image display body 500, etc.). The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content that is not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content of the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. In addition, the display content of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612 under the control of the main board 409 and the display content of the navigation display displayed on the image display body 500 under the control of the sub-board 510 are paired. The correspondence relation is not limited to 1 and may be a correspondence relation of 1 to n (a plurality of patterns). That is, when any special function LED 612 is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub-board 510 executes the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like in the display mode corresponding to the special function display. The specific display mode of the navigation display is not limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 or the main board 409 may specify which display mode the navigation display is performed. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all the processing related to the instruction function processing.

Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, it is assumed that the content of the instruction function of the AT is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function processing be ended before the reel rotation processing of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the completion of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation processing, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start to rotate, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are rendered valid. The operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and the timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c.

In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player's pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamp is turned off in the order of acceptance, and the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped. To execute.

In the next step S6, when it is determined that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state in step S5, the winning symbols are arranged on the “effective line” (whether a symbol corresponding to any winning symbol is present). Based on (whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining a winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating the "display contents (combination mode of symbols) displayed on the activated line" with the "combination of symbols allowed to be stopped on the activated line corresponding to the winning combination" Determine the winning combination. Further, the determination process in step S6 may be performed based on only the "display contents displayed on the activated line (combination mode of symbols)". In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a line (downward right line 623a) in which the "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" shown in FIG. 47 is displayed, and "BAR symbol-replay symbol-meaning" The two lines of the line in which the "design" is displayed (upward-right line 623b) are defined as "effective lines".

In step S7, a medal payout process is executed based on the contents of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination involving a change in the game state such as type 2 BB, the game state is changed (the game state is changed as shown in FIG. 49) or replayed. Various game benefits are given by the above.

The above is the processing procedure of one basic game of the slot machine 1. Here, in steps S2 (BET processing) to step S4 (reel rotation processing), internal processing is performed triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively called a start process. Hereinafter, a specific description of this starting process will be given.

[11-1. Startup process]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

In the start-up process, first, in step S101, the insertion of medals or the operation of the single-insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. When the MAX bet operation or the medal insertion is performed, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. It should be noted that this determination is the insertion of medals corresponding to the MAX bet (that is, the insertion of three or more medals in the case of the game of the specified number of three, the insertion of two or more medals in the game of the specified number of two). It is assumed that the condition is satisfied only when the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 for MAX bet are operated.

In the next step S102, as a reception process, the bet number (MAX bet only in this example) is determined, and the activated line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, when three medals are thrown in when the number of coins is three, two lines of a rightward rising line 623b and a rightward falling line 623a become valid lines, which is shown. Turn on the active line lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is valid, and in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted. If the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103 and the operation of the starting lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S105.

Further, if the player does not perform a bet operation or a medal insertion or a MAX bet is reached in step S101, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S104. At this time, the determination in step S104 is also not satisfied, the process returns to step S101 and the subsequent processing is repeated.

Further, in the replay game, it is not necessary to newly bet a medal. This automatically sets the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start to rotate, and random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Regarding the timing of extracting the random number at this time, it may be performed immediately after the operation of the starting lever 210, or in addition, in the programming process such as after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the transfer release counter (for reel) is zero. The transfer release counter (for reel) is one of the variable data managed by the main board 409, and is stored in the RAM 1114. The details will be described later in [11-8] (in particular, step S1003 and the like in FIG. 137). Further, the transfer memory counter referred to in step S108 in the subsequent stage is also managed by the main board 409 and held in the RAM 1114. The details will be described later in [11-8] and step S1002 of FIG. 137.

The relationship between the reintroduction release counter (for reels) and the reincarnation memory counter will be briefly described. In the accumulation zone of reincarnation production, information about the game is stored in the reincarnation memory counter for each unit game (one game) and reincarnate The discharge counter (for reel) counter value is incremented by "1" (see steps S1002 to S1003 in FIG. 137). Therefore, by passing through the accumulation zones over a plurality of games, a plurality of "game-related information" is stored in the reincarnation storage counter, and the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for reel) is set to the plurality of games in the accumulation zones. The number is recorded.

When it is determined in step S107 that the counter value of the transfer release counter (for reel) is 0 (YES in step S107), the flag process of step S111 is performed. When it is determined that the counter value is not 0 in step S107 (NO in step S107), the processes of steps S108 to S110 are performed in order to execute the pseudo game in the game for releasing the reincarnation effect. ), the flag processing of step S111 is performed.

In steps S108 to S110, the information for the unit game (one game) is extracted from the information about the game stored in the reincarnation storage counter (step S108), and the extracted information (for example, winning flag information). Based on, the pseudo game information is set (step S109), and the counter value of the transfer release counter (for reel) is decremented by "1" (step S110). The pseudo game information is information necessary for determining the operation mode of the reel 301 in the pseudo game, and is stored in the RAM 1114, for example. The processes of steps S107 to S110 may be performed after the flag process of step S111.

Here, the pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the slot machine 1, a game value is set as a game different from a game (which is also called a main game in order to distinguish it from a pseudo game) played by multiplying a game value (for example, a specified number of medals) for each unit game. It is possible to execute a pseudo game (pseudo game) by reel operation (rotation and stop of the reel 301) similar to this game without consuming. The operation of the reel 301 in the pseudo game is controlled by the main board 409 as in the present game. The main board 409 temporarily freezes the reel operation for this game by adding freeze control to the rotation control of the reel 301 when a predetermined condition for performing the pseudo game is established, and the pseudo game is executed during the freeze control. By controlling the operation content of the reel 301 based on the data prepared for use (for example, the pseudo game information in step S109), the reel operation of the pseudo game is realized. Therefore, the pseudo game can be said to be an example of an effect accompanied by freeze control (freeze effect).

Here, with the pseudo game in the slot machine, it is common to stop the reel 301 (individually reels 301a to 301c) by operating a stop button (for example, reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). The pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, even if it is not possible to accept the stop operation for the stop button, the reel 301 is rotated and stopped (or temporarily stopped including swing fluctuation) in a series. It may be executed as a staging operation. By doing so, expectation can be given to the lighting of the LED of the operation valid lamp indicating whether or not the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are valid.

Further, in the pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the operation means other than the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c (for example, the MAX insertion button 206, the chance button 204, the starting lever 210, etc., see FIG. 47) is pressed. The reel 301 may be rotated and stopped (or temporarily stopped including fluctuation fluctuation). Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform the game in the flow of the operation for advancing the game, because the effect of shortening the game time can be obtained. To give a more specific example, if the result of the game is obtained (after all reels are stopped), the player inputs a game value (for example, a medal) as the operation flow for the next game. Since it is possible to press the MAX input button 206 when performing an action, it is possible to press the MAX input button 206 at such timing (after stopping all reels) to rotate and stop the reel 301. preferable.

In the following description, when expressed as a pseudo game, it includes various forms of the pseudo game described above. Further, as described above, the pseudo game is only an example of an effect (freeze effect) accompanied by freeze control, and the method for realizing the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment is not limited to the pseudo game, and for example, another freeze. It may be a production.

Incidentally, in the case of this game, after the reel 301 is rotated and stopped, the payout of the game value may be made as a result of the game, but in the case of the pseudo game, the game value that does not consume the game value is paid. Therefore, it is not possible to pay out the gaming value as a result of the simulated game. However, based on the result of the pseudo game, it is possible to give a privilege different from the game value (for example, winning the transition to the AT game or adding the number of AT games).

In addition, the pseudo game is generally executed within the game period of the unit game in which the main game is performed, and specifically, for example, the starting operation of the starting lever 210 is performed by multiplying the game value. After that, before the operation control of the reel 301 corresponding to this game is performed, the reel operation by the pseudo game is performed, or after the reels 301a to 301c are stopped in this game, the reel operation by the pseudo game is performed. Or Further, during one main game (during one unit game of one game), the reel operation by the pseudo game may be executed a plurality of times (a plurality of pseudo games). For example, when the process of steps S108 to S110 is repeated and a plurality of pseudo game information is set, the pseudo game can be continuously executed the number of times corresponding to the plurality of pseudo game information.

Further, the pseudo game information is the information necessary for determining the operation mode of the reel 301 in the pseudo game, but specifically, for example, a predetermined stop corresponding to the winning combination flag stored in the transfer memory counter. Various settings such as the stop position of the reel 301, the rotation speed, the rotation time, the rotation direction, and the like can be performed in addition to the stop position of the reel 301 that stops the outcome. In addition, in the case where the pseudo game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the waiting time between the pseudo games can be set. Further, when the main board 409 controls the pseudo game, the sub board 510 may cause a display such as the image display body 500 to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the pseudo game. Thus, the pseudo game can be impressed to the player as a characteristic game effect.

Then, in step S111, it is determined whether or not a winning combination corresponds from the random number value extracted in the random number extraction of step S106 (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number value) (matching of random number value, flag processing). In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value matches (matches or coincides with) the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned on (=1) (see FIG. 50). The winning probability for each winning combination in the hit determination performed by collating the extracted random number value with the hit determination table is as shown in FIG. 49.

Then, in the flag processing, when determining the hit value determination table that serves as a determination reference when matching the extracted random number values in the game, the game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later is referred to. The winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (game state flag) that is in the ON (=1) state in the game is set and the extracted random number values are collated. As the game state flags, it is assumed that flags corresponding to the game states are prepared, and for example, there are a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus internal flag are in the OFF (=0) state, the general state intermediate flag is always set to the ON (=1) state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S111 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, there is a “miss” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device operates (see FIG. 50). ). Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when activated/established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. The symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices are satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the activated line. The above steps S106 and S111 are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps will be collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random number to the flag process corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 of FIG. 54 described above).

As described above with reference to FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function processing shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 55, this instruction function process may be executed as a part of the flag process of step S111 of FIG. 55, or step S114 after the flag process of step S111 is completed. The wait timer time-up may be executed before the time is up.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, a group of condition devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination, the instruction content of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). The command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command that has been appropriately summarized.

Further, the command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) as a result of the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command modes. .. In other words, the winning combinations are grouped according to their type (bell, replay, rare, etc.) and push order (press, middle, push regardless of order), etc. On the other hand, the command can be transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) in a form in which the group including the winning combination can be identified. The classification criteria for grouping winning combinations are not limited to the above examples, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the presence/absence of a push order is added to the classification criteria, all the bell combinations (AT1 to AT10) included in the push sequence bell are grouped into one group, and the bell combinations included in the push sequence insensitive bells (bell 1, bell 2). ) In another group, you can divide the bell role into groups depending on the presence or absence of the push order. At this time, the role of bell is divided into a group of push order bells and a group of push order unquestioned bells. The same applies to the replay combination, and may be divided into, for example, a push order replay group and a normal replay group (the push order does not matter). Further, all winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence/absence of a pushing order, and in such a case, all winning combinations can be divided into a group with a pushing order or a group without a pushing order. Instead of grouping the winning combinations, the condition devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. Below, the command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

First, regarding the command transmission to notify the grouped winning combinations, when the instruction function display is executed, a command that can understand all the breakdowns of the grouped winning combinations (so-called “complete navigation” possible commands) May be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what kind of winning combination the winning combination has been selected and what the pressing order is, and thus the reel stopping method advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called "complete navigation") capable of reliably teaching.

In addition, when the instruction function display is executed for the command transmission notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that can understand a part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (for example, only the first stop can be taught. "Partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of the information regarding the selected winning combination, so that the navigation display that can partially teach the reel stop method advantageous to the player (for example, only the first stop) Can be taught, so-called "partial navigation") can be displayed.

In addition, regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combinations, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command such that the breakdown of the grouped winning combinations is not known may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed, based on the group indicated by the command. , I cannot recognize any more information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, regarding the proper pressing order and a specific breakdown of the winning combination (which one of “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) You can recognize it to the extent that you do not know. The command for notifying the winning combinations grouped when such an instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a “condition device command” described later with reference to FIG. 60 and the like.

Furthermore, when the instruction function display is executed, it is not necessary to limit the small wins to be grouped to the push order bell, and the other small wins are grouped together (for example, the push order bell and the push order replay). You may do it. That is, in this case, even if the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or the push order replay is selected, if the proper push order is the same, a command indicating the same group is transmitted. Means Also, even if the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small wins to be grouped to the push order bell, and to group other small wins (for example, the push order bell and the push order replay). However, in such a case, the type of winning combination (whether it is replay or bell) cannot be discriminated on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) that has received the command, and the instruction function display is displayed. It is impossible to teach the winning combination in an unrelated state (for example, when the instruction function is not executed, the replay navigation indicating that the replay is won cannot be displayed on the image display body 500). It is preferable to group commands according to the types of push-order small wins and send the commands, such as separate push-order replay and push-order replay.

The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command notifying the winning combinations grouped in this way, and the peripheral boards can independently win the winning combinations and their winning combinations. It is possible to prevent the determination of the pressing order.

After the flag process of step S111 ends, in step S112, it is confirmed whether or not the pseudo game information for the pseudo game is set, and if it is set, the reel 301 is operated based on the pseudo game information. Then, the pseudo game is executed (step S113: pseudo game process). If the pseudo game information has not been set in step S112, or after the pseudo game process of step S113 ends, the process of step S114 is performed.

Regarding the pseudo game processing in step S113, when a plurality of pseudo game information is set, a plurality of pseudo games based on the pseudo game information are not all executed in one unit game, Some pseudo games may be carried over to the next main game. Moreover, you may make it specify the main game which can perform a pseudo game process. By doing so, it is possible to make the pseudo game appear over the main game of a plurality of games, or to make the pseudo game appear in a specific main game, which accompanies the pseudo game (including reincarnation effect described later). You can expect the effect of improving the game play.

Further, in steps S108 to S109, it has been described that the pseudo game information is set for each unit game (one game) based on the information stored in the reincarnation storage counter. When the game is being played, the appearance order of the pseudo game in step S113 can be determined by the order in which the above information is extracted and set in the pseudo game information. Then, by changing the set order of such pseudo game information, it is possible to change the playability in the game of releasing the reincarnation effect, and it is possible to produce various effects. Details will be described later in [11-8-3] and later.

In the next step S114, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start-up process (specifically, the game one time before the game) has timed out (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). A timer called this wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of the rotation of the reel in the game to the start of the rotation of the reel in the next game. It is a thing. Here, when the wait timer has timed out (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S115. Also, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S115, rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c become constant, the operation valid lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has become effective.

In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to rotate at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) by the player is accepted. ..

Next, in step S116, the wait timer is reset and the wait timer is started until the next starting process, and the starting process is ended.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is allowed as the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the game. If the corresponding winning combination is allowed here, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is operated, and the information of the operated condition device is used as the information command indicating the result of the internal lottery, the subsequent processing (reel stop processing, (Determination process, payout process, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (which is referred to as an extraction range) when performing random number extraction is predetermined. This extraction range can be determined to be, for example, an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 14 =16384 random numbers) or the like. In the first embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 1 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this. When the extraction range of this random number is expanded, the range of the random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased accordingly, so that the phenomenon that a specific random number value is biasedly extracted is unlikely to occur.

Within the above extraction range, a random number value corresponding to each winning combination is further assigned in advance. For example, among the random number values within the extraction range (from “1” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment), the random number value corresponding to the winning combination “two kinds BB” is set to “1”. When the extracted random number value becomes “1”, the result of the internal lottery is “winning the 2nd kind BB”, and the condition device BB1 of the 2nd kind BB processes as an information command in the game. Will be done. Further, if this is utilized, the winning probability of the 2nd type BB (probability that the 2nd type BB is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random number value corresponding to the 2nd type BB. .. In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of the two types of BB in the general state is [the total number of random number values corresponding to the two type BB/the total number of random number values within the extraction range] is 6553/65535. The winning probability of the seed BB is about 1/10.

In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to each winning combination. In the above example (2 types BB), the random number value “1” within the extraction range is the hit value corresponding to 2 types BB. Further, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined winning combination is set to consecutive random number values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, the winning combination of this predetermined winning combination The range of values is from random number value “1” to “4”. Then, when it is determined (matched) that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4”, it means that “the predetermined winning combination is won” as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single winning combination (for example, 2 types BB, cherry, replay, etc.) that wins only one winning combination is prepared. As described above, in addition to such a single winning combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations simultaneously wins (including a "duplicating combination" in which a bonus combination + a small combination simultaneously wins) may be prepared. When such a duplicated combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicated combination is also included in the above winning value.

From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined by the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of the winning value of any winning combination. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the winning value range of any winning combination, it is lost. That is, the range of the winning value of the loss is outside the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. The winning value may also be called a winning allowance value.

By the way, a single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination with respect to one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination with a plurality of winning combinations (for example, two) with respect to one extracted random number value. Corresponds to. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that the winning combination has been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to each winning combination of the plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are simultaneously established, the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, so in reality, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device are It may not always stop on the active line. For example, if the replay combination and the bonus combination are simultaneously won, and the pulling of the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop processing in step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order and the pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the activated line and is always the replay combination. The symbol combination will be stopped.

Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the push order-independent bells (bell 1 and bell 2) and the replay winning value that can expect winning (or establishment) without depending on the pushing timing and the pushing order in the stop operation are extracted. It occupies most of the range. Specifically, out of the total 65535 lottery values in the extraction range, the number of lottery values assigned to replay is 30993, and the number of lottery values assigned to the push-order unquestioned bell is 32059, resulting in a total of 63,502. Account for more than 96%. Then, in the first embodiment, the prescribed number in the bonus is 2, and when the replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming medals, and when the push-order unquestioned bell is won, 9 pieces are provided. Will be paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals are paid out during the execution period (during the bonus) of the bonus game.

[11-3. Game state control processing]
Below, a game state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described.

[11-3-1. Game state transition control processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

First, it is determined whether or not the bonus game (BB game) is in progress (step S151), and when it is determined that the bonus game is in progress (YES in step S151), whether the bonus game end condition is satisfied. It is confirmed whether or not (step S152). If the condition for ending the bonus game is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the game is returned while the gaming state during the bonus is maintained.

When the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game is ended and the state is shifted to the general state (step S153). In the general state, when a game is played over a certain period, the number of medals bet by the player for playing the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

When it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB game) is not in progress (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not it is in the bonus inside (bonus internal state) (step S154). That is, when the bonus combination (2 types BB) is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. The condition device corresponding to this bonus combination corresponds to the bonus combination in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line, the game continues to operate even after the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line.

If it is determined in step S154 that it is in the bonus internal state, then it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (step S155). When it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S155), the game state shifts to the bonus state (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. It In addition, when a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the game is returned while the gaming state inside the bonus is maintained.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S154 that the bonus internal state is not established, it is determined whether or not a bonus combination (here, the combination combination of two types BB, but may be a combination combination of two types BB) is won. It is determined whether or not (step S157). When it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has been won (YES in step S157), the game state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line in the game winning the bonus combination, the game in the bonus internal state is not executed, the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state, and the bonus game is executed. It If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in step S157), the process returns with the game state controlled in the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main board 409 controls the gaming state to any one of the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the AT function, but the execution of the AT game by the AT function is basically controlled by a system different from the above-mentioned gaming state control. It That is, the AT game can be executed in any of the gaming states of the general state and the bonus internal state. However, this is not the case when the restriction of the rule or the like is violated, and for example, the AT game cannot be executed in the bonus state. Below, the control processing of the game state regarding the AT function will be described in detail.

[11-3-2. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table), If the main processing of the instruction function processing is performed by the main board 409 and the generation of the instruction is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) has the same instruction function. Can be displayed on another display device or the like (navigation display, instruction generation effect). It should be noted that the display form of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, but both displays are required to have display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a rough processing flow of the instruction function processing. In FIG. 57, regarding the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1, a series of processing executed by the main board 409 and a series of processing executed by the sub-board 510 upon receiving a command from the main board 409 are shown together. ing. 58, 59, and 137 are flowcharts (No. 1 to No. 3) showing the detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation processing executed by the main board 409 among the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 57. Further, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of instruction function-related processing executed by the sub-board 510. In [11-3-2], first, the outline of the instruction function processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57, and in [11-3-3] and later, the instruction function will be described with reference to FIGS. Details of each process included in the process will be described.

Although various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function processing, these flags are stored in the memory (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510) in the board that executes the instruction function processing. This is an internal flag that is held, and the value or the like is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (eg, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. Further, when the flags of the same name are used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), basically, these internal flags have a common data format, and the main board 409 and the peripheral board side It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to the.

In addition to the above internal flags, variable data may be used. These variable data are also stored in the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, in the case of the main board 409, the RAM 1114 and the sub-board 510). In this case, the value is stored in the RAM 1122), and the value is read or rewritten by the CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409, the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

First, in step S61 of FIG. 57, the main board 409 executes processing relating to whether or not to generate an instruction function (instruction function generation processing). More specifically, it determines whether the AT is won or lost, determines whether or not the AT game can be started, and determines the number of continuous AT games. Further, whether or not to execute the precursor effect of the AT game is also determined in the instruction function generating process.

When it is determined as a result of the instruction function generation process that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 performs a process of displaying an instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game on the special display LED 612 (step S62). ). With this instruction function display, it is possible to show the proper stop order of the small push-combination combination that is established during AT, and to indicate that predetermined symbols should be arranged in the predetermined stop order.

In the case of the game in which it is determined in step S61 that the main board 409 does not need to display the instruction function, the specific display function display on the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

While the main board 409 displays the instruction function in step S62 based on the result of the instruction function generation process in step S61, the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display is displayed on the peripheral board (command) or the like. For example, it is transmitted to the sub-board 510) (instruction information command). When the indication function display is not performed, the fact may be notified by the indication information command, or the indication information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine that the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) can recognize not only whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also the instruction function display Display contents (instruction contents) can also be grasped.

Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub-board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 of FIG. 57 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 57, the instruction function generation processing (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processing by the main board 409 and the sub board 510 (specifically, step S61). Regarding the processing of S62 and the processing of steps S63 to S65), the execution timing of the mutual processing is not limited.

First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) displays (or has performed) the instruction function display in the game, and the indication function display is (or has been performed). ) (YES in step S63), the instruction generation effect process is performed as the process in step S64. If the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or is not performed) (NO in step S63), the peripheral board is instructed as the processing in step S65. Performs function-related processing.

The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is for displaying an “instruction generation effect” that teaches the player the stop order and stop position (targeted pattern) of the reel 301 on the image display body 500 and other display devices. This is a process for displaying a so-called AT navigation or the like. Note that the teaching content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to that according to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display processing. For example, it is not permissible that the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "reverse push" even though the instruction content indicating "forward push" is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display. Even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating “forward pressing” and indicates that “the left reel 301a should be stopped first” as the instruction according to the instruction generation effect content, the subsequent second Even if the reel 301b to be stopped is not taught, it is not allowed. Further, the fact that the teaching content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the content that is displayed according to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, and is a guideline of the pushing position in the instruction function display. Also applies when is determined. That is, for example, although the instruction content indicating the “red 7 symbol should be aimed at by all reels” is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “BAR symbol”. It is not permissible to have a "target" or a "target only the red 7 symbol on some reels".

In addition, as for a specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect modes such as displaying the pressing order and the symbols on the liquid crystal screen, lighting the LEDs associated with the reels 301a to 301c, and the like are conventionally known. However, any one or a combination thereof may be used.

The instruction function-related processing in step S65 is related to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game in a non-AT or a game in which a push-order winning combination is won even in AT). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen (for example, effect screen display corresponding to a precursor effect), and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. It should be noted that in the above-mentioned "pushing order unquestioned winning combination", not only the winning combination that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of coins regardless of the playing method at the time of winning like a pressing order unquestioned bell, but depending on the playing method It also includes winners who cannot expect the maximum number of coins to be paid out or cannot be paid out. To be more specific, not only is the winning combination (for example, the watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing with a game method (corresponding to the above-mentioned “maximum efficiency batting method”) that can expect the maximum payout, A winning combination that cannot be obtained when playing with "maximum efficiency batting" (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 from the symbol combination of the above watermelon role is prepared, It is a single winning combination that is determined to be a winning by stopping the symbol combination, and includes a so-called chance winning combination.

The instruction function processing is ended by performing the processing of steps S61 to S65 described above. Hereinafter, each process (step S61 to step S65) performed as the instruction function process will be described in detail.

[11-3-3. Instruction function generation processing]
[11-3-3-1. Instruction Function Generation Process of First Example]
The instruction function generation process shown in step S61 of FIG. 57 will be described in detail with reference to a specific example of the extraction table. In FIG. 58, the processing in the modes other than the special mode is mainly described, and in FIG. 59, the processing in the special mode is described. The "special mode" will be described later. Further, in FIG. 137, processing relating to “reincarnation effect” that can be controlled during the AT game is described. The explanation about “reincarnation production” including FIG. 137 will be collectively given mainly in [11-8] and thereafter.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 58, it is determined whether the AT flag is ON. The AT flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not an AT game is in progress. When it is ON (=1), it means that AT is in progress, and when it is OFF (=0). Means not in AT, ie in non-AT. If the AT flag is ON (YES in step S601), the instruction function generating process ends without performing any significant process. If the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601), it is determined in step S602 whether the AT internal flag is ON (=1). The AT internal flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the winning of the AT game is decided internally (AT internal state) although it is not in AT, specifically, AT After being won, the AT internal flag is turned ON in the non-AT state until the AT game is started. The AT internal flag is set to OFF (=0) when the AT is not won or during AT. In step S602, if the AT internal flag is ON, the process of step S603 is performed, and if the AT flag is OFF, the process of step S621 is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the AT flag is turned ON, a predetermined initial game number (for example, 30 games) is included in the variable data for the “AT game number” that counts the number of internal AT games. Suppose it is set. As for the initial number of AT games, in addition to setting a fixed predetermined number of games in this way, the initial number of games determined by lottery from a plurality of candidates for the number of initial games is set as the number of AT games. Alternatively, various methods such as setting the initial game number determined in the game period to the AT game number via a specific game period for determining the initial game number can be adopted. ..

In step S603, an AT addition lottery is performed. In the AT additional lottery in step S603, first, a lottery is made as to whether or not the initial number of AT games is to be added (the initial number of games additional lottery), and if it is decided to add, the number of games to be added is drawn. Is done (initial game number addition game number lottery). In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a predetermined game period (for example, a precursor game period described later) may be provided before the AT starts after the AT is elected, and the predetermined period is set in this game period. If the conditions are met, the initial AT game count may be added. When the process of step S603 is performed, the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601) and the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S602), which means that the omen game is in progress. As a result, an AT addition lottery will be conducted. Note that during the aura game, one of the internal flags, the “aura game flag”, is ON.

Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used in the initial game number addition win/loss lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process (see step S3 in FIG. 54) is “replay”, “push order bell”, “type 2 BB”, or “miss”. In most cases (65534/65535), the non-winning prize is selected, and it is not added. On the other hand, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process is other than the above, that is, "the push order does not matter bell", "watermelon (weak/strong)", "cherry (weak/strong)", "chance eye (weak/strong)". )” or “strongest”, a certain percentage (16384/65535) is won, and the addition is selected.

The groups of the two winning combinations shown in FIG. 61 are repeatedly used for the sake of simplification in the following description as well, so that the “replay”, the “push order bell”, the “two kinds of BB”, and the “outside” winning group are won. The roles will be referred to as “A group winning combinations”, and winning combinations other than A groups, that is, “pushing order unquestionable bell”, “watermelon (weak/strong)”, “cherry (weak/strong)”, “chance” The winning combinations of "eyes (weak/strong)" and "strongest" will be referred to as "group B winning combinations". Needless to say, the division of the winning combinations by the A group and the B group is merely an example for explanation, and in reality, different winning combinations may be provided, or there may be three or more divisions. Alternatively, the winning combination may be different for each lottery table.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for lottery on the number of games to be added to the initial game number. The initial game number addition game number lottery is performed when the initial game number addition game lottery is won. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 62, the distribution pattern of the number of games to be added is set to differ depending on whether the winning combination is the winning combination of the A group or the B group. As a general tendency, in the case of the winning combination of the group A, a relatively small number of games is often selected, and only a maximum of 200 games can be selected. On the other hand, in the case of the winning combination of the group B, it is the same that a small number of games is easily selected, but a higher number of games is more easily selected than in the case of the group A, and more than 200 games are selected. It is possible that

After the AT additional lottery is performed in step S603, it is determined whether or not the initial number of games additional lottery is won (step S604). If it is determined that the initial number of games is won, the current "AT" is determined in step S605. The process of adding the initial game number and the additional game number selected in the initial game number lottery is performed (addition of the initial game number). "AT initial game number" is variable data for indicating the number of AT games set at the start of AT. Then, the process proceeds to step S606. When it is determined in step S604 that the initial game number addition win/win lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, 1 is subtracted from the “number of precursor games”. The “precursor game number” is variable data for indicating the number of “precursor games” in which the predictive effect of AT (details will be described later) can occur.

Next, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become zero. When the number of precursor games is other than 0, that is, when the duration of the precursor game is left (NO in step S607), the instruction function generation process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of predictive games is 0 in step S607 (YES in step S607), it means that the predictive game is finished. At this time, since the AT internal flag is ON, the AT game is started. Therefore, the "AT flag" is turned on (step S608). After that, the AT internal flag and the precursor game flag are turned off (steps S609 and S610), the "special state flag" and the "each state flag" are also turned off (steps S611 and S612), and the instruction function generation process ends. ..

Here, the "special state flag" is an internal flag that is turned ON when the game progresses in the "special mode". In the first embodiment, the “special mode” is not a mere production mode but a special mode in which the winning probability or the like related to the AT lottery is preferentially treated. Conditions and the like for shifting to the "special mode" will be described each time in the processing of each step described later. Also, regarding the AT lottery game state controlled when it is in the "special mode", in the following description, the game is performed in the "special mode" when the AT lottery game state of the special "special state" is controlled. It will be done. Derivation examples will be described later. When there are a plurality of "special states" (special state 1, special state 2, special state 3) (see, for example, Fig. 63), a plurality of states are managed by one special state flag (for example, special state). When the state flag is 0, it is OFF, when it is 1, it is the special state 1, when it is 2, it is the special state 2, and when it is 3, it is the special state 3). A flag may be provided (for example, a special state 1 flag, a special state 2 flag, and a special state 3 flag are prepared). In any case, in the following determination that the special state is ON or OFF, it is determined to be ON when controlled to some special state, and is determined to be OFF when not controlled to any special state.

Further, the "each state flag" is a plurality of "AT lottery game states" (for example, a low-probability state, a high-probability state, an ultra-high-probability state, etc.) that are prepared so that the winning expectations regarding AT initial win lottery, etc. are different. It is an internal flag for indicating a control state for each "state" of special states 1 to 3, a hell state, etc.). Therefore, each state flag can be understood to include a special state flag and a hell state flag. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the case of "turning off each state flag", the state flags regarding all AT lottery game states are returned to the initial settings (in this example, the low certainty state is turned ON. Means "to turn on each state flag", the state flag corresponding to the AT lottery gaming state selected by the immediately preceding state transition lottery is turned on (other state flags are off). ) Means that. In addition, "to turn off each state flag" means that each state flag when it is not in AT (for example, a low-accuracy state, a high-accuracy state, an ultra-high-accuracy state that can be controlled even when not in AT). All of the state flags regarding each state may be turned off, or a predetermined state may be turned on. Details of the “special state”, “each state”, “state transition lottery (state transition lottery A, B, C, special state transition lottery)” will be described later.

If the AT flag is OFF in step S602, that is, if the AT is not being won internally in the non-AT, whether or not the special state flag is OFF (=0) in step S621. To be judged. The process when the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the special state flag is OFF in step S621 (YES in step S621), AT initial winning lottery is performed (step S622). The AT first win lottery is a lottery for determining whether to win the AT game while not winning the AT game. The condition in which the process of step S622 is performed is that it is not in AT (AT flag is OFF in step S601), is internally AT unelected (AT internal flag is OFF), and is not in special mode (special flag is OFF). Therefore, it is considered that the normal state in which neither the AT nor the precursor game is won or the precursor game in which the AT is not won (during the precursor) is in progress.

FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used in the AT initial win lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 63, the winning probability of AT first win is set based on the gaming state controlled when the AT first win lottery is performed and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. There is.

Here, the gaming state described in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is a “gaming state related to winning lottery” (specifically, a different number is set in the internal lottery of the winning combination as shown in FIG. 49). , The general state, the bonus internal state, the bonus state), but the "AT gaming state" in which a different number is set in the lottery related to the AT first hit or the precursor of the AT, etc., and thereafter, the "AT lottery gaming state". Call.

According to FIG. 63, as a specific example of the AT lottery game state, a hell state, a low certainty state, a high certainty state, a super high certainty state, a special state 1, a special state 2 in the order in which the winning probability of the AT first win is generally high. , And special state 3 are prepared.

Briefly describing each AT lottery game state, first, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning the AT first win regardless of which winning combination is selected. Next, the low-probability state is the initial state of the AT lottery game state, and the low-winning combination (also called the "rare combination", which is relatively difficult to win by internal drawing), specifically, the watermelon part, the cherry part, the chance It is possible to expect a certain amount of AT first wins when the winning role, which corresponds to the strongest win, and the bell in which the pushing order is not required in any state other than the bonus state may be included in the rare role.) In particular, comparing the winning probabilities in the same type of rare role (for example, weak watermelon and strong watermelon), it is easier to win in the “strong” system than in the “weak” system. These tendencies are the same in other AT lottery game states. In addition, when a winning combination other than the rare combination (non-rare combination), that is, a high winning combination (specifically, replay and push order bell) that is relatively easy to win by the internal lottery, is selected, Even in the lottery game state, it is almost impossible to expect to win the AT first hit.

In this example, the “low winning combination (rare)”, which is relatively difficult to win by internal lottery, is a winning combination with a relatively high expectation level regarding advantageous games (eg AT first win). It is an expected player." On the other hand, the "high winning combination (non-rare combination)" other than the rare combination is a "low expected combination" because it is a winning combination having a lower degree of expectation regarding advantageous games than the "high winning combination".

And, the high-accuracy state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the AT first win based on each winning combination is generally higher than the low-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state has a higher expectation of winning than the high-accuracy state. It is in a high gaming state.

Further, the special states 1 to 3 are special game states controlled in the "special mode" in this example. Special states 1 to 3 have higher expectation of winning the AT first win than the above AT lottery game states (low-probability state, high-probability state, super-high-probability state), and the winning role is a rare role If it is, the AT first win is won with a probability of at least 55000/65535 or more. Further, according to FIG. 63, the special state 2 is higher than the special state 1 and the special state 3 is higher than the special state 2, and the expectation of winning the AT first win is higher and the gaming state is highly advantageous.

Note that the distribution in the lottery table shown in FIG. 63 is an example, and for example, when the winning combination is a rare combination in the special state, the distribution such as always winning the AT first win is performed. Good. Further, although each of these states may shift to another state based on the winning combination, such transition lottery of the AT lottery game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, FIG. 74 and the like.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the "gaming state regarding winning combination lottery" is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state, the "gaming state regarding AT" becomes one of the above AT lottery gaming states. Controlled. Which of these AT lottery game states is controlled is managed by ON/OFF of each state flag. "Each state flag" is an internal flag provided corresponding to each AT lottery game state, and is a low-probability state flag, a high-probability state flag, a super-high-probability state flag, a special state flag (special state 1 flag ~ It corresponds to the special state 3 flag) and the hell state flag. A plurality of these respective status flags are not turned on at the same time, and when only one of the status flags is turned on, the other status flags are turned off. For example, when controlling to the ultra-high accuracy state, the ultra-high accuracy state flag is turned on among the respective state flags, and the other respective state flags are turned off. The "each state flag" does not have to be an individual flag corresponding to the type of AT lottery game state, but an internal flag (for example, a flag value of 1 for managing all AT lottery game states collectively). A low-probability state, a high-probability state when 2, and an internal flag that can be managed such as).

In step S623, it is determined whether or not the AT initial win has been won by the AT initial win lottery in step S622. When the first AT win is won (YES in step S623), the process of step S624 is performed, and when the first AT win is not won (NO in step S623), the process of step S632 is performed.

In step S624, a precursor lottery for determining whether or not to execute (shift) the “precursor game” is performed.

Here, the "precursor game" and the "precursor effect" in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the "precursor game" is a special game in which the "precursor effect" can occur, and the predictive game is played over a predetermined number of games (a plurality of games) selected by lottery. Then, the "prediction effect" is an effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the transition to the advantageous game state (transition to AT in this case) is made based on the result. The "precursor effect" is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of games. As a specific example of the effect, for example, "continuous effect" that is performed over a plurality of games and a suggested effect that is completed in one game. (For example, navi teaching of a small role, title display, etc.) are interwoven with each other. Details of the “continuous effect” will be described later in the description of the instruction function-related processing by the peripheral board (see FIG. 60).

In this example described with reference to FIG. 58, FIG. 59, and the like, the aura effect is always performed over a plurality of aura games, and the final game of the aura effect is the final game of the aura game. Therefore, the success/failure result of the AT transition indicated by the omen effect can also be regarded as the result of the omen game. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in both cases of winning the AT first win (when the AT is won) and not winning the AT first win (when not winning the AT), the precursor game is May be started. The omen game (or omen effect) performed at the time of AT winning is referred to as “main omen”, and the omen game (or omen effect) performed at the time of not winning the AT is referred to as “gase omen”. In the case of this omen, it is shown that the AT transition is made at the end, and in the case of Gase's oath, the AT transition is not shown at the last.

The predictive game to be executed in the instruction function generating process according to the present invention includes not only the “predictive effect” in which the “continuous effect” is performed as described above but also various other effects. It is feasible. For example, it is not a continuous performance with continuity, but a "roughness effect" in which some predetermined effect occurs more frequently than usual (for example, a characteristic background effect frequently occurs, or the color of a character's dialogue is It is conceivable that a changing presentation frequently occurs.

When such a "roughness effect" is used, as a pattern example of the aura game (main aura), a pattern "roughness effect A"+"continuous effect A (amenity effect)", "continuous effect A"+" It is possible to execute the pattern of "rough effect A" + "continuous effect B (predictive effect)", the pattern of "continuous effect A" + "rough effect A" + "rough effect B" + "continuous effect B (predictive effect)", etc. Is. In the case of this omen, since it is necessary to finally notify the winning of the AT transition, it is preferable that the omen effect is performed at the end.

On the other hand, as an example pattern of the omen game (Gase Omen), since it does not finally win the AT transition, the omen effect does not have to be performed at the end of the Gase Omen, so in addition to the pattern that is possible with this omen, It is also possible to execute a pattern such as "roughness effect" only, or a pattern in which "continuous effect" and "roughness effect" are combined to end with "roughness effect" at the end. In the case of a pattern that ends with "roughness effect" at the time of sign warning, the end of "continuous production (precursor effect)" performed before that is pretended to be the end of the precursor game, and "roughness effect" is used in the game after the precursor game. You may make it look like it is being displayed. In addition, in any of the omen games (general omen, omen omen), the "normal effect" that is the same as the normal time may be mixed in addition to the "continuous effect" and the "roughness effect".

As described above, the predictive game determined by the instruction function generating process according to the present invention can be executed in various patterns, but in the present example, for the sake of simplification of description, which predictive game (main predictor, gaze predictor) is executed. In the case of), the game proceeds in a pattern of “normal effect”+“continuous effect (predictive effect)”. At this time, as described above, the predictive effect is always performed over a plurality of games in the predictive game, and the final game of the predictive effect can be the final game of the predictive game.

In the precursor lottery in step S624, since the AT first win has been won in step S622 in advance, it is determined whether or not to play the precursor game (main precursor) before the AT is started. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the precursor lottery is performed even when the AT initial hit lottery is not won (for example, step S633 described later). It is decided whether or not the game (predictive gaze) is played, but in the case of prognostic gasse, the prognostic effect that allows the player to expect to move to AT is executed, but in reality, No transition to AT is indicated.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 determines whether or not the precursor game can be executed (for example, the precursor lottery in step S624) and determines the precursor game number that is the number of executed games (for example, step S626). Of the precursor game number lottery), the subsequent processing related to the indication of the indication game (for example, to display the indication that the indication game is in progress, determine the indication content and execution timing of the indication effect and continuous production, It is preferable that the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) that receives the precursor game number command from the main board 409 perform processing such as performing an effect according to the determination result. This is because when the main substrate 409 performs all or most of the above processes, the amount of processing by the main substrate 409 becomes excessive and the processing capacity of the main substrate 409 (capacity upper limit is defined) overflows. This is to prevent it from happening. In the recent game machines, the amount of data required for the process related to the production has increased as a result of the enhancement of the types and contents of the production. In consideration of such a background, there is a limit to how the main board 409 can perform the process related to the performance, and the processing load is distributed between the main board 409 and the peripheral boards as described above, so that the main board 409 can be processed. Not only can the processing capacity be suppressed, but it is also possible to enhance the effect contents (effect pattern) by the peripheral board that is not restricted by the capacity limit. Details of the process related to the indication of the aura game will be described later in the instruction function related process (FIG. 60 and the like) by the sub-board 510.

64 to 66 are views (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the precursor lottery. According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the precursor lottery, whether or not the precursor game is executed (present/absent) is drawn based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. FIG. 64 is an example of a lottery table used in a precursory lottery performed at the time of winning an AT, in other words, a lottery table used in a precursory lottery of this precursor. In addition, FIG. 65 is a precursor lottery performed when the AT initial win is not won (AT non-win) in the non-special mode (for example, the state where the AT lottery game state is controlled to a state other than the special state and the game is played). 66 shows an example of a lottery table used in FIG. 66. FIG. 66 shows a precursor lottery performed when the AT is not won in a special mode (for example, a state in which the AT lottery game state is controlled to a special state and the game is played). An example of the lottery table used in FIG. In other words, FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are the lottery tables used for the precursor lottery of the sign of gasse.

In the precursor lottery in step S624, the lottery table shown in FIG. 64 is used. When the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 64 is used, the precursor game is determined to be executed in any AT lottery gaming state, but the presence/absence distribution is changed and the precursor game is not executed. May be prepared.

Next, in step S625, it is determined whether or not the precursor lottery in step S624 is won, that is, whether or not the precursor game is determined to be executed, and if it is won (YES), the process of step S626 is executed. If it has not been won (NO), the process of step S631 is performed.

In step S626, the number of predictive games lottery for determining the number of games to play the predictive game (the number of predictive games) is performed. 67 to 70 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 4) for explaining the lottery table used in the precursor game number lottery. Like the lottery table (FIG. 64 to FIG. 66) used for the precursor lottery, the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery depends on the presence or absence of the special mode when the relevant lottery is performed and the presence or absence of AT winning. Different lottery tables are available. 67 is an example of a lottery table selected when the AT is won in a mode other than the special mode, FIG. 68 is an example of a lottery table selected when the AT is not won in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected when the AT is won in the mode, and FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected when the AT is not won in the special mode. In step S626, the lottery table of FIG. 67 is used.

According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, in the precursor game number lottery, the precursor game number is selected based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. Then, the precursor game is played for the number of precursor games selected by the lottery, the precursor effect appears in the middle of the game, and at the end, a notification as to whether or not to shift to AT is performed. 67 to 70, the winning combinations are grouped into the above-mentioned "rare combination" and "other than rare combination (non-rare combination)" in each lottery table. These lottery tables may be implemented by being divided into different lottery tables for each winning combination, but as shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 70, the data held by the main board 409 can be obtained by making the lottery tables as common as possible. It has the effect of reducing the capacity.

Comparing FIGS. 67 to 70, a relatively small number of precursor games (specifically, 4 games) is selected in the special mode, whereas a relatively long number of precursor games is selected in the modes other than the special mode ( Specifically, eight games or more) are selected.

Further, comparing FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the number of predictive games when the AT is not won (that is, the sign of the precursor of Gase) is shown when the AT is won (FIG. 67) and when the AT is not won (FIG. 68) in a mode other than the special mode. It is easier to select the number of games) that is slightly smaller than the number of precursor games when the AT is won (that is, the number of precursor games of this precursor). In addition, the maximum number of predictive games when the AT is not won is 32, whereas the maximum number of predictive games when the AT is won is 36. Therefore, the predictive game has a specific number of games (32 games). ) Is exceeded, it is possible to achieve a special effect that it is confirmed at this point that it is a precursor of the AT win.

After the aura game number lottery is performed in step S626, the aura game number selected in the lottery is set in the variable data for the “aura game number” (step S627). Then, by turning ON (=1) the "precursor game flag" which is one of the internal flags (step S628) and turning ON the AT internal flag (step S629), the predictive game is started in the subsequent games. The flag to be set is set. Then, the start of the precursor game means that the special mode (special state) is no longer set, so the special state flag is turned off (step S630), and the instruction function generating process is ended.

In step S631, since the player won the AT first hit lottery but did not win the precursor lottery, the AT flag is set to ON to switch to AT without performing the precursor game number lottery, and then the instruction function generation process is performed. To finish.

In step S632, processing is performed when it is determined in step S623 that the AT initial hit lottery has not been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the precursor game flag is OFF (=0). .. If it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is OFF (YES in step S632), the process of step S633 is performed, and if it is determined that the precursor game flag is ON in step S632 (step S632). No), the process of step S641 is performed.

In step S633, a precursor lottery for determining whether or not to execute the precursor game is performed. The sign lottery in step S633 is the same lottery process as in step S624 described above, but since the AT initial win has not been won in step S623, whether or not to make a gaze sign using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. Will be drawn by lot. According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, when a winning combination other than the rare combination (non-rare combination) is selected, almost no omen game is selected to be executed, but a weak rare combination (weak watermelon, weak cherry, When the weak chance) is selected as the winning combination, there is a high possibility that the precursor game is selected to be executed. If the winning combination is a strong rare role, there is a higher possibility that the aura game will be executed, and if the winning combination is the strongest, the aura game is always selected.

Next, in step S634, it is determined whether or not the precursor lottery in step S633 is won, that is, whether or not the precursor game is determined to be executed, and if it is won (YES), the process of step S635 is performed. If the player has not won the prize (NO), the process of step S638 is performed.

In step S635, a precursor game number lottery for determining the precursor game number for performing the precursor game is performed, and in step S636, the precursor game number determined by the lottery is set in the variable data for the “precursor game number”, In step S637, the "precursor game flag" is turned ON (=1). The processes of steps S635 to S637 are similar to the processes of steps S626 to S628 described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S637, the process of step S638 is performed.

In step S638, a lottery (state transition lottery A) regarding the state transition of the AT lottery game state is performed. State transition lottery A, when the current AT lottery gaming state is a low-probability state, a high-probability state, or a super-high-probability state, which AT lottery among a low-probability state, a high-probability state, or a super-high-probability state It is a lottery to shift to the game state (including continuation of the current state). In step S678 and the like in FIG. 59, which will be described later, when the current AT lottery game state is the special state (special states 1 to 3), which one of the low accuracy state, the high accuracy state, and the super high accuracy state is selected? A state transition lottery B is shown in which a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to shift to the AT lottery game state.

Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used in the state transition lottery A. 71, 72, and 73 are lottery tables for the state transition lottery A used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-probability state, a high-probability state, and an ultra-high-precision state, respectively. Is an example. When performing the state transition lottery, which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled can be recognized by referring to the value of each state flag.

The features of the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 will be briefly described. Referring to FIG. 71, which is used in the low-probability state, in the low-probability state, there is almost no transition (promotion) to the ultra-high-probability state unless the winning combination is the strongest, which is a realistic possibility. As for sex, it can be seen that when the winning role is a rare role, the transition (promotion) to the highly accurate state can be selected. In particular, it is most easy to promote to a highly accurate state when a weak role is a rare role, and specifically, promotion to a highly accurate state is selected at 16384/65535.

Referring to FIG. 72, which is used in the high-accuracy state, in the high-accuracy state, if the winning combination is a rare combination, the winning combination is not relegated (relegated), and the winning combination is replay, push order bell, and 2 types. It can be seen that there is a possibility of being demoted only with a fairly low probability (1310/65535) if BB is out of sync. It can be seen that there is a possibility of transition (promotion) to some extent in the super-high-precision state, which is the higher-level state, when the winning role is a rare role (particularly, the push order unquestioned bell or the weak rare role). In the high-confidence state as a whole, the state is mostly maintained or promoted, and is rarely demoted to the low-probability state.

As shown in FIG. 73 used in the ultra-high accuracy state, in the ultra-high accuracy state, if the winning combination is a rare combination, the winning combination does not move to a lower state (relegation), and the winning combination replays and pushes the bell. It can be seen that there is a possibility of being demoted to the low-probability state or the high-probability state only with a considerably low probability in the case of being out of the 2nd class BB. That is, in many cases, even if the state transition lottery A is performed in the ultra-high accuracy state, the ultra-high accuracy state is maintained, so that a state in which the benefit of AT is high is maintained.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state transition lottery A regarding the state transition of the AT lottery game state is not performed only during the AT game, but any game state during the non-AT game (for example, general The same may be applied to a state or a bonus internal state). Then, in the state transition lottery A during such a non-AT game, the same lottery table as illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 may be used, or different allocations are set depending on the game state. The lottery table may be used.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the state transition of the AT lottery game state is drawn by using the lottery table in which different transition probabilities are set based on the winning combinations, the winning probability of each winning combination The number of games in which each AT lottery game state is continuously controlled (so-called average stay game number) can be calculated based on the selection ratio of the transition destination state. Specifically, for example, using FIG. 49 (lottery table of winning combination lottery) and FIGS. 71 to 73 (lottery table of state transition lottery A), the average number of stay games in each AT lottery game state in the bonus internal state is shown. When calculated, the average number of stay games in the low certainty state is about 120 games, the average number of stay games in the high certainty state is about 25 games, and the average number of staying games in the ultra-high certainty state is about 36 games. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the average number of stay games in each AT lottery gaming state is not limited to the above calculation example. For example, each average number of stay games is set in advance and corresponding to the setting. As described above, the winning probability of each winning combination and the selection ratio of the transition destination state may be adjusted.

Further, in the above calculation example, the longest average stay game number is about 120 games in the low probability state, and the shortest average stay game number is about 25 games in the high probability state. On the other hand, the number of stay games in the "special state", which is another AT lottery game state, is selected from 2 to 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), so the average number of stay games in the special state is The number of games is shorter than the average number of stay games in any of the low-probability state, high-probability state, and ultra-high-probability state. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the previous stage, the average number of stay games in each AT lottery game state can be set arbitrarily, but the average number of stay games in the special state is other AT lottery games. It is preferable that the number of games is relatively shorter than the average number of stay games in the states (low-accurate state, high-accuracy state, ultra-high-accuracy state).

After the state transition lottery A in step S638 is performed, each state flag is turned on so as to correspond to the state of the transition destination determined in the lottery (step S639), and the instruction function generating process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S632 that the omen game flag is ON (NO in step S632), a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the variable data of the “omen game” is performed as the process of step S641. Then, in step S642, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S642), this means that the precursor game has ended, and therefore the precursor game flag is turned off (step S643). If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S642), it means that the precursor game is continuing, and the process of step S649 described below is performed.

After the process of step S643 is performed, a special state transition lottery for performing a lottery to determine whether to transit to the "special mode (special state)" is performed (step S644).

Here, the transition condition to the special mode (special state) in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the aura effect that displays (indicates or teaches) whether or not to shift to the AT can be performed as described above, but the aura effect ends in the aura game. After that, not only the pattern to return to the game state (the game state here means the AT lottery game state) before the start of the aura game (or the aura effect), but also another special game state (special state) May be controlled by (transition to special mode). In addition, when the transition to the AT is confirmed in the indication effect, the AT game is started as it is, and therefore the transition to the special mode is not performed. Therefore, such a special state is a special AT lottery game state that can be controlled only after the transition to the AT is not shown in the precursory game (that is, a sign of a gasse), and in this example, it is controlled to the special state. The game situation that is progressed by is called "special mode".

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the end of the sign of the gaze, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the special mode (control to the special state). If the lottery is won, the special state is controlled. The period (number of special state games) to be played is determined by lottery. Then, the game proceeds in the special mode until the number of games in the special state is exhausted, and the AT lottery and the precursor lottery are performed again based on the winning combination selected during that time. Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, one of the features is that the lottery regarding the AT in the special mode is performed in a situation in which it is preferentially performed before the execution of the gasse sign. As a result of the preparation, even if the transition to the AT is denied due to the warning sign, it is possible to shift to the special mode in which the expectation for the AT is high, and the expectation of the player is reduced due to the warning sign. It is possible to suppress the above and maintain the expectation for the special game (AT game). Note that the lottery related to the AT is preferentially treated in the special mode, for example, in the lottery table of the AT initial winning lottery shown in FIG. 63, the AT initial winning probability in the special states 1 to 3 is favored. Is shown to be present. Note that the special states 1 to 3 are gaming states that are separately set such that the degree of preferential treatment is different, and the degree of preferential treatment is high in the order of special state 1<special state 2<special state 3.

In this example, it is assumed that which of the special state 1 to the special state 3 is controlled is determined based on the game state when the transition to the special state is determined. Specifically, when the transition to the special state is decided in the low certainty state, the special state 1 is selected as the destination special state, and similarly, the special state 2 is selected in the high certainty state. , Special state 3 is selected in the case of ultra-high accuracy state. By doing this, the special state of the transition destination is preferentially treated according to the degree of advantage of the gaming state before transitioning to the special state (low certainty state <highly precise state <ultra-highly precise state) (special state 1<special state 2<special state 3) can be performed. Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the one-to-one correspondence between the game state before the shift and the special state of the shift destination as in the above example. As another example, for example, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low certainty state, either the special state 1 or the special state 2 is randomly selected as the state of the transition destination, and the high certainty state is similarly selected. In this case, either the special state 2 or the special state 3 may be selected by lottery, and in the case of the ultra-high accuracy state, the special state 3 may always be entered.

Further, in the processing shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, a special state transition lottery is performed in the final game of a gasse sign, and if the lottery is won, the special mode is shifted to immediately after the gasse sign is finished. By performing such a process, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the AT transition is not denied because the special mode is not transitioned until the precursor of the gasse reaches the final game. Therefore, even if it is a warning sign, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not to win the AT transition until the final game.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the timing of shifting to the special mode after the end of the warning sign is not limited to the above-described immediate shift after the end of the warning sign. For example, a relatively short waiting period (waiting game) may be provided before the transition to the special mode after the end of the warning sign (however, the waiting game period may be shorter than the number of warning signs. preferable). When providing such a standby game, it is preferable to control to a specific effect state during the standby game. The specific effect state may be, for example, a high-frequency effect mode in which a predetermined effect frequently occurs. By controlling to the high-frequency effect mode during the standby game, the effect can be generated over a plurality of games of the standby game, so an effect similar to the omen effect (short omen) can be generated over the plurality of games. It can be realized, and can be expected to improve playability. Further, in the case of providing a standby game, even if the precursor game is a precursor to a bad game, it is possible to expect a transition to the special mode when an effect that can be inferred to be a standby game occurs after the end You can expect the effect of maintaining the interest of the person.

In step S644, a special state transition lottery for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the special mode as described above is performed using a predetermined lottery table. FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used in the special state transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table of the special state transition lottery is changed to the special state based on the winning combination of the current game and the current AT lottery game state (low-probability state, high-probability state, super-high-probability state). The winning percentage that is controlled (shifts to a special state) is set. Specifically, when the winning combination is a rare combination, regardless of the AT lottery game state, the player always wins the transition to the special mode. If the winning combination is a non-rare combination, the higher the AT lottery gaming state is, the easier it is to win the transition to the special mode. Even if it is a non-rare role, at least half (32768/65535) will win the transition to the special mode. As described above, when the transition to the special state is determined, the special state 1 to the special state based on the game state (low-probability state, high-probability state, super-high-probability state) at the time of the determination. It is assumed that it is decided which of the states 3 is controlled.

Then, in step S645, it is determined whether or not the special mode transition lottery in step S644 has won the transition to the special mode. If the transition to the special mode has been won (YES in step S645), the processing in step S646 and subsequent steps is performed. When the process is performed and the shift to the special mode is not won (NO in step S645), the process of step S649 described later is performed.

In step S646, the period in which the special mode is controlled (the number of special state games) is determined by lottery upon winning the special state transition lottery in step S644 (special state game number lottery). FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. According to FIG. 75, the number of special state games is randomly selected from among different allocations depending on whether the winning combination is a rare combination or a non-rare combination (non-rare combination), and the winning combination is a non-rare combination. In some cases, it is selected from 2 to 9 games, and when the winning combination is a rare combination, it is selected from 2 to 20 games. In the case of the lottery table of FIG. 75, when the winning combination is a rare combination, not only the expectation of the maximum number of games is high, but also the average number of games is large, so that the special mode can be expected to continue for a long time. Since the special mode is favored with respect to the AT before the gaming state before the precursor game (or the precursor effect) is executed, the fact that the special mode lasts longer means that the expectation to the AT is higher. ..

Next, in step S647, the number of special state games selected in the special state game number lottery in step S646 is set in the variable data "number of special state games" for indicating the number of special state games, and then the special state flag is set. It is turned on (step S648), and the instruction function generating process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S642 that the number of precursor games is not 0, and if it is determined in step S645 that the transition to the special mode has not been won, the state transition lottery A is performed as the processing in step S649. Is done. The state transition lottery A in step S649 is similar to the state transition lottery A described in step S638, and the state of the transition destination is determined by using the lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) corresponding to the current AT lottery state. It is determined.

Then, in step S650, each state flag corresponding to the state of the transfer destination determined in the state transfer lottery A of step S649 is turned ON, and the instruction function generating process is ended.

The above is the description of each process illustrated in FIG. In the following, each process shown in FIG. 59 will be described. The process shown in FIG. 59 is a process subsequently performed when it is determined in step S621 of FIG. 58 that the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621). In FIG. 59, when the same processing as that described in FIG. 58 is performed, the detailed description thereof may be omitted.

First, in FIG. 59, an AT initial winning lottery is performed in step S661. The AT initial hit lottery in step S661 is the same as the process described in step S622, and thus details thereof will be omitted.

Next, in step S662, it is determined whether or not the hell state flag is OFF (=0). As described above, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning the AT first win regardless of which winning combination is selected. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a special state is controlled after the end of the precursor game (precursor of gasse) in which the winning result for the transition to the AT is not shown by the precursor effect. When a rare role is selected as a winning combination during the game period controlled in a special state (special mode), and the AT first win is won, a precursor effect indicating the winning result for the transition to the AT is given. The omen game that occurs (this omen) is executed. During the period in which this warning sign is executed, since the transition to AT is won, it is a useless game even if more AT is won. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the special mode, when the initial sign of AT is won and the main sign is executed, the period of the main sign is controlled to "hell state", and the useless AT winning is achieved. I try not to occur. In addition, even when the special mode is transitioned to the warning sign, the hell state can be controlled.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when controlling to the “hell state” as described above, not only the AT winning is suppressed but also advantageous privilege may be given to the player. Specifically, for example, an AT addition lottery for adding the number of AT games may be performed (the AT addition lottery may be made easier than in a normal AT game). It should be noted that the processing relating to the AT addition lottery may be the same as the AT addition lottery performed in the AT internal state described in step S603.

When it is determined that the hell state flag is OFF in step S662 (YES in step S662), the process of step S663 is performed, and when it is determined that the hell state flag is not OFF (ON) ( (NO of step S662) and the process of step S681 mentioned later are performed.

In step S663, whether or not the winning combination of this game is other than replay, push order bell, 2nd class BB, or “out” (that is, whether or not the winning combination is a “rare combination”) is determined. It is determined by referring to the operating condition device. In addition, the winning combination which is the criterion of this judgment is referred to as “rare combination” in this example for the sake of simplification of description, and it is not necessarily limited to “rare combination”. It may be limited to "rare part". When it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is the “rare combination” (YES in step S663), the process of step S664 is performed, and when it is determined that the winning combination is other than the “rare combination” ( The process of step S663) is performed.

The process of step S664 is a process performed when a rare combination is won in the special mode. Referring to FIG. 64 (the lottery table used in the precursor lottery performed at the time of winning the AT), it is understood that the precursor game always occurs when the player wins the AT when the winning combination is the rare combination. Further, referring to FIG. 66 (the lottery table used in the precursor lottery performed when the AT is not won in the special mode control), when the winning hand is the rare hand, the AT first win lottery is performed. It can be seen that the omen game always occurs even if the player does not win (AT non-win) (corresponding to the situation when the process of step S672 described below is performed). Therefore, before the processing of step S664 is performed, the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 is performed (not shown), whereby the transition to the precursor game can be confirmed.

As described above, when the rare part is selected as the winning part when the special mode is controlled, the omen game always occurs even if the AT initial winning lottery is not won (AT non-winning) Therefore, it is a game state in which continuous production (precursor production in the predictive game) is likely to occur. Therefore, a screen display such as "preparing for continuous effect" may be displayed as a display during the special mode to indicate to the player that the game state is in which continuous effect is likely to occur. Also, paying attention to the fact that a precursory game (and continuous production) will occur if you win a rare role in the special mode, a screen display such as "If you draw a rare role now?" is displayed as a display in the special mode. For example, the player may be expected to win a rare role. In any case, the special mode can be regarded as a mode that leads to the subsequent precursor game (or precursor production or continuous production). Therefore, in a broad sense, it is a “subsequent precursor game (or precursor production or continuous production)”. Can also include special modes.

Then, in step S664, since the execution of the precursor game is confirmed, the precursor game number lottery is performed, and as a process subsequent to the lottery, a set of the precursor game number that has been selected (step S665) and the precursor game flag are set. It is turned on (step S666). Since the processing of steps S664 to S666 is similar to the processing described in steps 626 to S628 of FIG. 58, details thereof will be omitted, but in the precursor game number lottery of step S664, it is shown in FIG. 69 or FIG. A lottery table (a lottery table selected at the time of AT win/AT not win in the special mode) is used.

After that, in step S667, it is determined whether or not the AT initial win is won by the AT initial win lottery in step S661. When it is determined that the AT is initially won (YES in step S667), the AT internal flag is turned on (step S668), and then the process of step S669 is performed. If it is not determined that the AT is initially won (NO in step S667), the process of step S669 is performed.

In step S669, the special state flag is set to OFF because it is determined that the precursory game is started (precursor game flag ON) from the progress so far. Furthermore, since the hell state is to be controlled during the execution of the aura game (during the aura game), the hell state flag is turned on in step S670, and the instruction function generating process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is other than the "rare combination" (NO in step S663), as the processing in step S671, whether or not the AT initial winning is won by the AT initial winning lottery in step S661. Is determined.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S671 that the AT first win is won (YES in step S671), the process of step S672 is performed. When the process of step S672 is performed, as described above in step S664, the situation is such that the omen game is always generated. Therefore, before the processing of step S672 is performed, the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 is performed (not shown), whereby the transition to the precursor game can be confirmed.

Then, in step S672, the number of predictive games lottery is performed, and then the number of predictive games selected in the lottery is set in the variable data “number of predictive games” (step S673), and the predictive game flag is turned on ( Step S674). The processes of steps S672 to S674 are similar to the processes described in steps S664 to S666 and steps 626 to S628 of FIG. After that, the AT internal flag is turned on (step S675), and the processing of step S669 and subsequent steps is executed.

If it is not determined in the determination process of step S671 that the AT first hit is won (NO in step S671), the process of step S676 is performed.

The process of step S676 is performed in a situation where the rare combination is not won in the special mode, and the AT first win is not won. Referring to FIG. 66, the omen game is not executed in such a situation. Therefore, before the processing of step S676 is performed, the aura lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 is performed (not shown), whereby it is possible to determine that the aura game is not started.

Then, in step S676, the value of the "special state game number", which is variable data for indicating the number of games in the special mode, is subtracted by one. After that, in step S677, it is determined whether or not the value of the special state game number is 0, and when it is determined to be 0, it means the end of the special mode. Therefore, in steps S678 to S680 related to the state transition, After the processing is performed, the instruction function generation processing ends. Further, if it is determined in step S677 that the value of the special state game count is not 0, it means that the special mode continues, and thus the instruction function generation process ends without performing the processes of steps S678 to S680. To do.

In step S678, a lottery (state transition lottery B) regarding the state transition of the AT lottery game state is performed. State transition lottery B, when the current AT lottery game state is any of the special states 1 to 3, which of the low-probability state, high-probability state, or super-high-probability state, moves to which AT lottery game state It is to draw lots (including the continuation of the current state).

Here, FIGS. 76 to 78 are views (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. 76, 77, and 78 are the lottery tables for the state transition lottery B used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state 1, the special state 2, and the special state 3, respectively. This is an example. When performing the state transition lottery, which AT lottery game state is currently controlled can be recognized by referring to the value of each state flag (particularly a special state flag).

In each of the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the state of the transfer destination is lottery based on the winning combination. Referring to FIG. 76, when the special state 1 is controlled, there is no transition to the super-high accuracy state, and when the winning combination is a rare combination, the transition to the high accuracy state is always selected, When the winning combination is a non-rare combination, the transition to the low-probability state or the high-probability state is selected almost at the same level. Referring to FIG. 77, when the special state 2 is controlled, there is no transition to the low-probability state, and although there is a degree of difference depending on the winning combination, the transition to the high-probability state or the ultra-high-probability state is selected. To be done. In addition, when the winning combination is a rare combination, there is a tendency that the transition to the super-high probability state is more easily selected than when the winning combination is a non-rare combination. Referring to FIG. 78, when the special state 3 is controlled, there is no transition to the low accuracy state or the high accuracy state, and the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state is always selected. In this way, comparing FIGS. 76 to 78, to the AT lottery game state (low-probability state <high-probability state <ultra-high-probability state) with high advantage in the relationship of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 It can be seen that the transition is easily selected, and from this point as well, it can be seen that the special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 has a high degree of advantage.

After the state transition lottery B in step S678 is performed, the special mode flag is turned off because the special mode ends (step S679), and the state becomes the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery B in step S678. Correspondingly, each state flag is turned ON (step S680), and the instruction function generating process is ended.

Next, the processing after step S681 performed when it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is not OFF (ON) will be described. The process of step S681 is performed because the AT internal flag is not ON (step S602), the special state flag is not OFF (step S621), and the hell state flag is not OFF (step S662). For example, this corresponds to a state in which the precursor game (precursor of gasse) is executed by AT non-winning after the special mode is entered.

The processing performed in steps S681 to S689 is the same as the processing described in steps S641 to S648 in FIG. 58 except for the processing in step S688, and thus the details will be omitted and only a simple flow will be described.

First, the number of predictive games is subtracted (step S681), and it is determined whether the number of predictive games has become 0 (step S682). When the number of precursor games is 0, the precursor game flag is turned off (step S683), a special state transition lottery is performed (step S684), and it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode is won. (Step S685) If the special mode game is won, a special state game number lottery is carried out (step S686), and the lottery game number is set to the "special state game number" (step S687). After the state flag is turned on (step S689), the instruction function generating process is ended. However, since the hell state is shifted to the special mode at this time, a process of turning off the hell state flag is additionally performed between step S687 and step S689 (step S688).

In addition, when the transition to the special mode is not won in the process of step S685, the state transition lottery C is performed (step S690). Here, in the state transition lottery C, similar to the state transition lottery A described in step S638 and the like of FIG. 58, the destination of the AT lottery game state is randomly selected. However, in this example, in the state transition lottery C, the transition to the low-probability state is determined with a probability of 100%, so that the next game is forced to fall to the low-probability state with a low advantage.

Here, in the situation where the process of step S690 is performed, when the AT internal flag is OFF (NO in step S602) and the hell state flag is ON (NO in step S662), the number of precursor games is 0 (step S682). YES), and further, the transition to the special state is denied in the special state transition lottery (NO in step S685). Explaining in a specific game situation, after the precursor effect is finished, the mode shifts to the special mode, and the precursor effect is again performed by winning the rare role in the special mode (while being controlled to the hell mode) Regardless, it corresponds to the case where the AT is not won, and in this example, in such a case, after the end of the precursor effect after the special mode (that is, at the end of the hell mode), the low probability state is forced. Move to.

In the first embodiment, winning a rare role that is a highly expected role in the special mode (in terms of the AT lottery game state means controlling to a hell state) is a mere precursor game. This is a game situation that is extremely advantageous for the player compared to transitioning and then transitioning to the special mode (however, a simple predictive game and transition to a special mode are also advantageous game situations for the player. is there). However, when the player cannot reach the special game (AT) as a result despite reaching such an extremely advantageous game situation, a low probability state in which the degree of advantage is significantly lower than other game states is obtained. I'm trying to fall. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous result (AT winning) cannot be issued in spite of the appearance of a very highly advantageous game situation (rare winning in the special mode), a reaction is made. By setting the worst state (low accuracy state), it is possible to realize a game machine with a sharp effect without making the specifications of the player unpleasant. In addition, from the viewpoint of the hall, a gaming machine provided with only modes that are advantageous to the player (specifically, a precursor mode, a special mode, a precursor effect after the special mode, etc.) is less likely to give a disadvantage to the hole. However, if the result of the extremely advantageous game situation ends in failure (AT non-win), the profit on the hole side can be secured by shifting to the worst state. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game period controlled in the special state is shorter on average than other general AT lottery game states (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, super high accuracy state). By doing so, the game balance can be maintained.

After the state transition lottery C in step S690 has been performed, processing for turning off the hell state flag is performed in order to transition from the hell state until then to the gaming state selected in the state transition lottery C (step S691). ), each state flag (that is, the low certainty state flag) corresponding to the state of the transition destination selected in the state transition lottery C is turned on (step S692), and then the instruction function generating process is ended.

As described above, the instruction function generating process (step S61 of FIG. 57) by the main board 409 is performed by performing the process of each step shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, and based on the result of the process, FIG. The processing after step S62 of the indicated instruction processing is performed.

The instruction function generating process performed by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the contents of each process described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, and may be performed by various derived patterns as described below. It can be replaced. In addition, in [11-3-3-3] described later, a derivative pattern of the instruction function generation process will be described as the instruction function generation process of the second example and the third example.

For example, in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, whether or not the aura game flag is ON (more strictly, whether or not the aura game is 0 in the aura game) is used as a determination trigger to enter the special mode. Although the transfer is selected by lot (for example, steps S632, S642, S644 in FIG. 58), as an example of the derivative pattern of the instruction function generating process, the sign game is provided with strengths (strong signs and weak signs). You may make it easy to transfer to a special mode. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately adjust the degree of transition to the special mode, so that the gaming property of the slot machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, the timing of the special state transition lottery and the state transition based on the lottery result are not limited to when the number of precursor games becomes 0. For example, the special state transition lottery is performed at an appropriate timing during the precursor game. Alternatively, the special mode may be set. In such a case, the precursor game and the special mode after that are combined so as to look like a series of “precursor modes”, so that the precursor game and the special mode are displayed in a manner different from those shown in FIGS. 58 and 59. Can be configured. Specifically, if the game period of 32 games is selected as the "precursor mode", and the predictive game is being played among them, if the special state transition lottery is won in the middle of the predictive game, By switching to the special mode, the remaining game period of the "precursor mode" can be set to the special mode. At this time, even if the omen game ends as a gaze omen, the special mode becomes a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than before the execution of the gaze omen, so if you can switch to the special mode at an early timing, the period of the special mode will be long. Continuing, you can raise your expectations for winning the AT. On the other hand, if the timing of shifting from the precursor game to the special mode is delayed, it is expected that the AT winning result will be displayed for a long time in the precursor game, and the special mode controlled after that will lead to the AT winning again. You can have expectations.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by adjusting the allocation of the lottery table regarding the transition to the predictive game (precursor effect) and the subsequent special mode (special state), the predictive game without transitioning to the special state. The pattern in which the AT winning is announced only by the omen effect is 1/2 when the winning role that triggers the omen game is a rare role, and the winning role that triggers the omen game is a rare role When it is other than (non-rare role), it may be 100% (may be close to 100%). By doing so, when a non-rare role that is usually difficult to win the AT is selected, the expectation of winning the AT can be significantly increased at the time when the precursor game (or the precursor effect) is developed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 59, as described in step S663, when the rare combination (low winning combination) is selected as the winning combination in the special mode, the precursor game is preferentially generated. The slot machine 1 of the form does not need to be limited to the winning of the rare role in the transition from the special mode to the precursor game generation. For example, even if a non-rare role (high winning role) is selected as a winning role in the special mode, the distribution may be set to an extent that can be expected to generate a precursory game. (You may think of the push order bell of the rare role and the push order bell of the non-rare role as "bell", or the push order bell of the non-rare role as the main "bell") Occasionally, the occurrence of the precursory game may be determined by 70% or more. In addition, in the special mode, the first win of the AT (step S661 in FIG. 59) may be distributed to an extent that can be expected for the AT win even when the high win (eg, Bell) is won. You may be made to win AT at 50% or more sometimes. At this time, the winning value corresponding to the push order bell may be changed in the distribution table illustrated in FIG. 63. By doing so, even in the special mode, even a high-winning prize that cannot normally be expected in the occurrence of a precursory game or AT win can be a fully expected win-winning prize, which enhances the player's interest. be able to.

However, as mentioned above, when a high winning combination is included in the preferential treatment for the precursor game occurrence from the special mode and the AT winning, the advantage of the special mode becomes extremely high, so the balance of the overall payout rate etc. From the viewpoint of maintaining, it is preferable to extremely shorten the game period of the special mode (the number of games controlled in the special state). By doing this, while the occurrence of a precursor game from the special mode and the expectation of AT winning are increased, when the game period of the special mode is shortened, the expectation of the player for the special mode for a short period of time is increased. It can be further enhanced.

When the game period (the number of games) in the special mode is extremely shortened as described above, the specific number of games can be determined as follows, for example.

First, as a first example, in the case where the push-down bell of the high winning combination is to be preferentially treated, an integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of the push-down bell is set as the special mode game period. According to the lottery table for winning combinations shown in FIG. 49, in a gaming state (general state, bonus internal state) other than the bonus state, the winning ratio of the push order bell is about 0.49 (calculated from 32000/65535). Therefore, its reciprocal is about 2.04. Therefore, as an integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of the push order bell, it is “2” when an integer value that is close to the reciprocal number is adopted, and “3” when the integer value rounded up to the right of the decimal point is adopted. Becomes

When the game period of the special mode is “2 games”, this number of games is the number of games that the player can feel that he or she can win a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the pushing order bell) within the game period. Therefore, the effect of enhancing the player's willingness to play and the expectation can be expected. In addition, when the game period of the special mode is “3 games”, the number of games is theoretically the number of games that can be won in a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the pushing order bell) within the game period (that is, Since the expected winning value is 1 or more), it is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege (occurrence of a precursory game or an AT winning) is given through the special mode, and to further enhance the player's expectation.

Next, as a second example, when the push order bell and the replay among the high winning combinations are targeted, the winning probability that the winning combination targeted for the preferential processing is selected is higher than in the first example (Fig. 49, the probability that the push order bell or the replay is won is about 0.63 in the general state and about 0.96 in the bonus internal state. Therefore, the game period of the special mode is set from the first example. Should be shortened, for example, to be limited to "1 game". When the game period of the special mode is set to "1 game", the opportunity to be overridden by the special mode is given only to the next game in which the failure result due to the warning sign is shown. Motivation can be sharply increased.

[11-3-3-2. Effect of the instruction function generating process of the first example]
When the slot machine 1 performs the instruction function generation process (the instruction function generation process of the first example) as described in [11-3-3-1], the following effects are also obtained. Can be realized.

First, according to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, whereby "a game machine capable of executing an expected effect expected to shift to an advantageous game is performed in a predetermined game period. Even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied by the expected effect, in the comparatively short game period after the predetermined game period, the special game state (special mode), which is more advantageous than the plural types of normal game states, is shifted. It is feasible to realize "a gaming machine to obtain".

The above-mentioned “expected effect” corresponds to the “predictive effect” described in the instruction function generating process of the first example. In the instruction function generating process of the first example, the “precursor effect” can be executed in order to suggest or teach the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game), and it has been described in step S624 and the like in FIG. As described above, the omen game in which the omen effect is performed includes a main omen that indicates a shift to the AT game (AT winning) and a gaze omen that indicates that the AT game does not transition (AT non-winning). Further, the precursor game can be said to be a continuous effect game that is performed in a delay period from the game in which the lottery related to the AT game transition (AT first hit lottery) is performed to the game in which the result is displayed.

Then, according to the instruction function generating process of the first example, even after the AT initial hit lottery is performed, the warning sign is executed, and even if the transition to the AT game is denied as a result, the special mode ( It is possible to shift to a special state). Specifically, when the special state transition lottery shown in step S644 of FIG. 58 is won, it corresponds to transition to the special mode (special state). When the processing of step S644 is performed, the slot machine 1 is in a state where the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 in a state where the AT machine has not been won (not internally won). That is, it is possible to shift to the special mode when the warning sign is finished and finished (see FIG. 74 for the lottery table).

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the special state controlled when the special state transition lottery is won is another AT lottery game state (so-called normal) as described in FIG. 63 and the like. It is equivalent to the gaming state, and specifically, compared to the low-probability state, high-probability state, and ultra-high-probability state), the expectation of winning the AT first win is increased, etc. It can be said that it is an advantageous mode (special mode). In the example of FIG. 63, if the winning combination is the “rare combination” while being controlled to the special state, there is a considerably high probability of at least about 84% (55000/65535) or more and the AT first win. You can win. However, in the instruction function generating process of the first example, the situation in which the game is played in the "special mode" is the non-AT state, and the superiority of the "special mode" is not as high as in the special gaming state (AT state).

It should be noted that the point that the period during which the mode is shifted to the special mode is “a relatively short game period” is, for example, that the special number is higher than the average number of stay games in the low-probability state, the high-probability state, and the ultra-high-probability state, which are normal game states. This is based on the fact that the number of games controlled by the mode (the number of special state games) is small, but this detailed description will be given later.

From the above, the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, "in a gaming machine capable of executing a precursor effect expected to be transferred to the advantageous game, shift to the advantageous game by the precursor effect Even if it is denied, it is possible to shift to a special mode that is advantageous to the player.” In the conventional gaming machine, when the result of the precursor production ends in failure (AT non-win), the gaming value spent for digesting the precursor of the gaze for which the precursor production is performed becomes useless for the player. However, there is a problem that the player's sense of loss is increased and the interest of the player is deteriorated. However, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, as described above, it is possible to shift to the special mode that is advantageous to the player even after the warning sign is consumed by the warning sign. Since it is possible to compensate (compensate) for the played game value and suppress the feeling of loss of the game value due to a sign of gasse, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play the game.

Furthermore, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the AT lottery game state before the precursor game (precursor effect) is started includes three types of a low-probability state, a high-probability state, and an ultra-high-probability state. However, the special states (special states 1 to 3) can be more advantageous with respect to the AT than any of those states (see FIG. 63 ). According to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, even if the shift to the advantageous game is denied by the precursor effect, it is more advantageous than before the precursor effect is executed. It is possible to shift to a special mode (for example, a special state), and it is possible to provide a game state with a high degree of expectation, on the contrary, due to the occurrence of a sign of gasse. Originally, the sign of Gase could be discouraging the player by being notified of the result that is not connected to the advantageous game (for example, AT game), but the slot when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed According to the machine 1, it is possible to provide an expected value that can supplement the gaming value consumed by the player for the warning sign by connecting to the special mode with high expectation after the warning sign.

Further, in the instruction function generating process of the first example, a state related to the advantageous game (corresponding to the AT lottery game state) even while a gasse sign having a result of denying the transition to the advantageous game is being performed. A transfer lottery can be conducted. Specifically, this corresponds to the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. In this state transition lottery A, the state transition is drawn by using the lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 based on the AT lottery game state controlled at that time point, but when looking at the distribution, Except when it is controlled to the highest super-high accuracy state at the time point, the promotion probability of transitioning to an advantageous state from that time point is set higher than the demotion probability of transitioning to an unfavorable state from that time point. For example, in FIG. 71, there is no demotion because it is a state transition lottery from the lowest-probability state. Further, for example, in FIG. 72, the ratio of demoting to the low probability state is 600/65535 even when the most probable non-rare role is won, whereas the ratio of promoting to the super high precision state is 63625/65535. The rate of promotion is overwhelmingly higher.

As described above, according to the instruction function generating process of the first example, not only the state transition lottery can be performed even while the gasse omen is being performed, but also the advantage can be increased by the state transition lottery, and therefore the gasse omen Even if the result is that the shift to the advantageous game is denied, it can be expected to shift to a state of high advantage so as to compensate for the loss caused by the negative result, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. Has the effect of suppressing.

Further, in the instruction function generating process of the first example, when a warning sign is performed, the AT lottery game state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state) that can be normally controlled in a specific game in which the number of remaining omen games becomes 0 , It is possible to perform a lottery to move to a special mode that is more advantageous than the (ultra-high accuracy state). Therefore, if you win the lottery, use the advantageous lottery table (lottery table for special states) in subsequent games. It is possible to carry out a lottery (AT initial win lottery) for shifting to the advantageous game. Specifically, the special mode transition lottery corresponds to the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 of FIG. 58 or step S684 of FIG. 59, and the subsequent transition lottery to the advantageous game is step S661 of FIG. It corresponds to the AT first hit lottery. In the AT first win lottery, the lottery table according to the AT lottery game state is used as shown in FIG. 114. According to FIG. 114, any of the low-probability state, high-probability state, and ultra-high-probability state is used. It can be seen that the special states 1 to 3 have a higher probability of winning the AT first win.

In addition, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, it is described that the special state transition lottery is performed when the number of remaining precursor games is 0. However, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, The special state transition lottery may be performed when the number of predictive games is not limited to 0 and is a predetermined number other than 0. By doing this, the state transition lottery (special state transition lottery) can be executed even during the prelude to Gase, so even during the premonition, a more advantageous state than the current AT lottery game state It becomes possible to switch to (special mode), and even if a sign of gasse that cannot be expected to shift to advantageous game is executed, all investment of game value (medals) necessary to digest the sign of gasse is wasted. It can be expected to have the effect of compensating for the investment.

In other words, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, a transition to a special mode (for example, a special state) in which a good lottery table is used in a specific game during (or immediately after) the premonition It has the feature that lottery can be performed.

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the period controlled in the special mode is a “relatively short game period (relatively short period)”, and the game period is a normal game state (low probability). State, high-precision state, ultra-high-precision state) is shorter than the period controlled. Specifically, as described in the state transition lottery A of the instruction function generation processing (for example, step S638 of FIG. 58), when the lottery table of FIG. 49 and FIGS. The average number of stay games in the certainty state is about 120 games, the average number of stay games in the high certainty state is about 25 games, and the average number of stay games in the ultra-high certainty state is about 36 games. On the other hand, since the number of stay games in the special state (special state 1 to special state 3) is selected from 2 to 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), the number of stay games is more than that in the normal game state. It's a short period. Then, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generating process is performed, when the omen game advantageous to the player is the omen omen (that is, when the shift to the AT game is denied), the comparison is made. Since it is possible to shift to such a special state for a very short period of time, even if the expected effect in the omen game ends in a failure result, it is possible to give a chance of another chance depending on the special state. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, it is possible to realize a game characteristic different from the game characteristic in the conventional gaming machine in which the omen state and the normal state are repeated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

Furthermore, according to the instruction function generating process of the first example, when the rare winning combination that is a high expected winning combination (low winning combination from the viewpoint of winning probability) is selected as the winning combination in the special state, The predictive game is started again with a probability (100% in the description of FIG. 59). However, when the predictive game ends in failure, the gaming state after the predictive game has a low profitability. It is forcibly dropped to the certain state (see the state transition lottery C in step S690 of FIG. 59). Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generating process is performed, even if the advantageous omen game ends in failure, the high expected winning combination (low winning combination) is won in a relatively short period of time thereafter. As a result, the omen game can be controlled to an advantageous special mode in which the omen game can be re-appeared, so that a plurality of situations advantageous to the player can be provided in a multiple (or continuous) manner. On the other hand, on the other hand, even if such a multiple advantage situation is provided, if those results are unsuccessful (do not shift to the AT game), as a reaction, the subsequent game state is Since it is forcibly dropped to a low-probability state (lowest gaming state in this example) with low profitability, it is necessary to provide the player with a gaming machine that takes into consideration the profits of the hall side as well as a gaming machine that is not sweet. You can

Also, from the viewpoint of securing profits on the hall side, the special state is a game state that is advantageous to the player (that is, disadvantageous to the hall side). Although not preferable, in the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the period during which the special state is controlled as described above is a normal gaming state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra high accuracy state). Since it is made shorter than the average number of stay games in (state), disadvantages on the hole side can be suppressed.

Further, in the instruction function generating process of the first example, the transition to the special mode (special state) is drawn by the special state transition lottery as described in FIG. 58 or FIG. 59. The expectation level may be displayed in points or the like to suggest to the player. The timing of giving points or the like is not particularly limited. Further, such suggestive effect may be performed by the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) instead of the main board 409. When such a suggestive effect is performed, it can be expected that the player's interest will be increased.

In the instruction function generating process of the first example, when the special mode as described with reference to FIG. 58 or FIG. 59 is performed after the end of the warning sign, a special effect (special state suggestion effect) that indicates that the special mode is being performed. ) May be executed. In the special state suggestion effect, for example, the content of the continuous effect (contents of the precursor effect to be returned) that may occur when the rare combination is won in the special mode may be suggested. Further, when the special state suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make it easier to select a continuous effect having a high expectation degree from a plurality of types of continuous effects. Specifically, taking the lottery tables of FIGS. 94 and 95 as an example, when the special state suggestion effect is executed, when the precursor effect (continuous effect) occurs thereafter, the weak system effect (weak story) , It is easier to select strong production (strong story, strong battle) than weak battle. By doing so, the interest of the player can be enhanced only by the appearance of the special state suggesting effect.

Further, according to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, whereby “a gaming machine capable of executing any one of a plurality of effects including a specific effect indicating a determination result regarding transition to advantageous game”. Therefore, in the game after the specific effect is executed, it is also possible to realize a "gaming machine capable of executing the predetermined effect in the stage before the result of the specific effect is displayed".

The above “specific effect” corresponds to the “continuous effect” described in the instruction function generating process of the first example, and “before the result of the specific effect is shown in the game after the specific effect is executed”. The state in which the "predetermined stage effect" is executed is, for example, the precursor game that is executed again based on the "special mode" described in the instruction function generation process, or that the rare combination is won in the "special mode". Alternatively, it corresponds to a continuous effect in the precursor game) or the like.

More specifically, according to the instruction function generating process of the first example described in [11-3-3-1], the "continuous effect" appears in the aura effect performed in the aura game, It is possible to teach the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game) (see the description of step S624 and the like in FIG. 58). The omen effect including the continuous effect is included in the main omen indicating that the game is to be transferred to the AT game (AT winning) or the geek omen that is not transferring to the AT game (AT is not winning). Therefore, the continuous production performed with the sign of gasse does not show the transition to the advantageous game.

Further, the “continuous effect” may be a mode in which one game completes and teaches whether or not to shift to the AT game, but in many cases, a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games. Further, when the "precursor effect" in the first embodiment is regarded as one of the "continuous effect", the effect is always performed over a plurality of games. Further, the “plurality of games” may be a game (so-called main game) in which an internal lottery related to a winning combination is performed once for each game, or may be simulated during one time of the main game. It may be configured by a game (so-called pseudo game, pseudo game) that creates a mode of a plurality of games, or may be a mixture thereof.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine capable of producing a continuous effect during a precursory game, if the result of the continuous effect denies the winning of an advantageous game, the player's interest will continue for a while after that. However, there were many problems that the value would continue to decline. To give a concrete example, when a continuous production in the omen game appears such as winning a rare role in a high probability state of AT winning, the player strongly expects AT winning, When the continuous production ended in failure, the sense of expectation dropped sharply due to discouragement, and the lowered interests could not be recovered immediately.

On the other hand, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, in the slot machine 1, the result of the precursor effect (continuous effect) does not indicate that the advantageous game is won (shift to AT). Also (that is, even if the precursor effect is a warning sign), it is possible to shift to a special mode that leads to the occurrence of the next precursor game after the sign warning is finished, so when the failure result is shown in the first warning effect. It is possible to reproduce the production of the previous stage. Also, since the omen game can be executed again based on the fact that the high expectation role (rare part) is won during the special mode after the omen sign, it is possible to perform the omen game in the omen game later. It is possible to reproduce an effect state in a stage before that when the failure result is shown in the first predictive effect.

Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the interest of the player is continuously obtained by the continuous effect showing a negative result as in the case of the conventional gaming machine described above. Even if the continuous production shows the result of denying the winning of the advantageous game without deteriorating to, by making it possible to reappear the stage production before the result of winning or losing the advantageous game is shown. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example as described above is performed, after the result of denying the winning of the advantageous game is shown in the "preceding continuous production", the "previous stage Even if "effect" appears, the result of the advantageous game is not necessarily shown by the effect following the "preceding effect" or the "preceding effect", and the winning of the advantageous game is denied. Sometimes Whether or not the winning result for the advantageous game is shown when the "preceding stage effect" is displayed by shifting to the special mode after the end of the sign, it is performed at the time of shifting to the special mode or during the special mode. It is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, winning combination).

Further, in the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example as described above is performed, the "preceding stage effect" is that the same effect as the "preceding continuous effect" is reappeared. As long as it is an effect that can be suggested, it does not have to be an effect included in the “previous continuous effect”. Then, even if the "preceding stage effect" appears, whether or not the same effect as the "preceding continuous effect" appears is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (e.g., winning combination).

Furthermore, the special state controlled by the special mode is also characterized in that the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is higher than the state before the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the low-precision state, the high-precision state, the ultra-high-precision state). Since it has (see the description of FIG. 63 ), according to such a slot machine 1, the continuous production is controlled by controlling the gaming state in which the expectation degree for the advantageous game is different before and after the continuous production. Even if the result does not indicate that the advantageous game is won, the player's expectation can be maintained until after the continuous production.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the continuous production that can be expected to shift to the advantageous game itself raises the expectation of the player, but when the result of the continuous production ends in failure (for example, AT non-win). Had the aspect that the degree of expectation dropped at once. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, so that even if the result of the continuous production does not indicate that the advantageous game is won Since the special mode that can be controlled (for example, a special state) has a higher advantage than before the appearance of the continuous production, even if the result of the continuous production fails, a higher expected state is created after that. It has a special effect in that it can be done. That is, the failure result of continuous production is not the mere end of the expected period, but a stepping stone to a more superior high expected period, thereby increasing the interest of the player in multiple stages and increasing the expectation of the player. The effect is that the feeling can be maintained for a long time.

Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, with respect to the transition ratio of shifting to the special mode after the failure of the continuous production, the transition based on the produced production mode of the continuous production. You may make it differ in a ratio. Specifically, for example, the probability of shifting to the special mode when the result of the continuous production ends in failure may be set to be higher (higher probability) as the continuous production with a lower expectation appears. .. In such a case, when a continuous production with a low expectation appears, the player's expectation for success of the continuous production (winning the transition to the advantageous game) is relatively low. On the other hand, after that, since the probability of shifting to the special mode, which has a higher advantage than before the appearance of the continuous production, becomes higher, the expectation of the player for the special mode is increased, and as a result, the player's expectation for the special mode is increased for a long time. You can sustain your expectations.

Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the state transition lottery can be performed even during the execution of the continuous effect, and the specific game (for example, the final game) during the continuous effect execution. ), the state transition lottery can be performed using a lottery table that is better than the normal state transition lottery. Specifically, the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. 58 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed during execution of the continuous effect. Further, the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 of FIG. 58 or step S684 of FIG. 59 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed using a table that is better than the normal state transition lottery in the specific game in which the continuous effect is being executed. .. By doing this, in the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform a state transition lottery with different degrees of advantage during execution of the continuous production (including at the time of termination). In addition to expecting (state transition lottery A), in a specific game, it is possible to expect state transition (special state transition lottery) regarding advantageous games in a situation where the degree of advantage is higher. Therefore, while the continuous effect is being displayed, not only the player can expect the result of the advantageous game transition shown by the continuous effect, but also the expectation of winning the advantageous game in the future due to the state transition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play the game.

In particular, when the specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed is the final game of continuous production, in the game when transitioning to the special mode, whether to win the transition to the advantageous game in the superior special mode is determined. Not only can the player be entertained, but also in the game before the transition, until the final game of the continuous production, the player is entertained whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT transition) depending on the result of the continuous production. Therefore, the interest of the player can be particularly enhanced.

Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, at the time of starting the game of the next game of the final game in which continuous effects are executed (for example, at the time of starting operation of the starting lever 210), the state A transfer lottery may be performed. Even in such a case, as in the case where the final game of continuous production as described above is a specific game in which special state transition lottery is performed, transition to advantageous game depending on the result of continuous production until the final game of continuous production. Even if the player is entertained whether or not (AT transition), even if the continuous production ends in failure, a special state transition lottery that allows transition to the special state is performed, which is advantageous. Since it is possible to entertain the player whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the special mode, it can be expected that the player's expectation can be maintained for a long period of time and the interest of the player can be particularly enhanced.

Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, by displaying a screen such as “preparing for continuous production” or “now if you draw a rare role?” during the special mode. Even if the consecutive effects in the precursor game executed before the transition to the special mode result in a failure result, it is possible to make the player greatly expect that the precursor game or the continuous production will occur again. The discouragement of the player due to the failure result can be suppressed.

When the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed in the slot machine 1, the “special mode” does not mean a simple production mode, but a winning probability or the like (for example, AT initial winning probability) related to a special game or a special state. This is the preferred mode. For example, in the case of the instruction function generating process described with reference to FIG. 58, FIG. 59 and the like, when the winning combination is “rare” in the “special mode”, the preferential treatment such as always winning the AT first win Measures are in place. Further, in the "special mode", the probability that the precursor effect (which may be read as continuous effect here) is set to be high, so that the expectation for AT winning due to the re-generation of continuous effect can be increased. it can. Regarding the gaming state controlled in such a "special mode", in the case of the AT instruction function generating process described in [11-3-3-1], the following cases are possible.

The first case is a case in which a transitionable state is set only when a specific condition is satisfied, or a state in which a special lottery table is used for selection is set. Specifically, it is the "special modes 1 to 3" shown in FIG. As described in the description of FIG. 63 and the like, the “special states 1 to 3” are states that can be shifted only when the specific condition in the aura game is satisfied, and are selected using a dedicated lottery table. AT lottery game state. In the slot machine 1, when the special game state for exclusive use is set in the "special mode" as described above, it is possible to use the special game state which is not selected in other situations. It is possible to make the superiority of the game being played extremely high.

The second case is not limited to when the specific condition is satisfied, but is a case where any of the states that can be shifted from the normal state is set. Specifically, for example, the “ultra high accuracy state” shown in FIG. 63 can be mentioned. The "ultra-high-accuracy state" is an AT lottery game state in which it is possible to make a transition between a normal state and a low-precision state and a high-precision state. It is also preferable as the AT lottery game state controlled in the "special mode". When the "ultra-high accuracy state" is selected by the state transition lottery performed in the predetermined game of continuous production, the game in the "special mode" is started. In the slot machine 1, in this way, by setting a specific game state that can be shifted from the normal time in the "special mode", it is possible to suppress an increase in the required memory area by preparing a new dedicated game state. However, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability while suppressing the processing amount by the CPU 1110.

In addition, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, a predetermined lottery (specifically, a special state transition lottery of step S644 of FIG. 58 or step S684 of FIG. 59) is performed, so that after continuous production. Although it is possible to shift to the special mode, the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the special mode may be displayed by points or the like to suggest to the player. The timing of giving points or the like is not particularly limited. Further, such suggestive effect may be performed by the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) instead of the main board 409. When such a suggestive effect is performed, it can be expected that the player's interest in shifting to the special mode is increased.

In the instruction function generating process of the first example, in the process flow after the winning of the special state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the continuous production of the precursor of the gasse, and the special state transition lottery is performed. When the control (i.e., shift to the special mode) is determined, the special mode is immediately shifted after the end of the continuous effect. In addition, as described above, in the special mode, the state is controlled to a state different from that before the execution of the continuous effect (a more dominant state). In this way, by immediately shifting to the special mode after the continuous effect, the slot machine 1 can change the degree of expectation in the game before and after the execution of the continuous effect, and suppress a decrease in the player's expectation. it can. In particular, when the expectation of the player after the execution of the continuous effect is higher than that before the execution of the continuous effect, the player's expectation can be strongly maintained.

Further, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, the processing example in which the special state transition lottery is performed when the number of remaining predictive games during the precursory time is 0 has been described. Since the continuous production (a part of the precursor production) is always performed therein, the situation where the number of remaining precursor games is 0 means the final game of the continuous production. According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, the transition control to the special mode is determined in the final game of the continuous effect, but in this case, the transition to the special mode before the final game ( That is, since the loss due to the continuous effect is not confirmed and displayed, the player can enjoy the possibility of the winning result (AT transition winning) due to the continuous effect.

[11-3-3-3. Another example of instruction function generation processing (second example, third example)]
Next, another example (second example, third example) of the instruction function generating process in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The instruction function generation processing of the second example and the third example is described in [11-3-3-1] in terms of the control processing of the game state (AT lottery game state) mainly determined by the instruction function generation processing. Since it has a different feature from the instruction function generating process (instruction function generating process of the first example), the description of the same configuration and process as the first example is omitted to avoid duplication, and different points will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generating process of each example. Specifically, FIG. 79(A) shows a transition example in the instruction function generating process of the first example, FIG. 79(B) shows a transition example in the instruction function generating process of the second example, and FIG. C) shows a transition example in the instruction function generating process of the third example. FIG. 79 shows the gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) controlled along with the passage of time and the degree of expectation thereof. The expectation degree here is an expectation degree mainly related to winning of special games (AT transition), and in FIG. 79, the higher the expectation value in the vertical axis direction, the higher the expectation value, and the lower the expectation value. It means a low value. Further, a plurality of points (a1 to a5, b1 to b5, c1 to c7) in the figure show characteristic timings in the respective transition examples. Below, the control of the characteristic game state in the instruction function generation processing of the second example and the third example will be described respectively, while comparing with the control of the game state in the instruction function generation processing of the first example.

First, the transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generating process of the first example will be described along the transition example shown in FIG. 79(A) while showing the correspondence with each process of FIGS. 58 and 59. In FIG. 79(A), the game is started from the normal game state in which the AT has not been won (and the internal AT has not been won). At this time, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-probability state. Then, in a1 in the middle of the normal game state, as a result of the state transition lottery (step S639 in FIG. 58), the AT lottery game state has transitioned to the highly accurate state.

After that, the game proceeds in a normal gaming state, and in a2, the precursor game (precursor game A) is started by winning the predictive lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) by selecting a rare winning combination. It was However, the omen game A started at a2 is a omen omen that has not won the AT first win. When the precursor game A, which is a precursor to a bad game, is started in a2, the state transition lottery A is performed for the transition of the AT lottery game state (step S638 in FIG. 58), but here it is assumed that the high-precision state has continued.

In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the transition of the AT lottery game state is not particularly different from the normal game state while the predictive game A by the gaze predictor is performed. Then, in a3, the precursor game A ends after the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has passed, but the special state transition lottery to be performed at the end (step S644 in FIG. 58). If the player shifts to the special mode, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (one of the special states 1 to 3) and the game in the special mode is immediately started (FIG. 58). Step S648). It should be noted that, while being controlled in the special mode, it is possible that the game is played in a state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra-high accuracy state) up to then [11-3-3 -1].

Next, in a4, it is assumed that, in the special mode game started from a3, the omen game (omen game B) is started due to the fact that a rare winning combination is selected (step S666 of FIG. 59). In addition, the precursor game A started at a4 is a precursor to the game that has not been won in the AT first win. At the time of the precursor game B of the bad sign at a4, the transition to the AT lottery game state is controlled to the hell state by turning off the special state flag and turning on the hell state flag (FIG. 59). Steps S669 and S670).

When the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the game controlled to the hell state does not win the AT initial winning lottery (or a lottery table that is difficult to win is used), and the number of precursor games lottery The precursor game B is executed for the number of precursor games determined in (step S664 of FIG. 59).

Then, in a5, the precursor game B ends, the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the precursor effect (continuous effect) in the final game, and then the normal game state is restored. When the precursor game B is the main precursor when the player wins the AT initial win, the transition to the AT game (AT winning) is announced at a5, and then the AT game is started.

Next, transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generating process of the second example will be described with reference to a transition example of FIG. 79(B).

In the instruction function generating process of the second example, when the execution of the expected effect over a plurality of games that indicates the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous game state is determined, the expected effect is generated by the internal lottery performed during the execution of the expected effect. It is characterized by suppressing the establishment of another trigger that may lead to execution. In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, when the expected effect is executed with a certain internal lottery result as a trigger, the execution form of the expected effect determined to be executed is This is to suppress the influence, and when it is determined whether or not the expected performance can be executed based on the result of the internal lottery such as the winning combination lottery, the purpose of treating the result of the internal lottery carefully can be realized.

In the instruction function generating process of the second example, as a specific control example of the game state for achieving the above purpose, as shown in FIG. 79(B), when execution of the expected effect is determined. , At a predetermined timing thereafter, the lottery state is controlled to a low expectation state (for example, a hell state) to suppress the transition to the advantageous game state.

First, since the processing of b1 shown in FIG. 79(B) is the same as the processing of a1 in FIG. 79(A), description thereof will be omitted. Next, in b2 of FIG. 79(B), the precursor game A of the precursor sign is started by winning the precursor lottery (step S633 of FIG. 58) by selecting the rare winning combination. Here, in the instruction function generating process of the second example, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-expecting state (specifically, for example, a hell state) while the precursor game A based on the gust sign is being executed. By controlling to the hell state, even if the rare part is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination performed during the precursory game A, it is possible to prevent the AT winning or the execution of a new precursory game from being selected. ..

Then, in b3, when the precursor game A ends after the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has passed, a special state transition lottery (step S644 in FIG. 58) performed at the end is performed. If the player has won the transition to the special mode, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (any one of the special states 1 to 3) to immediately start the game in the special mode (step S648 in FIG. 58). .. During the special mode, the game is played in a state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, super-high accuracy state) up to that point is that the instruction function generation processing of the first example is performed. The same is true.

After that, when execution of the precursor game B is decided during the game in the special mode, the precursor game B is started at b4, and when the precursor game B ends after the precursor game number has passed at b5, The result (AT non-win/AT win) is shown. The processing of this series of flows is the same as that of a4 and a5 in FIG.

The instruction function generation process of the second example is not limited to the process of realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79(B), and “the expected effect determined to be executed (specifically, the omen game , A sign effect, a continuous effect), it is difficult to win the advantageous game state”.

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, the slot machine 1 relates to the gaming state at any predetermined timing from when the execution of the expected effect is determined to when the expected effect ends. The lottery state can be lowered to a low expectation state.

Next, transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generating process of the third example will be described with reference to a transition example of FIG. 79(C).

In the instruction function generating process of the third example, an advantageous winning combination with a high degree of expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state (corresponding to a “high expected winning combination”) is executed when an expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made is executed. , Concretely, for example, when a rare role is selected as a winning combination, it is possible to execute another expected production triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning combination while teaching the result of the above expected production. It is characterized by doing. In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, when the expected production is executed with a certain internal lottery result as a trigger, the execution mode of the expected production is based on another internal lottery result. If you win the execution of another expected production based on the above-mentioned another internal lottery result, both the expected production and the other expected production will be performed. It is a game machine that can realize respectful control.

In the instruction function generating process of the third example, as a specific control example of the game state for realizing the above purpose, as shown in FIG. 79(C), execution of expected effect (previous expected effect) When it is decided to execute another expected performance (later expected performance), the previous expected performance is continued and the result of the expected performance is displayed at the end of the execution, and then the later expected performance is executed. I'm trying to do.

First, the processing of c1 shown in FIG. 79C is the same as that of c1 in FIG. Next, in c2 of FIG. 79(C), the predictive game A of the precursory game is started by winning the predictive lottery (step S633 of FIG. 58) by selecting the rare winning combination. Here, in the instruction function generation processing of the third example, during the signage game A by the gust sign, special transition control (specifically, hell) regarding the AT lottery game state like the instruction function generation processing of the second example is performed. It is assumed that the state transition lottery A is performed, for example, similarly to the instruction function generating process of the first example, without performing the state transition control).

After that, in c3 during execution of the precursor game A, it is assumed that the winning combination of the rare combination is selected. At this time, in the instruction function generating process of the third example, if the precursor lottery based on the rare role is performed and the new precursor game (precursor game C) is won by the precursor lottery, the precursor game C is executed. A process of delaying at least after the end of the precursor game A is performed. At this time, the precursor game number lottery for the predictive game C is also performed, but the selected predictive game number is set in variable data different from the predictive game number corresponding to the predictive game A currently being executed. In addition, the precursor game C is a premonition that has not been won in the AT first win, and a state transition lottery (for example, state transition lottery A) based on the winning role of the rare role is performed in c3. As a result, the AT lottery game state is super. Assume that you have been promoted to high accuracy.

Then, in c4, the precursor game A ends after the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has passed, and at the end, the result of the precursor game A by the precursor effect (continuous effect) (AT Transition non-win) is taught. In this way, the precursor game A ends in c4, but the precursor game C delayed in execution in c3 is stocked, so the precursor game C starts. In FIG. 79(c), when the precursor game A is started and the precursor game C is started, no special lottery is performed for the AT lottery game state.

As one of the processes included in the instruction function generating process of the third example, a predetermined connection period may be provided between the end of the precursor game A and the start of the precursor game C in c4. Alternatively, a stirrer effect may be performed in which the start of the precursor game C can be estimated during the connection period.

Then, the precursory game C of the precursory sign is played until the number of precursory games determined by the precursory game number lottery elapses, and at the end thereof, the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the precursory effect (continuous effect). In c5, if the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the precursor game C and the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (one of special states 1 to 3). The game in the special mode starts immediately.

Next, in c6 of the special mode game started in c5, when the omen game (omen game B) is decided to be executed due to the selection of a rare winning combination, etc., the omen game B is Be started. Then, as shown in c7, in the case where the precursor game B is a precursor to the gaze, the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the predictive effect (continuous effect) at the end of the number of the predictive games, and then the normal game state is restored. .. When the precursor game B is the precursor, the transition to the AT game (AT winning) is announced at the time of c7, and then the AT game is started.

Supplementing the processing of FIG. 79(C) as described above, when the rare role that triggers the execution of the omen game C is won during execution of the omen game A (Gane omen), the number of omen games determined in advance is The precursor game A continues without change, and the precursor game C is started after the precursor game A ends. Specifically, for example, when the number of precursor games of the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, even if the rare role is won in the 10th game (6 remaining games), the remaining 6 games are not represented by the precursor game A. Continued.

The instruction function generating process of the third example is not limited to the process of realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79C, but is based on “expected effect (corresponding to the indication effect or the continuous effect in the indication game)”. It is also possible to perform other processing such as "execution of another expected effect triggered by the selection of the advantageous winning combination (high expected combination, rare combination) while teaching the result". Hereinafter, some other processing examples will be shown.

First, in the instruction function generating process of the third example, when the trigger that leads to the execution of another expected effect is established during the execution of the expected effect (a rare role that determines the execution of the precursor game C while the precursor game A is being executed). In the case of winning), the number of predictive games in which the predictive game C is executed may be drawn by the winning game of the moment as described with reference to FIG. The precursor game number lottery may be performed when the precursor effect) is completed.

Further, in FIG. 79(C), when execution of another predictive sign (precursor game C) is decided when the high expectation combination (for example, rare part) is won during the predictive sign (precursor game A), Although it is assumed that the precursor game C is executed in a mode in which the precursor of the gasse is reset after the completion of the precursor of the previous gasse, in the case of winning the rare role multiple times during the precursor of the gasse, all rare role winnings (however, If the precursor game (prelude to Gase) is reset for the AT winning rare role), the precursor game may continue forever. In the instruction function generating process of the third example, in order to solve such a problem, when the high expectation part is won multiple times in the predictive game (especially in the predictive game), the predictive game is reset (previous game) The upper limit number of times may be limited. As a concrete processing example for limiting the upper limit number of times of the precursor game (Gasse sign) that is reset when one of the high expectation roles is won multiple times during one sign game (Gasse sign), Until it reaches, it may be processed so as to determine the reset of the predictive game each time the high expected combination is won, or a plurality of winnings of the high expected combination in one predictive game are put together to set the upper limit. Processing may be performed to determine the number of precursor games to be reset within the number of times. Although the upper limit number can be set to any number, the gaze sign tells the AT unwinning result that is disadvantageous to the player, and therefore the upper limit is also prevented in order to prevent the disadvantageous result from being repeatedly taught. It is desirable to set the number of times to a minimum of one.

In addition, in the indication function generating process of the third example, during the warning sign, a high-ranking high-ranking player with a particularly high expectation among the high-ranking players (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, strong chance rare chance, etc.). When the role) wins a plurality of times, the warning sign may be forcibly reset after the end of the current warning sign. To be more specific, in the case of winning a strong rare role multiple times in the middle of the precursor game A, even if the precursor game C is not determined to be executed by the precursor lottery based on each strong rare role winning, After the end of A, the precursor game C may be forcibly executed. In addition, the number of times of winning the high-ranking high-potential combination for forcibly resetting the precursor game can be set to any number from once to a plurality of times.

Further, in the instruction function generating process of the third example, the effect mode in the predictive game (predictive game C) set after the end of the predictive game of the premonition (predictive game A) is the same as the simple predictive game. Although it may be displayed, it may be displayed in a presentation mode in which the player can feel the relationship with the precursor game A.

For example, the omen game C may be executed while making it appear as if the omen game A is continuing. In such a case, by deleting neither the number of predictive games A nor the number of predictive games C, it is possible to respect the game periods allocated to both predictive games A, and apparently the predictive game A is more than normal. Since it can be seen that the number of games has been extended, it can be expected that the player's expectation is sustained and improved as a special situation.

Further, for example, the result of the aura game A may be always displayed in a continuous effect (which can be replaced with the aura effect) before the aura game C is started. In such a case, the winning combination (internal lottery result) that triggered the execution of the precursor game A is valued by performing the effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the precursor game A, and thereafter. Since the effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the aura game C is performed at another timing, the winning combination that has triggered the aura game C can be also important. In the instruction function generating process of the third example, from the viewpoint of valuing the internal lottery result, the main stage is more important than the effect mode shown in the preceding stage (the precursor game C as if the precursor game A is continuing). It is more preferable to control in the effect mode shown in (instruction surely the result of each aura game).

Further, in the instruction function generating process of the third example, when the precursor game C is decided to be executed while the precursor game A is being executed as described above, the precursor game C is set again after the completion of the precursor game A. However, the period from when the precursor game C is determined to be executed until the remaining number of precursor games A is exhausted (for example, when the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, Regarding the remaining 6 games for the precursor game A when the execution of the precursor game C is decided, the result display (indication of whether or not AT transition is possible) displayed in each of the precursor games A and C based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination. The period may be shortened to a predetermined extent within the range that does not hinder the above. In the specific example described above, when the number of remaining games of the precursor game A is 6, this corresponds to changing the number of remaining precursor games so that the precursor game A is finished by 3 games. By performing the instruction function generating process of the third example as described above, the expected effect (corresponding to the predictive effect that appears in the predictive game) based on each internal lottery result can be executed, and the result display is taught. be able to. Then, by shortening the precursor game being executed (precursor game A), the start timing of the precursor game to be reset (precursor game C) can be advanced, so that each of the precursor games is reset in a shorter period than if not shortened. Expectations can enhance the player's interest.

[11-3-3-4. Effect of the instruction function generating process of the second example]
According to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, whereby an “advantageous game advantageous to the player under any one of a plurality of lottery states with different winning expectations” In the gaming machine in which the transition to the advantageous game state is executed by lottery, and the expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous game state is successful is executed based on the result of the lottery, the expected effect is executed in the gaming machine. Is determined, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of varying the appearance ratio of the expected effect so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect in the subsequent determined games. is there.

The above-mentioned "advantageous game state" corresponds to the "AT state" in the instruction function generating process of the second example, and similarly, the "expected effect" corresponds to the "sign effect". In the instruction function generating process of the second example, the hell state flag is turned on when the start of the precursory game period in which the precursory effect is performed is determined (steps S666 and S674 of FIG. 59) (step of FIG. 59). By performing S670), the hell state is controlled during the omen game. When the hell state is controlled, the new AT first win is suppressed (see FIG. 63). Therefore, the precursor effect that is determined to be executed (even if it is not strictly determined, the precursor game is When the start is determined, it is also determined that the precursor effect is always executed), it is possible to suppress the influence of the execution mode. That is, by suppressing the winning of the new AT initial win in the hell state, the appearance of a new aura game is also suppressed, so that the appearance ratio of the aura effect is variable in a direction of being suppressed. As a result, a new precursor game is not generated during the precursor game, and the precursor effect related to the precursor game being executed can be displayed in the execution mode at the time of determining the execution.

In addition, the above-mentioned "gaming machine that can be realized by performing the instruction function generating process of the second example" is described more specifically, "a lottery state of any of a plurality of lottery states with different winning expectations" Based on the result of the lottery, the expected effect that indicates whether the transition to the advantageous game state is successful or not is executed based on the result of the lottery. In the gaming machine to be performed, when execution of the expected effect is determined, the lottery state is controlled to a low expectation state out of a plurality of lottery states with different expectation of winning at a predetermined timing thereafter, and an advantageous game state is set. It can also be said that by suppressing the transition, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the expected effect regardless of winning combinations in subsequent games. At this time, the “low expectation state” corresponds to the “hell state”.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the continuous production over a plurality of games is executed, the player's interest is concentrated on the production, so that the inside of the winning combination performed in each game in the production is performed. There was a tendency to be neglected with respect to the result of the lottery.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed even during continuous production, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (for example, high expected winning such as rare combination). (If a role is selected), a new effect will be generated and the current effect will be canceled, or a new effect will not be generated in order to continue the current effect, etc. However, there is a problem in that the execution mode of continuous effects may be affected, and the player's expectations regarding these effects may change (mainly decrease).

More specifically, when the previous effect is canceled, it is known that the previous effect is a loss result at that time, and the player's expectation is lowered. Also, if the subsequent production does not occur, it is assumed that the high expected winning combination is selected but the result is that the player was defeated in the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous game such as AT, so that the expectation of the player is also expected. Is reduced. Also, when the previous effect is rounded up in the middle and the later effect occurs, the result display due to the earlier effect that is rounded up tends to be rough, so even the player's expectation is rounded down. There is a risk that

However, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that carefully handles the result of the internal lottery in each game. Explaining in concrete processing, when execution of a precursor game (particularly, a precursory gaze) is decided, a low probability state (hell state) at a predetermined timing thereafter (for example, a timing when the precursor game flag is turned on). ), it is possible to prevent the result of the internal lottery performed during the precursory game from connecting to the expectation for the special game. In other words, this is to provide a game situation (rendering situation) that does not confuse the development content based on each lottery result by a plurality of lottery opportunities, and thus has the effect of carefully treating the result of the internal lottery in each game. You can

When the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed in the slot machine 1, the “predetermined timing of dropping to a low probability state (hell state)” can be classified as follows, and each has an effect. Can be expected.

First, when it is a predetermined timing to drop the game immediately after the execution of the gasse sign is decided or the start game of the gaze sign to a low probability state (hell state), during the subsequent games (before shifting to the gasse sign It is possible to suppress the expectation for the special game by the winning player even if any winning player is won (including the case where some preparation period is provided), and it became a factor for judging the sign of the running gasse. The importance of the winning combination can be secured, and the player's expectation for the result of the precursory gasse being executed can be secured.

In addition, when it is set as a predetermined timing to drop somewhere in the low-probability state (hell state) at some point during the premonition execution, at least by the winning combination in the internal lottery after dropping to the low-probability state, Since it is possible to prevent the player's expectation level from changing, it is possible to contribute to ensuring the execution of production that emphasizes the result of the internal lottery in each game. Here, in the indication function generating process of the second example (see [11-3-3-3]), as the gaudy omen effect pattern, in addition to “continuous effect (or omen effect)”, “roughness effect” and “rough effect” Although it is possible to interweave the "normal effect", for example, when these three types of effects are performed with a sign of gasse, the player may predict that the "normal effect" appears at the stage. It may not be possible to detect that it is a game, but even before the "continuous production (or omen production)" appears, it is guessed that it is a omen game when the "roughness production" appears. You can However, if the player can guess that it is a precursory game and then drop it to a low probability state, the expectation of the player may be reduced if a rare role is won in the meantime, so the predictive game execution When the predetermined timing for dropping somewhere in the low probability state is set, it is preferable to set at least the time when the "roughness effect" appears.

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, in the slot machine 1, in order to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect (predictive effect) to be executed, the expectation degree of the game state is higher than usual. There is a period of forcibly dropping to a low low probability state (hell state). In the case of forcibly dropping to a low probability state in this way, the payout rate generally decreases, so that the slot machine 1 cancels the decrease, and the high probability state (for example, a high-accuracy state or an ultra-high state). It is possible to increase the period/probability of the (probability state), improve the initial winning probability when a rare role is drawn, and improve the winning probability of the rare role in the first place. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that handles the result of the internal lottery carefully, and to raise and strengthen the situation advantageous to the player. You can In addition, since the payout rate can be sharpened, the playability can be improved.

Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, the appearance ratio of the expected effect is made variable so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect (predictive effect) to be executed. The processing for doing so is not limited to forcibly dropping to a low-probability state (hell state) whose expectation is lower than usual for a predetermined game period as described above, Other methods may be used that make it difficult to win the advantageous game state (AT) for the game period. Specifically, for example, in the predetermined game period, the winning probability may be changed (the game state itself is changed) by changing the lottery table used for the lottery, or the predetermined game period is performed. Regarding the game, the number of executions of the internal lottery may be suppressed by making it appear that a plurality of games are being played by the pseudo game. Further, other processing may be used that makes it difficult to form a rare combination that is likely to lead to winning of the expected effect. Even in the case of performing such processing, the appearance ratio of the expected production can be made variable so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected production in the game after the execution of the expected production is determined. The slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed can achieve the same effect as the case of controlling to the hell state for a predetermined game period.

[11-3-3-5. Effect of the instruction function generating process of the third example]
According to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, whereby “advantageous game advantageous to a player under any one of a plurality of lottery states with different winning expectations” In the gaming machine in which the transition to the advantageous game state is executed by lottery, and the expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous game state is successful is executed based on the result of the lottery in the gaming machine, the expected effect is executed. When an advantageous winning combination that is easier to win than other winning combinations (for example, a rare winning combination) is selected as a winning combination during the transition to the advantageous game state, while teaching the result of the expected production, , A gaming machine capable of executing another expected effect triggered by selection of an advantageous winning combination.

The above "advantageous game state" corresponds to the "AT state" in the instruction function generating process of the third example, and similarly, the "expected production" corresponds to the "precursor production", "continuous production" or "precursor game". .. In the instruction function generating process of the third example, when the expected production (for example, the omen game A) is executed based on the internal lottery result (the lottery result of the winning combination), the high expected combination wins during the execution of the expected production. When the execution of another expected effect (for example, the aura game C) is selected by being selected as a role, the aura game A is continuously executed, and the aura game C is executed after the aura game A is finished. Then, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 teaches the result of the expected effect (precursor game A), but the expected effect (predictive game C ) Can be executed separately, control that respects both the previous expected performance and another expected performance can be realized, and the expectation for the internal lottery result that triggered the execution of each expected performance is maintained. It is possible to exert an effect.

In a conventional gaming machine, when continuous production over a plurality of games is executed, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed even while the continuous production is performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery. (For example, when a high expected winning combination such as a rare role is selected), another continuous production is newly generated and the current continuous production is canceled or the current continuous production is continued. There was a process such as another continuous production being canceled. In a gaming machine in which such processing is performed, the result of each continuous production is not sufficiently taught because a part of the continuous production that may otherwise occur is not revealed, and the interest of the player is reduced. There was a risk of causing it. In addition, there is also a problem that the result of the internal lottery that triggered the execution of the continuous effect is neglected because a part of the continuous effect that may have occurred is not revealed.

On the other hand, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is based on the already-executed “first expected effect” and the internal lottery result performed during the “first expected effect”. With regard to the "later expected performance" determined by, the expected performance of both parties is executed, and by teaching the result of each expected performance to the player, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player, This has the effect of respecting not only the expected performance but also the results of the internal lottery.

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, as described above, the slot machine 1 respects both of the precursor games even if a different precursor game is won during the precursor game (Garse precursor). However, in order to realize such control, it is not necessary to forcibly change the lottery state (AT lottery game state) regarding the special game state during execution of the precursor game. In other words, by allowing the precursor game to be executed in a lottery state that is the same as the normal state before the precursor game is started, the expectation for the AT win and the precursor effect (continuous performance) that the player feels when winning the high-expected role. Can be maintained. Then, as described above, by not forcibly changing the lottery state regarding the special game state during the aura game, as compared with the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example or the second example is performed, the special game state is extremely reduced. It is possible to reduce the difficult period to win.

When the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, in the slot machine 1, after the “previous sign of gasse” is finished and the “post sign of gust” is executed, the slot machine 1 is in the first and second examples. Similar to the case where the instruction function generation process is performed, it is possible to immediately shift to the special mode in which the expectation for the special game state is higher than before, so that the player's interest is suppressed and the player's expectation is reduced. The feeling can be maintained or improved over a relatively long period of time. In other words, even if the signs of gasse occur continuously and the result of losing the AT transition is taught, the player is switched to the special mode with a higher degree of superiority, so that the player is at least until the special mode ends. You can continue to expect. Further, when the rare part is won in the special mode, the predictive game is started again, so that the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

In addition, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is set when the high-potential winning combination is frequently won during the aura game (Gaze omen), as shown in the derivative example. It is possible to suppress the number of signs of gas. According to the slot machine 1 as described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest by avoiding the continuation of redundant gasse signs while allowing control while respecting a plurality of expected effects (symptom effects). ..

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is forcibly forced to win a predetermined number of high-ranking high-potential combinations during the predictive game (predictive gambling), as shown in the derivative example. You can set a warning sign. According to the slot machine 1 as described above, it is possible to increase the ratio of starting the precursor game with respect to the higher and higher expected roles that originally have higher expectations. It can be provided to the player.

Further, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, in the slot machine 1, as shown in the derivative example, when the high expectation combination is won multiple times during the omen game (especially during the omen), You may make it limit the upper limit number of times of the precursor game (in the precursor of gas) to be set. According to the slot machine 1 as described above, when the high expectation part is won a plurality of times in a short time during the aura game, the aura game is repeatedly reset and the aura game is played over an excessively long period of time. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player continues for a long time, it can be expected that the interest of the player will be enhanced for an appropriate long period of time.

[11-3-4. Indication function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main board 409 determines to generate the instructing function as a result of the instruction function generating process (specifically, for example, when the push order small winning combination is won during the AT game). The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects a display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from among a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, the display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). .. Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

[11-3-4-1. Indication function display (first example)]
First, a first example of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In the first example, as shown in FIG. 47, the slot machine 1 is provided with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side, and the special display LEDs 612a and 612b are used to generate 2 The indication function is displayed by displaying the digits and numbers.

80 and 81 are views (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the indication function display of the first example. 80 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 81 shows the display mode of the special display LED 612b. 80 and 81, the "segment display" column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the "content" column shows the contents indicated by the displayed alphanumeric characters. Further, in FIG. 81, a display outline of the effect display (navi display) on the image display body 500 and the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed is shown in the “navi display” column, and the display is displayed in the “use application” column. The situations and situations where the display is used are shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 will be described later in [11-3-5].

In the instruction function display of the first example, the following rules are provided as an example of rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) Two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) are used to perform indication function display (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating a guide of the pressing place, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating a pressing order.
(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started and the last reel 301 in rotation is started at least until the acceptance of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started. The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the reel stop operation. That is, the period for displaying the instruction function does not overlap with the period for displaying the number of payouts. As a result of the game, when the gaming value (medal) is not paid out, that is, when the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, if the indicator function is displayed and the payout number is not displayed, the indicator function is canceled (not displayed) at the same timing as when the payout number is displayed. As an alternative, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.
(3) In the game in which the instruction function display is performed by the special display LED 612, when one of the spinning reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the instruction function display ( If it is not the reel indicated as the reel to be first stopped by the special display LED 612b) (that is, the reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or the timing of pressing the reel stop button 211 is the instruction function display. Even if the timing does not correspond to the position indicated by the (special display LED 612a) as a guide for the pushing position (that is, the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction content), The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation for the reel 301 is completed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 determines which instruction content is displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display in the game. It will be decided based on the winning combination. First, the instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (details will be described later).

The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the “reference of the pressing location” displayed on the special display LED 612a within a range that does not deny the “appropriate pressing location” based on the winning combination of the game. be able to. Specifically, for example, when "BB1 (7 red symbols)" is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines the instruction content to display "2" (7 red symbols) on the special display LED 612a. However, in addition to this, since the game method aiming at the "red 7 symbol" is not denied, the instruction content for displaying "0" (no designation) may be determined.

In addition, the main board 409, in the same manner as the instruction content of the “reference of the pushing place”, regarding the instruction content of the “pushing order” displayed on the special display LED 612b, the “appropriate pushing order” based on the winning combination of the game. The instruction content can be arbitrarily determined within the range that does not deny. For example, it is assumed that the push order bells (AT1, AT2) that make the forward push the "appropriate push order" generate the instruction function in the game selected as the winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of the “pushing order” as “left/middle/right” (six selection pressing order), and according to the display example of FIG. 81 (details will be described later). , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, as the instruction content for clarifying only the "left" of the first stop without revealing the second stop and the third stop, "left first (2 options)" may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example 81 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, from the condition that the range is not to deny the “appropriate pressing order”, the instruction content of the pressing order may include at least the game procedure based on the “appropriate pressing order”. That is, as the instruction content having the possibility that the left reel 301a may be stopped first, "left first or right first" (segment display "E" in FIG. 81) or "left first or middle first" (FIG. The segment content “F” of 81) may be used as the instruction content, and further, the content of the instruction that the pressing order is unknown (segment display “0” in FIG. 81) may be used.

Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 80, as a guide of the pushing place, there are four ways of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red 7 symbol)”, and “3 (BAR symbol)”. Numbers are set to be displayed. When "0" is displayed as a guide for the pressing place, it means that the guide for the pressing order is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game, but in such a case Even if there is, when the reel stop button 211 is pressed without being aware of the stop timing (unspecified stop operation), the symbol combination based on some winning combination is not always aligned on the activated line. In other words, in order to surely stop the symbol combination based on the winning combination in the game in which "No designation" is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed as in the above-described maximum efficiency batting method. It is required to stop at. Specifically, for example, when the push order bell (AT1 to AT10) is won during AT, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is a stop operation by an appropriate push order. As long as you have it, you can arrange the symbol combination of the role of Bell regardless of the stop timing (without missing). On the other hand, for example, if the special display LED 612a displays “0” when the winning combination is a combination (eg, watermelon combination) that may be missed depending on the stop timing, the stop timing is not taken into consideration. If you press the reel stop button 211, you may miss the role of watermelon. To win the role of watermelon surely, the symbols that make up the symbol combination of watermelon are within the retractable range. It is necessary to press the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

Here, it is preferable that the design of the pushing place is a design that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating, but the stop operation is aimed at the design as a guide at an appropriate timing. Even if it does, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the activated line.

Further, for the symbols corresponding to "1" to "3" shown in FIG. 80, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the target "chance symbol" in "1" may be a "correct" symbol or a "right" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the target symbol of "2" may be the "blue 7" symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. Note that the segment display shown in FIG. 80 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased and set within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a segment display may be added for symbols other than those illustrated in FIG. 80 (for example, watermelon symbols). Further, the pattern set as a guide for the pushing place is not limited to one, and for example, the segment display such as "either the red 7 design or the blue 7 design" is set as a guide for the pushing place is set. May be. 80 and 81, the correspondence between "contents" and "segment display" does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of "segment displays" showing the same "content" are prepared. May be.

Next, referring to FIG. 81, 16 display patterns are set and displayed, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as the display contents of the segment display. .. The details of each display pattern will be described below in detail. Note that when displayed in 7 segments, capital letters “B” and “D” may be indistinguishable from the numbers “8” and “0”, respectively, and therefore, “b” and “d” in FIG. 81. Will be displayed in lower case.

The display "0" on the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order does not matter). However, as described in the "Usage" column, it is not used only when the winning combination does not matter in the pressing order, but when the winning combination that can be won by the alternative is taught, the pushing order is intentionally taught. It can also be used if not. In addition to push order bells and replays, wins that do not require push order include low chance wins (rare roles) such as chances, watermelons, and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed when the rare combination is won, the display on the special display LED 612b becomes “0”, but at this time, the expected display such as “Chance!” and the type display of the rare combination are displayed in the navigation display. It may be performed. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach the player that the game has a high degree of expectation that is different from the normal game. Also, in the latter case where the pushing order is not dared to be taught when a winning combination that can be won by an alternative is selected, the proper pushing order is not taught, so the navigation display example is "????". ..

The indications "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as a proper pressing order, and so-called 6-option pressing order is displayed. You can When the pressing sequence of 6 selections is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are taught in the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped will be clarified erasably, but it may be intentionally specified.

Further, the displays "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined as a proper pressing sequence whether any one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first. Thus, it is possible to display a so-called three-option push order. When the three selection push sequences are displayed on the instruction function display, the navigation display teaches the reel to be stopped first.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 48, FIG. 49, etc., the five-option push-order bell is prepared. Since the display pattern is insufficient, it is only necessary to use the 6-option push-order display, or to use only a part (only for the middle-press push-order bell) and the 3-option push-order display.

When the pressing order such as "1" to "9" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, if the stop operation is performed according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b, the most payout is performed. In order to provide the player with advantageous game results, such as a push-type bell winning in a stopped form with a certain number of pieces. As described above, in order to obtain the stop system with the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

Further, "providing a game result that is advantageous to the player" described in the preceding paragraph includes "suppressing that the game result that is unfavorable to the player is provided". A specific example will be described below. For example, a push order replay is prepared in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order, and at the time of winning the push order replay, if the stop operation by the "specific push order" is performed, the blue 7 symbol lineup is stopped. I can. This blue 7 symbol set is used as one of the effects for teaching the addition when the push order replay is won during AT and the AT game number is internally determined to be added, for example. To do. When such a push order replay is won, displaying the “specific push order” as an instruction function when the number of AT games is increased leads to the provision of “a game result advantageous to the player”. On the other hand, if the number of AT games is not increased even if the push order replay is won, and the "specific push order" is displayed as the instruction function, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol arrangement is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. Also, since the "game result that is advantageous to the player" that is the addition of the number of AT games is not provided, "the game result that is disadvantageous to the player" is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such a “game result unfavorable to the player”, if the AT game number is not added at the time of the push-order replay, a “specific push” is given. It is possible to display the pushing function so as to avoid the "order". By playing the game in accordance with the instruction function display as described above, the blue 7 symbol alignment, in which the number of AT games is not added, does not appear, so that "the player is provided with an unfavorable game result. It is possible to “suppress”, and as a result, “an advantageous game result is provided to the player”.

On the other hand, unlike the case where "1" to "9" are displayed, the display "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b indicates "a part" of the pressing order that can lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display "A" indicates only that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (two alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Further, for example, in the case of the display "d", it is indicated that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and neither the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if the proper pressing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected in the first stop, any one of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) that is still rotating in the second stop. By selecting whether or not to stop, it is possible to make four choices as a result. In addition, if the proper pressing sequence is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, it is possible to make two selections.

As described above, when the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as "A" to "F", even if the stop operation is performed according to the display content, the pressing order is not always proper. However, when the proper push order can be finally selected, the push order bell is won in the stop form with the largest number of payouts, which provides advantageous game results to the player.

The display examples on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but in reality, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game. 89, which will be described later, shows a specific display example.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode that makes it easy to grasp the instruction content. Appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and an advantageous game result can be expected as compared with the case where the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create a gaming nature that was not available in conventional gaming machines.

In addition, the display examples as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide of the pressing place, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the amount of data required for the main board 409 to perform the indication function display can be reduced.

[11-3-4-2. Indication function display (second example)]
Next, a second example of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In the instruction function display of the second example, the slot machine 1 is provided with one dot-attached 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c shown in FIG. 85), and the instruction function is displayed by displaying a predetermined pattern on the special display LED 612c. Display.

FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining a display device used in the indication function display of the second example. In the indicator function display of the second example, a dot-attached 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c) is used as a display device for indicating the indicator function. As shown in FIG. 82, the special display LED 612c is configured by adding dot LEDs to so-called 7-segment LEDs, and is a segment LED having a total of 8 lightable portions. FIG. 82 shows an example of a lighting rule of the special display LED 612c, in which eight possible lighting parts are each digit bit of data represented by an 8-bit binary number (1 bit, 2 bit,... .., 8 bits). Therefore, by writing the target data (instruction function display data) indicating the instruction content in an 8-bit binary number, it is possible to realize the indication function display corresponding to the target data by the special display LED 612c. Specifically, for example, when the second bit of the target data is set (the value of the second lowest digit is “1”), the lightable portion indicated by “2 bit” in FIG. 82 is turned on. To be done. Note that such a display law is merely an example, and for example, a predetermined process may be performed to turn on the light so that the value of the target data cannot be easily read.

83 and 84 are views (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the indication function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, the following rules are provided as an example of rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) The indication function display is performed using one dot-attached 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c). The special display LED 612c is controlled to light in correspondence with each digit bit of the "instruction function display data" represented by an 8-bit binary number. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the upper 4 bits (5 bits to 8 bits) of the “instruction function display data” hold information indicating the standard of the pushing position (FIG. 83 ). Information indicating the pressing order is held in 4 bits (1 bit to 4 bits) (FIG. 84).
(2) Same as rule (2) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.
(3) Same as rule (3) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to generate the instruction function, what kind of instruction content is displayed on the special display LED 612c as the instruction function display is the same as in the case of the first example. The board 409 determines based on the winning combination in the game. Further, since the specific instruction content illustrated in FIGS. 83 and 84 corresponds to the instruction content illustrated in FIGS. 80 and 81, the description will not be repeated.

First, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 83 will be described. FIG. 83 exemplifies a specific example of the upper 4 bits indicating the indication of the pushing place in the indicating function display data. Specifically, if the indication of the pushing place is "No designation", "1" is set in the fifth bit, and if the indication of the pushing place is "chance pattern", "1" is set in the sixth bit. If it is set and the target of pushing place is "red 7 pattern", "1" is set at the 7th bit, and if the target of pushing place is "BAR pattern", "1" is set at the 8th bit. To be Then, according to the lighting rule shown in FIG. 82, the “segment display” corresponding to each “content” is performed on the special display LED 612c.

Next, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 84 will be described. FIG. 84 exemplifies a specific example of the lower 4 bits indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display data. Specifically, different instruction contents are set for each of the 16 lower four bits "0000" to "1111". Then, the "segment display" corresponding to each digit bit is performed on the special display LED 612c.

Since the upper 4 bits shown in "binary number display" of FIG. 83 and the lower 4 bits shown in "binary number display" of FIG. 84 are displayed in different digits, the indication function display actually used is displayed. The data for use can be represented by 8-bit binary data that is a combination of the upper 4 bits (Fig. 83) indicating the indication of the pressing place and the lower 4 bits (Fig. 84) indicating the pressing order, and is indicated by the special display LED 612c. The function display can also display each of the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits at the same time.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the second example. In FIG. 85, a display example of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612c based on the examples of FIGS. 83 and 84 and a navigation display table displayed on the image display body 500 or the like corresponding to the instruction function display. Illustrative examples are shown. For details of the navigation display, the same instruction content as in FIG. 85 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 89 as a specific example of the instruction function display in the first example in [11-3-5] in the subsequent stage. The description is omitted here.

According to FIG. 85, first, No. 1 shows a display example when the instruction content is "No designation" (No. 0 in FIG. 83) and "No question" (No. 0 in FIG. 84) in the pressing order. There is. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs a lighting display corresponding to the binary 8-bit indicating function display data of "00010000" that is a combination of the higher-order 4 bits "0001" and the lower-order 4 bits "0000". More specifically, only the lightable part corresponding to 5 bits is turned on.

Next, in FIG. 2 shows a display example when the indication content is “No designation” (No. 0 in FIG. 83) and the order of pushing is “Left/Right/Middle” (No. 2 in FIG. 84). It is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c provides a lighting display corresponding to the binary 8-bit indicating function display data "00010010" that is a combination of the upper 4-bit "0001" and the lower 4-bit "0010". More specifically, the lightable parts corresponding to 2 bits and 5 bits are lighted.

Next, in FIG. In the instruction content 3, when the indication of the pushing place is “red 7 pattern” (No. 2 in FIG. 83) and the pushing order is “right first (2 choices)” (No. 12 in FIG. 84). The display example of is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs a lighting display corresponding to the binary 8-bit indicating function display data "01001100" that is a combination of the upper 4 bits "0100" and the lower 4 bits "1100". More specifically, the lightable parts corresponding to 3 bits, 4 bits, and 7 bits are turned on.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the second example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the instruction content at first glance. Even if the player notices that the indication function display is being performed by the display LED 612c, a new playability is created in which the instruction content cannot be immediately grasped. For example, an effect of arousing curiosity to know the display law of the indication function display on the special display LED 612c can be expected. Even if it is very difficult to grasp the instruction content from the display mode on the special display LED 612c, the player is taught the correct reel stop operation by performing the navigation display based on the instruction content. Therefore, there is no disadvantage for the player, and the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can enhance the player's interest in the game when the instruction function display is displayed.

Further, in the instruction function display as in the second example, since the instruction function display data in the binary notation generally used in the calculation process is used, the main board 409 determines the instruction content of the instruction function, and It is possible to easily realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the instruction content while reducing the processing load when the display LED 612 performs the instruction function display. More specifically, it is assumed that the condition device number registered on the program (the number assigned to the group when grouped) is represented by an 8-bit binary number, and the condition device number is displayed as it is. By making it possible to output the use data as an instruction function display, it is possible to suppress unnecessary conversion processing and reduce the processing load on the main board 409. Further, in such a case, it is possible to realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the instruction content without intentionally changing the condition device number to another number or the like.

As described above, as shown in the first example and the second example, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize the indication function display by adopting various display methods under the control of the main board 409.

[11-3-4-3. Change display mode]
Next, the change of the display mode on the display (special display LED 612) on which the indication function display is performed will be described.

As described above, in the slot machine 1, the instruction content based on the winning combination can be displayed on the special display LED 612 as the instruction function display. Here, since the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display is a game method (that is, an appropriate reel stop operation) that can bring an advantageous result to the player, a game timing at which the player can execute the reel stop operation. The indication function display must be displayed by. In other words, when the instruction function display is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next at a specific timing before the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 can be accepted. The correct instruction content regarding (for example, which reel stop button 211a to 211c which stop position should be used as a guide for stop operation) should be displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function. In changing the display mode of the special display LED 612, the “specific timing” described below has such a meaning.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the principle regarding the display timing of the instruction function display is applied to the special display LED 612, the special display LED 612 is instructed as described in [9-3] and the like. Information other than the function display can also be displayed (for example, payout display, error display, other effect display, etc.).

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, the display mode at the "specific timing" on the special display LED 612 is "appropriate reel stop operation to be executed next". The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed to another display mode at timings other than the above-mentioned “specific timing” as long as the display is of the correct instruction function of the correct instruction content regarding “. Hereinafter, the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed as described in detail below, the change of the display mode before and after the change facilitates the player to notice the change. However, other than that, the components other than the special display LED 612 may be used to suggest or teach the change so that the player can easily notice. Specifically, for example, a predetermined display device (LED, lamp, etc.) is turned on or blinked, a specific sound is output from a speaker, or “See special display LED 612!” is displayed on the liquid crystal display surface of the image display body 500. You may display a production screen such as. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect screen is displayed on the image display body 500, if the progress of the effect screen that has been displayed until then is temporarily stopped or the like, the player can be more surely aware of the display change. Can be made.

In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode on the special display LED 612 is changed in such a manner that the player can easily notice it, it is ensured by the player that the display mode is changed (or changed). Since it can be recognized, the player is given an impression that a special effect different from the usual is performed, and the effect of increasing the player's expectation for giving a special privilege or the like is exerted. Further, it is possible to make the player expect that the instruction content of the instruction function display displayed after the change will be the instruction content that can lead to a more advantageous game result.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode may be changed so as to be easily noticed by the player as described above, while conversely, the display mode may be changed so as not to be noticed by the player. May be. Specifically, the display itself on the special display LED 612 can be changed in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice, without performing the above-described effect for making the player notice. More specifically, for example, the display of "8" on the special display LED 612 is changed to "0" to relatively reduce the difference between the lighting portions before and after the change, or to light (blink) a dot segment with a narrow lighting area. Alternatively, there is a change such that the light is turned off, the brightness of the segment is changed (in addition to the simple ON/OFF switching, a change in the brightness degree by gradation control is included).

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize an effect as if the display mode was changed without the player's knowledge when changing the display mode which is difficult for the player to notice. , It is possible to give a great surprise to the player who notices the display change at any timing, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Further, since it is possible to make the player aware of when the display mode is changed, it is possible to enhance the concentration of the game.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the display mode which is difficult for the player to notice while all reels 301 are not stopped (all reels 301 are rotating). Also, it is desirable not to change the instruction content regarding the first stop reel (the pushing order of the reel 301 to be first stopped and the standard of the pushing position). In addition, when such a display mode is changed in the special display LED 612, it is desirable not to change the instruction content by the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like regarding the first stop reel.

More specifically, first, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the pushing order is that when the instruction content regarding the first stop reel is changed by the change of the display mode, the player who does not notice the changed instruction content is This is because the game is advanced according to the instruction content before the change (the game operation is performed in the pushing order contrary to the latest instruction content), which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, by not changing the instruction content related to the first stop reel, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

The reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the push location is, for example, instruction content A such as whether the condition device corresponding to the red 7 pattern alignment is operating (for example, the pushing order is reverse push, push The standard of the place is 7 red symbols, and when changing the display mode after generating the display mode of (instruction content indicating that the 7 red patterns can be aligned when all reels are stopped), the reel stop button for the first stop Before the 211 (in this case, the reel stop button 211c according to the reverse push) is pressed, the instruction content B (for example, the instruction content B) indicating that another condition device that is not aligned even if the red 7 symbol is aimed is operating. Display mode of the same stop operation as A (instruction indicating that the red 7 symbols cannot be aligned when the third stop reel is stopped, although an instruction is given to reverse the push order, the guide for the pushing position is the red 7 symbol) If it is changed to, the player will know in advance that the red 7 symbols will not be aligned even if they are aimed at, and there is a risk that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode after the change from the instruction content A is the instruction content C that does not violate the instruction content A (at least, the pushing order is the right reel first stop, and the red 7 is used as a guide for the pushing position). By including the symbols, the display mode of the instruction content that does not deny the possibility that the red 7 symbols will be aligned when all reels are stopped) is displayed before the change until at least the first stop of the right reel 301c by the player. It is preferable to expect a game result (red 7 symbols aligned) along the given instruction content A.

As a specific example of the display mode based on the instruction content C, "the order of pressing is reverse, the guide of the pressing place is the red 7 pattern or the BAR pattern". In the case of such instruction content C, since there is no stop position where both the red 7 symbol and the BAR symbol can be drawn in on the reel band 321c (right reel 301c) (see the symbol arrangement in FIG. 46), the right reel 301c When the player first stops, the player can select (select) which one of the red 7 symbol and the BAR symbol is to be aimed as a target of the pushing position. Then, when the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is operating internally, if the player performs a reel stop operation at an appropriate pushing order and at a timing at which the red 7 symbol can be pulled in, red, 7 The pattern alignment stops. Further, if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol arrangement is not operating internally, or if the stop operation is not performed by an appropriate pressing order or timing, the red 7 symbol arrangement is not stopped. It should be noted that the instruction content for allowing the player to select the pushing place can also be performed at the second stop and the third stop of the reel.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the instruction content (reference of the pushing place) regarding the first stop reel is not limited to the above example (change from the instruction content A to the instruction content C). As another example, the instruction content C may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the special display LED 612 indicates the display mode of the instruction content C, only the uncertain information that the red 7 symbol alignment may be stopped by the reverse push is provided, but then, the first Before the stop reel is operated (the freeze process may be performed in parallel), the display mode based on the instruction content A is changed, and the confirmation information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the reverse push Therefore, even before the reel 301 is stopped, it is possible to make the player expect the award of privilege by the red 7 set.

As another example of changing the instruction content (reference of the pushing place) for the first stop reel, the instruction content B may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the special display LED 612 indicates the display mode of the instruction content B, even if the red 7 symbol is aimed at by reversely pressing, the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop, but non-uniformity confirmation information is provided. By changing to the display mode based on the instruction content A before the operation for the first stop reel is performed, it is possible to provide the confirmation information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the reverse push. Here, in the case where the display mode is changed from the instruction content B to the instruction content A in a manner that is easily noticed by the player by performing freeze control or the like, the player's interest is provided before the reel 301 is stopped. Can be increased. On the other hand, when changing the display mode from the instruction content B to the instruction content A in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice, the player does not notice the confirmation information of the instruction content A and the reel 301 is not noticed. Although it is assumed that a stop operation will be performed, even in such a case, after all the reels 301 have stopped, the red 7 symbols are not aligned, contrary to the recognition of the player who thought that the red 7 symbols were not aligned. Since it can be stopped, it can give surprise and joy to the player, and can be expected to improve interest.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when intentionally changing the instruction content regarding the first stop reel in accordance with the change of the display mode, the freeze operation or the like is sandwiched to accept the stop operation for the reel stop button 211. It is desirable to prevent the player from performing an erroneous game operation that does not follow the changed instruction content by delaying the start time of the stop button press acceptance start.

Further, as an example of such a change in the display mode, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game is played in a game procedure that was not originally intended (for example, a mistake in the pushing order), the player will notice. The display mode can be changed (including deletion) in a difficult mode (details will be described later in [11-3-4-3-1]). According to the slot machine 1 as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure, so that the game can be continued with peace of mind.

In a conventional gaming machine, when being controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as an AT state, an appropriate stop operation is taught by the image display body 500 and the like, but it is monotonous enough to repeat a game according to the teaching. There was a problem that it tended to be work. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 performs the instruction function display for instructing the stop operation, and makes the player notice the display mode of the special display LED 612. Since it can be changed in an easy mode or in a mode that is difficult for the player to notice, unlike the conventional game machine, it is possible to add variety to the game effect of the slot machine 1.

[11-3-4-3-1. Display change timing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function display is performed, even when the player presses the reel stop button 211, the arbitrary timing satisfying the condition that the press operation is not accepted as a valid operation ( The main board 409 can change the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the timing when the reel stop operation cannot be accepted). Below, a typical change timing of such a display change will be cited and a specific processing example associated with the display change will be described.

(1) Start Lever Press to Stop Button Press Acceptance First, as a typical first change timing, when the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game (start lever press), the reel stop button 211a to An example is a period until the reception of the pressing operation on the 211c is started (the start of the stop button pressing reception). Strictly speaking, instead of changing the display mode immediately before the start of the stop button press acceptance, the player may notice the change of the display mode before starting the stop operation for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It is preferable to change the display mode at a timing when a certain period of time is secured before the start of acceptance of pressing of the stop button.

In the slot machine 1, when the start lever 210 is operated, an internal lottery related to a winning combination is performed by the main board 409, and the instruction content of the instruction function display is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery. When changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the above-described first change timing, for example, the special display LED 612 displays the first display mode at the timing after the start lever is pressed, and then the reel is stopped. Before the pressing operation on the button 211 can be accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed to the second display mode.

At this time, it is more preferable to add freeze control during rotation control of the reel 301 and change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to the second display mode during execution of the freeze control. By changing the display mode during the execution of the freeze control in this way, the display mode can be surely changed during the period in which the reception of the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 is not started, and at the same time, the player is given some special It is also possible to realize the effect of making it easy to notice that the effect (change of display mode here) is performed.

Further, in such a case, the second display mode is required to be a display mode of an instruction function display showing correct instruction content regarding the reel 301 to be stopped first, while the first display mode is correct. The display mode may be a display mode of the instruction function other than the instruction content, or may be a display mode other than the display of the instruction function. A specific display mode example will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2]. Further, another display mode may be displayed between the first display mode and the second display mode.

In this way, by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the first change timing, the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is changed at least once, so that a special effect is performed. The game can be felt by the player, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In particular, when the display mode is changed during execution of the freeze control, the special feeling can be further enhanced by sandwiching the freeze control which is obviously different from the normal reel control. It should be noted that, if such a freeze control is performed when a lottery result with a high rarity degree is obtained, the player's expectation can be significantly increased.

In the first change timing, when changing the display mode immediately before the start of the first stop button press acceptance, as described above in [11-3-4-3], the first stop reel is changed. It is desirable not to change the instruction content (firstly, the order of pushing the reels 301 to be stopped and the standard of the pushing place).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first change timing, the display mode is changed at any timing within the period immediately after the start lever is pressed to immediately before the start of the stop button press acceptance. be able to. In particular, when the player changes the display mode at "timing immediately before the start of the first stop button press acceptance start" in which it is difficult for the player to change the operation mode of the first stop button press, the instruction content regarding the first stop reel is maintained. However, by changing the display mode, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player. Further, in the case where the player changes the display mode at the "timing (including freeze control) in which a certain period of time is secured before the start of the stop button press acceptance", which allows the player to change the operation mode of pressing the first stop button, The change can increase the player's expectation.

(2) First stop button press to second stop button press acceptance start (or second stop button press to third stop button press acceptance start)
Next, as a typical second change timing, when any one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed (for example, the first stop button is pressed), the reels corresponding to the remaining spinning reels 301. The period until the reception of the pressing operation of the stop button 211 is started (for example, the second stop button pressing reception start) is included. In the case of the second change timing, as in the case of the first change timing, if possible, a certain period of time is secured before the end of the period (for example, start of acceptance of pressing the second stop button). It is preferable to change the display mode at the timing.

When changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 at the second change timing, for example, after the game is started and the reel 301 starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed (any one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed first). Until the operation is performed), the first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is displayed after the first stop button is pressed and the reception of the remaining stop buttons is started. Change to the second display mode.

As a specific situation in which the display mode is changed at the second change timing, a display change originally intended and a display change not originally intended are assumed. Here, since the above-mentioned first display mode is displayed immediately before the first stop button is pressed, it is necessary to be an instruction function display showing “correct instruction content” for at least the first stop button. .. On the other hand, as described in detail below, the above-mentioned second display mode can adopt different types of display modes depending on whether the display change was originally intended or the display change was not originally intended. ..

First, the originally intended display change means that the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode as the game progresses in advance by the main board 409. At least, it means a display change when it has been decided (before the first stop button is pressed).

In the case of such originally intended display change, a period during which the pressing operation of the second stop button (remaining reel stop button 211) cannot be accepted by executing freeze control after pressing the first stop button. Is preferably extended and the display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode during the freeze control. Then, at this time, in the second display mode, an instruction function display indicating “correct instruction content” regarding the second stop button is displayed.

It should be noted that when the display is originally intended, the instruction content shown by the first display mode does not have to be the same as the instruction content shown by the second display mode. The content may be “group display” related to the first stop button, and the instruction content shown in the second display mode may be “segment display” capable of specifying the pressing order of all reels. The “group display” will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

Further, in the case where the instruction content indicated by the first display mode and the instruction content indicated by the second display mode are made to be the same at the time of the originally intended display change, different display modes showing the same instruction content are set. The display should be changed. Different display modes showing the same instruction content will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

Next, the display change that was not originally intended is performed in advance by the main board 409 (at least the first stop button is pressed, for example, when the game procedure is not expected to progress the game. Means that display changes that have not been determined) are made. Specifically, when the reel stop button 211 corresponding to a reel different from the instruction content displayed in the instruction function display (in this case, the first display mode) is pressed when the first stop button is pressed, A so-called push order error may occur.

If a pressing order error occurs, for example, if a pressing order error occurs when the first stop button is pressed, the special display LED 612 continues to display the instruction function until then for the remaining second stop button press and the third stop button press. Even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the game operation according to the instruction content cannot be performed. Specifically, for example, when the left reel 301a is stopped by the first stop, even though the pushing order of “right/left/middle” is shown as the instruction content, the instruction content is continued as it is. Then, the target reel to be second stopped becomes the left reel 301a that has already been stopped, which may confuse the player as to what kind of game should be performed. In such a case, the main board 409 of the slot machine 1 can roughly perform the following three types of control.

The first control is a control for continuing to display the instruction function at this place even if a pressing order error occurs. In this case, it is not necessary to change the display from the first display mode to the second display mode. However, a second display mode by a special display mode that teaches that the pressing order is wrong is prepared, and when the pressing order is mistaken, the display is changed to such a second display mode. May be. At this time, it is preferable to notify the player that the pressing order error has occurred also in the image display body 500 and the like. When performing such control, even if the instruction content of the instruction function display is not changed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the user has made a mistake in the pushing order, and the instruction content of the instruction function display and the subsequent game Even if the procedure is not compatible, it is possible to convince the player to proceed with the game.

The second control is a control for erasing the indicating function display that has been displayed until then when a pressing order error occurs. If such control is also regarded as one of the changes in the display mode, the change in the display mode eliminates the situation that the game operation according to the instruction content cannot be performed, and prevents the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure. can do. In addition, after the indication function display in the first display mode is erased, the special display LED 612 may display, as the second display mode, a display mode informing that the instruction function display is deleted. By changing the display mode in this way, the player can be made aware of the reason why the first display mode has disappeared, so that the continuation of the game can be promoted without causing anxiety in the subsequent game. You can

In the third control, when a pressing sequence error occurs by pressing the first stop button, the instruction function display is changed to the second display mode so that the instruction content indicates the advantageous operation procedure for the remaining stop operation. It is a control to change to.

For example, as in the push order bells (AT1 to AT10) described with reference to FIG. 51, a winning combination in which the number of medals paid out at the time of winning is 9, 2, or 1 depending on the pushing order is won. When the instruction function is displayed, if a correct stop operation is performed in accordance with the original instruction content (first display mode), it is possible to expect to win the bell role and pay out 9 medals. However, if a mistake is made in the pressing order and the reel stop button 211 different from the instruction content is stopped first, how the subsequent two reel stop buttons 211 are processed due to the priority operation of the condition device. Even if the stop operation is performed, you cannot expect to pay out 9 medals. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even in such a situation, an operation procedure that can be expected for paying out two medals is newly provided as a second display mode as a slightly advantageous operation procedure. The indication function can be displayed.

In a specific example, when AT10 is won, the instruction content (“05” according to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81) that the target of the pushing place is “no designation” and the pushing order is “right/left/center” It is supposed to be displayed (first display mode). Here, if the player mistakenly presses the reel stop button 211b and presses the reel stop button 211b, the cherry symbol or the BAR symbol is stopped on the activated line of the middle reel 301b (see FIG. 51). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed, the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped, but before the pressing operation of the next reel stop button can be accepted, for example, the BAR symbol can be aimed at the right reel. The display mode is changed to a different instruction content (“34” according to FIGS. 80 and 81) (second display mode). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the second display mode, the BAR is stopped on the effective line of the right reel 301c, and the bell 1 symbol or the bell is displayed on the effective line of the left reel 301a. 2 Design stops. As a result, the symbol combination of the small article 2 or the small article 8 is stopped on the activated line, so that the payout of two medals can be received.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a display change that was not originally intended is made, the display mode is changed so that the instruction content is advantageous to the player even a little. It is possible to relieve a player who receives an unfavorable game result due to a mistake in pushing order or the like. By providing the gaming machine capable of realizing such rescue control, it can be expected to maintain the motivation to continue the game without excessively discouraging the player who has made a mistake in the pushing order.

In the example of the pushing order bell described above, it was not possible to expect the maximum payout number (9 pieces) at the time when the pushing order was wrong with the first stop button, but in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, Even if the pressing order is wrong with the stop button, as the pressing order of the relief measure, the remaining stop operation was performed aiming for a specific symbol and a specific pressing order in a manner corresponding to each winning combination of the pressing order small winning combination. In this case, a “relief push order” that can be expected for the maximum payout amount may be prepared. When a pressing order error occurs, the display is changed to the second display mode in which the rescue pressing order is the instruction content, so that even if the pressing order is incorrect, the player can receive the maximum number of sheets. Since it is possible to give an opportunity to win a medal, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in playing the game.

Further, when the display on the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the above-described third control, image output by the image display body 500, voice output by the speaker, or the like is also used. It is preferable that the player can surely detect the change.

The above is a typical change timing when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed when the instruction function display is performed, but the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to these change timings. If the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 is not accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 may be changed at other timings (for example, after all reels 301 are stopped or after the payout processing is completed). You can

Thus, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed according to the progress status of the game at a predetermined change timing that does not accept the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 even during the game. Can be changed. In particular, even when a game operation that is not originally intended, such as a mistake in the pushing order, is performed, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed based on the game operation, so that the appropriate instruction content for the next game operation is provided. Can be shown. As a result, even if an improper game operation is performed in an unintended manner such as a mistake in pushing order, it is possible to provide relief for the game and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the player's line of sight tends to be concentrated only on the reel and the effect display device (corresponding to the reel 301 and the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1), and the player's interest in the entire gaming machine. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the indicator (special display LED 612) for displaying the instruction function is changed at the timing when the reel stop operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the display device. As a result, the target of attention by the player is expanded, and it can be expected that the player's interest in the entire gaming machine is increased as compared with the conventional gaming machine.

[11-3-4-3-2. Display change example]
In the following, regarding the display mode of the special display LED 612 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, examples of display changes other than those described above will be given.

(1) Display change between indication function displays First, a display change example of changing the display mode between indication function displays on the special display LED 612 will be shown. As described above, in the instruction function display, one or more display modes of the instruction function display may be set for one instruction content. Therefore, when performing the indication function display on the special display LED 612, from one display mode (for example, the first display mode described above) to another display mode (for example, the above-described first display mode) that shows the same instruction content as the display mode. It can be changed to the second display mode).

86 and 87 are views (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a display example of the instruction function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. The “segment display 1” and the “segment display 2” shown in FIG. 86 are display examples of the indication function display on the special display LED 612a, and the “segment display 1” and the “segment display 2” shown in FIG. 87 are the special display LEDs 612b. 3 is a display example of an indication function display in FIG. Note that the “segment display 1” in FIGS. 86 and 87 is the same as the display example of the “segment display” in FIGS. 80 and 81, respectively, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

According to FIGS. 86 and 87, “segment display 1” and “segment display 2” are set as a plurality of display examples showing the same instruction content on the special display LEDs 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). Looking at the individual displays, corresponding to the display examples “0” to “3” of the “segment display 1” on the special display LED 612a, “4” to “7” are sequentially displayed in the display example of the “segment display 2”. In the display example of "segment display 2", "F" to "0" are set in correspondence with the display examples "0" to "F" of "segment display 1" set in the special display LED 612b. It is set in the reverse order of the case of the segment display 1 (FIG. 87).

Then, comparing such "segment display 1" and "segment display 2", the display on the special display LED 612 (display combining the special display LEDs 612a and 612b) shows the instruction function display of the same instruction content. , The segment display is always different. As a specific example, the display of “segment display 1” and “segment display 2” will be described when the indication of the pressing place is “red 7 pattern” and the pressing order is “right/middle/left”. First, in the case of "segment display 1", the special display LED 612a displays "2" corresponding to the guide of the pushing position of "red 7 pattern", and the special display LED 612b displays "right/middle/left". "6" corresponding to the pressing order is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of "segment display 2", "6" corresponding to the guide of the pushing position of "red 7 pattern" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and "right/middle/ "9" corresponding to the pressing order of "left" is displayed. That is, when looking at the special display LED 612 as a whole, “26” is displayed in the case of “segment display 1” and “69” is displayed in the case of “segment display 2”, which are segments different from each other. Will be displayed.

The “segment display 1” and the “segment display 2” shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 are set to the first display mode and the second display mode as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. As a result, the display mode of the special display LEDs 612 (612a, 612b) can be changed while the instruction function display shows the same instruction content. In the specific example described above, the display mode of "26" can be changed to the display mode of "69". As described above, by changing the display between the display modes that are easily identifiable, in the slot machine 1, the game is as if the instruction content shown on the special display LED 612 was changed for the player at first glance. It is possible to realize the effect, and even if the instruction content before and after the display mode is changed can be grasped, a special effect is performed when the display mode is intentionally changed with the same instruction content. It is possible to make an impression, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the game result.

Further, as another example of the display change between the indication function displays, the indication function display in a display mode (hereinafter, also referred to as “clear display mode”) that is easy to identify as illustrated in FIGS. 80 and 81, As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the indication function display in the display mode that is difficult to identify (hereinafter, also referred to as “indistinct display mode”) is used, and these are displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, the display mode of the special display LED 612 may be changed. 80 and 81 are different in that two 7-segment LEDs without dots are used, and FIGS. 83 and 84 are different in that one 7-segment LED with dots is used. However, 7-segment LEDs with dots are used. By using, since it is possible to display with a 7-segment LED without dots, the influence of this difference is eliminated.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by changing the display between the “clear display mode” and the “unclear display mode”, the player can change the degree of clarity of the display mode on the special display LED 612. The player's expectation for the game can be increased. In particular, when the display mode is changed from the "unclear display mode" to the "clear display mode", clear information is provided to the player such that the instruction content is easier to understand. The player's expectation can be further increased.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a display change that makes the degree of clarity of the display on the special display LED 612 variable is performed, the display change is performed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player. It is possible to strongly give the player the impression that a special effect is generated. Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can make the player aware that the display mode of the instruction function display may change for each game, so that monotonization of the game is suppressed and special display is performed. This has the effect of raising interest in the LED 612 and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612 is not limited to the one-time change from the first display mode to the second display mode. To give a specific example with reference to FIG. 81, when a bell combination (AT7) having a 6-option pressing order in which the reverse pressing is an appropriate pressing order is selected as a winning combination, as a first display mode on the special display LED 612b Assuming that “C” indicating the pressing order of “right first (2 choices)” is displayed, after that, in a period satisfying the condition of the display change timing as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. , “C” and “6” display modes are alternately displayed at high speed, and “6” indicating the pressing order of “right/middle/left” is displayed as the final second display mode. You may When such a display mode is changed, even if "C" is displayed on the special display LED 612b until the first stop button is pressed, the reel stop button 211c should be the first stop operation. Since there is no change, the instruction function display with the correct instruction content is displayed. This is the same even if "6" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Then, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to "6" by the time the second stop button is pressed, it becomes clear that the reel stop button 211b should be secondly stopped. Therefore, the player has 6 options. The stop operation can be performed in an appropriate pressing order of. On the other hand, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b remains "C" until the second stop button is pressed, the player selects the reel stop button to be secondly stopped from one of the reel stop buttons 211a and 211b. When the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to "6", the answer in the proper pressing order in the game is shown (correct answer display).

When the correct answer display regarding the stop operation is performed by changing the display mode in this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the special display LED 612 is limited to an appropriate pressing order, and the main correct answer display (for example, , Etc. may be performed by a display device (for example, the image display body 500) managed by the sub-board 510. However, if the correct display is performed by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 before all the reels 301 are stopped (before the reels are completely stopped), the instruction content shown as the correct operation stop operation in the changed display mode. However, there is a possibility of instructing a stop operation for the reel that has already been stopped. Therefore, it is desirable to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to display an appropriate pressing order (correct order of pressing order) after all reels are stopped, and further turn off the special display LED 612 after a lapse of a predetermined time. It is desirable to do. However, even if the reel 301 is stopped in a pushing order that is not the correct answer, if a medal (game value) is paid out, the pushing order of the correct answer is not displayed after waiting for a predetermined time. It is desirable to cause the special display LED 612 to display the payout immediately after the reel is completely stopped. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the correct answer display processing as described above, it is possible to entertain the player through the unit game while preventing the interest from being lowered because the answer is known during the game. ..

Further, when the display mode is changed with the high speed change as described above, the display mode showing the correct instruction content is included in the display modes changed at the high speed, and finally any display mode is changed. The display mode may be displayed, or the display mode indicating the correct instruction content may be finally displayed after the high speed change is performed in a state where the display mode indicating the correct instruction content is not included. If a plurality of types of change patterns for high-speed change are prepared, the degree of expectation can be made different depending on the change patterns, so that the playability can be improved. It should be noted that such a change pattern of the display mode is not limited to the “high speed” change, and may be a change pattern that allows the player to recognize that the display mode is changing. Specifically, for example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds. Further, for example, the display mode is changed to the shortest time from the pressing operation of the start lever 210 to the start of the stop button pressing acceptance (the required time when the wait timer is up and there is no so-called wait). Good. Further, for example, assuming that the reel 301 has the farthest index position, the display mode may be changed by the time required for the reel 301 to make one round.

Further, as still another example of the display change between the indication function displays, there is an example of using the display mode of the grouped indication function displays. The "display mode of grouped instruction function display" here means a display mode (group display) that is set in association with a plurality of instruction contents in a group according to a predetermined rule, For example, first, it is possible to group instruction contents having the same reel (reel stop button) to be stopped.

FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining an example of group display in the indication function display. FIG. 88 shows a display example on the special display LED 612b, and the description other than the “group display” column is the same as that in FIG. 81, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. According to FIG. 88, it is assumed that the group display of “L” is performed for the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 1, 2, 7, and 10) in which the reel to be stopped is the left reel 301a first. For the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 3, 4, 8 and 11) in which the reel to be stopped first is the middle reel 301b, a group display of "c" is performed, and the reel to be stopped first is Regarding the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 4, 5, 9, and 12) which is the right reel 301c, a group display of "r" is performed.

When the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed using the "group display" shown in FIG. 88, the special display LED 612b is the first display mode, which is the "group display" of the correct instruction content regarding the reel to be stopped first. In the second display mode, the special display LED 612b displays “segment display” of the correct instruction content regarding the reel to be stopped after the second display. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination is a 6-compression pressing bell combination (AT7) in which reverse pressing is an appropriate pressing order, “r” is displayed as the first display mode, and then [ 11-3-4-3-1], “6” is displayed as the second display mode during the period that satisfies the condition of the display change timing as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. When performing such a display change, while the first display mode is displayed, the player can only obtain information that the first reel 301c should be stopped first, but in the second display mode. Since information about reels to be stopped after the second time can be obtained at the time of the change, it is possible to get interested in changing the display mode.

It should be noted that the display change between the instruction function displays as described above is particularly performed during a game period (for example, a chance zone) in which the degree of award is changed depending on whether or not the proper pressing order can be hit. It can bring a high effect. That is, the player who is playing such a game period aspires to change the display mode to change the partial instruction content to the complete instruction content, and pays attention to the display trend in the special display LED 612. Therefore, not only can the playability be enhanced, but also the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 can be enhanced.

(2) Display change between indication function display and other than indication function display As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is pressed against the reel stop button 211. At the specific timing at which the operation can be accepted, it is sufficient if the correct instruction content regarding the "appropriate reel stop operation" to be executed next is indicated, and thus, for example, the game period before (or after) the specific timing. In, the display mode other than the indication function display may be displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, in the following, as a display change example between the indication function display and other than the indication function display, a simple display change example in the special display LED 612 from a display mode other than the indication function display to a display mode of the indication function display Show.

For example, a 7-segment LED is used as the special display LED 612, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode at the first change timing described in [11-3-4-3-1]. It is assumed that the display mode is changed. As the first display mode, segment displays of "0" to "3" are prepared. The first display mode is a display mode other than the indication function display, that is, a display mode not included in the “segment display” used in the indication function display, and the instruction content is not associated. On the other hand, segment display of "4" to "7" is prepared as the second display mode. The second display mode is a display mode used in the indication function display, and the instruction content is associated with each.

In such a case, first, after pressing the start lever, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612 as the first display mode, and the freeze control of the reel 301 is executed before the stop button press acceptance is started. Then, during execution of the freeze control, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is sequentially changed to “1”, “2”, and “3”, and before the freeze control ends, for example, as a second display mode, Display “5”. After that, the stop button press acceptance is started after the end of the freeze control, and the player performs the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 according to the instruction content indicated by the display mode of "5". Here, “5” displayed in the second display mode is determined in advance based on the result of the winning combination lottery. By changing the display mode in this way, what is initially displayed as “0” is increased and displayed during freeze control, so it is possible to give the player enjoyment as to how many numbers will increase. it can. Then, if the higher the final value is, the more advantageous the game result can be obtained, the player can be greatly interested in the result of changing the display mode.

Further, in the above simple example, as a display mode other than the indication function display, a display similar to the display mode by the indication function display (in this example, both are similar in terms of numbers) This allows the player to feel continuity. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to use a similar display, and it is possible to change from a different display that is clearly different from the display mode of the instruction function display. In such a case, when the different display is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is possible to make the player feel that the display mode is changed, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

(3) Other Display Modification Examples The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize the instruction function display by adopting various display methods under the control of the main board 409, but it is not limited to the above. An example of display change in the display LED 612 is shown.

An example of such a display change is that the display is changed using a display device (special display LED 612) for performing the indication function display, which is different from the segment LED used in the above description. .. Such another type of display corresponds to, for example, a segment LED (so-called full-color LED display) capable of displaying a plurality of colors, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a lamp, or the like.

For example, when the special display LED 612 is a full-color LED display, the display color can be changed to red when the display mode is changed while normally displaying the instruction function in green. Generally, if the player is more likely to notice the red color than the green color, the display color is changed in this way to change the display mode, thereby making it easier for the player to notice the change in the display mode. be able to. In addition, when the display colors of the normal time and the change time are relatively similar visually (for example, colors of warm colors such as red and orange, colors of cold colors such as blue and purple). It is also possible to add a fine game property that only the player who plays the game while carefully watching the display color on the special display LED 612 can immediately recognize that the display mode is changed.

Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, not only can the display color be changed as in the case of using a full-color LED display, but the brightness of the display itself can be changed. That is, when the display mode is changed, if the display brightness of the special display LED 612 is made higher than usual, it is possible to make the player feel that the display mode is changed, and the effect of enhancing the entertainment of the game is enhanced. Can be expected. Further, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case of using the segment LED.

Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a dot display, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where the segment LED is used. Although the dot display is less versatile in display mode than the liquid crystal display, it has an advantage over the liquid crystal display in terms of suppressing power consumption and monotonic control signals. Further, even when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or the like as described above, these are still managed by the main board 409.

As described above in [11-3-4-3] and thereafter, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that displays an instruction function display on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409. The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed in the middle of one game (unit game). Here, the basic flow of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 is that the instruction content of the indication function is determined based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery (winning combination lottery) related to the winning combination. An instruction function display indicating the contents is displayed. And the winning lottery is performed only once in the unit game. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the instruction function display is shown in one display mode based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed within the unit game, so that the special display can be achieved despite the fact that the winning combination does not change within the unit game. The LED 612 can display a plurality of types of display modes. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the lottery result has changed in the unit game. Then, specifically, even if the display mode showing the instruction content having a high possibility of the low expected combination (for example, “00” in the instruction function display of the first example) is shown, the high expected combination is highly likely. An effect that can be expected to change to a display mode showing the instruction content (for example, “2C” in the instruction function display of the first example) and the like, which maintains the player's interest in the game over the entire unit game Play.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 by making it possible to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 within the unit game as described above. It is possible to provide a game style in which a game is advanced while paying attention to the special display LED 612. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as compared with the conventional game machine in which the production display on the liquid crystal display (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1) or the like tends to be excessively emphasized, By providing a novel game style, the player's interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a carry-over combination capable of carrying the winning flag after the next game (for example, a bonus combination such as “2 types BB” shown in FIG. 49) is selected as a winning combination. In the case of performing the instruction function display regarding the winning combination, the instruction function display does not have to be completed in one game of the winning game, and the instruction function display is displayed over a plurality of games from the winning game or the subsequent games. You may do it. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination lottery causes the BB combination (carrying-out combination) and the watermelon combination (non-carrying-out combination) to be simultaneously won, in the winning game, the instruction content for aligning the symbol combination of the BB combination is shown. It is assumed that the indication function is displayed. However, in this winning game, the symbol combination of the BB combination does not stop on the activated line, and when the BB combination does not win, the instruction function display displayed in the winning game is continuously displayed until the next game. You may Further, even if the indication function display is once erased between the winning game and the next game, the indication function display of the next game may be performed in a display mode in which the indication function display of the winning game is inherited. By doing so, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment enables the indication function display over a plurality of games, teaches the opportunity to obtain advantageous results for the player beyond the unit game (1 game), and plays the game. The expectation of the person can be greatly increased.

[11-3-5. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 displays the instruction function with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation process, while displaying the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction content is notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510). As described above with reference to FIG. 55, the instruction information command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral boards when the instruction function occurs can identify the group including the winning combination selected in the game. It is sent in the form (command that groups winning combinations).

A command in which such winning combinations are grouped will be described with a specific example. First, for example, when "AT1" which selects the proper press order as the normal push order is selected as the winning combination, and all the proper push orders are displayed in the instruction function display, the winning order is grouped as "Order". Information such as "You have won the push order bell group" is notified. Here, the winning combination "AT2" is also grouped into the "push order group of the normal push" because the proper push order is the normal push order. Therefore, even if "AT2" is selected as the winning combination when all the proper pressing sequences are displayed in the indication function display, the same command as in the case of "AT1" is notified. Further, for example, when “AT1” is selected as the winning combination and only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper pressing order in the indication function display, the command “grouping the winning combinations is “first stop Information such as "Winning the push order bell group which is the left reel" is notified. Here, the winning combinations “AT2” to “AT4” are also grouped into a “push order bell group in which the first stop is the left reel” because the first stop in the proper pressing order is the left reel. Therefore, even when any one of "AT2" to "AT4" is selected as the winning combination when only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper pressing order in the indication function display, it is the same as the case of "AT1". The command will be notified. Then, the sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) according to the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect process).

That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function is generated, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, while displaying the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content in the instruction function on the image display body 500. As a result, the instruction content is announced in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

Further, as described above in the description of step S31 of FIG. 54, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. The sub-board 501 may determine the display mode for navigation display from a plurality of display modes as long as the display content does not have to be contrary to the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display (corresponding relationship of 1 to n). ).

FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the first example. In FIG. 89, a display example of the navigation display is shown in a manner corresponding to the display example of the instruction function display illustrated in FIGS. 80 and 81. According to FIG. 89, first, when the indication function display is "00", that is, when "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a and "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, At this time, since there is no substantial instruction content, the player does not need to aim for a particular symbol, and the pressing order may be arbitrarily selected. When the player wins a replay that does not require any pressing order during AT, such a display is made. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, "?" is displayed on all reels.

Next, when the indication function display is "02", that is, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a and "2" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. At this time, the player Does not need to aim at a particular symbol, but it is required to stop the reel 301 in the stop order of pinching (left/right/middle). When the push order bell of "AT3" or "AT4" is won during AT, such a display is made. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, "1" is displayed at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" is displayed at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and "2" is displayed at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c. The order of stopping the right and middle pinching is taught. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command indicating that the push order bell has been won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is set to a yellow color reminiscent of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, , When all the reels 301 are rotating, it is a reel to be stopped first, and when two reels are rotating, it is equivalent to a reel to be stopped second) than images showing other stop orders. It may be highlighted.

Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output, and specifically, the reel to be stopped first. When the reel is the left reel 301a, an example in which a voice such as "It's left" is output at the timing before the first stop of the reel is performed can be given. When performing voice output, different voice output (for example, character, dialogue, etc.) based on the type of winning combination (bell, replay, rare, etc.) Different intonation etc.) can be used properly. By performing the navigation display including the audio output in this way, the notification of the instruction content to the player can be made more reliable, and the navigation display that changes according to the game situation can be provided to enhance the interest of the player. Can be expected.

Next, when the instruction function display is "2C", that is, "2" is displayed on the special display LED 612a and "C" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. At this time, the player Is required to first stop the right reel 301c while aiming at the red 7 symbol, and then, for either the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b, a selection to secondly stop while aiming at the red 7 symbol is required. To be Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, for example, when a special replay combination having different stop forms depending on the pressing order is prepared, by displaying such an instruction function when the special replay combination is elected, an appropriate pressing order can be obtained. It is possible to realize a reel effect in which the specific symbol arrangement is stopped when the stop operation is performed. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation, by indicating "1" at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c and "?" indicating the unknown stop order at the corresponding positions of the other reels 301a and 301b, the stop order is indicated. Teaches only the first stop of the right reel 301c. Furthermore, in order to teach the guide of the pushing place, the effect display "Aim at the red 7 pattern" is displayed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the instruction content by the instruction function can be more surely transmitted to the player.

FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period by various display devices and the like. In FIG. 90, various display devices and the like are shown on the vertical axis, and a display period such as at which timing in the progress process of one game shown in the horizontal axis the display and transmission are performed is shown. ..

First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 90 will be described. In the following description, other timing charts will be used in the same format, but each timing chart is viewed in the same way, and the description of items will be omitted.

The instruction information 801 corresponds to the instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmit”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510.

The instruction function 802 corresponds to the instruction function controlled by the main board 409, means “display” when the instruction function 802 is ON, and the special function LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is off, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of gaming values paid out as a result of the game, and when the payout number 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 displays the payout number. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. The information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and the program processing, it can be displayed again even after the power is turned off.

The segment error 804 is equivalent to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the segment LED when the error is detected, and means “display” when the segment error 804 is ON, and the special display LED 612. The details of the error are notified in (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display an error.

The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510, means “display” when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the navigation display is not performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with content that does not violate the display content of the instruction function 802. Although detailed description is omitted, data relating to the display on the sub-board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and the data can be appropriately read back even when the power is cut off. And

The liquid crystal error 806 corresponds to the details (for example, type and content) of the error being displayed on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and means “display” when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Details of the error are notified on the liquid crystal screen of the display body 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal error 806, the error is notified with the content that does not violate the notification in the segment error 804.

The error occurrence 807 indicates an error occurrence situation, but in the figure, it may be read as the main board 409 detecting the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred (the error has been detected) at the timing when it is turned on, and when the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (the error has been detected). Does not mean). If the error occurrence 807 turns off after turning on, it means that the error is resolved at the timing of turning off.

The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the segment error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

Further, in FIG. 90 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 which is the first one of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 on which the reel 301 has been stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (or last) reel 301. Means the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed.

Next, a display period (including a transmission period and the like) of each display device shown in FIG. 90 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 90 is shown under a situation in which the game is played without an error during AT in which the instruction function is executed, and the payout is not generated in the game.

In FIG. 90, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the pressing operation of the starting lever 210 is performed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, in the instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the stop operation for all reels 301 ends from the timing when the operation for pressing the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (the third stop button is pressed). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. Note that in the example of FIG. 90, the navigation display is started before the instruction function display is started, but the navigation display is displayed based on the content of the instruction information command, and the content of the instruction information command is the instruction. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is the same as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 90, the timing of “starting acceptance of stop button press acceptance” and the timing at which the instruction function 802 is turned ON appear to be the same, but strictly speaking, after starting acceptance of press of the reel stop button 211. The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed before the timing of “starting the stop button press acceptance”, and in the processing of the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. Also, the instruction function display is executed before the timing when the stop button press acceptance starts. The timing of such "start of stop button press acceptance" and "indication function display" is the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

Further, in FIG. 90, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set to the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is set to the start of rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of the display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-mentioned display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing in the period from when the pressing operation of the starting lever 210 is performed until when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted. May be started.

Next, an example of a display period in a situation different from that of FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing another example of the display period by various display devices and the like. The timing chart of FIG. 91 is the same as that of FIG. 90 in that the game is played without an error during AT in which the instruction function is executed, but it shows the situation where the payout is generated in the game. Different. In FIG. 91, in addition to the game progress shown on the horizontal axis of FIG. 90, after the reels are completely stopped, the payout of the game value (medal) is started, and the payout is completed. And "medal insertion (BET allowed)" for starting the next game.

According to FIG. 91, when the gaming value is paid out, the special display LED 612 displays the number of payouts, which is also displayed on the special display LED 612 until the “third stop button is pressed”. It can be seen that the display period does not overlap with the display. Further, in FIG. 91, the period during which the instruction function 802 is displayed is up to “pressing the third stop button”, but as another example, it may be continuously displayed until “payout start”. Even in such a case, the display period of the instruction function 802 does not overlap with the display period of the payout number 803.

[11-3-6. Instruction function related processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 60, the instruction function-related processing by the peripheral board (specifically, for example, the sub-board 510) will be described. The start timing of the instruction function-related processing does not necessarily have to be after the completion of the instruction function generation processing (step S61 of FIG. 57), and may be performed in parallel from the middle of the instruction function generation processing. In such a case, the time required for the overall processing can be shortened, but it is preferable that the time is at least after the timing at which the instruction information command and the condition device command described above can be received.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 60, the condition device command transmitted from the main board 409 is received. The condition device command is a command format of information on condition devices (there may be a plurality of condition devices) that are permitted to operate based on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery on the winning combination performed on the main board 409. It is a thing.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the condition device command does not have enough information to allow the receiving side (sub-board 510) of the command to completely identify the winning combination. It is preferable that the information about the condition device notified in step 1 is information that can identify the winning combinations (or condition devices) grouped together. Further, in particular, when the instruction function display is not executed, the sub-board 510 is prevented from identifying or judging the proper pressing sequence and pressing position of the winning combination in the game by the command transmitted from the main board 409. Required to do so. Specifically, for example, although it is understood that the sub-board 510 that received the command wins the push order bell, the breakdown of the winning combination (which one of “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) is unknown. It is preferable not to have it. In this regard, as described in [11-1], the command for notifying the winning combination grouped when the indication function display is not executed may be regarded as the “condition device command”. The specific format of these commands may be any commonly used command format. For example, among the bits assigned to all the winning groups, the bits for the winning group in the game are set. It may be possible to use a format in which a notification is made with a notification, a format in which an identification number associated with a winning group in the game is notified, or the like.

Although not shown, the sub-board 510, before and after receiving the condition device command in step S701, uses the status flags (special status flag and hell status flag) used in the instruction function generation processing by the main board 409. It is assumed that the value of (including) is received by a command or the like. Further, it is assumed that the AT flag, the AT internal flag, and the like are also transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510 and the like by an appropriate command or the like. Further, the above-mentioned instruction information command is also transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510. The mode of transmitting the command transmitted from the main board 409 may be a mode in which individual commands are transmitted at individual timings, or a command in which some command information is collected into one. It may be a mode.

After receiving the condition device command in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether the hell state flag is ON. When it is determined that the hell state flag is ON (YES in step S702), the process of step S703 is performed, and when it is determined that the hell state flag is not ON (OFF) (step S702). NO), the process of step S721 described later is performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not a "precursor game number command" for notifying the number of predictive games has been received. The “precursor game number command” is to be transmitted as a command to the peripheral board at an appropriate timing when execution of the predictive game is determined in the instruction function generating process of the main board 409 (precursor game flag is ON). .. If it is determined that the precursor game number command is received (YES in step S703), the process of step S704 is performed, and if it is determined that the precursor game number command is not received (NO in step S703), As the processing of step S718, processing for performing various effect displays is performed, and the instruction function-related processing ends.

When the process of step S718 is performed, it is not in the hell state, and the precursor game is not started. Therefore, as a specific “various effect display”, for example, a rare role is selected as a winning role. When a predetermined cut-in effect and a winning effect suggestion effect screen are displayed, etc. are displayed.

In step S704, it is determined whether the "continuous effect flag" is OFF. The “continuous effect flag” is an internal flag that is turned “ON” when the “predictive effect” including the “continuous effect” is being executed.

Here, the "continuous effect" in the first embodiment will be described. The "continuous effect" corresponds to an effect that is displayed in a continuous effect content over a predetermined number of games from one game to a plurality of games among the predictive effects executed during the predictive game. , At the end of the “continuous effect”, an effect result that teaches (indicates/announces) whether or not the special game (here, AT) is won or not is displayed. Therefore, the result of the continuous effect is also the result of the omen effect, and more specifically, the result of the omen game.

Here, an example of the relationship between the “predictive effect” and the “continuous effect” in the first embodiment will be described. For example, "title display" is performed in the first game of the omen effect. This title display may be a display showing the content of the subsequent continuous production (for example, "the main character vs the battle of the enemy A!"), or a display simply showing the start of the continuous production (for example, "start judgment opportunity"). !)) or the like. Then, in the second game or later of the precursor effect (corresponding to the first game or later of the continuous effect), the effect content of the continuous effect (corresponding to "contents of continuous effect" described later) is displayed. Then, in the final game of continuous production (which is also the final game of precursor production), the result of the continuous production (whether or not AT transition is possible here, but may be transition to other advantageous gaming state) is announced. (I suggest/teach) In addition, you may make it announce the result by the said continuous production as the last game of the continuous production which finished the display of the content of continuous production.

In the following description regarding the instruction function-related processing, “continuous effect” means such a continuous effect regarding AT transition. In addition, when the precursor effect and the continuous effect are executed over "a plurality of games", this "a plurality of games" is a plurality of games in which an internal lottery related to a winning combination is performed for each game (main game). It may be present, or may be a pseudo multiple game created by changing the reel 301 a plurality of times during one game.

When it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is OFF (YES in step S704), the process of step S705 is performed, and when it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (ON). (NO of step S704), the process of step S711 is performed.

In step S705, a continuous effect generation lottery for determining whether or not to generate a “predictive effect (may be considered as a continuous effect)” is performed. In the above-mentioned example, when the precursor effect is generated, the title display is performed in the first game of the predictive effect, and the continuous effect is generated in the remaining games of the predictive effect. Therefore, the continuous effect is generated by the continuous effect generation lottery. It can be considered that it is decided whether or not to allow it.

92 and 93 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the lottery table used in the continuous effect generation lottery. FIG. 92 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is ON, and FIG. 93 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is OFF. In both FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, based on the number of predictive games (that is, the number of remaining predictive games) at that time, whether or not the predictive effect (or continuous effect) is executed is selected by lottery. Is set.

According to the examples of FIGS. 92 and 93, when the number of remaining precursor games is 5 or more or 1 or less, the precursor effect is not won, and the remaining precursor games are 2 to 4 games. Only in this case is there an opportunity to win the occurrence of the precursor effect. Moreover, in the lottery tables of FIGS. 92 and 93, at least when the number of remaining predictive games is two, the predictive effect is always won (255/255). Further, comparing the case where the AT is internally won (FIG. 92) and the case where the AT is not internally won (FIG. 93), the case where the AT is internally won is better. When the number of remaining predictive games is large, it is easier to win the predictive effect than when the player does not internally win. By performing the continuous effect generation lottery using such a lottery table, when the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is generated, the more the effect is continued, the higher the degree of expectation of reaching the AT win advantageous result for the player. Can be higher.

An example of the breakdown of the indication effect according to the number of remaining indication games will be described. In the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining predictive games is 2 and the player wins the predictive effect, the title is displayed in the first game (the number of remaining predictive games is 2 because it is immediately executed). The second game (the remaining number of precursor games is 1) displays the first game (the first game of continuous production. The same hereinafter) of the continuous production content, and the result of the precursor production (or continuous production). Is displayed.

In the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining predictive games is 3 and the player wins the predictive effect, the title is the first game (the number of remaining predictive games is 3 because it is immediately executed). In the second game (the number of remaining omen games is 2), the display of the first game (first game of the continuous production) of the continuous effect content is performed, and in the third game (the number of remaining omen games is 1). The second game of the continuous effect content (the second game of the continuous effect) is displayed, and the result of the precursor effect (or the continuous effect) is displayed.

In the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining predictive games is 4 and the player wins the predictive effect, the title is the first game (the number of remaining predictive games is 4 because it is immediately executed). In the second game (the number of remaining precursor games is 3), the first game (the first game in the continuous production) of continuous effect content is displayed, and in the third game (the number of remaining precursor games is 2). The second game of the continuous effect content (the second game of the continuous effect) is displayed, and the third game of the continuous effect content (the third game of the continuous effect) is displayed in the fourth game (the number of remaining precursor games is 1). Is performed, and the result of the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is displayed.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the generation of the precursor effect has been won in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705. If it is determined that the winning effect has been won (YES in step S706), the process of step S707 is performed and the winning is achieved. When it is determined that the instruction function has not been performed (NO in step S706), the instruction function-related processing ends.

Then, in step S707, the continuous effect content lottery for determining the content of the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is performed for the predictive effect that was won in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705. 94 and 95 are views (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the lottery table used for the continuous effect content lottery. The lottery table illustrated in FIG. 94 is used in cases other than the special mode, and the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 95 is used in the special mode.

In FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, four types of “weak story”, “strong story”, “weak battle”, and “strong battle” are prepared as the effect contents, and each is based on ON/OFF of the AT internal flag. A lottery will be held with different allocation. These four types of production content have a relationship of "weak story" <"weak battle" <"strong story" <"strong battle" as the degree of expectation (reliability) leading to AT winning In the production contents (story system and battle system), the production of “strong” has a higher reliability than that of “weak”.

From the above, the reliability in the predictive effect (or continuous effect) (the degree of expectation leading to AT winning) is the number of continuous games of the predictive effect (determined by the continuous effect generation lottery using FIGS. 92 and 93) or It can be seen that it is variably realized according to the effect contents of the sign effect (determined by the continuous effect content lottery using FIGS. 94 and 95).

Further, in the first embodiment, when the continuous effect content lottery is performed in the special mode (using FIG. 95), the selected effect content is determined to always continue four games including the title display. That is, when it is controlled to the special state, in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705, when the number of remaining predictive games is 4, it is ensured that the generation of predictive effect is won. Even if any effect content is selected in the continuous effect content lottery in the subsequent step S707, the precursor effect can be continued for four games. As described above, the breakdown of the precursor effects of these four games is that the first one game is the title display and the remaining three games display the contents of the continuous effects, and particularly in the final game, the result of the precursor effects (or continuous effects). Is displayed.

When the effect content of the continuous effect displayed in the predictive effect is determined by the continuous effect content lottery, the generation of the predictive effect based on the determined effect content is started in step S708. Then, since the precursor effect is being executed, the continuous effect flag is turned on (step S709), and the instruction function related processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (that is, the omen effect is being executed), whether or not the number of omen games is 0 is determined as the process of step S711. The number of precursor games can be confirmed by referring to the precursor game number command whose reception is confirmed in step S703. Then, when it is determined that the number of precursory games is 0 (YES in step S711), the processing of step S712 is performed as the processing associated with the end of the precursory game. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S711), the precursor game is currently being executed and the precursor effect is being executed. Display (continuous effect display) is performed. The precursor effect displayed in the process of step S717 is a predictive effect based on the effect contents determined in step S707, and the precursor effect is accurately indicated by referring to the number of games after the precursor effect is started. The effect can be displayed.

In step S712, it is determined whether the special state flag is ON. As described above, the ON/OFF of the special state flag is set in the instruction function generating process by the main board 409, and in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, a predictive game (precursor effect) It may be controlled to a special state (enter a special mode) after it is finished. If it is determined that the special state flag is ON (YES in step S712), a predetermined display (special state screen display) that allows the player to recognize that the special mode is in the process of step S713. After outputting, the instruction function related processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S712 that the special state flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S712), it is determined whether the AT internal flag is ON (step S714). If it is determined that the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S714), the AT game is started because it means that the continuous effect and the omen game have ended in the AT internal winning state. Therefore, in step S715. As the processing, a predetermined display (AT start screen) indicating the start of the AT is output, and then the instruction function related processing is ended. When it is determined that the AT internal flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S714), as the processing in step S716, various effect displays are output, and then the instruction function related processing is ended.

Next, the processing after step S721 will be described. The process after step S721 is a process performed when the hell state flag is ON, that is, when the hell state is controlled. The situation in which the hell state is controlled is, for example, when the precursor game is played after the special mode, and when the lottery table of FIG. 63 is used, the AT initial win is not won in the hell state.

As processing in such a hell state, first, in step S721, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is OFF. This process is the same as the process of step S704, and thus the details are omitted.

When it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is OFF, continuous effect generation lottery is performed (not shown, but similar to step S705), and then continuous effect content lottery is performed in step S722. In step S723, the generation of the precursor effect according to the lottery result is started, the continuous effect flag is turned on in step S724, and the instruction function related processing is ended. Note that the processing of steps S722 to S724 is the same as the processing of steps S707 to S709 described above, and thus details thereof will be omitted. Further, when it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF, since the indication effect is being performed, the indication effect display (continuous effect display) is performed as the process of step S725, and the instruction function related process is ended. .. The process of step S725 is the same as the process described in step S717.

As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 60, the control processing managed by the peripheral board (sub-board 510) is performed with respect to the state that can be positioned as the precursor of the AT game (for example, the precursor game or the special mode). be able to. Note that the determination process (AT game determination process) regarding the end of the AT game and the management of the number of games (AT game determination process) is performed after the reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54), and details thereof will be described later in [11-8] and the like. ..

[11-3-7. Expectation display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [11-3-4] and subsequent steps, by the control processing (instruction function display processing) performed by the main board 409, the instruction content based on the winning combination is displayed on the special display LED 612. (Instruction contents regarding a predetermined game operation) can be displayed as an instruction function display. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is played on the display (special display LED 612) on which the indicator function is displayed by another control process (expectation degree display process) performed by the main board 409. It is possible to display an expectation display (hereinafter, referred to as “expectation degree display”) that indicates the degree of expectation for the privilege that can be given. Hereinafter, such "expectation level display" will be described in detail.

The expectation level display process by the main board 409 is optional from the start of the internal lottery process (step S3) to the end of the unit game in the process procedure of one game (unit game) shown in FIG. The expected degree display on the special display LED 612 is performed at an appropriate timing according to various concrete examples of the expected degree display described later. Further, the expectation level display does not always have to be displayed in the game in which the instruction function display is performed. For example, the expectation level display may be performed without the instruction function display, or the expectation degree display is not performed. Only the indication function display may be performed.

Further, the expectation level display is a display that indicates the degree of expectation for the privilege that can be given by the game being played, but the "privilege" in this case can include various benefits that are advantageous to the player. .. Specifically, it fixes advantageous games (bonus games, AT games, etc.), shifts to an advantageous AT lottery game state (high-probability state, ultra-high-probability state, etc.), advantageous game stock and period extension (AT stock and The addition of the number of AT games, etc.), and the payout of the gaming value (medal) associated with the winning of the symbol combination based on the winning combination are all equivalent to the “privilege”. In addition, when there is a special state (an example of a so-called chance zone) in which the execution of the advantageous game is decided based on whether or not the correct answer is given in the correct push order, the teaching of the proper push order is stocked (so-called. , Navistock) can also be included in the “privilege”.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to display the degree of expectation that indicates the degree of expectation of at least one of such advantages. It should be noted that the “expectation degree” for the privilege may be an expectation degree regarding whether or not the above-mentioned privilege is awarded (for example, a bonus or AT winning expectation degree), or an expectation degree for the above-mentioned privilege grant amount (AT game). It may be the expected degree of the number of additional games). In the case of the degree of expectation regarding the presence or absence of the award, any display method of percent display or level display described later may be used, but in the case of the degree of expectation regarding the award amount of the privilege, the award amount may not be displayed in percentage. Level display is preferred over percent display because it is difficult. In addition to this, in the case of the expected degree of the privilege grant amount, the expected privilege grant amount may be displayed in the expectation level display.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 manages the lottery related to the winning combination, the indication function display, the awarding of the privilege, and the like. Therefore, the expectation display is managed by the main board 409. As a result, it is possible to increase the reliability of the expectation display. It should be noted that the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree display does not always have to be the actual expectation degree relating to the awarding of the privilege, and the main board 409 may determine and display the expectation degree in terms of performance. However, in the case of the "fixed display" or "premier display" described later, in order not to discourage the player, the display should be allowed only in the situation where the privilege is always granted based on the actual expectation level. Is preferred.

[11-3-7-1. Display mode of expectation display (first type)]
In the expectation display process, the main board 409 selects a display manner of the expectation display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from among a plurality of prepared display manners (for example, holding display data in the ROM 1112 or the like). .. Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree-of-expectation display can be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes that can be used in the indication function display. Hereinafter, the expectation display in such a display mode will be referred to as a “first type expectation display”. When the first type of expectation display is performed, it is not necessary to newly prepare a display manner for the expectation indication, and therefore data of a display manner prepared in advance for the indication function display (for example, stored in the ROM 1112 or the like). It is possible to display the degree of expectation by diverting.

Hereinafter, in the slot machine 1 in which the first type of expectation display is performed, the display modes of the indicating function display and the expectation display will be described with reference to specific examples of patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
96 and 97 are views (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the expectation degree display (Pattern 1) of the first type, and FIG. 96 shows a display example of the instruction function display. 97 shows a display example of expectation display. In this pattern, the special display LEDs 612a and 612b are used as an example of a display device that displays the indicating function and the degree of expectation. At this time, the display mode of the indication function display and the display mode of the expectation display are expressed by a two-digit display that is a combination of the displays of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b).

First, FIG. 96(A) shows a display example of the special display LED 612a that displays information indicating the reference of the pushing place in the indication function display. Further, FIG. 96B shows a display example of the special display LED 612b that displays information indicating the pressing order in the indication function display. Since the display example of FIG. 96(B) is the same as the display example of the special display LED 612b in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. 81, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display example of FIG. 96(A) is expanded based on the display example of the special display LED 612a in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. More specifically, in FIG. 80, four types of segments are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with four types of instruction contents (“no designation”, “chance symbol”, “red 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”). Although display patterns (“0” to “3”) were prepared, in the case of FIG. 96A, 16 types of segment display patterns (“ 0" to "9", "A" to "F") are prepared. For example, when "0", "4", "8", and [C] are displayed on the special display LED 612a as the indication function display, all indicate the instruction content of "no designation". It should be noted that which of the display modes having the same instruction content with respect to the indication of the pushing place should be selected (in the above example, "0", "4", "8" or [C] is selected) , May be determined according to a predetermined processing procedure, or may be randomly selected.

If the display examples of FIGS. 96(A) and 96(B) are used, the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an instruction function including two-digit characters or numbers. By the display, it is possible to show the content of the instruction based on a predetermined game operation in the game (standard of pushing place and pushing order). Specifically, for example, when any of “21”, “61”, “A1”, and “E1” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as the indication function display, “a forward operation stop operation aiming at the red 7 symbol is displayed. Is the instruction content of the instruction function display.

Next, FIG. 97(A) is a display example of the special display LED 612a in the expectation level display, and FIG. 97(B) is a display example of the special display LED 612b in the expectation level display. As shown in FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B), the degree of expectation display by the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is performed by the segment display of any one of “0” to “9” or “F”. Then, by using the display examples of FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B), the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an expectation level consisting of two-digit characters or numbers, and the expectation level is displayed. The degree of expectation of the privilege can be suggested by the display.

Here, the expectation degree indicated by the two-digit expectation degree display as described above will be described with a specific example. It should be noted that this kind of expectation display is also applied to other expectation displays (expectation display according to the first type pattern 2 and the second type patterns 1 and 2) described later.

When the two-digit number from “00” to “99” is displayed on the special display LED 612, it can be displayed as a percentage of the expected degree. That is, when the lowest value is "00 (0%)", the privilege cannot be expected, and when the highest value is "99 (99%)", the privilege can be expected to be large.

Further, when the display of the upper digit in the expectation degree display by the special display LED 612 (that is, the segment display of the special display LED 612a) is “F”, the award of the privilege is confirmed or the award amount of the predetermined amount or more is determined. It indicates the “confirmation status” in which the grant of the privilege is confirmed. Therefore, when "F" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, the "fixed display" is displayed regardless of the segment display of the special display LED 612b.

Further, when the segment display of both the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is “F” (that is, when the segment display of the special display LED 612 is “FF”), a more special premiere among the above-mentioned confirmed displays. Display When the premier display appears, the freeze control of the reel 301 is performed in parallel, or a specific display effect is executed on the image display body 500 controlled by the sub-board 510, so that the special display is highly rare. It is preferable to emphasize that this is a situation. Further, when the premier display is displayed, a larger privilege than when the other confirmed display is displayed may be given.

When the first type expectation display (Pattern 1) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode (see FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B)) used for the expectation display is It matches any one of a plurality of display modes (combination of segment display shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B) used in the indication function display. For example, the display of “91” on the special display LED 612 can indicate the instruction content of “stop operation of forward pressing aiming at the chance symbol” in the case of the instruction function display, while “91” for the privilege in the case of the expectation display. 91%” can be shown.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is desirable to utilize the numerical value information used for the indication function display in the expectation degree display, assuming such an expectation degree suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, only the alphabet may be used so that the degree of expectation may be difficult to understand at first glance. In such a case, even if the alphabet is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is difficult for the player to determine the degree of expectation in an instant, so that the effect of maintaining the player's expectation is expected. it can.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of the pattern 2 in the case where the first type expectation display is performed will be described. FIG. 98 is a view for explaining the first type expectation display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expectation display. In the pattern 2 of the first type, the indication function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 is used as the display example of the indication function display.

The expected degree display of the pattern 2 of the first type is displayed in two digits by the special display LEDs 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b), and FIG. 98(A) shows an example of segment display on the special display LEDs 612a. FIG. 98(B) shows an example of segment display on the special display LED 612b.

According to FIG. 98(A), the special display LED 612a displays any of "0" to "3" at the time of displaying the degree of expectation. The segment display shown in FIG. 98(A) can indicate, for example, the expected level of the expected degree, and the expected level becomes higher in the order of “0 (level 0)” to “3 (level 3)”. Further, according to FIG. 98(B), the special display LED 612b displays any one of "0" to "9" and "F" at the time of displaying the degree of expectation. The segment display shown in FIG. 98(B) can be used to indicate the expected level of the expectation level (similarly to the segment display shown in FIG. 98(A) (the expectation level from “0” to “9”). Will be higher). At this time, the segment display of “F” means a confirmation display for confirming the award of a privilege or the like.

In addition, the segment display shown in FIG. 98(B) is based on the instruction content of the instruction function display, for example, when the instruction function display is performed in the same game, in addition to showing the expected level of the expectation degree. It can be a segment display. Specifically, in the instruction function display in the same game in which the expectation degree display is performed, when any of “0” to “9” is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612b as information indicating the pressing order, the expectation degree display is displayed. Also in the above, the special display LED 612b may be made to perform the same segment display. By performing such a segment display, even if the player mistakes the expectation display for the instruction function display, it is possible to perform a stop operation based on an appropriate pressing order, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented.

When the segment display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is performed in the expectation level display, it is not necessary to perform the same segment display as the instruction function display as in the above example. Before the first stop, the segment display corresponding to the instruction content with which the reel 301 to be first stopped can be recognized may be displayed as the expectation display. Specifically, for example, when “right first (2 choices)” is determined as the instruction content of the pressing order, according to the display example of FIG. 81, “C” is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612b as the instruction function display. To be done. At this time, from the viewpoint that the display mode of the special display LED 612b in the expectation level display may be a segment display of the instruction content such that the right reel 301c is first stopped, "5 (right left middle)", "6 ( It is also possible to display a segment display of either "right middle left"" or "9 (first right)".

When the first type expectation display (Pattern 2) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode used in the expectation display (see FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B)) is This matches any one of a plurality of display modes (combination of segment displays shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) used in the indication function display. For example, the display of “11” on the special display LED 612 indicates the instruction content of “stop operation of forward pressing aiming at the chance symbol” in the case of the instruction function display, but the expectation degree for the privilege is “in the expectation degree display”. Level 1".

It should be noted that when the first type expectation display shown in Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 is performed, the order and timing of the indication function indication and the expectation indication are displayed on the special display LED 612. Will be described in detail in [11-3-7-3] and later. In any case, since the first type expectation display is performed, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform the expectation display using the display mode of the instruction function display.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation display is performed, the display on the special display LED 612 is performed in a display mode that can be recognized as either the instruction function display or the expectation display. It is possible to entertain the player as to which display is being performed.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is progressed by the game operation (appropriate stop operation) based on the instruction content of the instruction function display, advantageous advantageous privilege can be given to the player. Specifically, for example, a push order bell combination is won, an indication function display is performed, and an appropriate stop operation is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the indication function display. The symbol combination with the largest number of payouts out of the symbol combinations is stopped, and the medal with the largest number of payouts is awarded. On the other hand, although the degree of expectation display can indicate the degree of expectation of the privilege, the degree of benefit indicated by the degree of expectation display can be a different privilege different from the advantageous privilege guided by the instruction function display. Specifically, the different privilege here corresponds to, for example, the degree of expectation regarding the determination of a bonus game or an AT game, the degree of expectation regarding the addition of the number of AT games, and the like. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays such a display mode by making it possible to display such an instruction function display and an expectation level display on a specific display device (special display LED 612) using a common display mode. In this case, the player can have an expectation of different types of benefits (advantageous benefits and different benefits) at the same time, and entertain the player whether the display mode is based on the indication function display or the expectation level display. For. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing monotonization of the game without getting tired of the game.

For example, regarding the display on the special display LED 612, if the reel stop operation is performed because it is considered to be the indication function display, and the indication remains after the timing at which the indication function display disappears by performing the stop operation. Since it can be seen that the degree of expectation is displayed instead of the indication function display, the player can expect to give a privilege according to the degree of expectation indicated by the display. Therefore, when some kind of display is displayed on the special display LED 612, the player advances the game while praying that it is not the instruction function display, and therefore the expectation level display is displayed, that is, the privilege. It is possible to make the player have an expectation for the grant of.

In the example of the previous stage, the case where the game is advanced while it is difficult to determine whether the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is based on the indication function display or the expectation level display is explained, but the present embodiment The form is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, by blinking the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 or changing the display color, it is possible that the display mode is highly likely to be the expectation display. Or, for example, the display mode is the same as the indication function display at first, but after that, by performing the blinking display as described above, the display mode is the expectation display. There is a high possibility that

Then, in such an expectation level display, the display contents are determined by the main board 409 itself which draws the winning combination and determines the grant of the privilege based on the lottery result of the lottery, and the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409. It is possible to make the player assume that the expectation degree of the privilege directly connected to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the expectation degree display.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case where the first type expectation degree display can be performed, even if the instruction function display is performed, the expectation degree display is further performed so that the privilege is given. It can be expected that a winning combination with a high degree of expectation has been selected (a winning combination with a high expectation).

More specifically, in a game state such as an AT game in which the instruction function display is frequently executed, the instruction function display is mainly performed at the time of winning such as a push order bell or replay. However, as described above in the explanation regarding the winning combination (for example, [10-1], etc.), the push order bell and the replay are high winning combinations that are relatively easy to win in the internal lottery, and the degree of expectation regarding advantageous games is low. It is a "low expectation". On the other hand, the watermelon role, the cherry role, the chance role, etc., which are considered to be “highly expected roles” with high expectations regarding advantageous games, are low-winning roles that are relatively difficult to win in the internal lottery, but these high expectations are high. Since the winning combination is a pressing order-independent combination in which the payout number does not change depending on the pressing order, the instruction function display is not necessarily required even during the AT game. That is, in a game state such as an AT game, there is a high possibility that a low expected winning combination will be won at the time when the instruction function display is performed, and the degree of expectation regarding awarding of the privilege tends to be low. ..

In order to solve such a problem, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation display using the display mode of the indication function display is performed as the first type expectation display, so that it is special during the AT game or the like. Even if the indicating function is displayed on the display LED 612, it can be expected to be the expectation display. If the display on the special display LED 612 is the degree of expectation display, it can be expected that the player has won the high expectation combination. Therefore, even if the indication function display is performed, the expectation for the high expectation combination is maintained, You can entertain the game.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation level is more easily displayed when the high expected combination is selected in the winning combination lottery than when the low expected combination is selected in the winning combination lottery. It is desirable to do. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination is the push-bell operation (an example of a low expected combination), the probability of actuation of the expectation display is set to 0.01 (1%), while the winning combination is the weak watermelon combination. If it is (an example of a high expectation combination), if the probability of actuation of the expectation display is 0.50 (50%), it is possible that the player has won a high expectation combination when the expectation display is performed. Since it is high, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation regarding the expectation display.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of a method of setting the probability of actuation of the expectation display for increasing the possibility of winning the high expectation combination when the expectation display is performed, using the above example. Referring to the lottery table of the winning combination lottery (FIG. 49 ), the winning probability of all the push-order bell combinations (AT1 to AT10) is 3200/65535 in the general state or the bonus internal state, and the winning probability of the weak watermelon combination is , 800/65535, the probability of appearance of the winning combination is multiplied by the probability of winning of each winning combination, and thus the probability of appearance of the winning combination of the winning combination (that is, the winning combination of the winning combination It is possible to calculate the probability of display). The expected degree display appearance probability of the push order bell combination is (32000/65535×0.01), and the expected degree display appearance probability of the weak watermelon combination is (800/65535×0.50). Then, by comparing the ratios of the expected degree display appearance probability of the low expected role and the expected degree display appearance probability of the high expected role, when the expected degree display is performed, the proportion of the winning combination being the high expected role ( Alternatively, it is possible to calculate a ratio in which the winning combination is a low expected combination. For example, if you calculate the ratio of the probability display appearance probabilities of the push order bell role and the weak watermelon role, you can see that the weak watermelon role occupies 55.56%, and only when the push order bell role or watermelon role is won. If it is determined that the expectation degree display can be performed, it means that more than half of the time when the expectation degree display is performed is a weak watermelon role (high expectation role). If such an idea is extended to all winning combinations, if the probability display appearance probability of the high expected combination is at least 50% or more of the probability display appearance probability of all winning combinations, the expectation display will be increased. It is possible to increase the possibility that you have won a high expectation role when played. If the operation probability at the time of winning the high expected winning combination is set too high, there is a possibility that it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the high expected winning combination when the expectation level is not displayed. Therefore, a reference value (for example, 70%) regarding the upper limit of the operation probability may be provided so that a certain degree of expectation can be obtained without displaying the degree of expectation.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation degree display is performed, it is possible to have the expectation for the high expectation hand as described above, and thus the game operation according to the instruction function display. Even in an AT game where the game tends to be monotonous, the effect of suppressing monotony of the game is realized by entertaining whether the display on the special display LED 612 is the indication function display or the expectation display. can do.

It should be noted that in the first type of expectation display, all the display modes used for the indication function display do not have to be used as the display modes of the expectation display. Further, for a very small part of the display such as the premier display, a display mode specific to the expectation display, which is not used for the indication function display, may be used.

In addition, when the player erroneously recognizes the expectation display displayed on the special display LED 612 as the indication function display when performing the first type expectation display, the instruction content of the indication function display corresponding to the indication is displayed. It is conceivable that a stop operation will be performed according to the above. In such a case, if the operation procedure that is disadvantageous to the player is eventually guided, the player's interest may be reduced. Therefore, when performing the first type expectation level display, It is preferable to perform the expected degree display while avoiding a display mode in which the operation procedure when the degree display is read as the instruction function display may be a disadvantageous operation procedure.

The expectation display is performed by avoiding the display mode in which the operation procedure when the expectation display is replaced with the instruction function display may be a disadvantageous operation procedure, in particular, the reel stop operation for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is performed. Previously, it should be taken into consideration when the degree of expectation is displayed. Specifically, for example, when the instruction content to be displayed in the instruction function display is “reverse press”, the segment display corresponding to the instruction content of “reverse press” is used to display the degree of expectation, or at least the first It is preferable to perform the degree-of-expectation display using the display mode of the instruction function display in which the reel 301 to be stopped becomes the right reel 301c. Referring to the display example of FIG. 96, as the segment display on the special display LED 612b, the segment display of the instruction content for first stopping the right reel 301c is “5 (right left middle)”, “6 (right middle left). )”, “9 (first right)”, and “C (first right (2 choices))”. Therefore, in such a case, when performing the expected degree display by the percentage display, the display of the lower digit of the special display LED 612 (that is, the display on the special display LED 612b) is any one of "5", "6", and "9". You can do it. Considering the reels to be stopped second, since the segment display “6 (right middle left)” is a stop mode contrary to “reverse push”, if possible, the lower digit of the expectation display is “5” or “9”. It is preferable that

[11-3-7-2. Display mode of expectation display (second type)]
In the expectation degree display of the first type, it has been described that the expectation degree display is performed in any one of the plurality of display manners that can be used in the indication function display. However, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment In, it is possible to perform the expectation degree display in a display mode different from any of the plurality of display modes that can be used in the indication function display. Hereinafter, the degree of expectation display in such a display mode will be referred to as a “second type expectation degree display”. When the second type expectation display is performed, it is necessary to prepare a display manner for the expectation display separately from the display manner for the indication function display. Therefore, it corresponds to a plurality of display manners for the expectation display. A plurality of display data are stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

Hereinafter, in the slot machine 1 in which the second type of expectation degree display is performed, the display modes of the instruction function display and the expectation degree display will be described with reference to specific examples of patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the second type expectation display (Pattern 1), and shows a display example of the expectation display. The expected degree display of the pattern 1 of the second type is displayed in two digits by the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b), and FIG. 99(A) shows an example of segment display in the special display LED 612a. FIG. 99(B) shows an example of segment display on the special display LED 612b. In the pattern 1 of the second type, the indication function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 is used as the display example of the indication function display. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed, any one of "0" to "3" is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612a, and "0" to "9", "A" to "" on the special display LED 612b. Any of "F" is segment-displayed.

According to FIG. 99(A), in the special display LED 612a, any one of "L", "H", and "F" is segment-displayed at the time of the expectation display. Here, the segment display of "L" on the special display LED 612a means that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the segment display of "H" means that the degree of expectation is relatively high. In addition, the segment display of “F” means that the grant of the privilege (or the grant of the privilege with a predetermined amount or more) is confirmed (confirmation display). Further, according to FIG. 99(B), the special display LED 612b displays any one of "0" to "9" and "F" in the segment display at the time of expectation display. Here, the segment display of “0” to “9” on the special display LED 612b indicates the expected level of the expectation degree, where “0” is the lowest expectation level and “9” is the highest expectation level. High expectations level. Further, the segment display of "F" on the special display LED 612b is used for a more special premier display among the finalized display in which "F" is segment displayed on the special display LED 612a. Details of the premium display are the same as those described above with reference to FIG. When the premium display is performed in the expectation display of the pattern 1 of the second type, “FF” is displayed on the special display LED 612.

In the case where the expectation degree display of the pattern 1 of the second type is performed, the two-digit display mode by the special display LED 612 shows a rough expectation degree in the upper digits (“L”, “H”, “F”). The lower digit (“0” to “9”, “A” to “F”) can indicate a more detailed expected degree.

Then, the display mode of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) is not individually captured, but is regarded as the special display LED 612 that is displayed in a two-digit display mode, and the expected degree display including such two digits is displayed. Comparing the display mode with the display mode of the instruction function display (see FIGS. 80 and 81), the higher digits of the expectation display (“L”, “H”, “F”) are in the higher digits of the instruction function display. Since it is not displayed, it can be seen that the display mode of the two-digit expectation display is different from the display mode of the indication function display.

That is, when the expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, some indication is displayed on the special display LED 612 without being clearly indicated by the indication function display or the expectation level display. Even if the mode is displayed, if the high-order digit (special display LED 612a) of the display mode is any of "L", "H", and "F", the degree of expectation is displayed and "0" to "3". It is possible to determine that the display is the indication function display if any of the above.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of the pattern 2 when the second type expectation display is performed will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the second type expectation display (Pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expectation display. In the pattern 2 of the second type, the indication function display of the second example shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 is used as the display example of the indication function display. Therefore, in this case, the special display LED 612 on which the expected degree display and the indication function display are displayed is, more specifically, one dot-attached 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, in the indication function display using the special display LED 612c, the upper 4 bits indicate the standard of the pressing place, and the lower 4 bits indicate the pressing order. By performing lighting control corresponding to each digit bit of the data on the basis of (instruction function display data), the special display LED 612c can indicate both the indication of the pushing place and the pushing order.

On the other hand, according to FIG. 100, in the expectation display of the pattern 2 of the second type using the special display LED 612c, the segment display of "0" to "9" is performed based on the degree of expectation. Further, in the expected degree display of the pattern 2 of the second type, the segment display of “F” is the confirmed display. Note that, in FIG. 2 and No. 2 in FIG. In order to avoid overlapping with the segment display (displayed as the number "3") when the indicator function is displayed in combination with 15, the dot segment is lit when displaying "3" in the expectation display. I am trying to let you.

When such an expectation display of the second type pattern 2 is performed, the display mode of the expectation display is any alphanumeric character from "0" to "9" or "F". On the other hand, the display mode of the indication function display is highly likely to be a symbol display because the lighting control is performed corresponding to each digit bit of the 8-bit binary data (data for indication function display). Comparing the specific examples in which the display examples of FIG. 84 are combined, there is no overlap with the display mode of the expectation display.

That is, when the expectation degree display of the second type pattern 2 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special indication LED 612 (special indication Even if some display mode appears on the LED 612c), if the display mode is any one of "0" to "9" and "F", it is an expectation display, and if it is other than that, it is an indication function display. It becomes possible to determine that there is.

It should be noted that when the second type expectation display shown in Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 is performed, in what order and timing the instruction function display and the expectation display are displayed on the special display LED 612. Will be described in detail in [11-3-7-3] and later. In any case, by performing such a second type expectation display, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform the expectation display in a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display. ..

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type expectation display is performed, regarding the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612, whether the instruction function display or the expectation display is displayed. Since it is identifiable, the expected effect can be executed by the expectation display without causing the player to mistakenly recognize it, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by displaying the expectation display. Further, since the instruction function display and the expectation degree display are displayed by the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, effects on the image display body 500 managed by the sub board 510 (for example, a screen related to navigation display or expectation degree). Regardless of the presence/absence of display, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned improvement in the enjoyment of the game.

Then, in such an expectation level display, the display contents are determined by the main board 409 itself which draws the winning combination and determines the grant of the privilege based on the lottery result of the lottery, and the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409. It is possible to make the player assume that the expectation degree of the privilege directly connected to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and it is possible to enhance the reliability of the expectation degree display.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type expectation display can be performed, the expectation display is performed when the display mode different from the indication function display is displayed on the special display LED 612. Since it becomes clear, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the privilege from the point in the middle of the game. In particular, as mentioned in the first type of expectation display, the expectation display should be executed more easily when the high expectation combination is selected in the winning combination lottery than when the low expectation combination is selected. (For example, as shown in the first type, if the winning combination is the push-bell combination, the probability of displaying the expectation is 0.01, while if the winning combination is the weak watermelon, the expectation is displayed. It is possible to create a situation in which it is highly possible that the player has won a high expectation role when the expectation level is displayed, such as by setting the probability of actuation of 0.50). Can be increased.

Further, in a game state in which the instruction function display is frequently executed, such as an AT game, the instruction function display is displayed when the push order bell or the like is won, and a monotonous operation is performed only by repeating the game operation according to the instruction content of the instruction function display. Although it tends to be a game, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the second type of expectation display to be performed, so that the expectation display in a display mode different from the indication function display can be performed. It is possible to generate a possibility of occurrence, and it is possible to suppress monotony of a game such as during an AT game.

The expected degree display illustrated in FIGS. 96 to 100 suggests the expected degree when at least some display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612, but regarding the state in which nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. May also be regarded as one expectation display (for example, the lowest expectation).

[11-3-7-3. Priority display regarding expectation display]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 displays not only the instruction function display showing the instruction content regarding the predetermined game operation, but also the expectation display indicating the expectation degree of the privilege. You can Then, the main board 409 can be controlled to preferentially display either the expectation level display or the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 during the unit game (one game) (priority display).

Here, the above-described priority display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is, from the viewpoint of priority control, display control in which display timing is given priority (timing priority display), and display in which display layers are given priority. It can be divided into control (priority display of layers). Further, the priority display described above is, from the viewpoint of the priority target, an expectation priority display in which the expectation display is displayed with priority over the indication function display, and an indication function in which the indication function display is displayed with priority over the expectation display. It can be divided into priority display.

Hereinafter, such various priority displays will be described in detail with specific examples.

[11-3-7-3-1. Timing priority display]
Here, priority display of timing will be described. In the priority display of timing, by providing a difference in priority in display timing between the expectation display and the instruction function display, when the expectation display and the instruction function display are displayed in the unit game, The high-priority display is displayed on the special display LED 612 prior to the low-priority display. As for the setting of the priority difference on the display timing, the information in which the priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 for each unit game based on the gaming state, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery, and the like. May be set to perform the processing.

In the priority display of timing, the display with low priority is not displayed on the special display LED 612 simply by turning off the display with high priority. After the display with the high priority is turned off, the display with the low priority is turned on separately, so that the display with the low priority is performed, and the expectation display and the expectation display are performed in the unit game. Both of the indication function displays will be displayed on the special display LED 612.

(1) Expectation Priority Display First, the expectation priority display, in which the expectation display is given a higher priority than the instruction function display, will be described. It is assumed that the priority of the indication function display is lower than that of the expectation display, but the indication function display may be explicitly given a low priority, or it is handled in an initial state where no priority is given. May be.

Further, in the expectation degree priority display, when both the expectation degree display and the indication function display are displayed in the unit game, the expectation degree display is displayed on the special display LED 612 before the indication function display. Even in such a case, it is preferable to switch to the indication function display by the display timing at which the indication function display should be performed. Specifically, for example, in a game in which it is decided to display the instruction content regarding the first stop reel by the instruction function display, before the first reel stop operation is performed (more specifically, the first reel stop operation). The degree of expectation displayed before the operation is ready to be accepted and before the predetermined timing of “Begin receiving acceptance of stop button press” shown in FIG. 101A described later) The display is turned off and the instruction function display is turned on so that the instruction function display for instructing the operation mode of the first reel stop operation is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the predetermined timing. It is preferable.

Further, assuming that the instruction function display is performed after the expectation level display is performed in the unit game, after the game operation based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is finished (for example, after the third stop button is pressed) The expectation level display may be displayed again on the special display LED 612. Then, the display form of the expectation display again displayed may be different from the display form of the expectation display previously displayed. Specifically, for example, “30%” in the previous expectation display. By changing the expectation degree in the same unit game by displaying the expectation degree of “80%” in the expected degree display that is displayed again. You may.

FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a display example when priority display of timing (expectation priority display) is performed. 101A is a timing chart showing display periods of various types of display, and FIG. 101B is a diagram showing transition of an example of a liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500 in the display example.

The items shown on the horizontal axis of FIG. 101A are typical timings in the course of the game, but the items other than the freeze start and freeze end items are common to the items described in FIG. 90 and the like. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. It should be noted that "freeze start" and "freeze end" indicate start timing and end timing when the freeze control is performed during the rotation control of the reel 301, and during the period when the freeze control is performed, the reel stop button is pressed. Even if an operation is performed on 211, the operation is not accepted and is invalid. Therefore, the stop operation for stopping the reel 301 cannot be performed on the reel stop button 211.

On the vertical axis of FIG. 101(A), an instruction function display 701, an expectation degree display 702, and a liquid crystal effect display 703 are described as various displays showing the display period. Both the indication function display 701 and the expectation level display 702 are displayed on the special display LED 612 (more specifically, at least one of the special display LEDs 612a, 612b, and 612c). When the display is ON, the display is performed, and when the display is OFF. Means that the display is not performed. In FIG. 101A, a segment display example is described when the indication function display 701 or the expectation degree display 702 is ON. This segment display example is the indication function display example of FIG. 96 and the expectation degree of FIG. 97. The segment display example corresponds to the display example. However, such a segment display example is only an example, and other instruction function display examples (for example, see FIGS. 80, 81, 83, 84, 86 to 88, etc.) and other expectations. It may be a segment display example corresponding to the display example (see, for example, FIGS. 98 to 100).

Further, the liquid crystal effect display 703 of FIG. 101A corresponds to the effect display displayed on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510, and when ON, the degree of expectation display or instruction on the image display body 500. This means that the effect display related to the function display is performed, and when OFF, it means that the effect display related to the expectation degree display or the instruction function display is not performed on the image display body 500. Note that, in general, the image display body 500 displays some effect throughout the unit game, and even if the liquid crystal effect display 703 is OFF in FIG. 101(A) or a similar timing chart described later, the image display is performed. It does not mean that no effect display is displayed on the body 500.

FIG. 101(B) shows a screen example of the effect display concerning the expectation degree display or the instruction function display displayed on the image display body 500 when the liquid crystal effect display 703 is turned on in FIG. 101(A). ing. The screen example of FIG. 101(B) is an example when a predetermined effect display is displayed on the image display body 500 based on the display mode of the expectation degree display or the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. In such a case In addition, by assisting the effect display by the image display body 500, it becomes possible to more surely inform the player of the display mode of each display on the special display LED 612. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to perform the effect display regarding the expectation level display or the instruction function display.

The above description of each item in FIGS. 101A and 101B is the same in the same drawings (FIGS. 102 to 104) described later, and the description thereof will be omitted hereinafter.

Explaining the change of the display accompanying the progress of the game with reference to FIG. 101(A) and FIG. 101(B), first, the expectation display 702 is turned ON during the period from the start of the reel rotation to the start of the freeze after the start of the game. Then, the special display LED 612 displays the expectation degree of the display mode “30”. Referring to FIG. 97, the degree of expectation display of the display mode “30” means that the degree of expectation of a privilege is 30%. Since the period in which the above-mentioned expectation display is displayed is before the start of the stop button press acceptance, the player cannot perform the game operation for stopping the reel 301 (stop operation for the reel stop button 211). Further, while the special display LED 612 is displaying the degree of expectation in the display mode "30", the liquid crystal effect display 730 may display an effect display of "CHANCE?" (a), so that it may be possible to expect something from the game. It suggests to the player that he cannot. However, the feeling of expectation due to the effect display of (a) does not give a stronger feeling of expectation as compared with the effect display of (d) described later.

After that, when the freeze control is started, the expectation degree display 702 is turned off, but since the instruction function display 701 is not turned on yet at the timing immediately after the start of the freeze, nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. Then, the instruction function display 701 is turned on when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the freeze, and thus the instruction function display of the display mode “31” is performed on the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display mode “31” means the instruction content of “the guide of the pushing place is the BAR symbol and the pushing order is the forward pushing”. Then, such an instruction function display is continuously displayed until the timing (stopping the third stop button) when the stop operation for all reels 301 ends, and then turned off. In the liquid crystal effect display 703, first, while the freeze control is being executed, the effect screen dedicated to the freeze is displayed ((b) effect display). After the freeze ends, while the instruction function display 701 is ON, the navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “31” is displayed (effect display of (c)). When the effect display of (b) is performed, the player is notified that the freeze control is occurring, and by the effect display of (c), the instruction content of the instruction function display is assisted to play the game. It is possible to encourage a person to perform an appropriate game operation.

Then, after the third stop button is pressed, the indication function display 701 is turned off, the expectation degree display 702 is turned on again, and the expectation degree display is performed by the special display LED 612. As shown in FIG. 101(A), in the expectation display 702 that is turned on again, a display manner “80” different from the display manner “30” in the previous expectation display is displayed, starting from 30%. The expected degree of increase to 80% is shown. Further, the display mode of the liquid crystal effect display 703 is also changed in accordance with the turning on of the expectation degree display 702, and the effect display of “CHANCE!!” (d) is performed as shown in FIG. 101(B). This makes it possible to increase the sense of expectation in the game over the effect display of (a).

After that, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends when the payout is completed. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the effect display (e) of "confirm bonus!", thereby giving a bonus benefit in the completed previous game. Teach that has been confirmed. The effect display of (e) is turned off at the timing when the start lever is pressed so as not to interfere with the effect display in the next game.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display (expectation priority display) as shown in FIG. Since the display is first displayed on the special display LED 612 in the unit game, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the privilege from a relatively early stage in the unit game. In particular, in a game state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, a display different from the instruction function display may suddenly occur, so that each game and the player feel a sense of tension and expectation. You can make it happen.

Further, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed such as during an AT game, the expectation degree display is first displayed, so that the instruction function display is not performed. , [11-3-7-1], etc.), and it is possible to presume that such a low winning combination is a high expecting combination with a relatively high expectation for benefits. It is possible to greatly improve the player's expectation of granting a privilege.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of timing (expectation priority display) is performed, so that the instruction function display having a lower priority than the expectation display is also taught by the instruction function display. Since the instruction function display can be performed on the special display LED 612 at a timing at which the player can perform the predetermined game operation, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the predetermined game operation and being disadvantaged. it can. Further, after the display period of the indication function display is finished, the expectation display can be displayed again by changing the display mode, so that even if the expectation in the previous expectation display is relatively low, It is possible to make the player hope that the degree of expectation may be higher in the degree of expectation display. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (expectation priority display) is performed, so that the player's interest in the game result can be maintained throughout the unit game, which is amusement of the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is the display content of the expectation display and the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, the information can be notified to the player more reliably.

(2) Instructed Function Priority Display Next, an instructed function priority display in which the instructed function display is given a higher priority than the expected degree display will be described. It is assumed that the priority of the expectation display is lower than that of the indication function display. However, the expectation display may be explicitly given a lower priority, or it is handled in the initial state where no priority is given. May be.

Further, in the indication function priority display, when both the expectation degree display and the indication function display are displayed in the unit game, the expectation degree display is displayed after the indication function display is displayed on the special display LED 612. The expectation level display is displayed at a timing that avoids the period in which the instruction function display should be displayed.

In many cases, the specific “period in which the indication function display should be displayed” is at least the period from the start of the stop button press acceptance (a certain time before) to the third stop button press. It is preferable that the expectation display is displayed at any timing after the third stop button is pressed. However, if the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display is satisfied when the first reel stop operation is performed (for example, if the instruction content indicates only the first stop reel), “display the instruction function display” is displayed. The “power period” is not limited to the above, and in such a case, the timing before the completion of the stop operation (pressing the third stop button) for all reels 301a to 301c (for example, the first The expectation level may be displayed after the reel stop operation).

FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a display example when priority display of timings (instruction function priority display) is performed. 102A is a timing chart showing display periods of various types of display, and FIG. 102B is a diagram showing transition of an example of a liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500 in the display example.

To explain the change in display accompanying the progress of the game with reference to FIGS. 102(A) and 102(B), first, after the start of the game, during the period from the start of reel rotation to the pressing of the first stop button via freeze control, The indication function display 701 is turned on, and the indication function “29” is displayed on the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display form “29” means the instruction content of “a guide of the pushing place is a red 7 symbol and the pushing order is the right first stop”. Since this instruction content corresponds to the instruction content for instructing only the first stop reel because the remaining reels 301a and 301b may be stopped in any order as long as the reel 301c is stopped first, The instruction function display of the aspect “29” is turned off at the timing when the first stop button is pressed. During this period, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “29” (effect display of (a)).

At the timing of pressing the first stop button, the instruction function display 701 is turned off and the expectation degree display 702 is turned on, so that the expectation degree display of the display mode “F9” is performed on the special display LED 612. With reference to FIG. 97, the expectation level display of the display mode “F9” is a finalized effect regarding the grant of the privilege. The expectation display is continuously displayed until the timing when all reels are stopped. In the liquid crystal effect display 703 of this period, based on the expectation display, the effect display (the effect display of (b)) indicating that the degree of expectation for the privilege “super heat” is considerably high is displayed. It is possible to increase the expectation of the person.

The lower digit of the display mode of the expectation display in FIG. 102(A) is set to "9" because the display mode "9" indicating the pushing order in the instruction function display is inherited. By doing so, even if the player does not notice that the display on the special display LED 612 is changed from the indication function display to the expectation degree display, the display mode showing the pressing order is not changed so that the game operation is performed. You can avoid anxiety.

According to FIG. 102(A), after the expectation level display 702 is turned off at the timing when the reels are completely stopped, both the instruction function display 701 and the expectation level display 702 are turned off until the unit game ends. .. At this time, on the liquid crystal effect display 703, the effect display of (c) “Bonus confirmed!” is displayed, thereby informing that the grant of the bonus is confirmed in the game.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (instruction function priority display) as illustrated in FIG. 101 is performed, so that the indication function having a higher priority than the expectation display is given. Since the display is first displayed on the special display LED 612 in the unit game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, the expectation display may be displayed in the subsequent unit game. It has the effect of making the player have a sense of expectation of appearing and maintaining amusement of interest throughout the unit game. In particular, in the game state where the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation display is displayed after that, the benefit of the game is Since it can be expected to be granted, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (instruction function priority display) is performed, so that the special display LED 612 can perform the instruction function display at an early stage in the unit game. The proper game operation based on the function display can be taught to the player without fail, and the risk of the player performing an unfavorable game operation by overlooking the instruction function display can be avoided. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the player's enjoyment of the game due to performing an unfavorable game operation and gives the player a sense of security. You can

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is the display content of the expectation display and the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, the information can be notified to the player more reliably.

[11-3-7-3-2. Layer priority display]
Here, priority display of layers will be described. In the priority display of layers, by providing a difference in display control priority between the display layer for displaying the degree of expectation and the display layer for displaying the indication function, the priority level is displayed in the unit game. Even when the indication function display is output to the display (for example, the special display LED 612) in parallel, the display layer (upper display layer) having a higher priority is preferentially displayed on the special display LED 612. It As for the setting of the priority difference in the display control, the information in which the priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main substrate 409 for each unit game based on the gaming state, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery, and the like. May be set to perform the processing.

Then, in the priority display of layers, the output of the display layer (upper display layer) with a high priority is changed from the situation in which the expectation display and the indication function display are output in parallel (the both are ON). When it is turned off, the display on the special display LED 612 is switched to the display of the display layer (lower display layer) with a lower priority.

Regarding the priority display of the layer layers, if the display device that is the output destination of the display layer is a segment LED such as the special display LED 612, only the display layer with the highest priority among the display layers output in parallel is displayed. Although displayed, for example, when a display device capable of superimposing display such as a liquid crystal display is selected as an output destination, the output display layers are simultaneously displayed in superimposition, and a display layer having a high priority is displayed. , The color, the brightness, the display cycle, or the like may be provided so as to be highlighted. However, in the case of performing such a superimposed display, for example, when the display layer of the instruction function display is highlighted, the effect display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is performed on the image display body 500. It is preferable that auxiliary control is performed so that the player can recognize the displayed display layer.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such priority display of the layer layers, mutual display such that a blank display period does not occur between the respective displays (expectation level display and instruction function display). Even if the output timing is not adjusted in consideration of the general display timing, the priority display of the upper display layer and the switching of the display layers can be realized only by outputting at each output timing. Therefore, the display control by the main board 409 is possible. The above load can be reduced, which in turn can contribute to the reduction of the program capacity of the main board 409.

In the following, regarding the priority display of layers, the expectation priority display and the indication function priority display will be respectively described. However, no matter what priority display is performed, the display mode of the indication function display is at the display timing at which the indication function display should be performed. Is displayed on the special display LED 612 as in the case of the priority display of the timing described above.

(1) Expectation Priority Display First, of the layer priority display, the expectation priority display realized by setting the expectation display layer as the upper display layer and the indication function display layer as the lower display layer will be described. To do.

FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a display example when priority display of layers (expectation priority display) is performed. 103A is a timing chart showing display periods of various types of display, and FIG. 103B is a diagram showing a transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

The display example shown in FIG. 103 is a winning pattern which is not illustrated in FIGS. 49 and 50, but the winning combination lottery results in a bonus combination (eg, “BB1”) and a high expected combination (eg, “strong watermelon combination”). This is a display example when both and are simultaneously elected.

Explaining the change of the display accompanying the progress of the game with reference to FIG. 103(A) and FIG. 103(B), first, in the upper display layer from the start of the reel to the predetermined timing after the start of the freeze after the start of the game. A certain expectation display 702 is output (ON), and the special display LED 612 displays the expectation in the display mode “90”. Referring to FIG. 97, the degree of expectation display of the display mode “90” means a considerably high degree of expectation of the privilege being 90%. Since the period in which the above-mentioned expectation display is displayed is before the start of the stop button press acceptance, the player cannot perform the game operation for stopping the reel 301 (stop operation for the reel stop button 211).

On the other hand, the instruction function display 701, which is a lower display layer, is turned on some time after the reel rotation is started, but is not displayed on the special display LED 612 while the expectation level display 702 is turned on (FIG. Equivalent to the broken line portion in A)). Then, if the expectation degree display 702 is turned off before the freeze control is finished, the output of the upper display layer disappears, so that the display of the special display LED 612 is switched from the expectation degree display 702 to the instruction function display 701. The instruction function display of the aspect “26” is performed. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display mode “26” means the instruction content of “a guide of the pushing place is a red 7 pattern and the pushing order is reverse pushing”. After that, the ON state of the instruction function display 701 continues until the third stop button is pressed, but the expectation degree display 702 as the upper display layer does not become the ON state during this time, so the instruction function display is continuously displayed on the special display LED 612. To be done.

Further, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, from the start of the reel rotation to the end of the freeze, as an effect display based on the display content of the expectation degree display 702, (a) an effect of “intense heat” that indicates a high degree of expectation. By the display, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation regarding the benefit of the game is very high. After that, after the freeze control is finished, as the navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, the special display is performed by performing the effect display of (b) that makes it possible to aim the red 7 symbol by reverse pressing. Not only the LED 612 but also the image display body 500 can teach the player a proper game operation, so that the player can be prevented from performing an inappropriate game operation.

After that, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends when the payout is completed. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, the effect display of (c) "Bonus confirmed!!" is displayed, and it is possible to teach that the award of bonus has been confirmed in the completed previous game. ..

The sub-board 510 may change the display timing of the bonus finalized effect of (c) based on the stop position of the reel 301, the operation mode by the player, and the like. Specifically, for example, when all reels are stopped by reversely pressing according to the instruction contents of the instruction function display 701, the stop timing is shifted and the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop, or a strong watermelon role that is simultaneously won. When the symbol combination is stopped, the display in the next game as shown in FIG. 103(A) is performed. On the other hand, as a result of the appropriate stop operation being performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, when the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped, the bonus fixed effect of (c) is displayed at the timing of the reel all stop. You can do this. In this way, the sub-board 510 adjusts the display timing of the liquid crystal effect display based on the stop position of the reel 301 or the like, so that it is possible to perform the effect display with a small deviation from the game situation, and feel a sense of discomfort in the progress of the game. You can prevent it from happening.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the layers (expectation degree priority display) as illustrated in FIG. 103 is performed, so that the special display LED 612 displays the expectation degree display and is appropriately displayed. Since it is possible to switch to the indication function display at a timing and teach the player proper game operation, expectation for high expected winning combination by expectation degree display and expectation for game result by performing appropriate game operation Both feeling and feeling can be enhanced. In particular, when the high degree of expectation display is displayed as shown in FIG. 103, the game is instructed by the subsequent instruction function display so that the opportunity to give the privilege is not lost by the improper game operation. You can be careful about the operation.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a situation where it is particularly important to let the player perform an appropriate stop operation, such as when a special replay combination having different stop types depending on the pressing order is won, priority display of layers ( By performing the expectation degree priority display), it is possible to greatly expect a deterrent effect that prevents the player from performing an unfavorable game operation.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display is preferentially displayed in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, by performing the priority display of layers (expectation priority display). At this time, it is possible to presume that the player has won the low winning combination (for details, see the description such as [11-3-7-1]) in which the instruction function is not displayed, and thus, Since the low winning combination is a high expecting combination having a relatively high degree of expectation for the privilege, the player's expectation for granting the privilege can be greatly improved.

(2) Indication function priority display Next, in the layer priority display, the indication function priority display realized by setting the indication function display layer as the upper display layer and the expectation degree display layer as the lower display layer explain.

FIG. 104 is a diagram for describing a display example when priority display of layers (priority display of designated functions) is performed. FIG. 104(A) is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 104(B) is a diagram showing a transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example. The display example shown in FIG. 104 is a display example when the weak cherry winning combination is won by the winning combination lottery.

Explaining the change of the display accompanying the progress of the game with reference to FIG. 104(A) and FIG. 104(B), first, after the start of the game, from the start of the reel rotation to the start of the payout, the degree of expectation display which is a lower display layer 702 is output in the display mode of "76" (ON). Referring to FIG. 97, the display of the degree of expectation of the display form “76” means that the degree of expectation of the privilege is 76%. However, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 104(A), since the instruction function display 701, which is the upper display layer, is output (ON) from a predetermined timing after the start of freeze to the pressing of the third stop button, No special degree LED is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, the period in which the expectation level display of the display mode “76” is displayed by the special display LED 612 is the “previous display period” from the reel rotation start to the predetermined timing after the freeze start, and from the third stop button press to the payout start. It is the "post-display period".

Then, the special display LED 612 displays the display mode “36” as the instruction function display from the “previous display period” to the “post display period”. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display form “36” means the instruction content of “a guide of the pushing place is a BAR symbol, and the pushing order is reverse pushing”. In addition, since the winning combination in the game is weak cherry, it is originally a push-order indeterminate combination. However, when a stop operation is performed by reversely pressing the BAR symbol, the accessory 19 (weak combination) shown in FIG. Since the symbol combination of the condition device corresponding to cherry) is drawn in on the activated line, even if the game operation is performed with the instruction content, the game result is not disadvantageous to the player.

Summarizing the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612 shown in FIG. 104(A), the expectation level display of the display mode “76” is performed from the reel rotation start to the predetermined timing after the freeze start, and the subsequent display is performed. Until the third stop button is pressed, it is switched to the indication function display of the display mode "36", and from the pressing of the third stop button to the start of the payout, the expectation degree display of the display mode "76" is switched again.

Looking at the transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the liquid crystal effect display 703, something may happen in the game by (a) effect display of "!" being performed from the start of reel rotation to the end of freeze. Suggests to the player that there is none. Since this display period is before the start of the stop button press acceptance, even if the meaning of the effect display of (a) is not understood, the player is not confused about the subsequent game operation.

Next, from the end of the freeze to the pressing of the third stop button, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function of the display mode “36”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the instruction function display 701. As the navigation display based on the content of the instruction, the effect display of (b) is performed so that the BAR symbol can be aimed by pressing it backward. By performing the effect display of (b), since it is possible to teach the player proper game operation not only from the special display LED 612 but also from the image display body 500, the player can perform an inappropriate game operation. It is possible to suppress it.

From the pressing of the third stop button to the start of payout, the special display LED 612 displays the expectation level of the display mode “76”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 focuses on the player's expectation level display. As an effect for making the effect, the effect display of (c), “Attention to segment!” is performed. By performing the effect display of (c) as described above, even if there is a player who misses the expectation display before the instruction function display is performed, it is possible to urge the player to recognize the again displayed expectation display. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can surely recognize that the expectation level is displayed.

After that, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends when the payout is completed. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, in order to teach that the privilege indicated by the expectation display has not been given in the previous game, the display of (sorry! Is done. In addition, when the privilege indicated by the expectation display is given, an effect display for teaching the addition of the privilege such as “addition succeeded!” may be performed. Regarding the timing at which the effect display in (d) is performed, the sub-board 510 may appropriately change the display timing, as in the effect display in (c) in FIG. 103(B).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of layers (instruction function priority display) as illustrated in FIG. 104 is performed, so that even if the instruction function display is displayed, the unit game after that is displayed. Since the expectation level display may be displayed inside, the player is expected to have the expectation level display appearing, and the effect of maintaining the interest of the game throughout the unit game is achieved. In particular, in the game state where the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation display is displayed after that, the benefit of the game is Since it can be expected to be granted, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, priority display of layers (priority function indication display) is performed, so that if the display mode of the indication function display is output, the special display LED 612 is given the highest priority. The instruction function display can be surely executed at an appropriate timing for teaching the player a proper game operation. As a result, it is possible to reliably teach the player an appropriate game operation based on the instruction function display, and avoid the risk that the player performs an unfavorable game operation by overlooking the instruction function display. be able to. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the player's enjoyment of the game due to performing an unfavorable game operation and gives the player a sense of security. You can

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is the display content of the expectation display and the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, the information can be notified to the player more reliably. Particularly, by performing an effect such that the special display LED 612 is focused, like the effect display of (c) described with reference to FIG. 104B, the importance of the special display LED 612 can be increased.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a feature of performing priority display of layers, by outputting another display layer below the upper display layer in the special display LED 612, the higher display is performed. When the output of a layer is turned off, the lower display layer can be displayed without causing a time lag other than the time required for switching the display, so that the next display mode is displayed in an extremely short time. It is possible to realize a display with a sense of urgency. Specifically, for example, at the moment when the player presses the third stop button (or the third stop button, such as switching from the effect display of (b) described in FIG. 104(B) to the effect display of (c)). At the moment of releasing the stop button), it is possible to switch from the display mode of the indication function display to the display mode of the expectation level display, so that the display mode of the special display LED 612 changes each time each game operation is performed. You can expect the player.

In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a display device (special display LED 612) managed by the main board 409 that controls the progress of the game regardless of whether the priority display of the timing or the priority display of the layer is performed. ), it is possible to display different types of displays such as an indication function display and an expectation level display, and further, it is possible to display both the indication function display and the expectation level display during the unit game. Either of the degree displays can be preferentially displayed. In the conventional general slot machine, various information is displayed on the effect display device (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment) managed by the sub-board, so that a lot of information is given to the player. Although it has been possible to provide the above, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the interest of the player by itself, but the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment solves such a problem. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine to which a new game characteristic which is not provided in the conventional game machine is added.

[11-3-7-4. Other expectations display]
In the above [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], the processing in the case of displaying the expectation degree display on the display device (special display LED 612) on which the indication function display is performed has been described. However, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can also display other expectations. Below, other expectation level displays that can be executed in the slot machine of the present embodiment will be listed and described. The expected degree display enumerated below can be appropriately combined with the expected degree display described in [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3].

(1) Expectation degree display based on change of display form of instruction function display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display form of the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612 is displayed while maintaining the display content. By changing it, the expectation level can be displayed.

The change of the display form is, for example, a slow flashing (flashing for a long period of time) when, for example, the expectation display is not performed and the segment display corresponding to the instruction content is normally lit during normal operation. In this case, the segment is displayed as a low-expectation level like the segment display “L” in FIG. 99(A), and when high-speed blinking (blinking in a short period) is performed, the segment in FIG. 99(A) is displayed. An example of the high degree of expectation display is “H”. Although such a display form is only an example, by executing the expectation display with different expectation levels based on various display forms, the expectation regarding the privilege, for example, the expectation that the AT game is added can be calculated. Differences can be made and the number of games to be added can be suggested.

(2) Expectation degree display as a notice display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special display LED 612 performs the instruction function display, the display mode showing the specific instruction content is displayed before the display mode is displayed. A predetermined display mode different from the mode (a blink display or a fake display similar to the indication function display) can be displayed, and when the predetermined display mode is displayed, the degree of expectation that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege is high You may make it display.

Specifically, for example, when the special function LED 612 is about to perform the instruction function display in the display mode of "13" and the segment flashes at high speed before the display mode of "13" is completely displayed. The expectation display may be performed to indicate that the game has a high expectation for the privilege. Further, when such a high-speed blinking occurs, thereafter, the display mode of "13" of the instruction function display is not completely displayed (the display of the instruction function is stopped), and the display mode is displayed in a predetermined expectation level display. May be switched, or the image display 500 may be made to perform an effect that suggests a feeling of expectation for a privilege. If the instruction function display is canceled, internally, it is not a game that is determined to display the instruction function at the time of winning the push order small combination, for example, a high expected combination of a push order (cherry role). Or a role of watermelon).

(3) Expectation degree display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], special When the display LED 612 can display a predetermined degree of expectation display, by displaying the display mode of the degree of expectation display in multiple stages, the degree of expectation display increases the degree of expectation as the display time and the number of times of display increase. May be performed.

Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the display mode of “50” is finally displayed as the expectation degree display, instead of displaying “50” at one time on the special display LED, “10”, It is possible to perform display such that the degree of expectation gradually increases in a plurality of stages such as “20” and “50”. The specific display process of the stepwise expectation display is not limited to the gradual increase display as in the above example.For example, the expectation may be lowered and then the highest expectation may be displayed at the end, or random It is possible to display the final degree of expectation after displaying the degree of expectation several times.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the expectation degree is displayed on the special display LED 612, the target function of the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree display (target privilege) is displayed in the same unit game. It can also be indicated by the display. Specifically, in the special display LED 612, after the display mode of "50" is finally displayed through the display modes of "10" and "20" as the degree-of-expectation display, an instruction to "aim at the red 7 symbol" is given. When the instruction function display of the content is displayed, the expectation degree of “50%” by the expectation degree display is the expectation degree for “red 7 symbol alignment” suggested by the instruction function display. That is, even if the expected degree display indicates 100% expected degree, since the target privilege changes depending on the instruction content of the instruction function display, it may be a high privilege such as red 7 symbol alignment. In some cases, you may end up with a low privilege such as a set of bell patterns. As described above, by associating the target of the degree of expectation by the degree of expectation display with the instruction function display, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the degree of expectation suggested by the degree of expectation display but also the instruction function display is suggested. Since the target privilege can also have meaning, the interest of the player can be maintained through the unit game.

(4) Expectation level display that directs whether or not to display a specific mode indicating the execution of lottery related to payouts In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific mode is displayed on the indicator (special display LED 612) that displays the instruction function. When the lottery related to the payout is performed when is displayed, the special display LED 612 displays a predetermined degree of expectation to expect whether or not the particular mode is displayed stepwise. Degree production can be realized.

FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree display that renders whether or not the display in the specific mode is possible. In FIG. 105, in one segment LED (special display LED 612c), the display transition of the expectation display in which the display mode changes stepwise is shown. Here, when "3" is segment-displayed, it is assumed that the "specific mode" is displayed and a lottery related to payout (for example, addition of the number of AT games) is performed. As shown in FIG. 105, in the special display LED 612c, first, the 7-segment portion is “(a) upper stage lighting”, “(b) middle stage lighting”, “(c) lower stage lighting”, “(d) upper stage lighting”. The lights will be turned on in this order. After that, if a certain waiting time elapses and "(e) Lower right light turns on," the specific mode "3" is completed as the segment display, so it is determined that the lottery related to the payout will be performed (expectation level). Successful production results). On the other hand, in the case where “(f) Lower left stage lighting” is displayed after (d), “2” is displayed as the segment display, which indicates that lottery related to payout is not performed (expected). Degree failure result). It should be noted that it is preferable that the result of the degree-of-expectation effect is also clearly displayed on the image display body 500.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the degree-of-expectation display as illustrated in FIG. 105, the indicator (for example, the special display LED 612c) for displaying the instruction function display is different from the instruction function display. Not only the expectation display can be displayed, but also the expectation effect that is completed only by the display can be executed. Thus, in the display device managed by the main board 409, it is possible to provide a novel game machine capable of executing an important effect. In addition, in the case where the expectation effect is performed on the display device (for example, the special display LED 612) managed by the main substrate 409 in this manner, “7” is displayed on the display device (for example, the image display body 500) managed by the sub substrate 510. It is preferable to display a caution message such as "Look at the segment display," so that the player's attention is focused on the display on which the expectation effect is produced.

The above is a description of the game state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of lottery tables used in various internal lottery for controlling such a game state does not have to be one, for example, Alternatively, a plurality of setting values (for example, four levels of setting values 1 to 4) may be provided and a different lottery table may be used for each setting value. Specifically, there is a disparity (stepwise difference, extreme difference, etc.) in the internal lottery probabilities at each set value. With respect to this set value, the higher the set value is, such as set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4, it is preferable that the lottery probabilities such as the bonus winning combination and the AT winning rate are preferentially treated. For example, the probability of winning BB1 is set to be higher in the setting value 4 than in the setting value 1, so that the possibility of winning the BB1 is high. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be provided with a characteristic for each set value and used as a clue when the player estimates the set value, or with the set value according to the management of a hall or the like. It is possible to operate, and so on. The setting value is not limited to the above.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process ends, an operation for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, an operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is awaited. In FIG. 106, as an example, the content of the reel stop processing by the “table method” is shown. The flow of the reel stop control process will be described below.

In the reel stop processing, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to the condition device that has operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with a pattern corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main substrate 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device that is satisfied in step S201, the reel stop control table 211 is in a standby state until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each reel of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F=0, that is, OFF). It is also determined whether or not any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until the operation of pressing all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processing in step S202 and thereafter is repeated.

Here, the order in which the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, “forward pressing”, “sandwich pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse”. There are six types of "push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push". In the following description regarding FIG. 106, these push orders will be focused on the reel stop button 211 on which the push operation is performed first. Then, it is classified into three ways of pushing. That is, when the first stop reel is the left reel 301a, it is called "forward push", when it is the middle reel 301b, it is called "middle push", and when it is the right reel 301c, it is called "reverse push".

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has stopped (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF=0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. In step S201, if the left reel stop button 211a is first (first) pressed from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c along the "forward-press" stop operation procedure, step S202 Is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0). The "first reel" referred to here is a reel that first receives a stop operation or that stops first. In this example (“forward pressing”), the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F=0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S204.

In the next step S204, the first reel stop processing is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, a reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the effective line of the slot machine 1 is only two lines of the upward right line and the downward right line, the stop control tables of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) are reduced to one at this point. You can decide. That is, the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter) can be a winning symbol especially in the upper position or the lower position. In the case of a winning symbol, the reel stop control table that allows the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) to be aligned on the activated line based on that symbol is selected. It will be.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F=1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the stopped state. In this example, since the left reel stop flag LF is only turned ON and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 and the subsequent processes are repeated. Execute.

Then, when the processing of step S202 and thereafter is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination of step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b is stopped (medium reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF=0), and the operation of pressing the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. To do. Here, since the "forward push" stop operation procedure is followed, the press operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the subsequent Step S211.

In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F=0) as in step S203. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F=1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

In step S213, as a middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above) To execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stop reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216 to set the middle reel stop flag MF to ON (MF=1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in a stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since this is not the case, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeatedly executed.

Further, in the processing from step S202 onward for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF=0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processing of steps S218, S220 and the like is the same as the above-described processing of step S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF=1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state at this time point, so this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop processing ends.

It should be noted that since the same explanation as above can be made in the case of the "middle press" stop operation procedure, the details are omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore the following description will be made.

The "reverse push" stop operation procedure differs from the "forward push" or "middle press" stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop processing). is there. That is, in the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", only the right reel 301c is in the stopped state, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stop eyes of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid symbols. It is possible to arrange the winning symbol corresponding to any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbol can be prepared on any of the activated lines, and any one of them may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for pulling the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag (corresponding winning symbol) into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible is performed (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the reel stop operation by the player is accepted, the range in which it can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range in which the winning symbol can be drawn, for example, 4 symbols) (Minutes) is determined in advance, and when there is a corresponding winning symbol within the range, control is performed to pull this into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The "retractable range" here means the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel after the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the maximum retractable range is four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotationally moved up to four symbols based on the position.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even when there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within the pullable range. If so, it is possible to move the corresponding winning symbol to the inside of the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. By performing this pull-in control, the player displays the winning symbol as long as the winning symbol is within the pulling-in range, even if the timing of pushing the relevant winning symbol is somewhat early. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible (missing the gaming privilege without being able to obtain the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination because the winning symbols cannot be arranged).

In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay role or the push order insensitive bells (bell 1, bell 2) etc. is operating, the winning symbol is not required without the player's eye-catching. Can be aligned. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay combination, the bell 1, the bell 2, etc., each corresponding winning symbol is arranged at a maximum of every 4 symbols ( See FIG. 46 above). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum pull-in number is set to 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of a maximum of 4 as described above are always effective regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to pull in the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, when focusing on the replay symbols, other symbols are the maximum between the replay symbols on the left reel 301a. Four of them are arranged (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, even if the stop operation is accepted at any position of the reel, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn and stopped on one of the activated lines. be able to.

If the result of the internal lottery is a combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn in rather than the bonus symbol. When a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in this winning game, the state of establishment of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In the subsequent games in which no small combination (or replay combination) has been established, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

The above is an example of the reel stop processing based on the table method. Aside from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this as well, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Further, in the first embodiment, either reel control processing of the control method or the table method may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process ends, the main board 409 has a winning symbol on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (a combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning symbol is displayed. Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 107, the content of this determination processing will be specifically described.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, the winning symbols are arranged on any of the activated lines from the mode of the stopped eyes in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning symbol). Whether or not the pattern combination mode is displayed) is determined. In addition, a stopped eye particularly when all reels 301 are in a stopped state is called a stopped eye.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (=1) and OFF state (=0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game flag is ON (=1), the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF (=0), the determination at step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). Explaining the determination of the symbol combination in a specific example, if the bonus is the two kinds BB shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to the two kinds BB is a symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the activated line. (Refer to the condition device “BB1” in FIG. 53), when such a symbol arrangement is stopped on any diagonal line, it can be determined that the two kinds of BB symbols (bonus symbols) are stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the activated line (YES in step S302), bonus game start processing regarding the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the processing ends. To do. The bonus game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not the bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination), and if it is determined to be a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game processing, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as that of the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay game. After the processing of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned off (=0) (step S306), and the processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not the replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small symbol symbol (a symbol combination indicating a winning of a small symbol symbol). ) Is determined (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the winning combination is a small winning symbol, as a process of step S309, the payout of the specified number of medals corresponding to the small winning symbols in the set is executed (the specified number of medals is paid from the medal discharging device 110). put out). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is informed (announced and displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination has been paid out. After the processing of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination winning flag is turned off (=0) (step S310), and the processing is completed.

When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a small winning symbol (NO in step S308), none of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 described above are satisfied, and any on the activated line. The winning symbols of "No" are not available. The result at this time is also referred to as a "missing eye (a combination mode of disjointed symbols)". In such a case, the losing process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, if the winning flag that is in the ON (=1) state at this point is another winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF (=0). If none of the winning flags is ON (=1) (at this time, the losing flag is ON (=1)), the losing flag is turned OFF (=0). After the losing process in step S311, the determining process ends.

The processing from step S302 to step S311 described above is processing executed when the game state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process executed during the bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to be the bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the activated line. The term "bonus game payout symbol" as used herein means a generic name of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out by aligning during a bonus game, and specifically, a bonus game payout combination (in this example, In the state or the internal state, the payout is defined as the same as the small winning combination, but a special bonus exclusive winning combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a payout process of a specified number of medals according to the aligned bonus game payout symbols is executed (step S313). In the medal payout process, the specified number of medals are paid out from the medal discharging device 110, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (announced, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout combination has been paid out.

Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, bonus game end determination processing for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 109), and then the determination processing ends.

When it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol is not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (=0) (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern that becomes NO in step S312, there may be a case where a bonus game time payout combination has been won but has been eliminated, or a case where the bonus game time payout combination has not been won. In the process of step S315, the establishment flag of the bonus game payout combination is turned OFF in the former case, and the loss flag is turned OFF in the latter case. In addition, in the case where a bonus exclusive winning combination that is surely won during the bonus game is prepared, and when it is possible to win the winning combination without losing the bonus exclusive winning combination, the process of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

The processing of steps S301 to S315 described above is the game state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110).

[11-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 in FIG. 107 is satisfied, the bonus game start processing is executed. This bonus game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, a BB flag) is ON (=1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned ON (=1) and the bonus flag is turned OFF (=0). Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative payout number is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the bet number of the prescribed number of the bonus game (the prescribed number of the BB game is 2 in this example).

If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are complete even though the bonus flag is OFF (=0). That is, it may occur when some improper means (for example, goto act) is performed or the slot machine 1 is out of order. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to inform the occurrence of an error.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end determination processing]
Subsequently, the bonus game end determination processing in step S314 of FIG. 107 described above will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 107, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number exceeds the total payout number (for example, 200) defined for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative payout number during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612 and the like. The cumulative payout number is provided separately by an LED or the like for display. It may be displayed on this).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is set to OFF (=0) (step S460), and the process ends.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of the control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, the control of various effect operations is executed by the sub-board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub-board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, the various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the presentation mode includes one that is completed only in the game (hereinafter, referred to as a one-shot production mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Of these, in the single-shot production mode, production that suggests the winning flag (indication production, notification production, details will be described later), production that informs payout of medals (payment appearance, it is also possible to inform up to the number of payouts), etc. There is.

The suggestive effect is an effect that indirectly notifies the winning flag to the player (notification effect), which is different from an effect that directly notifies the winning flag to the player. For example, a form of a winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. , The display of colors and the like is performed. In addition, the suggestive effect is performed even when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of losing). In this case, it is the production of the content that is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken by any winning combination). This can make it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

The notification effect clearly informs the player of the result of the game such as “bonus confirmed!” or “AT winning!” when the winning flag is a bonus role or when an AT is won in the AT lottery, for example. It is possible. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because there is a possibility that a large number of medals can be obtained) that is pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or AT. That is, when the player wins the AT or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate that.

In addition, as continuous production modes, there are those corresponding to the game state such as the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. These are for clarifying how the game state is, and by performing these effects (continuous effect), the player can determine whether the current game state is, for example, a general state or not. It becomes easy to make a distinction such as whether it is in a state.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the continuous effect mode corresponding to the above-mentioned gaming state (general state, bonus internal state, bonus state), but also [11-3-3] will be described. The continuous effect can be executed in a mode that suggests or teaches whether or not to shift to a special game (for example, an AT game) advantageous to the player, such as a predictive effect of the AT. Further, such a continuous effect is not limited to control by the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), and may be controlled by the main board 409. Further, such a continuous effect may be completed in one game, but is continuously executed in a mode in which related effect contents are displayed over a plurality of games, and finally the result is displayed. Is common. In the instruction function process of the first embodiment, as a display form of “precursor effect”, an example in which the title display of one game is first performed and then “continuous effect” is performed from one game to a plurality of games is performed. As I explained, it can be said that the "symptom effect" is a continuous effect as a whole. Then, when the result of such a continuous effect (for example, a precursor effect) is displayed, the player can recognize whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game is performed in the subsequent games.

The various effect modes described above can be executed by displaying an image on the image display body 500, generating a sound effect by the speaker 512 or the like, emitting light or lighting by LED decoration, or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a dull impression when the player continues to play the game for a long time. The presentation mode is not limited to being performed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll that imitates a character, a movable model, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at positions different from those of the reels, and can be started and stopped independently of the player's operation as part of the production. What is executed) or illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light typified by a rotating lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. By adopting such a method, it is possible to entertain the player sufficiently without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[11-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error is notified according to the detected error type. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 lights up (or blinks), and the special display LED 612 can display an error indicating the type of the error. The special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In some cases, an error is not detected, but a sudden power failure is included in the abnormal state.

When the above-mentioned abnormal state occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of power off, it is sufficient if no error display remains after power is returned). The method for canceling the error differs depending on the error that has occurred, but in many cases power off (OFF/ON) is required.

[11-7-1. RAM clear]
Here, the clearing of data values (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time of a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF/ON, the value of the data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized within an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) for rewriting to a value is performed. Therefore, even when the error canceling process is performed, there is a possibility that part of the data held in the RAM 1114 will be cleared if the power is turned off and on.

However, if the error clearing process is performed during the indication function display or the power is cut off during the payout of medals, the RAM clear clears the data used for the indication function display and the payout number display. , It is expected that the game will be interrupted. In the slot machine 1, in consideration of such a problem, a RAM clear target range in the RAM 1114 is set in advance.

FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining a data block of the RAM. FIG. 110 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is collected on the end side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 110, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. Further, as the target range of the RAM clear, five types of "clear range 0" to "clear range 4" are defined. Note that each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. “Clear range 0” means a target range that is basically not executed and corresponds to all erasure. That is, the RAM clearing in the clear range 0 is not performed in normal maintenance or error processing. From another viewpoint, the set value data area 1114a does not have the data value cleared except when the RAM clear is performed in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

“Clear range 1” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

“Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

“Clear range 3” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the end of the bonus. To clear the RAM in the clear range 0 to clear range 2, each hall clear requires the work of a hall clerk, etc., but the RAM clear at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by the internal process after the bonus ends. Will be executed. When clearing the RAM at the end of the bonus, specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110, the data areas equal to or smaller than the replay input number area 1114j are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area. 1114i is not cleared.

The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned off/on. That is, when the power is turned off/on without changing the setting or resetting the data, the data area which is the target range in the “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the "clear range 3", the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power off/on.

“Clear range 4” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed by, for example, an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the number of bets on medals is determined. In the RAM clear at the start of each game, specifically, the data area of the display flag area 1114l or less among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110 is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the interrupt check are used. The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

Next, each data area shown in FIG. 110 will be briefly described. A set value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the set value data area 1114a.

Information indicating the open/closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door-shaped front member 200 (or the front opening/closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing that it is open is stored.

The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information regarding lighting of a lamp (for example, the replay lamp 606, the start lamp 608, and the like, which are display devices arranged on the display panel 501). Information indicating the number of credits (the number of stored medals) is stored in the number-of-credits area 1114e. The credit display area 1114f stores information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many gaming values have been paid out in the game. The payout display area 1114h stores information for displaying the number of paid-out medals on the special display LED 612. The instruction function display area 1114i stores information corresponding to the instruction content by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612.

The replay insertion number area 1114j stores the number of gaming values to be inserted during the replay operation (the number of inserted medals during replay). The interrupt check timer area 1114k stores timer information necessary for executing interrupt processing.

Information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. In the medal payout number area 1114m, the payout number of gaming values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the insertable number area 1114n, information indicating whether or not the game value can be inserted is stored. The number-of-medals-insertion area 1114o stores the number of game-values inserted before the start of the game. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used by the condition device.

As described above, in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, by setting the range in which the RAM clear is performed for each of various actions (setting change, power OFF/ON, etc.), it can be expected to realize efficient memory control.

Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the game machine, and data such as a program must be stored within the specified range. However, in recent years, regarding the processing related to the test signal and the processing related to fraud, the data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area outside the range defined above (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 110). Is allowed. However, use of such an unused area is limited to a gaming machine having an instruction function.

Further, in the slot machine 1, after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off or the like, whether or not to redisplay the data displayed before the RAM clear is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may refer to the data stored in the data area where the RAM has not been cleared and redisplay the data as much as possible at the time of restoration from the power failure. The data relating to the payout number display, the data relating to the navigation display, etc.) can theoretically be redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referencing the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[11-7-2. error indication]
Next, the error display on the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining an error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “Notification type” column of FIG. 111 (which will be described later but includes some that are not errors) is displayed in the “SEG” column on the special display LED 612. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in a distinguishable manner. Of the errors shown in the “Notification type” column of FIG. 111, each error other than “Communication error (during series code error)” detected by the sub-board 510 has a main error detection signal when the error occurs. The board 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 111 are some of the errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1. In addition to the illustrated errors, there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub-board 510.

The outline of each error shown in the "Notification type" column of FIG. 111 will be described below.

The “RAM error” is an error notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication error (during series code error)” is detected when there is an error in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

Although “setting is being changed” or “setting is being confirmed” is not an error, the “setting value” is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the work, and thus is described in FIG. 111. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. The notification timing of "during setting change" is the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing of "during setting check" is the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

The “illegal payout error” is an error notified when an abnormal payout is made. Specifically, a payout count switch (not shown; a switch for counting the number of paid-out medals, for example, except when the medals are paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving unit (not shown) included in the medal discharging device 110, for example, (Provided in the medal releasing device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 111, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is "when the main game is not stopped" or "when the main game is stopped". The higher priority is detected when the main game is not stopped. However, the same "HF" is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612 regardless of the timing.

The "inserted medal passing time 1 error", "inserted medal passing time 2 error", "medal passing sequence 1 error", "medal passing sequence 2 error", "medal passing interval time error", and "inserted medal backward error" The error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process of inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 203 and reaching the hopper 1110b. The abnormality referred to here includes not only an abnormality relating to the passage route of the medal but also an abnormality caused by insertion of a foreign object other than the medal.

In the slot machine 1, when the insertion sensor 207b detects passage of a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 203 (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), the lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are then detected. It reaches the hopper 110b while the passage is detected at. The lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect passage of medals at predetermined positions where they are provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is passed through the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the sauce pan 201. When the medals whose passage has been detected by the insertion sensor 207b have not moved through such a normal process (prescribed medal passage sequence), the main board 409 determines whether or not each sensor has detected and the detection time. Detect each of the above errors.

The outline of each error is explained. The “insertion medal passing time 1 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign matter other than medals) are accumulated in the vicinity of the insertion sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the insertion sensor 207b is It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passing time 2 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign matter other than medals) stay near the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is a predetermined time. It is detected when continuing (for example, 500 ms). The detection target period of the "inserted medal passing time 2 error" is always set, but the notification timing of the error is set at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game such as after the payout process is completed).

The “medal passing sequence 1 error” is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the selector sensor is performed while the medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when the lever sensor has not detected a medal in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the passage of the medal is detected by the selector sensor. The "medal passage sequence 2 error" is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the shoot sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when the shoot sensor does not detect the medal within a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the selector sensor detects the passage of the medal.

The “medal passage interval time error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in an unexpected manner in a normal state. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, some object is detected at a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval (that is, the passing interval when medals are continuously inserted) assumed during normal operation. The error is detected when the situation of passing has been detected at a predetermined frequency (for example, five times in succession).

The “inserted medal backward error” is an error that is notified when a medal moves along a route other than the prescribed medal passing sequence, and particularly when a backward movement is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the detection order of medal detection by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, shoot sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

Further, the “payout medal jam error”, the “payout medal empty error”, and the “auxiliary storage full tank error” are errors reported when there is an abnormality related to the payout or storage of medals. To explain the outline of each error, first, the "payout medal jam error" is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, when the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more, the error is detected. The "payout medal empty error" is an error that is notified when the medals in the hopper 110b are empty. Specifically, when the medals from the hopper 110b are not normally paid out and the payout is retried (payout retry), if the payout count switch is in the ON state for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) or more after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage full tank error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard, the error is detected.

The “priority” column of FIG. 111 shows the priority of notification between errors. In the present example, the priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time, and even if an error having a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. , Display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of the error of a higher priority detected later. In addition, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown in the “SEG” column. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, it is not possible to restart the game (play the next game) unless these errors are canceled.

In addition, when "video" is "○" in the "notification method" column, for example, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display body 500. However, the notification image by “video” is required to have display contents that are the same as the error display on the special display LED 612. When the “sound” is “◯”, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512, for example. When the “lamp” is “◯”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output or lamp output, the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error of high priority is detected, the error of low priority is detected. The notification mode may be emphasized in comparison.

Further, the “reset cancellation” column shows whether or not the error can be canceled by the reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. When the error that can be reset is released by resetting, the data area of “clear range 2” (see FIG. 110) of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared.

When "immediate" is written in the "responsiveness" column, it means that the main board 409 can detect the error when the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when an illegal payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command notifying the detection. That is, even if it is described as "immediately", it is not always necessary to display the error immediately when the error is detected. For example, after the result of the game is obtained (after the payout process is completed, or the payout process is performed). It is also possible to display an error before the start of. The fraudulent payout error is a highly urgent error that means that the gaming value has been fraudulently paid out.

[11-7-3. Error processing]
In the following, the processing when the error described in the previous chapter in the slot machine 1 occurs during a game (error occurrence processing) will be described. The specific details of the error occurrence process differ depending on what kind of requirement definition the slot machine 1 has with respect to the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 has a requirement definition (first requirement definition) regarding an error as shown below, and the details of the error occurrence processing performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping (for example, strong error and weak error) based on importance is not performed on a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues to proceed and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is continuously displayed.

112 and 113 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the first embodiment. FIGS. 112 and 113 are combined into one flow chart. In this flow chart, the overall processing procedure of one game is based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 54, and further details the processing performed when an error occurs. Showing. It should be noted that FIGS. 112 and 113 show an example of the processing procedure when the game progresses in the non-power-off state (that is, in the state where the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 114, which will be described later, is a flowchart illustrating a processing procedure example of the power failure recovery processing in the first embodiment. In FIG. 114, the processing procedure is applied even when the power is turned off/on in the processing of FIGS. 112 and 113.

[11-7-3-1. Error processing (when power is off)]
With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of error occurrence (when there is no power interruption) will be described. Since the flow of the overall processing overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 54, detailed description of the processing already described will be omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the processes of FIGS. 112 and 113 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). In addition, in order to make it easier to understand the situation in which each process is performed, correspondence with the “state of the gaming machine” shown in FIG. 90 is also shown.

First, in FIG. 112, as described in the BET process in FIG. 54, after a specified number of game values (specifically, medals) have been inserted, the game is performed by the player pressing the start lever 210. It is started (step S801). The flow of such a game corresponds to "pressing the starting lever" from "inserting a medal" shown in FIG.

When the game is started by depressing the starting lever 210, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not it is a section where the special display LED 612 can display the indicating function. Here, the section in which the instruction function display is possible means a game (for example, during an AT game) in which the instruction function display by the instruction function can be executed. It has been described above that the instruction function display is performed during the AT game, but in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the AT game (for example, the AT is relatively won). The instruction function may be displayed even in a chance zone (CZ) or the like that is easy to perform. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even in games other than the AT game.

When it is determined in step S804 that it is a section in which the indicating function can be displayed (specifically, when it is determined that the main board 409 performs the instruction by the indicating function) (YES in step S804), in step S803. Based on the acquired condition device, the instruction content by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

Then, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to "start of reel rotation" shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting the instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform the navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to the navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the instruction information command in step S808 may be transmitted at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

After that, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the indication function display are as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81. In addition, the predetermined display timing regarding the “navi display” and the “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. 90. Then, after the instruction function display in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that it is not a section in which the instruction function display is possible (specifically, when it is not determined that the main board 409 issues an instruction by the instruction function) (NO in step S804). , The rotation of the reel 301 is started without performing the processing relating to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 (step S811), and acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started ( Step S812).

Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptance possible” shown in FIG. 90. After the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (first stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to "pressing first stop button" shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the pressing of the second stop button performed thereafter (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process of step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process of step S819 is performed. In FIG. 113, when an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is shown to be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining spinning reel 301, The process of step S819 may be performed after the reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. This also applies to step S816. In the processing after such error detection, the priority (importance) may be set differently according to the type of error, and the processing may be selectively used based on the priority. For example, an error such as “HF (illegal payout error)” that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation should be a high priority error. When such a high-priority error is detected, the process of step S819 should be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating. preferable.

In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (second stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to "pressing second stop button" shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the pressing of the third stop button performed thereafter (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process of step S817 is performed. When an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining spinning reel 301.

In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to "pressing third stop button" shown in FIG.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected within a predetermined time after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped). Yes (step S818). Then, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection in step S818.

In step S819, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is terminated. However, if it is determined in step S804 that it is not a section in which the instruction function display is possible (NO in step S804), since the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, special processing needs to be performed in step S819. There is no.

After that, in step S820, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine the winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to "stop all reels" shown in FIG.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 113, the processes of steps S819 and S820 are performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection during the game until then, but the subsequent processes are performed as to whether or not it is determined that an error is detected. It depends on Specifically, if no error has been detected during the game so far, the processing from step S821 is performed, and if an error is detected during the game so far, the processing from step S825. Is done.

First, as a normal time process in which no error is detected during the game until then, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the game value is paid out. In paying out the gaming value, when it is confirmed that the winning combination is stopped based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error is detected, and the game ends. When it is determined that there is a payout in step S821 (YES in step S821), the display of the number of payouts on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and at the same time, the payout processing of the gaming value (medal) is performed (step S823). .. After that, since no error has been detected, the game ends.

On the other hand, as a process when an error is detected during the game till then, it is first determined whether or not the game value is paid out (step S824).

The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821), and when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824), step S822 (payout number display) and S823. The process of (payout process) is also the same.

However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing of steps S826 and S827 is performed to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process is completed, the payout amount display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processes of step S826 and subsequent steps are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the processing in step S826 and subsequent steps is performed as it is.

In step S826, the special display LED 612 is caused to display the type of error detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. After that, an error canceling process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk, the sales office or the like (step S827), and the game ends.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function and the number of payouts. The type of the detected error can be notified to the player, the hall clerk, or the like by displaying the error without blocking the display.

In the following, as the game progresses based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 112 and 113, when an error occurs, what will be the display period of various display devices will be described. This is illustrated under typical circumstances.

115 to 118 are timing charts showing display period examples (Nos. 1 to 4) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 115 to 118 are assumed to be situations where the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

First, in the case of FIGS. 115 to 117, when an error occurs (at the time of detection), the display is controlled by the sub-board 510 (for example, the image display body 500) to immediately display the details of the error. A chart is shown. That is, at the same time that the error occurrence 807 is turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is also turned on. However, it is assumed that the liquid crystal navigation 805 cannot be “displayed” while the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Such a setting can be realized, for example, by transmitting a command to the sub-board 510 as detection information of the error at the timing when the main board 409 detects the error.

In FIG. 115, an error occurs at the timing of starting reel rotation in the game in which the gaming value is not paid out. At this time, while the error display (liquid crystal error 806) on the image display body 500 is simultaneously performed, the error display (segment error 804) on the special display LED 612 is not performed until the reel is completely stopped.

In FIG. 116, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing when the stop button press acceptance starts. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on (displayed) at the same time, and the navigation display 805, which was on (displayed) before the error occurred, is changed to off (non-display) when the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on. It Then, the segment error 804 is turned ON (displayed) for the first time when the reels are completely stopped and thereafter the gaming value payout process is completed.

In FIG. 117, in the game in which the gaming value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on (displayed) at the same time, and the navigation display 805 that has been “displayed” before the occurrence of the error is changed to off (non-display) when the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on. Then, the segment error 804 becomes ON (display) only after the reel is completely stopped.

Thus, in the case of FIGS. 115 to 117, when an error occurs, the special display LED 612 displays the error after the game ends, while the image display body 500 immediately displays the occurrence of the error, It is possible to promptly notify the occurrence of an error of a player or the like. Further, the special display LED 612 can be displayed without overlapping the respective display periods of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error display. However, in the case of FIG. 115 to FIG. 117, although the progress of the game is not interrupted, the liquid crystal navigation 805 is set to “non-display” when the liquid crystal error 806 becomes “display”, so the instruction while viewing the navigation display There are cases in which the stop operation according to the function cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 118, the detailed display of the error on the display device (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub-board 510 is at the timing of the error display (error display on the special display LED 612) controlled by the main board 409. The timing chart is shown with the setting that they match. That is, even if the error occurrence 807 is turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is not set to “display” until the segment error 804 becomes “display”. Such setting can be realized, for example, by the main board 409 not only transmitting the error detection information to the sub-board 510 but also notifying the special display LED 612 of the timing of error display.

In FIG. 118, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button. At this time, the display regarding the instruction function (instruction function 802 and liquid crystal navigation 805) is continuously displayed until the third stop button is pressed, and the subsequent payout processing proceeds normally. Then, when the payout is completed, an error display (segment error 804 and liquid crystal error 806) on the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 is performed. After that, when the error cancellation processing is performed according to the error and the error is resolved, the segment error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 are turned off (not displayed), and the error occurrence 807 is also turned off.

In this way, in the case of FIG. 118, even if an error occurs, the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 are displayed after the end of the game (strictly, when the payout is completed when there is a payout, or when there is no payout). An error is displayed when the reel is stopped), so that an error in the game can be detected without hindering game progress and game operation (specifically, stop operation according to the instruction function while watching the navigation display). Can be reliably notified. That is, in the case of FIG. 118, for the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error display on the special display LED 612, it is possible to secure a display period in which each display has a meaning (the display effectively works), and at the same time, It is possible to prevent the display periods from overlapping.

[11-7-3-2. Power failure recovery processing]
With reference to FIG. 114, the processing procedure of the power failure recovery processing in the slot machine of the first embodiment will be described. The power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed when all power failures are recovered, such as power OFF/ON in error cancellation processing, simple power OFF/ON when no error occurs, or recovery from sudden power failure due to power failure or the like. Done in.

In FIG. 114, first, the power interruption process from all the states is started. In step S901, it is determined whether or not any power supply voltage is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold value. As a specific example of the predetermined threshold value determination, when the power supply device 112 includes a 24V power supply and a +12V power supply, the power supply voltage of the 24V power supply is 20.4V or less, or the power supply voltage of the +12V power supply. Is 10.5V or less. When it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S901), the process ends.

When it is determined in step S901 that any of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value (YES in step S901), the RAM 1114 stores the stack pointer in the save area (step S902). The process of step S902 and the process of step S907 described later are as described in the description of the data area of the RAM 1114 of [11-7-1] (see also FIG. 110).

After that, a data protection process (RAM protection process) is performed on the RAM 1114 (step S903), and then the slot machine 1 is turned off (step S904). Note that the above-described processing regarding the RAM is not limited to the RAM 1114 on the main board 409, and the same processing may be performed on the RAM 1122 on the sub-board 510.

Then, when a power source restoration operation is performed by a hall-related person or automatic restart (step S905), first, it is determined whether or not any power source voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (step S906). As the predetermined threshold value here, the same threshold value as exemplified in step S901 may be used. When it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value (NO in step S906), the process ends.

If it is determined in step S906 that the power supply voltage is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value (YES in step S906), the stack pointer stored in the save area of the RAM 1114 in step S902 is referred to read necessary data (step S906). S907).

Then, the stored number display LED 613 is returned to the displayable state (step S908), and the special display LED 612 is returned to the displayable state (step S909).

Next, in step S904, it is determined whether or not any of the reels 301a to 301c was rotating in the state immediately before the power was cut off (state before power interruption) (step S910).

If it is determined that one of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the pre-power cut state (YES in step S910), it means that the reel stop operation is not completed. While returning to the rotation state of No. 1, the instruction contents of the instruction function stored in the RAM 1114 (more specifically, the instruction function display area 1114i shown in FIG. 110) are displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S911). Then, it progresses to step S916.

If it is determined that none of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the pre-power cut state (NO in step S910), whether or not the pre-power cut state is "reel completely stopped" and "payout". Is determined (step S912). When it is determined that the situation is “all reels stopped” and “payout is present” (YES in step S912), the special display LED 612 displays the number of payouts. The information regarding the payout amount can be read out, for example, by referring to the saved stack pointer in the RAM 1114, or by referring to the payout display area 1114h. Then, it progresses to step S916.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S912 that the situation is not "all reels stopped" or "no payout" (NO in step S912), it is determined whether an error is detected (step S914). ). When it is determined that an error has been detected (YES in step S914), the special display LED 612 displays information regarding the detected error (step S915). At this time, the error lamp 604 may be turned on. Then, it progresses to step S916. If a negative determination is obtained in step S914, the process directly proceeds to step S916.

After the processes of steps S905 to S915 described above are performed, other return processes (details are omitted) are performed in step S916, and the slot machine 1 is in the pre-power-supply state before the power-off state in step S904. Return to.

As described above, by performing the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 114, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, even after the power failure occurs, data and Appropriate restoration of the display can be realized.

In the following, when a power failure occurs during the progress of a game, the power failure recovery processing is performed based on the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. 114 to determine the display period of various display devices and the like. Or will be illustrated under specific circumstances.

119 to 121 are timing charts showing examples (No. 1 to No. 3) of the display period (by various display devices) when the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. 119 to 121 assume that the instruction function is all generated (for example, during AT), and show display period examples by various display devices as in the case of FIGS. 90 and 91 described above. Although not shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, the slot machine 1 automatically operates after the power is restored if at least one of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating before the power is turned off. The rotation of the reel 301 which has been rotated by the internal processing is restarted.

In the case of FIG. 119, the error is not particularly detected, and the power is cut off between the “start of stop button press acceptance start” and the “first stop button press”. Note that, in FIG. 119, the power may be cut off at the same time as “start of acceptance of pressing of stop button”. At this time, the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805, which had been "displaying" the instruction content, become "non-display" due to the power-off, but when the power is restored thereafter, the display content before the power-off is "displayed" again. (Corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 114). Then, after the power is restored, the game proceeds as usual. Further, since no error is detected during one game, the segment error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 remain “non-display”.

In the case of FIG. 120, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of “starting the stop button press acceptance start”, and then the power is cut off before the “first stop button press”. .. The power cutoff here may be a power cutoff due to an error that has occurred or a power cutoff for another reason. In such a case, if the liquid crystal error 806 is immediately “displayed” due to the occurrence of the error, the liquid crystal navigation 805 ends “display” until then and becomes “non-display”. After that, even if the power is restored after the power is cut off, the error is not canceled, and therefore, in the image display body 500, the state where the liquid crystal navigation 805 is “non-display” and the liquid crystal error 806 is “display” is maintained.

On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 120, since the special display LED 612 does not immediately display an error, the instruction function 802 is “displayed” from the timing when the stop button press acceptance starts. Even after the power is restored after the power is cut off, the contents of the “display” can be displayed again by reading from the RAM 1114 (corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 114). Then, the special display LED 612 “displays” the segment error 804 after the completion of the payout.

In the case of FIG. 121, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, the error is not particularly detected, and the power is shut off during the payout process after the reels are completely stopped. At this time, until the start of payout, it is the same as a normal game, and the payout number 803 becomes “non-display” due to the power-off, but it is “displayed” again after the power is restored (corresponding to step S913 in FIG. 114). ) So you can complete the payout.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121, in the slot machine 1, even if the power is cut off during the game, the main board 409 is performed by performing the power cut-back processing shown in FIG. 114 when the power is restored. The display status managed by can be restored before the interruption.

[11-7-4. Other error processing]
In the above [11-7-3], an example of the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1 has been described, but other process examples of the error occurrence process will be described below.

[11-7-4-1. Common points and differences in processing when each error occurs]
In the following description regarding the other processing at the time of error occurrence, an error occurs when the slot machine 1 has second to sixth requirement definitions different from the above-mentioned first requirement definition as “requirement definition regarding error”. The process at the time of occurrence will be described. Further, in order to avoid confusion in the process of description, the slot machine 1 having the first requirement definition will be referred to as a slot machine 1a, and the slot machines 1 having the second to sixth requirement definitions will be respectively referred to as the slot machine 1b to the slot machine. Notated as machine 1f. Therefore, for example, the “error occurrence process in the first embodiment” described in the description of FIG. 112, FIG. 113, etc. is replaced with “error occurrence process in the slot machine 1a having the first requirement definition”. be able to.

Comparing the slot machines 1b to 1f with the slot machine 1a, since the requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing is different, the processing procedure of the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition is different, but other control processing and configuration are different. The slot machine 1 is common to the slot machines 1 described so far. Therefore, repetitive description of common parts will be omitted, and different points will be mainly described.

[11-7-4-2. Error occurrence processing based on the second requirement definition]
The slot machine 1b has the following requirements as the second requirement definition related to the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping of a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance related to game progress is defined as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance related to game progress than the “strong error” is defined as a “weak error”.
(2) When a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error is displayed after the end of the game.
(3) When a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is canceled.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the indication function display is restored after the error is canceled.

According to the second requirement definition, the processing required when only a weak error occurs is the same as the first requirement definition. Therefore, in the slot machine 1b, when only a weak error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) displayed by the various display devices in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition are changed to the second time. It can be applied as an error occurrence process based on the requirement definition of.

Also, the slot machine 1b can divert the processing of the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 114 to the return processing at the time of power failure, and therefore, the display period example at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. 119 to 121. Can be applied to the slot machine 1b.

The classification criteria of “strong error” and “weak error” are not particularly limited, but, for example, based on the “priority” of the error shown in FIG. You can do this. Further, for example, all errors may be set to "strong error".

122 and 123 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. In the following, the processing procedure of the error occurrence processing based on the second requirement definition will be described, focusing on the difference from the flowchart (FIGS. 112 and 113) of the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition.

First, the processing of steps S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 122 is the same as the processing of steps S801 to S812 of FIG. 112, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in FIG. 123, the player presses the first stop button, and reel stop processing is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation was performed (step S830).

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S830 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S831). If no error is detected in step S831 (NO in step S831), the process of step S833 is performed. If an error is detected in step S831 (YES in step S831), it is determined in step S832 whether the detected error is a strong error. When it is determined that the error is a strong error (YES in step S832), the process of step S839 is performed, and when it is determined that the error is not a strong error, that is, the error is weak (NO in step S832), step S833. Go to processing.

In step S833, the second stop button is pressed, but thereafter, similarly to steps S831 to S832, whether or not an error has been detected (step S834) and whether or not the detected error is a strong error. The determination of (step S835) is performed. The same determination process (steps S837 and S838) is performed even after the third stop button is pressed in step S836.

As a result of the determination that the error is detected in steps S830 to S838, if a strong error is detected, the process immediately before the occurrence of the strong error is held as the processing of step S839, and the progress of the game is stopped. .. When the progress of the game is stopped, the player cannot stop the spinning reel 301. As a specific process for holding the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error, saving various data in the RAM 1114 or the like is assumed.

Then, after the progress of the game is stopped in step S839, error cancellation processing corresponding to the generated strong error is necessary. Therefore, in step S840, it is determined whether the error cancellation processing is performed to cancel the strong error. Is determined. In step S840, the next process does not proceed unless it is confirmed that the strong error has been released. Then, when the cancellation of the strong error is confirmed (YES in step S840), as a return of the process, the process is restarted from the time when the error occurs.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of the error detection in steps S830 to S838, if the strong error is not detected in any period (NO in step S837 or NO in step S838), the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is displayed. Is finished (step S841). When the process of step S841 is performed, only a strong error is not detected, and a case where a weak error is detected is included.

After that, in step S842, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine the winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. In step S843, the presence or absence of payout of the gaming value is determined, and if it is determined that the payout is present, the special display LED 612 is caused to display the number of payouts (step S844) and the payout process is executed (step S845).

If it is determined in step S843 that there is no payout, or if it is determined that there is a payout and the process of step S845 ends, then the presence or absence of error detection is determined as the process of step S846. If it is determined in step S846 that there is no error (NO in step S846), the processing ends.

If it is determined that there is an error in step S846 (YES in step S846), it means that a weak error has been detected during steps S830 to S838, and therefore it is necessary to display an error of the weak error. There is. Therefore, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S847), and the details of the weak error are displayed on the special display LED 612 as an error (step S848). After that, when the error canceling process of the error displayed in step S848 is performed (step S827), the series of processes ends.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, in the slot machine 1b, when a weak error is detected during the game, the game progress is continued and the error display of the weak error is displayed after the game ends. On the other hand, when a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is immediately stopped and it is required to execute the error canceling process. Further, although the progress of the game is interrupted when a strong error occurs, the instruction function display is restored after the error cancellation processing, so that the player can continue the game while confirming the instruction content.

In the following, in the slot machine 1b, when an error occurs while the game is being advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 122 and 123, what will be the display period of various display devices, etc. , Under specific circumstances.

FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. It is assumed that FIG. 124 shows a situation where the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

In FIG. 124, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and a strong error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). ). In the slot machine 1b, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the "indication" is maintained for the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. Further, in the example of FIG. 124, the image display body 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error display instead of the indication function display (“non-display” of the indication function 802 and “display” of the segment error 804), and the image display body 500. Then, instead of the navigation display, an error is displayed (“non-display” of liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of liquid crystal error 806), so that the game is interrupted. However, the instruction function 802 and the navigation display 805 that have been “hidden” will be “displayed” again after the error cancellation processing for the strong error is completed, so the game can be played from the situation before the occurrence of the strong error. It can be restarted.

[11-7-4-3. Error occurrence processing based on the third requirement definition]
The slot machine 1c is provided with the following requirements as the third requirement definition relating to the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping of a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance related to game progress is defined as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance related to game progress than the “strong error” is defined as a “weak error”.
(2) When a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error is displayed after the end of the game.
(3) When a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is canceled.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the indication function display is stopped and is not restored even after the error is cleared.

Such (1) to (3) of the third requirement definition are the same as (1) to (3) of the second requirement definition, and only (4) is different.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, similarly to the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, the various display devices shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition. The display period example (see FIGS. 115 to 118) can be applied. Also, as for the recovery process at the time of power failure, the process of FIG. 114 shown as the process at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, and therefore, at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. 119 to 121. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1c.

125 and 126 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1c. Comparing the processing of FIGS. 125 and 126 with the processing of FIGS. 122 and 123 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1b, only step S880 of FIG. 126 is different. That is, in FIG. 126, when it is determined in step S840 that the strong error has been released, in step S880, the main board 409 clears the display content of the special display LED 612, and thereafter, the processing is repeated from the time when the error occurs. Is started.

Then, by performing the process of step S880, the slot machine 1c can prevent the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 from being restored after the error is released when the strong error occurs.

According to such a slot machine 1c, when a "strong error" having a high degree of importance on the game occurs, even if the processing for canceling the strong error is performed, the state before the occurrence of the strong error is completely eliminated. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by not displaying the instruction function after error recovery, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game operation in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function in an abnormal game in which a strong error has occurred. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being easily granted a privilege when an illegal act that causes a strong error is performed.

In the following, in the slot machine 1c, when an error occurs while the game is being advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 125 and 126, the display period of various display devices and the like will be described. , Under specific circumstances.

FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. It is assumed that FIG. 127 shows a situation where the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

In FIG. 127, similarly to FIG. 124 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and at the timing of pressing the second stop button. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). However, in FIG. 127, according to the requirement definition (third requirement definition) of the slot machine 1c, the game is not interrupted even if a weak error occurs, and the "indication" is maintained also in the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. In the example of FIG. 127, the image display body 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error display instead of the indication function display (“non-display” of the indication function 802 and “display” of the segment error 804), and the image display body 500. Then, an error is displayed instead of the navigation display ("non-display" of liquid crystal navigation 805 and "display" of liquid crystal error 806), so that the game is interrupted. Even if the error canceling process is performed thereafter, the display content of the instruction function display is cleared as shown in step S880 of FIG. 126, so that after the recovery, the instruction display of the special display LED 612 is not displayed again. Do not show. Further, in the example of FIG. 127, the liquid crystal navigation is not similarly displayed after the return. Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, after the recovery from the release of the strong error, the player cannot recognize the instruction content of the instruction function, and the game is advanced while the instruction function does not occur.

[11-7-4-4. Error occurrence processing based on the fourth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1d is provided with the following requirement as the fourth requirement definition related to the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping of a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance related to game progress is defined as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance related to game progress than the “strong error” is defined as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) If an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not canceled regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, an outer end board communication command) to the external relay terminal board 131, so that the main board 409 receives the command via the external relay terminal board 131. The error information is output to an external device (for example, the hall computer 1200, a data display, etc.) that is connected with the computer.

The fourth requirement definition in such a slot machine 1d has only (1) in common with the third requirement definition, but in view of the other requirement definitions, the processing required when only a weak error occurs Is similar to the error occurrence processing based on the third requirement definition (that is, the same as the error occurrence processing based on the first or second requirement definition).

Therefore, in the slot machine 1d, like the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition and the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, if only a weak error occurs, the first requirement definition is added. The display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) of various display devices shown in the processing when an error occurs based on the above can be applied. Also, as for the recovery process at the time of power failure, the process of FIG. 114 shown as the process at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, and therefore, at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. 119 to 121. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1d.

In the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1d, a predetermined error detection result is output to the outside via an external relay terminal board 131 (may be abbreviated as “outer end board”). I am trying. By providing the external relay terminal board 131 on the main board 409, the slot machine 1d is connected to external equipment (hall computer 1200, data display, etc.) in the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to an external device.

128 and 129 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. In the following, the error occurrence based on the fourth requirement definition is centered on the difference from the flowchart (FIGS. 112, 113, 122, 123) of the error occurrence processing based on the first or second requirement definition. The processing procedure of the hour processing will be described.

First, the processing of steps S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 128 is the same as the processing of steps S801 to S812 of FIG. 122, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in FIG. 129, similarly to the processing in steps S813 to S832 in FIG. 123, in steps S850 to S852, whether or not an error is detected after the first stop button is pressed, and further, the error is a strong error. It is determined whether or not there is. However, in the case of FIG. 123, if it is determined that there is a strong error, the game is temporarily stopped (step S839 in FIG. 123), whereas in FIG. 129, even if it is determined that there is a strong error, the game is played. The progress is continued, and instead, a command indicating the occurrence of a strong error (outer end plate communication command) is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 (step S853).

In FIG. 129, in step S853, strong error occurrence information is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131, so that a strong error occurs in an external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) connected via the external relay terminal board 131. Information can be output. Meanwhile, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1d does not stop, and the process proceeds to the next stop button pressing process (step S854).

In FIG. 129, even when the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), the processing after the stop button is pressed as shown in steps S850 to S853 is repeated, and therefore, up to step S861. The detailed description of is omitted.

Summarizing the processes of steps S850 to S861, it is repeatedly determined whether or not an error is detected until the reel stop button 211 is pressed and the stop operation is performed on all reels 301, and it is determined that a particularly strong error is detected. When the determination is made, the occurrence of a strong error is immediately notified via the external relay terminal board 131.

Since the processing of steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 129 is the same as the processing of steps S819 to S827 in FIG. 113, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As an outline of the processing of steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 129, after the stop operation for all reels 301 is finished, the indication function display is cleared, all reels 301 are stopped, and then the winning combination is performed. When the payout is performed and an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays an error after the payout processing is completed, and waits for the error cancellation processing.

Note that the error display shown in step S869 of FIG. 129 is that even if the error detected during the game is a strong error, the error display (error of weak error shown in step 826 of FIG. 113 is displayed. Display) is different. That is, in FIG. 129, when a strong error is detected, the error occurrence is notified to the external device via the external relay terminal board 131, while the error display of the error is also performed in the slot machine 1d itself after the game ends. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong error can be notified more reliably.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIG. 128 and FIG. 129, in the slot machine 1d, regardless of which error is detected during the game, the game progress is continued and the error display of the error is displayed after the game ends. Be seen. Further, when a strong error is detected during the game, the error occurrence is immediately notified to the external device via the external relay terminal board 131, so that the hall managing the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200). It is possible for related parties to easily notice the occurrence of an important error, and it is possible to accurately manage the error occurrence data. Further, even if such a strong error occurs, the progress of the game is not interrupted, so that an effect of suppressing the burden on the player can be expected.

In the following, in the slot machine 1d, when an error occurs while the game is being advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 128 and 129, the display period of various display devices and the like will be described. , Under specific circumstances.

FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. In FIG. 130, it is assumed that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Further, in FIG. 130, the outer end plate communication 808 is added to indicate the timing when the main board 409 transmits a command to the external relay terminal board 131 as information indicating that a strong error has been detected. When the outer end board communication 808 is ON, it means that the above command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is OFF, it means that the above command is not transmitted.

In FIG. 130, similar to FIG. 124 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1b and FIG. 127 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1c, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON). Further, a strong error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

However, in FIG. 130, according to the requirement definition (fourth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, the game is not interrupted regardless of which error occurs, and the error is displayed after the game ends. Therefore, the "display" of the instruction function display 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805 is not disturbed by the occurrence of an error. However, when a strong error is detected, the main board 409 immediately sends a command indicating the detection of a strong error to the external relay terminal board 131 (outer end board communication 808 is ON), so that the external relay terminal board 131 is switched on. It is possible to notify the occurrence of a strong error to an external device connected via the near real time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130, after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (after the reels are completely stopped in the case of a game without payout), an error display is performed (“segment error 804 “ "Display", and "display" of the liquid crystal error 806), the error can be canceled before the next game is started.

[11-7-4-5. Error occurrence processing based on the fifth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1e is provided with the following requirements as the fifth requirement definition related to the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping of a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance related to game progress is defined as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance related to game progress than the “strong error” is defined as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) If an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not canceled regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 sends a predetermined command (for example, a display mode change command) to the error-dedicated display device to cause an error in the display mode on the display device. Change to a specific display for when it occurs.

The fifth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1e is the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and is different only in (4).

Therefore, in the slot machine 1e, like the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, and the slot machine 1d having the fourth requirement definition, only a weak error is generated. When the error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) by the various display devices shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition can be applied. Also, as for the recovery process at the time of power failure, the process of FIG. 114 shown as the process at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, and therefore, at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. 119 to 121. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1e.

131 and 132 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1e. When the processes of FIGS. 131 and 132 are compared with the processes of FIGS. 128 and 129 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1d, only steps S881, S882 and S883 in FIG. 132 are different.

In FIG. 132, when the first stop button is pressed (step S850), it is determined whether or not an error has been detected (step S851). If it is determined that there is an error, it is determined whether the error is a strong error. It is determined whether or not (step S852). When a strong error is determined in this step S852 (YES in step S852), the main board 409 transmits a “display mode change command” to the error-dedicated display device as the processing of step S881, and the display mode on the display device is displayed. Is changed to the specific display for when an error occurs.

Here, the "display mode change command" is one of the means for informing a specific display device (for example, the error lamp 604 may also be used) that at least a strong error has occurred. It is not necessary to use the command format as long as the specific display for informing the occurrence of the strong error can be displayed on the specific display. Further, the “display mode change command” may not only notify the occurrence of a strong error but also the details (type, etc.) of the error that has occurred.

Further, the processing of steps S882 and S883 is the same as that of step S881 in the error detection check after the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858). Since it is performed, the description is omitted.

As described above, in the slot machine 1e, by performing the processing of steps S881, S882, and S883, it is possible to notify that a strong error has occurred by a specific display device. The slot machine 1e is provided with such a specific display device separately from the display device (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed, so that when the strong error to be immediately notified occurs, the instruction function display ( Furthermore, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of the strong error while continuing the progress of the game without hindering the (navi display).

In the following, in the slot machine 1e, when an error occurs while the game is being advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 131 and 132, what will be the display period of various display devices and the like. , Under specific circumstances.

FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. It is assumed that FIG. 133 shows a situation in which the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Further, in FIG. 133, the display mode change 809 is added to indicate the transmission timing of the “display mode change command” for changing the display mode for a specific display device when the main board 409 detects a strong error. .. When the display mode change 809 is ON, it means “send”, and the above-mentioned display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display device. When the display mode change 809 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the display mode change command is not transmitted to the specific display device. Further, although the timing of changing the display mode on the specific display device is not shown in FIG. 133, it is assumed that the timing is changed immediately after the display mode change 809 becomes “ON (transmission)”.

In FIG. 133, similarly to FIG. 130 and the like used in the explanation of the slot machine 1d, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and further, the timing of pressing the second stop button. Indicates that a strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (fifth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, (1) to (3) are the same as (1) to (3) of the fourth requirement definition, and (4) ) Only different. Focusing on this point, comparing FIG. 133 with FIG. 130 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1d, in FIG. 130, a command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 when a strong error is detected. 133 is different in that the display mode on a specific display is changed by transmitting the display mode change command at the same timing. However, the display period of each display other than that is the same in FIGS. 130 and 133.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 133, it is preferable that the change of the display mode on the specific display device is continued until the error of the strong error that caused the change is canceled.

As an example of the display mode of the "specific display for occurrence of a strong error" on a specific display device, when the error lamp 604 that is normally used for error notification is also used, it is lit during normal error notification. On the other hand, in the case of the specific display based on the strong error detection, the display mode may be changed such as blinking. Further, when using a dedicated specific display device, more detailed error notification can be realized by changing the notification pattern (lighting pattern, display image, audio output pattern, volume, etc.) according to the type of strong error. You can

According to the slot machine 1e, by enabling such "specific display for occurrence of strong error", it is possible to promptly and surely notify the occurrence of an error when a strong error having a great influence on the game occurs. In addition, the special display LED 612 for indicating the indication function and the number of payouts, and the image display body 500 for displaying the navigation are prevented from interfering with the respective display contents, so that the game can smoothly proceed. Can be expected to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 133, after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (after the reel is completely stopped in the case of a game without payout), the error display is performed (“segment error 804 “ "Display", and "display" of the liquid crystal error 806), the error can be canceled before the next game is started.

[11-7-4-6. Error occurrence processing based on the sixth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1f is provided with the following requirement as the sixth requirement definition relating to the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping of a plurality of errors based on importance. Specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance related to game progress is defined as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance related to game progress than the “strong error” is defined as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) If an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not canceled regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the display mode of the special function LED 612 indicates the strong error is detected by changing the control pattern of the main board 409. Is changed to a display mode that understands.

The sixth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1f is the same as the fourth or fifth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

Therefore, in the slot machine 1f, similarly to the slot machines 1b to 1e provided with the other requirement definitions described above, when only a weak error occurs, when only a weak error occurs, It is possible to apply the display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) by the various display devices shown in the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition of No. 1. Also, as for the recovery process at the time of power failure, the process of FIG. 114 shown as the process at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, and therefore, at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. 119 to 121. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1f.

134 and 135 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1f. Comparing the processing of FIGS. 134 and 135 with the processing of FIGS. 128 and 129 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1d and the processing of FIGS. 131 and 132 used in the explanation of the slot machine 1e, step S884 in FIG. Only S885 and S886 are different.

That is, in the error occurrence process based on the sixth requirement definition, as shown in FIG. 135, a strong error is detected in the strong error determination (steps S852, S856, S860) in the error check after pressing each stop button. When it is determined that the special display LED 612 is displayed, the main board 409 transmits a command for displaying an instruction function display when an error occurs (steps S884, S885, S886). The display mode in which only the instruction content is displayed (instruction function display in pattern 1) is changed to the display mode in which the detection of the strong error is displayed together with the instruction content (instruction function display in pattern 2).

Here, an example of a specific control for changing the display form of the indication function display when controlling the indication function display by a command will be described. In the case of performing the indication function display of pattern 2 when a strong error is detected, a normal control is performed. By setting a predetermined bit that is not used in the command for pattern 1, information indicating the instruction content and information indicating a strong error can be transmitted together as a command. As a display example of the pattern 2 on the special display LED 612, when the pattern 2 is used, blinking display, error information and instruction information are alternately displayed, and a bit segment is turned on. Good.

As described in the "display mode change command" in the description of the slot machine 1e, the communication format of information does not necessarily have to be the command format in order to satisfy each requirement definition in the slot machines 1a to 1f. Input/output control may be performed in a format other than a command in controlling the function display.

As described above, in the slot machine 1f, by performing the processes of steps S884, S885, and S886, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a strong error by the special display LED 612 without interrupting the indication function display.

Therefore, according to the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs during the game, even if the error is a strong error, the game progress is not interrupted, so that the player can surely be provided with a game opportunity. Further, on the other hand, the occurrence of a strong error can be promptly notified at a location (a special display LED 612 on the display panel 501) that is easily visible to the player or the like, so that the safety for the slot machine 1f can be ensured. Can be expected.

In the following, in the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs while the game is being advanced based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 134 and 135, what will be the display period of various display devices, etc. , Under specific circumstances.

FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. It is assumed that FIG. 136 shows a situation in which the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Further, in FIG. 136, when the strong error is detected, the display pattern of the indicating function display is changed from the pattern 1 at the normal time to the pattern 2 at the time of the error occurrence, and therefore, the display period of the indicating function display in each pattern is shown. As an alternative, instead of the "instruction function 802" used in other figures, "instruction function (pattern 1) 802a" and "instruction function (pattern 1) 802a" are added.

In FIG. 136, similarly to FIG. 130 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, FIG. 133 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, etc., a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a ON), and a strong error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (sixth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1f, (1) to (3) are the same as (1) to (3) of the fourth or fifth requirement definition. , (4) is different. Paying attention to this point, comparing the display period (FIG. 136) in the slot machine 1f with the case of the slot machine 1d (FIG. 130) and the case of the slot machine 1e (FIG. 133), when a strong error is detected, FIG. The command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131, and the display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display device in FIG. 133, whereas in FIG. 136, the display mode pattern of the instruction function display is displayed at the same timing. It is different in that the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function display of the pattern 2 by changing. However, the display periods of the other displays are the same in FIGS. 130, 133, and 136.

Further, according to FIG. 136, the “display” of the function display 802a is switched to the “display” of the instruction function 802b at the timing of pressing the second stop button when the strong error occurs (timing when the strong error occurrence 807b is turned on). To be Then, the instruction function display of pattern 2 is continuously displayed until the timing of pressing the third stop button. That is, in the slot machine 1f, even if the indication function display is changed to the pattern 2 due to the detection of the strong error, the indication function display of the pattern 2 is continued until the original display period of the indication function display ends. It means that.

According to such a slot machine 1f, while the progress of the game is not interrupted by the occurrence of an error, the instruction content of the instruction function is continuously displayed, while the instruction function is displayed when an important strong error occurs. Since it is possible to notify the occurrence of the error by changing the mode of (1), it is possible to realize a gaming machine that achieves both smooth progress of the game and prompt response to an abnormal state.

Further, as shown in detail, the liquid crystal error 806 controlled by the sub-board 510 is also “displayed” at the same timing after the end of the game as the segment error 804. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (after all reels are stopped in the case of a game without payout)), the next game is played. You can let the error clear before you start.

It should be noted that the slot machines 1a to 1f may be appropriately combined as long as the respective requirement definitions regarding the processing at the time of error occurrence do not interfere. For example, if the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition is a limited process related to a weak error, it can be combined with the second to sixth requirement definitions. Further, for example, by combining the processes at the time of detecting a strong error in the fourth to sixth requirement definitions, a wide range of notifications can be realized at the time of detecting a strong error.

[11-8. Reincarnation production]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "reincarnation effect" is prepared as a special game effect executed in a specific game section when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game. When the reincarnation effect is executed, it can be expected to give a new privilege (for example, the addition of the number of AT games), and the degree of the expectation is higher than that during a normal AT game.

Further, the game section in which the reincarnation effect is performed can be divided into a stacking zone and a discharging zone, and the games played in each zone are called a stacking game and a discharging game. The accumulation game is played over a plurality of unit games (one game played by multiplying the game value), and predetermined information (for example, information about a winning combination flag and reel stop) is executed in each unit game. Information regarding the aspect) is stored. The releasing game is played after the stacking game in a shorter game period than the unit games in which the stacking game is played, and new benefits can be given based on the predetermined information stored in the stacking game. To That is, the privilege expectation accumulated by storing the information of the accumulation game is collectively emitted in the emission game of a shorter game period than the accumulation game.

The privilege that can be given in the release game (for example, the number of AT games to be added) is a different opportunity from the privilege that is given when the accumulation game is executed (for example, paying out game value or adding the number of AT games). Is a new privilege that is different from the privilege that can be granted in a normal unit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, before the execution of the reincarnation effect, a predictive effect that suggests the execution of the reincarnation effect can be executed, and the game in which the predictive effect (preliminary reincarnation effect) is performed is called a reincarnation precursor game.

The outline of the AT game according to the present embodiment will be described below, and then the reincarnation effect during the AT game will be described in detail.

[11-8-1. Overview of AT game]
The outline of the AT game will be described. Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the AT function, the AT game number counter is determined for each game to determine whether the AT game is continued or ended, and the number of games is managed (AT. Game determination process). The AT game determination process corresponds to a performance process that affects the generation of an instruction, and thus is executed by the main board 409.

The AT game starts when the AT game start condition is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the AT end condition is satisfied. [11-3-2] As described in the instruction function process below, when the start condition of the AT game is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (AT flag) is turned ON (=1) and the AT game is Is started and the AT flag is turned off (=0) at the end of the AT game. Information such as an internal flag relating to an AT game such as an AT flag and the number of AT games described later is held in a memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 for controlling the AT game, but in the sub-board 510. Similar information may be held in a memory (for example, RAM 1122).

The conditions for starting the AT game (conditions for turning on the AT flag) are as described in detail in [11-3-2] and below, but simply stated, the AT was won in the AT lottery. In the state (AT internal flag is ON), the starting condition of the winning AT is satisfied. Also, as described above, when the AT flag is turned on and the AT game starts, the AT internal flag is turned off.

At the start of the AT game, the effect of clearly indicating to the player the start of the AT game and the number of AT games is performed (for example, the AT start screen is displayed). Further, in addition to the start-time game number determined at the start of the AT game, a function is added to add the AT game number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition during the AT game.

Further, FIG. 137 below shows a process in which the game period controlled for the AT game game state (AT game period) is subtracted by 1 count for each game, but the AT game period is changed by another subtraction method ( For example, in the case where the AT game period is managed according to the number of appearances of AT navigation), it is preferable to perform an appropriate AT game determination process according to the subtraction method.

[11-8-2. Control processing related to reincarnation (main board)]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a part of the detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation processing, and particularly shows processing by the main board 409 for the AT game (step S1001 of FIG. 137 is the same as that of FIG. 58). (YES after step S601 (AT flag is ON)). Then, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "reincarnation effect" is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game. Below, each process of FIG. 137 is demonstrated focusing on the process regarding the reincarnation effect.

First, in step S1001 of FIG. 137, it is determined whether the reincarnation flag is ON. Here, the reincarnation flag is an internal flag for indicating that the reincarnation effect is being executed (including immediately before the start of execution), and when it is ON (=1), it is in the reincarnation effect (including the reincarnation effect start time). ), and when OFF (=0), it means that non-incarnation production is being performed. The reincarnation flag is turned on when the reincarnation lottery is won and the number of remaining games of the incarnation precursor game is 0 (step S1029 described later). Then, the turned-on reincarnation flag is turned off at the timing when the lottery process for the discharge zone in the reincarnation effect is completed (step S1013 described later).

If the reincarnation flag is ON in step S1001 (YES), the processes in and after step S1002 are performed as "process for reincarnation effect". If the reincarnation flag is OFF in step S1001 (NO), the processes from step S1021 onward are performed as "process for non-reincarnation effect".

Note that in step S1021, it is determined whether or not the reincarnation precursor game flag is ON. The reincarnation precursor game flag is an internal flag for indicating that the reincarnation precursor game is being executed (including immediately before the start of execution), and when ON (=1), it is during the reincarnation precursor game ( (Including), and when OFF (=0), it means during the non-incarnation precursor game.

When the precursory game flag for reincarnation is ON in step S1021 (YES), the processing from step S1022 onward is performed as "processing for predicting reincarnation game". On the other hand, when the precursory game flag for reincarnation is OFF in step S1021 (YES), the processing from step S1031 is performed as "processing for the non-reincarnation precursory game".

In the following, in order to facilitate understanding of each process shown in FIG. 137 in the progress of the game, “processing for a non-incarnation precursor game (steps S1031 to S1038)”, “processing for an incarnation precursor game” (Steps S1021 to S1030)", "Processing for reincarnation effect (Steps S1002 to S1013)" will be described in order, and finally, "Processing regarding remaining AT game number (Steps S1041 to S1045)" will be described.

(1) Processing for Non-Reincarnation Premonition Game When the reincarnation flag is not ON in step S1001 (NO) and the reincarnation precursor game flag is not ON in step S1021 (NO), that is, even during reincarnation production or during the reincarnation precursor game The processing when there is not is described.

First, in step S1031, an AT additional lottery is performed in which the number of additional games to be added to the number of continuous AT games is selected. If the player has won the AT additional lottery in step S1031 (if the number of additional games other than 0 games is selected), the winning value (the number of additional games) is added to the current "AT game number", and then the process of step S1034 (Step S1032 YES, S1033). If the player has not won the AT addition lottery in step S1031 (when the number of games to be added to 0 game is selected), there is no AT game to be added, and thus the process directly proceeds to step S1034 (NO in step S1032). The “AT game number” is managed by holding a value in predetermined variable data that can be rewritten, but in this example, detailed description at the time of rewriting is omitted, and “AT game number” is simply added. The description such as "do" is adopted. Then, such an abbreviation is applied to other variable data.

In addition, the variable data of “AT game number” shown in FIG. 137 and the like counts the “internal AT game number” used in the processing on the main board 409, and is the variable of “AT game number”. The data value is not always taught to the player at the same timing. That is, even if the “internal AT game number” is added, the timing at which the player can identify the AT game number after addition is discriminated by the main board 409 or the sub-board 510. Can be controlled. Specifically, for example, when the number of internal AT games is 50 in the AT game, and the number of additional games of 30 is added, the number of internal AT games is 80. At this time, on the image display body 500 whose output is controlled by the sub-board 510, the display of the AT game number may be immediately added from "50 games" to "80 games", but it may be delayed after several games have passed. May be displayed such that "30 games" are added, or "30 games" may be divided and added over a plurality of times, or after 50 games (the remaining games of the AT game). The display (so-called back-loading) may be made such that "30 games" is added when the number becomes 0). As described above, by changing the number of AT games that can be recognized by the player at a timing that does not necessarily coincide with the change in the number of internal AT games, it is possible to realize various game playability. Can contribute to improving the interest of

FIG. 138 is an example of a lottery table used for AT additional lottery. The lottery table shown in FIG. 138 can be used for the AT additional lottery in step S1031, and based on the winning combination selected in the game (see steps S106 and S111 in FIG. 55), from 0 to 300 games. Lottery for the number of additional games. It should be noted that selecting the number of games to be added to the 0 game is substantially synonymous with not adding the number of AT games (not winning the addition). When the number of additional games is selected by using the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 142 and 143 described later, AT additional lottery using the lottery table shown in FIG. 138 is not performed.

In the lottery table of FIG. 138, the winning combination is two groups of “replay, push order bell (AT1 to AT10), two types BB, out” and “other than the above (watermelon, cherry, chance eye, strongest eye)”. It is set so that the degree of expectation regarding privilege granting (addition of the number of AT games) is different for each group. When the degree of expectation is specifically confirmed, in the case of a winning combination included in the former group, the number of games added to 0 game is selected, and the number of AT games is not added. On the other hand, in the case of a winning combination included in the latter group, there is a possibility that 0 games will be selected (108/256), but AT games may be added (148/256). The number of games to be added to 300 games is selected.

In other words, the winning combination included in the former group is a “low-expecting role”, which has a low degree of expectation regarding the privilege granting that the number of AT games is increased, and the winning combination included in the latter group is an AT game having a lower expectation. It is a “high-expecting role” with a high degree of expectation regarding the addition of the number of benefits. Strictly speaking, “miss” is not a winning combination, and thus may not be included in the low expected combination.

Also, referring to FIG. 49, the above-mentioned high expected winning combination is also a “low frequency winning combination (low winning combination, rare winning combination)” in which a winning probability equal to or lower than a predetermined probability is set. For example, if the predetermined probability is 1/80, in the case of the general state shown in FIG. 49, the winning probability is 1/81.9 even for the weak watermelon having the highest winning probability among the high expected hands, and the predetermined probability is You can see that it is below. On the other hand, the low expected winning combination is also a "high frequency winning combination (high winning combination, non-rare combination)" in which a higher winning probability is set than that of the low frequency winning combination.

Note that such grouping of winning combinations is also used in FIGS. 139 to 143 described later, but the same description is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 138 to 143, all winning combinations are divided into two groups and the distribution is set for each group, but the lottery table applicable to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has such a mode. Not limited to. For example, distribution may be set for each winning combination. In addition, for example, the groups that were two in FIG. 138 may be subdivided, and the winning combinations may be divided into three or more groups. However, considering the load on the program processing, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and control the processing load by setting the distribution by grouping to some extent rather than setting the distribution according to each winning combination. can do.

Further, in the AT additional lottery in the present embodiment, as in the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 138, the number of additional games may be drawn by one lottery based on the winning combination, but such a lottery method It is not limited to. Alternatively, for example, a two-stage lottery may be performed, in which whether or not to add the number of AT games is selected by lottery, and when the number of additional games is increased by lottery.

In step S1034, a reincarnation lottery is performed in which the reincarnation effect is drawn by lottery. If the player has won the reincarnation lottery, the process proceeds to step S1036. If the player has not won (not won), the process for the non-reincarnation precursor game ends, and the process proceeds to step S1041 (step S1035).

FIG. 139 is an example of a lottery table used for reincarnation lottery. The lottery table shown in FIG. 139 can be used for the reincarnation lottery in step S1034. If the winning combination of the game is “low expected combination”, it is relatively difficult to win (1/256), while the winning combination of the game is When the winning combination is the "highly expected combination", it is set relatively easily (80/256).

When the player has won the reincarnation effect in step S1034, in step S1036, a reincarnation precursor game number lottery is performed to determine the number of games for which the precursor effect for the selected reincarnation effect is executed (precursor game number).

FIG. 140 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery for predicting reincarnation games. The lottery table shown in FIG. 140 can be used for the number-of-preliminaries game lottery in step S1036, and the number of precursor games is lottered based on the winning combination of the game. Note that, in FIG. 140, the distribution of the number of precursor games is set to be the same regardless of the winning combination of the game, but the distribution setting mode is not limited to this. For example, when the winning combination of the game is a “high expected combination”, the number of precursor games for a relatively long period may be made easier to be selected than when the winning combination is a “low expected combination”. Further, the number of precursor games of 0 game may be set to be included in the lottery result, and in such a case, when the number of precursor games of 0 game is selected, the number of precursor games of 0 games is not directly passed through the reincarnation precursor game. It is possible to realize a game progress in which the reincarnation effect is started.

In step S1037, the number of predictive games determined in the number of predictive reincarnation games in step S1036 is set to the “number of predictive reincarnation games”. Then, in step S1038, after the incarnation precursor game flag is turned ON (=1), the process proceeds to step S1041.

As described above, the main parts of the processes of steps S1031 to S1038 are summarized. When the reincarnation lottery in step S1034 is won, the reincarnation precursor game number lottery is performed in step S1036, and the incarnation precursor game flag is turned on in step S1038. As a result, the conditions for starting the reincarnation precursor game are satisfied.

(2) Processing for the Reincarnation Predatory Game If the reincarnation flag is not ON in step S1001 (NO) and the reincarnation precursor game flag is ON in step S1021 (YES), that is, the reincarnation is not in progress, the reincarnation precursor The processing when the game is executed will be described. When the reincarnation predictive game is executed, on the display device (for example, the image display body 500) managed by the sub-board 510, a predictive effect (a rough effect, a continuous effect, etc.) in a display mode different from the normal game state is displayed. At the end of the reincarnation precursor game, the start of reincarnation production is taught. It is also possible to prepare a dummy precursor effect that does not lead to the start of the reincarnation effect.

First, in step S1022, AT addition lottery is performed. This AT addition lottery is the same process as the AT addition lottery in step S1031, and for example, the lottery table of FIG. 138 can be used. If the player has won the AT addition lottery in step S1022, the winning value is added to the number of AT games, and then the process proceeds to step S1025 (YES in step S1023, S1024). If the player has not won the AT addition lottery in step S1022, there is no game to be added, and thus the process directly proceeds to step S1025 (NO in step S1023).

In step S1025, "1" is subtracted from the number of reincarnation precursor games. Then, in step S1026, it is determined whether or not the number of incarnation precursor games after the process of step S1025 is “0”. When the number of pre-incarnation games is "0" (YES), it means that the pre-incarnation game is finished and the reincarnation effect is started from the next game, and the processing from step S1027 is performed. When the number of pre-incarnation games is not "0" (NO), the process for the pre-incarnation game is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1041.

In step S1027, a reincarnation accumulation game number lottery is performed in which the number of games (number of accumulation games) in which the reincarnation production accumulation game is executed is selected. FIG. 141 is an example of a lottery table used in the lottery for reincarnation accumulation games. The lottery table shown in FIG. 141 can be used for the reincarnating accumulated game number lottery in step S1027, and the accumulated game number is drawn based on the winning combination of the game. According to the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 141, when the winning combination is “low expected combination”, the number of accumulated games of 3 games is always selected, and when the winning combination is “high expected combination”, 3 games, The number of accumulated games of either 5 games or 7 games is selected. The winning combination referred to in the lottery table of FIG. 141 is not limited to the winning combination of the game (the winning combination in the game in which the number of pre-reincarnation games is “0”). For example, the winning combination in step S1034 It may be a winning role in the game that is won in the lottery.

Although details will be described later, since information on the relevant game (for example, a winning combination flag) is stored in each accumulation game, and a privilege can be given based on the stored information in the discharge game, the period of the number of accumulation games. The longer is, the higher the degree of expectation regarding the granting of the privilege in the whole reincarnation production becomes. Therefore, in the case of performing the reincarnation accumulation game number lottery using the lottery table of FIG. 141, when the winning combination of the game is “high expected winning combination”, and when the winning combination of the game is “low expected winning combination” Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation regarding the granting of the privilege in the reincarnation effect executed later.

Then, the number of rollover games determined by the reincarnation rollover game number lottery in step S1027 is set to the "rollover rollover game number" (step S1028), and the reincarnation flag is set to ON (step S1029), whereby the reincarnation effect is produced. Ready to start. Therefore, the pre-incarnation game is ended, and in step S1030, the pre-incarnation game flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1041.

(3) Process for reincarnation production The process when the reincarnation flag is ON in step S1001 (YES), that is, the process for reincarnation production will be described.

Among the processes of steps S1002 to S1013, steps S1002 to S1007 are processes for the stacking zone, and steps S1008 to S1012 are processes for the discharge zone. Explaining the outline of the reincarnation production of this example, information of the game is stored in each game in the accumulation zone (accumulation game), and a privilege is given based on the held information in the discharge zone.

First, in step S1002, information about the game (unit game) is stored in the reincarnation storage counter. The reincarnation memory counter is an example of information holding means for holding information in the accumulation game for each unit game, and in the processing example of FIG. 137, the winning combination selected by random number extraction in the starting process is used as the information regarding the game. Flag (see steps S106 and S111 in FIG. 55) is held. That is, in step S1002, information indicating the winning combination flag in the multiplication game is set in the reincarnation storage counter.

The “game-related information” stored in the reincarnation storage counter is not limited to the above-described information (flag information) indicating the winning combination flag, and for example, the operation of the reel 301 in each unit game of the accumulation game. It may be information indicating a mode (stop order, rotation time, stop position, etc.). By holding the information indicating the operation mode of the reel 301 in this manner, it becomes possible to reproduce and display the operation mode of the reel 301 during the accumulation game in the subsequent discharging game. The "reproduction display" in the reincarnation production means, for example, a display at least to the extent that the reproduction target can be recalled, and does not necessarily repeat exactly the same mode as the reproduction target. Specifically, it displays a reproduction with a stop result with a missing drop corrected, promotes the winning combination and displays it again, and wins that are not displayed among multiple winning combinations that have been simultaneously won (double winning). Performing a reproduction display with a stop result based on the (condition device) is also included in the “reproduction display” in the reincarnation production (missing and promotion will be described in detail later).

Next, in step S1003, the value of the regeneration transfer counter (for reel) is incremented by "1", and in step S1004, the value of the regeneration release counter (for lottery) is incremented by "1". The reincarnation release counter is a counter for processing in the reincarnation production release game, and is a reincarnation release counter for reel control (for reels) and a reincarnation release counter for additional lottery processing for the AT game (for lottery). ) And are prepared.

The counter value of the reincarnation discharge counter (for reels) means the number of times the pseudo game is executed in the discharge game (the number of pseudo games), and is referred to in step S107 of FIG. 55 and the like. Then, the dummy game is executed in the discharging game by the number of times indicated by the counter value. Further, the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) means the number of times the additional lottery is executed in the release game, and the counter value is decremented every time the additional transfer AT reincarnation release is performed in step S1009 described later.

Next, in step S1005, "1" is subtracted from the number of reincarnated accumulated games, which indicates the number of remaining games in the accumulated zone.

In step S1006, a transfer addition AT addition lottery is performed in which the number of additional AT games in the addition game is selected. The AT additional lottery during reincarnation accumulation can be positioned as a lottery that is an alternative to the AT additional lottery (steps S1022 and S1031) during the non-incarnation effect. The number of games added to the lottery result is added to the number of AT games in step S1007.

FIG. 142 is an example of a lottery table used for AT addition when transferring products. The lottery table shown in FIG. 142 can be used for the AT transfer addition lottery in step S1006, and the number of additional games is selected based on the winning combination of the game. More specifically, according to the lottery table of FIG. 142, when the winning combination is “low expected combination”, at least 10 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 53. There will be 5 games (13700/256). When the winning combination is “highly expected combination”, at least 30 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 104.1 games (26660/256). In other words, when the winning combination is the “highly expected combination”, the minimum number of games to be added and the expected value are higher than when the winning combination is the “low expected combination”.

After the process of step S1007, the process for the emission zone is started. First, in step S1008, it is determined whether or not the number of reincarnation accumulation games is 0 (that is, whether or not the accumulation zone is ended).

If the number of reincarnation accumulation games is 0 in step S1008 (YES), the accumulation zone is ended and the discharge zone is started, so that the process proceeds to step S1009. On the other hand, in step S1008, if the number of reincarnation accumulation games is other than 0 (NO), the accumulation games remain and the emission zone is not yet moved. Therefore, the processing for the emission zone is not performed, The process proceeds to step S1041.

In step S1009, a transfer addition AT addition lottery for drawing the number of AT games to be added in the release game is performed. The number of games added to the lottery result is added to the number of AT games (step S1010), and the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is decremented by "1" (step S1011).

FIG. 143 is an example of a lottery table used for the AT additional lottery at the time of transfer release. The lottery table shown in FIG. 143 can be used for the AT addition reassignment lottery in step S1009, and the number of additional games is lotted based on the winning combination of the game. More specifically, according to the lottery table of FIG. 143, when the winning combination is “low expected combination”, at least 20 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 59. There will be four games (15200/256). Further, when the winning combination is the “highly expected combination”, at least 50 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 121.9 games (31200/256). In other words, when the winning combination is the “highly expected combination”, the minimum number of games to be added and the expected value are higher than when the winning combination is the “low expected combination”.

In addition, by the number of additional games by AT additional transfer lottery lottery (step S1009) performed using the lottery table of FIG. 143 and the additional transfer AT addition lottery lottery (step S1006) performed using the lottery table of FIG. Comparing with the number of games to be added, the expected value of the number of games to be added by the AT addition at the time of reincarnation release is higher than the expected value of the number of additional games to be added by the AT drawing at the time of reincarnation accumulation (specific difference: It can be seen that in the case of +, the game is +5.9, and in the case of the high expectation role, it is +17.8. That is, the degree of expectation related to a new privilege that can be given in the discharging game is higher than the degree of expectation related to the privilege that can be given in the accumulation game.

Next, in step S1012, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the reversion release counter (for lottery) is 0 (that is, whether or not the process for the release zone is ended). In step S1012, if the counter value of the regeneration transfer counter (for lottery) is other than 0 (NO), since the stock for the discharge zone remains, the process returns to step S1009, and the reversion release counter for discharge zone (for lottery) is performed. Until the counter value of) becomes 0, the processing such as AT addition lottery at the time of transfer release is repeated. On the other hand, if the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is 0 in step S1012 (YES), the reinstatement flag is turned off (step S1013) to end the process for the release zone, and in step S1041. Go to processing.

As described above, the processing for reincarnation production is completed by performing the processing of steps S1002 to S1013.

Note that, according to FIG. 137, the process for the discharging game (in particular, the process of steps S1009 to S1013) is the same after the process for the multiplying game (steps S1002 to S1007) is finished in the final game of the multiplying game. However, this is only one processing example in the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, and other processing timings and processing procedures may be used.

Describing in more detail by taking the extra lottery at the time of reincarnation release as an example, when the process of FIG. 137 is performed, the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is set in the same game after the number of reincarnation accumulation games becomes 0. Since it is repeatedly executed by the number of times of the counter value, internally, at the end of the final game of the accumulation game, the number of additional games to be added in the discharging game is all determined.

On the other hand, as another processing example, after the final game of the accumulation game (for example, a unit game in which the discharging game is executed), the number of times of the counter value set in the reincarnation discharge counter (for lottery) is reincarnated. The additional lottery may be repeated at the time of release. In addition, for example, when a stacking game is executed a plurality of times in the stacking zone, additional transfer lottery may be performed for each unit game at the time of reincarnation release. Further, for example, during the unit game in which the release game is executed, the additional lottery at the time of reincarnation release may be performed before each pseudo game is executed.

However, no matter what timing or procedure the process for the release game is performed, the number of additional games determined by the process for the release game (the number of additional games during reincarnation release) is displayed on the reels or the like in the release game. It is preferable that the player is instructed/announced at the timing of execution. That is, even if the “internal AT game number” is added according to the number of additional games at the time of reincarnation release, the teaching timing of the additional game number at the time of reincarnation release to the player is before and after the reel operation for the release game is performed. It is preferable that such a teaching control is performed, so that it is possible to strongly impress the player that a new privilege is given in the release game, so that a new playability is created and Amusement of the game can be greatly enhanced. Although the above teaching timing is basically preferable, the teaching timing may be changed only in some cases. Specifically, for example, when the number of additional games is less than a predetermined number, the number of additional games is taught immediately after the reels stop, but when the number of additional games is more than the predetermined number (or part of them). ) May be taught at a timing further delayed by a predetermined time from immediately after the reel is stopped. In such a case, it is possible to presume a large number of additional games due to the deviation of the teaching timing. The interest can be increased.

(4) Processing Related to Remaining Number of AT Games As described above, since the reincarnation effect of this example is performed during the AT game, after the processing shown in steps S1001 to 1038 has been performed, in step S1041 AT The number of games is decremented by "1".

Then, in step S1042, it is determined whether or not the number of AT games is zero. If it is determined in step S1042 that the number of AT games is not 0 (that is, the AT game does not end), the instruction function generating process in the game ends, and the AT game continues in the subsequent games.

If it is determined in step S1042 that the number of AT games is 0 (that is, the AT game ends), the AT game end condition is satisfied, and thus the process proceeds to step S1043 and the processing at the end of AT is performed.

Specifically, the reincarnation flag is turned off in step S1043, the reincarnation precursor game flag is turned off in step S1044, and the AT flag is turned off in step S1045. Then, after the processing of step S1045, the instruction function generation processing in the game ends.

As described above, the processing for the AT game (including the processing relating to the reincarnation effect) is completed by performing the processing of steps S1001 to S1045 of FIG. 137. In the process illustrated in FIG. 137, even if the reincarnation lottery is won in step S1034, the reincarnation effect is not executed when the AT game is finished while the reincarnation precursor game is being executed. As a countermeasure against such a case, for example, when winning the reincarnation lottery, the maximum value of the number of precursor incarnation games (four games in the case of FIG. 140) that can be selected in the number of predictive reincarnation games in step S1036 is set. It is also possible to add a large number of games without fail so that the reincarnation effect is always executed without ending the AT game. Further, while the precursory game for reincarnation is being executed, while the subtraction of the AT game number is temporarily stopped internally, the subtraction display of the AT game number is continued on the image display body 500, before the winning reincarnation effect is started. It may be possible to avoid ending the AT game. Furthermore, when the subtraction of the number of AT games is temporarily stopped internally, if the reincarnation precursor effect remains after the display of the number of AT games on the image display body 500 becomes 0, the AT on the image display body 500 is displayed. The AT game may be displayed as being continued by keeping the display of the number of games at 0 or displaying a special extension (for example, a display such as "EXTRA").

[11-8-3. Reincarnation production game progression]
In the following, the game progress in the reincarnation effect will be described using a specific display example during the reincarnation effect.

FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the progress of the game during the reincarnation effect. In FIG. 144, the reincarnation precursor game is played over three games during AT (first game to third game), and as a reincarnation effect thereafter, the accumulation game is between three games (fourth game to sixth game). The release game is played during one game (seventh game). In the seventh game, discharge games (games 7-1 to 7-3) are executed three times during the pseudo game (simulated game of three games) while the main game of one game is executed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining an example of the liquid crystal display and the reel display during the reincarnation effect. In each of FIGS. 145(a) to (d) and (a') to (c'), an example of liquid crystal display is shown in the upper part, and an example of reel display is shown in the lower part. Here, the liquid crystal display means image display by the image display body 500, and the display mode is controlled by the sub-board 510. Further, the reel display means a stop result of the reel 301 which is made visible to the player by the symbol display window 401. Since the operation of the reel 301 is controlled by the main board 409, the reel display is also controlled by the main board 409. Note that (a) to (d) and (a') to (c') in FIG. 145 correspond to the same symbols in FIG. 144, respectively, and show an example of the display mode at each timing.

Here, the outline of the reincarnation effect described in FIG. 137 will be described again. The reincarnation effect is decided to be executed when the reincarnation lottery (step S1034) is won, and the reincarnation precursor game is executed over the number of the reincarnation precursor games that have been drawn (step S1036) before the reincarnation lottery is executed. Further, during the reincarnation production, the accumulation game and the release game are executed, and when the accumulation game is executed for the number of reincarnation accumulation games selected by lottery (step S1027), information about the game is stored (step S1002), based on the information stored in a plurality of accumulation games, a release game over a game period shorter than the total number of accumulation games (a game period of the number of games in the main game multiplied by the game value). Is executed. Then, in the discharging game, a new privilege is added (step S1010) in addition to the privilege (step S1007) in the accumulation game.

Referring to FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, when following the progress of the game of the reincarnation effect, first, in the first to third games, a reincarnation precursor game (reincarnation game) that suggests whether or not the reincarnation effect is executed. Sign production) is performed.

The form of the reincarnation precursor effect is not particularly limited, but may be an effect that gives an impression different from usual or a continuous effect that may suggest execution of the reincarnation effect. For example, some sort of battle effect may be displayed on the image display body 500, and execution of the reincarnation effect may be suggested when the battle effect is won. In addition, for example, by not displaying a clear warning sign effect as in the above-mentioned battle effect, but by displaying (buzzing) various effect displays that are noisier than usual, there is a high expectation for some advantageous state. You may make it suggest and then teach execution of reincarnation production.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the teaching effect in the reincarnation precursor effect, but also various teaching effects may be performed at a predetermined timing during the reincarnation effect. Specifically, for example, on the image display body 500, a display such as "entering the accumulation zone" is displayed at the start of the reincarnation effect to instruct execution of the accumulation game, or a game in which the emission game is executed (see FIG. 144). At the start of (equivalent to 7 games), a display such as “emission zone entry” may be displayed to instruct execution of the emission game. Further, in addition to the effect display by the image display body 500, various outputs relating to the execution of the reincarnation effect may be performed by operating a predetermined effect means (for example, LED or accessory).

Next, in the fourth to sixth games, the reincarnation effect is started, and the accumulation game corresponding to the first half is executed. In the reincarnation production of the present embodiment, the accumulation game is executed over a plurality of consecutive unit games (main game).

Specifically, in the fourth game shown in FIG. 145(a), as a reel display, a stop symbol of a push-order bell combination (any one of AT1 to AT10) is shown, and as a liquid crystal display, the number of AT games is added ( He is taught that he has won 10 additional games. More specifically, the bell symbols are lined up and stopped on the line descending to the right, and it is determined that the bell is won, and nine medals are paid out (see FIG. 51). That is, the winning combination of the fourth game is the push order bell (any of AT1 to AT10), and since the AT game is being executed, the reel 301 is stopped according to the taught navigation display. , The stop sequence of the push order bell is displayed on the reel, and the number of additional games of 10 games is selected in the AT additional transfer lottery in the game (step S1006 of FIG. 137).

In the remaining games (fifth game and sixth game) of the accumulation game, the game progresses similarly to the fourth game. In the fifth game, it is assumed that the strong watermelon is selected as the winning character and that the number of additional games of 30 games is selected in the AT addition lottery during reincarnation accumulation. However, in the fifth game, it is assumed that the stop timing of the reel 301 (timing of pressing the reel stop button 211) is not proper timing, and at this time, the symbols forming the symbol combination of the strong watermelon cannot be drawn sufficiently, On the reel display of FIG. 145(b), the stop result due to the missed item of the role of the strong watermelon is displayed. More specifically, the watermelon symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel and the middle reel, but the watermelon symbol cannot be drawn into the right reel and the blue 7 symbol is stopped. At this time, it is not determined that the winning combination of the strong watermelon has been won, and the medal is not paid out (see FIG. 53). However, even if the reel display is missed, since the AT addition lottery during reincarnation accumulation is performed based on the winning combination, the liquid crystal display teaches the addition winning of 30 games (30G).

In the sixth game, it is assumed that the replay is selected as the winning combination, and the number of additional games of 20 games is selected in the AT additional lottery during the reincarnation accumulation. In FIG. 145(c), a stop result of the replay combination is displayed as a reel display. More specifically, the replay symbols are stopped in the middle line, and it is determined that the replay combination has been won, and the replay game is provided (see FIG. 53). In addition, as a liquid crystal display, 20 games (20G) additional winning are taught.

At the time of executing each accumulation game, for example, by setting flag information as the information of the game in the reincarnation memory counter (step S1002 of FIG. 137), the winning combination in the accumulation game is determined based on the winning combination in the subsequent discharging game. It is possible to display the reels.

Even if the winning combination is missed as in the fifth game, the winning combination flag information (in this case, the strong watermelon combination flag information) is set in the reincarnation memory counter as the information of the game. Therefore, the reel display corresponding to the strong watermelon combination can be performed in the discharging game described later. Further, by storing information (for example, a stop bit) indicating the stop position of the reel 301 in the reincarnation storage counter, it is possible to perform the reel display with the same dropouts as in the accumulation game even in the discharging game.

Next, in the seventh game, a discharging game, which is the latter half of the reincarnation effect, is played. In the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, in the unit game period (one game in the above example) shorter than the total number of unit games (three games in the above example) of the plurality of consecutively executed accumulation games, The discharge game by the pseudo game is played as many times as the total number of unit games. In addition, for at least a part of the discharging game, the winning combination information shown in the past game (cumulative game) is reproduced and displayed across other games.

In the seventh game, after the start operation of the starting lever 201 for this game is performed and before the acceptance of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop button 211 is started, the discharge game by the pseudo game (Corresponding to the 7-1st to 7th games shown in FIG. 144) is executed.

As the processing of the main board 409 relating to the discharging game, as described in FIG. 55, the unit of the stacking game is based on the information set in the reincarnation memory counter (for example, the flag information of the winning combination in the stacking game). The dummy game information is set for each game (steps S107 to S110 in FIG. 55), and the dummy game for the number of sets of the dummy game information is executed (step S113 in FIG. 55). When the pseudo game is continuously executed a plurality of times, the reel 301 is controlled to a stopped state with a slight swing in a predetermined range (pseudo stop) during the pseudo game and the predetermined time elapses. It is assumed that the next pseudo game will be executed later. By performing such processing, it is possible to reproduce and display the winning combination information shown in each accumulation game in each discharge game (each of a plurality of simulated games). In addition, by performing AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release for each release game (step S1009 in FIG. 137), it is possible to give a new privilege by an opportunity different from that during the accumulation game. Since the 7-1 to 7-3 games are pseudo games, the winning determination is not made.

Here, a specific reproduction display example in the discharging game will be described. As described above, in FIGS. 144 and 145, the display contents are shown in the order of (a), (b), and (c) in the fourth to sixth games which are the accumulation games. In addition, in the 7-1 to 7-3 games, which are release games, the display contents are shown in the order of (c'), (b'), and (a'), but (c'), ( b') and (a') mean that they are reproduction displays of (c), (b), and (a), respectively. That is, in the example of the reincarnation effect shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the reproduction display by the discharge game is performed in order from the new unit game information among the unit game information held in the reincarnation storage counter during the accumulation game.

In the 7-1st game shown in FIG. 145(c'), the reproduction display of the sixth game is performed, and the stop result of the replay combination is displayed as the reel display. In addition, the liquid crystal display is instructed to add 30 games (30G) to win as a lottery result of the AT additional transfer lottery.

In the 7-2nd game shown in FIG. 145(b'), the reproduction display of the fifth game is performed, and the stop result of the strong watermelon combination is displayed as the reel display. More specifically, watermelon symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the middle line. Here, the stop result of the fifth game was the missed part of the strong watermelon role, but in the 7-2 game, it can be stopped when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop timing instead of the missed part. "Stop result of strong watermelon role" is displayed as a stop result. As described above, in the 7-2 game of the pseudo game, the 5th game that was missed is not reproduced as it is, but by displaying a stop result that is not missed, a strong watermelon role can be played in the 5th game. It is possible to make the player recognize the game result that the game was missed and give the player the impression that the loss caused by the missed game is complemented in the 7-2nd game. Further, the liquid crystal display is instructed to add 200 games (200G) to win as the lottery result of the AT addition at the time of reincarnation release.

In the seventh-third game shown in FIG. 145(a'), the reproduction display of the fourth game is performed, and the stop result of the push order bell combination (AT1 to AT10) is displayed as the reel display. In addition, the liquid crystal display is instructed to add 50 games (50G) to win as a lottery result of the AT addition at the time of reincarnation release.

As described above, in the discharge game shown in FIGS. 145(c') to (a'), the accumulation game is reproduced and displayed in reverse order, and a new privilege is given by the AT addition transfer lottery lottery. Since the winning expected value of the number of additional games to be added by the AT additional transfer lottery is greater than that of the AT additional transfer lottery drawing (see the lottery tables in FIGS. 142 and 143), the additional game is added during the release game. The privilege may be granted to a higher degree than time.

Then, in the seventh game, at a predetermined timing (d) after the end of the release game (games 7-1 to 7-3) by the simulated game, the total amount of privilege grant taught during the period of the release game is determined. The taught liquid crystal display (addition of the AT game of 280 games in total) is performed, and the reel 301 for the main game of the seventh game starts to rotate (FIG. 145(d)).

Note that the number of remaining AT games is shown in the upper right portion of the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 145. 145 (a) to (c) during the accumulation game, the remaining game number of the AT game is subtracted one by one in each game because it is the game period of this game, and the AT addition lottery during the reincarnation accumulation is drawn. The number of games to be added is added. On the other hand, during the release game of FIGS. 145(c′) to (a′), since the game period is a pseudo game, the remaining game number of the AT game is not subtracted, and the reversion release AT in FIG. 145(d) is performed. The number of additional games by additional lottery is added together. However, such subtraction of the AT game number is merely an example, and for example, the AT game number subtraction may be stopped during the game period (the first to seventh games in FIG. 144) in which the reincarnation effect is performed. Good.

In addition, in the liquid crystal display illustrated in FIG. 145, "!" is added to the number of additional games taught in the discharge games (c') to (a') during the accumulation games (a) to (a). This shows that the performance is higher than that of (c). Also, by increasing the number of "!"s such as "200G!!" in (b') and "280G!!" in (d) indicating the total number of additional games, a particularly high additional performance is exhibited. ing. As described above, the display mode having the meaning of emphasizing the additional performance and the number of additional games is not limited to "!", and other symbols may be used, and the color or size of the taught character may be changed. You may Further, the output mode by the output means other than the image display body 500 (for example, the speaker 512, the illumination device 502, etc.) may be changed such that audio output is also performed when the performance is high.

As the game progress of the reincarnation effect is performed as described above, in the discharging game of the number of games (one game in the above example) smaller than the total number of games (3 games in the above example), Reproduced display of the indicated stop result in the release game, and a new benefit (reincarnation release) that is different from the benefits of the accumulation game (payment of game value and addition of the number of AT games by AT lottery at the time of accumulation accumulation) (Addition of AT game number by lottery) can be given.

[11-8-4. Reproduction display pattern]
In the present embodiment, the display pattern for reproducing and displaying the accumulation game in the reincarnation effect discharge game is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 144 and 145. Hereinafter, a typical display pattern of reproduction display will be described.

[11-8-4-1. Reproduced contents]
As for the reproduction content of the stacking game in the discharging game, what kind of information the main board 409 stores in the RAM 1114 (for example, the reincarnation storage counter) as the “information of the game” during the stacking game (step S1002 in FIG. 137). ), or based on the “information of the game” stored in the reincarnation memory counter, the main board 409 changes depending on what information is extracted to set the pseudo game information (step S108 in FIG. 55). can do. However, in the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, it is required that a reproduction display accompanied by at least reel movement is performed.

(1) Reproduction Display of Stopped Outcomes First, as described with reference to FIG. 137 and the like, as a typical reproduction content, there is a reproduction display of stopped upouts based on the flag information of the winning combination. By setting the flag information in the RAM 1114 (reincarnation memory counter) as the information of the game during the stacking game (step S1002 in FIG. 137), the stop output based on the winning combination during the stacking game in the subsequent release game. The eyes can be reproduced and displayed.

Further, if the RAM 1114 is made to hold information (for example, a stop bit) indicating the stop position of the reel 301, it is possible to completely store the stop result at the time of the stacking game, so that the stacking game at the time of the discharging game. It is possible to reproduce and display the same stop result as the time.

(1-1) Change of missed item When the stop result is reproduced and displayed, as described in the difference between the stopped result of FIG. 144(b) and (b′), the winning combination of the winning combination is missed. When it occurs, you may make it show the stop result when it is not missed in the corresponding discharge game.

In addition, when a dropout occurs in the accumulation game, the stop result of the dropout may be reproduced as it is in the discharge game. In such a case, the player can be strongly given the impression that the past game is reproduced by causing the same release result as the accumulation game to appear in the discharge game. In any case, it is possible to provide a novel game property that a privilege (addition of the number of AT games) is given again as the past game is reproduced regardless of whether or not the missed result of the drop is corrected. it can.

(1-2) Promotion of winning combination As a derivative example of reproducing the stop result of the accumulation game in the discharging game, the stopping result of another winning combination of the same type as the winning combination in the accumulation game is displayed in the discharging game. It may be allowed to. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination in the accumulation game is the “low-expected winning combination” “push order bell (AT1 to AT10)”, in the discharging game, the “high-expected winning combination” is selected among the same bell combinations. Displaying a stop result such as "strong bell (bell 2)" corresponds to so-called "promotion of a winning combination".

In order to perform such promotion of the winning combination in the discharging game, when the pseudo game information is set based on the flag information at the time of the accumulation game set in the RAM 1114 (reincarnation memory counter), the flag information is It is only necessary to add a process that can change the winning combination shown to a higher winning combination (having a higher degree of expectation regarding benefits) of the same type of winning combinations, and a pseudo game based on the winning combination changed by the processing. By setting the information, it is possible to show the stop result of the winning combination after promotion.

When the winning combination is promoted in the releasing game, it is preferable that the AT addition at the time of reincarnation release is executed based on the winning combination after promotion, and the promotion is performed by performing the relevant drawing in this way. Since the degree of expectation of the privilege (the number of additional games) can be made higher than that in the case where the winning combination is not promoted (that is, the winning combination before promotion), the player's interest can be enhanced when the promotion of the winning combination occurs. Further, when the winning combination is promoted, it is preferable that the image display body 500 be provided with a highlighting effect that clearly indicates that the promotion has occurred. By performing such an highlighting effect, the player can be promoted. The effect of making sure that the promotion of the winning role is noticed can be expected.

However, when promoting a winning combination among winning combinations of the same type as described above, the AT addition at reincarnation release lottery is not executed based on the winning combination after promotion, but executed based on the winning combination before promotion Even if it is done, since the amount of benefits that can be expected at the time of the release game by the AT addition at the time of reincarnation release is higher than the amount of benefits that can be expected at the time of the addition game by the AT addition at the time of reincarnation accumulation lottery, the expected value is higher ( 142 and 143), it can be seen from the player's point of view that a lot of privileges are given by promotion of the winning combination.

In addition, the promotion of the winning role in the release game is not limited to the promotion from "low expected role" to "high expected role" like push order bell to strong bell, but from weak watermelon to strong watermelon. It is also possible to promote to a winning combination having a high expectation degree of a privilege among the “highly expecting combinations”. When promoting a winning combination among winning combinations of the same type included in the “highly expected combination”, it is preferable to subdivide the groups of winning combinations in the lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 142 and 143 to correspond to each other. In this way, when a plurality of promotion patterns of winning combinations are prepared, more complicated game play can be provided.

Further, as another modification example regarding the reproduction display of the stop result, the symbol combination of the winning combination displayed in the symbol display window 401 during the accumulation game may be reproduced and displayed on a different line during the discharging game.

(2) Reproduction display by reel mode other than the stop result In addition to the above, reproduction display of the reel modes of the reels 301a to 301c in the accumulation game can be mentioned. For example, in the stacking game, the RAM 1114 stores the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are received as the information of the game, so that the order in which the reels 301a to 301c are stopped can be stored. it can. Then, by setting the pseudo game information based on the storage of the reception order of the pressing operation, in the discharging game, it is possible to perform a reproduction display in which the reels 301a to 301c are pseudo stopped in the same stop order as in the accumulation game, and reproduced. You can improve your sex.

Further, if the RAM 1114 is made to hold the operation interval of each pressing operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c as the information of the game at the time of the accumulation game, the stop interval of the reels 301a to 301c in the simulated game of the discharge game can be set. It becomes reproducible and the reproducibility can be improved.

If the RAM 1114 holds the elapsed time from the start of rotation of the reels 301a to 301c to the stop of rotation of the reels 301a to 301c as the information of the game at the time of the accumulation game, the rotation of each reel 301a to 301c in the simulated game of the discharging game. The time can be reproduced and the reproducibility can be improved.

It should be noted that the reproduction content given in these (2) makes it possible to reproduce the action of the reel in the accumulation game in the release game, but from the viewpoint of appealing the reproduction display to the player, it is given in (1). It is preferable to execute it together with the reproduction display of the stop result.

Further, although the above reproduction display example has an effect of enhancing the reproducibility of the accumulation game in the emission game, in the emission game of the reincarnation production, the peculiarity of the emission game should be emphasized rather than the improvement of the reproducibility. For the purpose, a reel control different from the accumulation game may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the discharging game, the rotation speeds of the reels 301a to 301c may be different from those in the accumulation game, or some or all of the reels 301a to 301c may be rotated in a direction opposite to the normal direction. You may do it. In this way, by performing reel control different from the stacking game by this game, while emphasizing that the discharge game is a special game, it is possible to make the reproduction of the stacking game conscious by displaying a stop result. You can

[11-8-4-2. Reproduction order]
The reproduction order of the accumulation game in the discharge game is determined by the main board 409 in a series of processes (steps S107 to S110 in FIG. 55) for extracting the information of the accumulation game from the reincarnation storage counter and setting the pseudo game information. The pseudo game information is set in a different order, or is changed depending on the order in which the pseudo game information set by the main board 409 is executed when the pseudo game process is executed (step S113 in FIG. 55). be able to.

In the following, in the reproduction display of the stacking game in the discharging game, the reproduction order pattern (discharge pattern) will be listed and described by taking as an example the case where the stop result at the stacking game is set as the reproduction content.

It should be noted that in any of the emission patterns, the emission game has a shorter game period (game value) than the total number of the accumulation games for a plurality of accumulation games in which game information is stored in the reincarnation storage counter. Each game of the stacking game is reproduced and displayed by being executed in the game period of the number of games in this game multiplied by) and executing the pseudo game as many times as the stacking game within the game period. ..

(1) First Release Pattern In the first release pattern, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, reproduction display in the release game is performed in the reverse order of the execution order of the accumulation game.

Specifically, in the case of FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, when the accumulation game is executed in the order of (a), (b), and (c) from the fourth game to the sixth game, the release game 7-1 ~ In the 7-3rd game, a pseudo game based on each piece of information of the unit game set in the reincarnation memory counter is executed in order from the information of the new unit game, so that (c'), (b' ) And (a') are executed in this order. Then, in each release game, a new privilege is granted (AT transfer addition AT lottery lottery) based on the winning combination (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted) in the corresponding accumulation game. The number of AT games is added).

(2) Second emission pattern In the second emission pattern, reproduction display in the emission game is performed in the same order as the execution order of the accumulation game (normal order).

Specifically, taking FIGS. 144 and 145 as an example, when the accumulation game is executed in the order of (a), (b), and (c) from the fourth game to the sixth game, it corresponds to the emission game. In the 7th to 7th games, the unit games set in the order set in the reincarnation memory counter (that is, in order from the oldest unit game information among the unit game information set in the reincarnation memory counter) By performing the pseudo game based on the information of (1), the discharge game is executed in the order of (a'), (b'), and (c'). Then, in each release game, a new privilege is granted (AT transfer addition AT lottery lottery) based on the winning combination (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted) in the corresponding accumulation game. The number of AT games is added).

(3) Third Emission Pattern In the third emission pattern, for each winning combination in a plurality of accumulation games, “highly expected combination” is selected as compared to the accumulation game in which “low expected combination” is selected. Reproduction display in the discharge game is performed in the order of prioritizing the upper game (highest expected winning order).

As described in the description of FIG. 138 in [11-8-1], the “highly expected winning combination” is a winning combination that has a higher degree of expectation regarding the privilege addition of adding the number of AT games than the low expected winning combination. In other words, it is a "low frequency winning combination (rare combination)" in which a winning probability equal to or lower than a predetermined probability is set. For example, the winning combinations other than the above described in the lottery tables of FIGS. 138 to 143 correspond to the “highly expected winning combinations”, and the bell 1 (weak bell), the bell 2 (strong bell) shown in FIG. Weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, weak chance, strong chance, and strongest.

In addition, the “low expected winning combination” is a winning combination having a lower degree of expectation regarding the privilege addition of the number of AT games than the high expected winning combination, and in other words, higher than the high expected winning combination (low frequency winning combination). It is a "high-frequency winning combination (non-rare combination)" for which the winning probability is set. For example, the winning combination of “replay/push order bell/2 type BB/out” described in the lottery tables of FIGS. 138 to 143 corresponds to the “low expected combination”, and the replays AT1 to AT10 shown in FIG. It corresponds to the 2nd type BB and the outlier.

The third release pattern will be specifically described. Taking FIG. 144 and FIG. 145 as examples, among the accumulation games executed in the fourth game to the sixth game, the winning combination of the fourth game shown in (a) is the push order bell (either AT1 to AT10). Since the winning combination of the sixth game shown in (c) is replay, the winning combinations of (a) and (c) are “low expected combinations”. On the other hand, the winning combination of the fifth game shown in (b) is the “highly expected combination” of the strong watermelon (however, it is a missed eye).

Therefore, in the releasing games 7-1 to 7-3, the accumulation game in which the winning combination of “highly expected combination” is selected is preferentially reproduced and displayed, for example, (b′), ( The discharging game is executed in the order of a') and (c'). In addition, as for the stop result of the push order bell (a') and the stop result of the replay (c'), which release game is to be regarded as the same "low expected role"? You can execute it first. In addition, if the winning degree groups in the lottery table are subdivided and a difference is provided in the degree of expectation related to privilege granting among the “low expected roles” (for example, the expected value of the number of additional games to be randomly selected), the privilege granting The discharge game with the higher expectation is executed first.

Then, in each release game, a new privilege is granted (AT transfer addition AT lottery lottery) based on the winning combination (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted) in the corresponding accumulation game. The number of AT games is added). Here, since the release game based on the winning combination of the “highly expected combination” is preferentially executed, it is possible to expect a large amount of privilege grant from the first game (pseudo game) of the release game.

In addition, when the “promotion of the winning combination” described in [11-8-4-1] is performed, the execution order of the releasing game is not the winning combination in the accumulation game but the winning combination after the promotion. It is preferable that the determination is made based on the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant. Such processing is the same for the fourth release pattern.

(4) Fourth Release Pattern In the fourth release pattern, for each winning combination in a plurality of accumulation games, a “low expected combination” is selected as compared to a multiplication game in which a “high expected combination” is selected. Reproduction display in the discharge game is performed in the order of prioritizing the upper game (lowest expected winning order).

Specifically, taking FIGS. 144 and 145 as an example, the winning combination of the fourth game shown in (a) among the accumulation games executed in the fourth game to the sixth game is a push order bell ( (Any of AT1 to AT10), and the winning combination of the sixth game shown in (c) is a replay, the winning combinations of (a) and (c) are “low expected combinations”. On the other hand, the winning combination of the fifth game shown in (b) is the “highly expected combination” of the strong watermelon (however, it is a missed eye).

Therefore, in the releasing games 7-1 to 7-3, the accumulation game in which the winning combination of “low expected combination” is selected is preferentially reproduced and displayed, and thus, for example, (a′), ( The releasing game is played in the order of c′) and (b′). In addition, as for the stop result of the push order bell (a') and the stop result of the replay (c'), which release game is to be regarded as the same "low expected role"? You can execute it first. In addition, if the winning degree groups in the lottery table are subdivided and a difference is provided in the degree of expectation related to privilege granting among the “low expected roles” (for example, the expected value of the number of additional games to be randomly selected), the privilege granting The emission game with the lower expected degree is executed first.

Then, in each release game, a new privilege is granted (AT transfer addition AT lottery lottery) based on the winning combination (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted) in the corresponding accumulation game. The number of AT games is added). Here, since the release game based on the winning combination of the “low expected combination” is executed with priority, as a plurality of simulated games in the release game progress, the amount of new privilege is increased, and You can expect to give a large amount of benefits until the end.

(5) Fifth Release Pattern In the fifth release pattern, the amount of privilege (the number of additional games) given to all the release games (reproduction display by a plurality of simulated games) is determined at the start of the release game. In this case, the reproduction display in the release game is performed so that the amount of award given is ascending or descending. As described in (3) Processing for reincarnation production in [11-8-2], whether or not the amount of privilege granted for all the releasing games is determined at the start of the releasing game It is determined by the processing timing and the processing procedure of the processing (especially, the processing of steps S1009 to S1013).

Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 144 and 145, it is assumed that the accumulation game is performed in the fourth game to the sixth game. Then, before the discharging game is started in the 7-1st game, the number of additional games in all the discharging games of the 7-1st game to the 7th-3rd game is, for example, 280 as shown in FIG. 145(d). It is assumed that the game (30 games+200 games+50 games) has been decided. At this time, if the reproduction display is performed so that the amount of privilege granted is in descending order, the releasing game is executed in the order of (b'), (a'), and (c').

It should be noted that, in the above example, the description is made such that the privilege display amounts are arranged in descending order and the reproduction display is performed without changing the privilege addition amounts corresponding to the reproduction display of (a′) to (c′). A certain 280 game may be appropriately distributed to each reproduction display that is performed the same number of times as the total number of accumulation games. Specifically, the reproduction display order is (b'), (a'), (c'), but the number of additional games taught by each is 150 games, 100 games, 30 games. Good. Further, in the case where the total amount of privilege is distributed in this way, the order in which the accumulation game is reproduced and displayed may be appropriately changed as long as the condition of the ascending order or the descending order of the privilege is satisfied. For example, as described in the first discharge pattern, the reverse display may be performed, or as described in the third discharge pattern, the high expected hands may be displayed in the priority order. ..

By adopting such a fifth release pattern, the granted amount of the taught benefit is surely increased (in the ascending order) or decreased (in the descending order) every time the reproduction display is performed a plurality of times in the releasing game. ), it is possible to enhance the effect of providing a new privilege. Furthermore, in the case of distributing the amount of each release game from the total amount of application, it is possible to realize a more effective effect such as teaching a large number of additional games at the end of the release game.

[11-8-5. Features and effects]
Although the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment has been described in detail above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment capable of executing such an incarnation effect has the following features and effects.

First, as a general characteristic of the reincarnation production, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a bonus (a payout of a gaming value or the number of AT games by AT addition lottery during reincarnation accumulation) is selected based on the winning combination in the unit game of the accumulation game. Is added, and a release game by a pseudo game is performed based on the information (for example, flag information) of the unit game held in the reincarnation memory counter, and in the release game, information on each of the unit games is added. On the other hand, it is possible to give a new privilege (addition of AT game at the time of reincarnation release, addition of the number of AT games by lottery) different from that of the accumulation game. Further, the granting of the privilege in the discharging game is taught to the player along with the reel operation (for example, a stop result) in a manner of reproducing the accumulation game.

That is, according to the slot machine 1 in which such a reincarnation effect is performed, it is possible to give a new privilege to the information regarding the stacking game by the discharging game, even after the stacking game is finished. In other words, in other words, the privilege expectations accumulated by storing the information of the accumulation game can be collectively emitted in the emission game. Moreover, in the discharging game, the player can be instructed to be given a new privilege with the same (or similar) reel movement as in the accumulation game, so that the player has a novel gameplay that does not get tired. Can be realized.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, even if various advantageous games (for example, bonus game, AT game, ART game, etc.) are prepared, the reel rotates based on the start operation and the reel stops based on the stop operation. The basic game progress of the unit game (one game) of playing is not particularly changed, and there is a considerable possibility that the player gets tired of the repetition. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by providing the above-mentioned reincarnation effect, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine in which the player is not bored even though the unit games are repeated.

Further, as another characteristic of the overall reincarnation production, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a low-frequency winning combination (high expected winning combination) in which a winning probability equal to or lower than a predetermined probability is set, and a winning probability higher than the low-frequency winning combination. However, in the normal game state, there are multiple winning combinations including at least a high-frequency winning combination (low-expecting winning combination) whose value related to award is lower than the low-frequency winning combination. At the time of execution of, the information of the past game (flag information of the winning combination in the accumulation game) is held, and the pseudo game is performed in the discharging game based on the information, so that the past game can be played across another game. The information on the winning combination shown in the game (for example, the stop result at the time of the accumulation game) is reproduced and displayed. Specifically, for example, the stop result (see FIG. 145(a)) shown in the fourth game of FIG. 144 is referred to as the fifth and sixth games, and further, the 7-1 and 7-2 games. It is reproduced and displayed in the 7th to 3rd games across different games (see FIG. 145(a′)).

In the discharging game, although the winning combination in the past games has a high ratio of being a high-frequency winning combination (low expected winning combination), the reproduction state of the information of the winning combination is higher than that in the normal game state. By additionally granting the privilege to a high degree, it is possible to increase the value of the privilege granted to the winning combination selected in the past games.

Specifically, when the bonus is to add the number of AT games, the above-mentioned “normal game state” corresponds to a normal AT game other than during reincarnation production, for example. Comparing the addition of the AT game number in the normal AT game (see FIG. 138) with the addition of the AT game number in the reincarnation production (see FIGS. 142 and 143), a reproduction display of the accumulation game, particularly in the discharge game. It is shown that the additional grant of the privilege is carried out to a high degree.

That is, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the player can win only a high frequency winning combination (low expected winning combination) such as a replay or a push order bell at the time of the main game (cumulative game), it is reincarnation. Since the addition of the AT game number is performed to a high degree in the release game of the effect, the value of the privilege giving to the high frequency winning combination such as the replay and the push order bell is enhanced. Therefore, even if a low expected winning combination is selected and many benefits are not granted, if a reincarnation effect occurs after that, it can be greatly expected to be granted additional benefits, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In other words, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a low-value game having a low value related to awarding is selected and a low-value game is played in the accumulation game, the accumulation game is executed. Since the privilege can be converted to a high-value game by additionally giving the privilege to the reproduction game to be reproduced and displayed to a high degree, it is possible to increase the value of the low expected combination selected in the accumulation game. Thus, even if a low-value game is played, it may be converted into a high-value game after that, so that it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing and to expect the game development.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine, the winning probability of a high expected hand is generally set to be lower than the winning probability of a low expected hand, and in many games, the low expected hand is selected as a winning hand. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest of the player is likely to deteriorate if the winning of the low expecting role continues. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by providing the above-mentioned reincarnation effect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player even if the winning of the low expected combination continues.

In addition to the features of the overall reincarnation effect described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a discharge game that is shorter than a plurality of unit games in which the accumulation game is performed after the accumulation game. Is performed, a new privilege can be granted based on the predetermined information stored in the stacking game, and the new privilege is added to the reel game in such a manner as to reproduce the stacking game (for example, stop output). It is characterized by being taught to the player with his eyes. According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, the bonus game accumulated by storing the information of the stacking game is stored together with the pseudo game that realizes the reel operation reminiscent of the reproduction of the stacking game. Since they are collectively released in the release game of a shorter game period than the accumulation game, the release of the privilege expectation accumulated in the past games can be condensed and taught to the player, and the interest of the player is increased. It can be greatly improved.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, even if a privilege such as an addition of the AT game number is given, the privilege is less advantageous to the player (for example, a relatively small number of games such as 5 games and 10 games). However, there was a risk that the interest of the player would rather decline. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the above-mentioned reincarnation effect, the player's interest is improved by condensing and teaching the release of the privilege expectation accumulated in the past games. It is possible to provide a gaming machine to which the privilege can be given.

Further, in addition to the features of the overall reincarnation effect described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of consecutive past games (cumulative games) regardless of a winning combination in each past game. A winning role in the accumulation game is expected to be a low expected role (high frequency winning role) by displaying the reproduction game by the release game within the game period shorter than the plurality of times and giving the privilege within the game period. ), the feature is that the opportunity for granting a privilege can be increased.

That is, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment having such a feature, the winning combination in the accumulation game is a low expected combination, and whether or not the privilege is given at the end of the accumulation game Even if the number is small, in the emission game that reproduces and displays the stacking game, the bonuses are concentrated in a period shorter than the total number of the stacking games, and as a result, the winning role in the stacking game is achieved. Regardless of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunity of granting the privilege, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the privilege grant associated with the reincarnation effect.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the degree of expectation for the addition of the number of games greatly changes depending on the winning combination in the game. Maintaining expectations has not been easy. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by providing the above-mentioned reincarnation effect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the player's expectation for granting a privilege.

Further, when the reincarnation effect is executed with the first release pattern of [11-8-4-2], according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of unit games are executed in the accumulation game. In this case (fourth to sixth games), information about each unit game is held in the reincarnation memory counter, and a game period shorter than the plurality of unit games (seventh game) is held based on the held information. In addition, the discharge game can be executed in a mode (reproduction display of the stop result) accompanied by the reel operation. Then, in the discharging game, a new privilege different from the privilege given in the accumulation game is added to each of the unit game information held in the reincarnation memory counter (addition of the number of AT games in each simulated game of the discharging game). ) Can be given, and the addition of the new privilege is condensed and taught in the above short game period (addition of the number of AT games three times accompanying the release game is taught during the seventh game). You can Furthermore, the condensed teaching of the new privilege is performed in order from the teaching corresponding to the information of the new unit game held in the reincarnation memory counter, so that the player has an impression as if the game was going back to the past accumulation game. Can be given.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the opportunity to obtain the privilege is generally limited to once for each game, and it is difficult to expect to grant the privilege to the game that has ended. Therefore, if the game period during which the privilege is not granted continues, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play may be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the reincarnation effect based on the first emission pattern is performed, a plurality of game results performed in the accumulation game are reproduced and displayed in reverse order in the emission game. At the same time, in the discharging game that is performed in a shorter period than the accumulation game, the player is instructed that new benefits different from those in the accumulation game are condensed and given, so the game that ended ( In this case, a new privilege can be expected to be given to the accumulation game) on another occasion of the release game. Therefore, even if the game period in which the privilege is not granted or the game period in which the privilege is given is relatively small continues, it is possible to expect a new privilege to be granted by the reincarnation production, and thus the player's willingness to play can be maintained. Machine can be provided.

In addition, in the discharging game, by teaching the new privilege granting while reproducing and displaying the stacking game in the reverse order, the privilege is granted again in each of the past stacking games that have ended, going back in time. It is possible to realize a novel effect that makes the player feel as if it were performed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the expected value of the amount of privilege granted in the release game is higher than the expected value of the amount of privilege granted in the AT game and the accumulation game during the non-incarnation effect (see the lottery tables in FIGS. 138, 142, and 143). ), even if the game period in which the privilege to the extent that the player is satisfied is not continued is continued, it is possible to expect a larger amount of privilege to be granted when the reincarnation effect is performed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play. You can

Further, when the reincarnation effect is executed in the third release pattern of [11-8-4-2], the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is more likely than the plurality of times of consecutive accumulation games to be performed. During a short game period, the information of the winning combination selected in the stacking game is reproduced and displayed in the order of prioritizing the stacking game winning the high expecting role over the stacking game winning the low expected combination (for example, stop. The discharge game is executed to reproduce the pattern). Furthermore, in this discharging game, each time a reproduction display is performed for each of the multiple accumulation games, the degree of reproduction is higher than in the normal game state (in the AT game during the non-incarnation effect or during the accumulation game) ( 138, 142, and 143), a new privilege can be given (specifically, for example, AT addition at the time of reincarnation release addition of the number of AT games by lottery).

According to the slot machine 1 in which such a reintroduction effect of the third release pattern is performed, the reproduction display based on the high expected hand is preferentially executed in the release game, and the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant in the release game. Since the higher the expected number is, the player can be expected to give a large amount of privilege from the first game (pseudo game) of the release game.

Further, according to such a slot machine 1, regardless of the winning history of the winning combination in the multiplying games, the reproduction display based on the high expected combination is prioritized in the discharging game, and immediately after the starting of the discharging game. Since a large amount of benefits can be granted from, many of the low-expected roles are won during the game period of the accumulation game, and even if the benefits are not granted so much, the situation where the player can be discouraged is quickly recovered, The effect that keeps the player interested can be expected.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, since there is a low probability of winning a high-expected role with a high degree of expectation regarding awarding of a privilege, there are few opportunities for the player to expect to award a privilege, and the interest of the player in most games is low. There was some risk of being lost. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reincarnation effect of the third emission pattern is performed, even if there are many low-promising winnings in past games (cumulative games) over a plurality of times. , In the release game, a new privilege can be given to the player in a descending order with a higher degree than expected and a higher expectation degree, so that a gaming machine that can interest the player regardless of the winning combination is provided. Can be provided.

[12. External output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a signal (also called an external output signal) can be output to the outside of the slot machine 1 via the external relay terminal board 131. Such external output will be described in detail. The external output regarding the occurrence of an error has already been described in [11-7] and thereafter, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 48, the external relay terminal board 131 is a board connected to the main board 409, and relays a signal input from the main board 409 and outputs the signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. The signal output to the outside of the slot machine 1 by the external relay terminal board 131 is input to the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200 in FIG. 48) communicatively connected to the slot machine 1, and the external device concerned. Then, based on the input signal, it is possible to manage and display the game information in the slot machine 1.

In addition to the hall computer 1200, the external device may include a so-called data display. The data display here means, for example, a device installed above each gaming machine (slot machine) and displaying game information (number of big hits, number of starts, number of wins, etc.) in the gaming machine, or in a hall. It corresponds to a device that is installed in and that can collectively display game information about a plurality of game machines. The data display is, for example, communicatively connected to the hall computer 1200 so that the above game information can be displayed using the information output from each gaming machine (slot machine 1) to the hall computer 1200.

The external relay terminal board 131 relays a signal input from the main board 409 and outputs the signal to the outside. The communication relationship between the slot machine 1 and the external device via the external relay terminal board 131 is always The signal output is limited to one direction from the slot machine 1 (main board 409) to the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200). Therefore, with respect to the signal output to the outside by relaying the external relay terminal board 131, the output timing and output content of each signal are controlled by the main board 409.

[12-1. External relay terminal board configuration]
A configuration example of the external relay terminal board 131 in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The external relay terminal board 131 includes an input connector (CN1) to which a signal is electrically input from the main board 409 and an output connector (CN2) to electrically output a signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. Let's prepare. Each of CN1 and CN2 has eight terminals (pins), and a predetermined signal is transmitted (input or output) at each terminal. Each pin has an ON or OFF state, and when set to ON, a signal corresponding to each pin is transmitted. Individually, the pins of CN1 are designated as CN1_1 to CN1_8, and the pins of CN2 are designated as CN2_1 to CN2_8. The signals transmitted through the respective pins of CN1 and CN2 correspond to each other. For example, the signal input from CN1_1 is output from CN2_1, and the signal input from CN1_2 is output from CN2_2. Hereinafter, the output connector (CN2) will be described in detail, and the description of the input connector (CN1) having the same configuration will be omitted.

Note that such CN1 and CN2 are merely examples for explaining the external relay terminal board 131 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and if it is a general signal relay board, other configurations (for example, more With many connectors and pins).

FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining a signal output from the external relay terminal board. FIG. 146 shows an example of signals (external output signals) transmitted by the pins CN2_1 to CN2_8 in the output connector CN2 of the external relay terminal board 131. Each signal will be described with reference to FIG. 146.

First, the throw-in signal output from the pin CN2_1 is a signal indicating the number of thrown medals consumed in the game. For example, when the game is started using the prescribed number of three, "3" is given. The closing signal is output in the mode shown by. Specifically, the process of turning OFF/ON again is added twice (then, it is turned OFF) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first input signal was output, and the input signals for a total of three times are intermittently supplied. To output a signal indicating the consumption of three medals. In FIG. 146, regarding the output timing of the insertion signal, the insertion signal is output at the timing when the starting operation (lever ON) by the starting lever 210 is performed, that is, immediately after the medal is consumed.

The payout signal output from the pin CN2_2 is a signal for indicating the number of payouts of medals (game value) given as a result of the game. For example, the main board 409 pays out nine medals (see FIG. 54), the payout signal is output in the form of "9". Specifically, the process of turning OFF/ON again is added eight times (then, it is turned OFF) after a predetermined period has elapsed since the first payout signal was output, and a total of nine payout signals are intermittent. , The signal indicating the payout of nine medals is output. Note that “at the time of payout of medal” shown as the output timing of the payout signal in FIG. 146 is the timing at which the medal payout process by the main board 409 is started and the medal is actually paid out (at the time of payout start). Alternatively, the timing may be the timing (when the payout is completed) when the medal payout process by the main board 409 is completed and the payout of all the medals is completed. In addition, these timings are specific examples in the case where medals (playing value) are paid out as a result of the game. For example, when a replay privilege is given as a result of a game that won a replay role. In the same manner as in the case where the medals are paid out, the following can be used as a specific example of the output timing of the payout signal. In other words, the "timing when the medals are paid out" can be read as "the timing when the process for setting the replay is started", and the "timing when the payout of all medals is completed" is the "replay Can be read as "the timing when the setting is completed".

The type signals 1 to 3 output from the pins CN2_3, 2_4, and 2_5 are signals assigned according to the present embodiment, and by combining ON/OFF of the type signals 1 to 3, a plurality of types relating to the game can be obtained. Is predetermined to indicate the information of In FIG. 146, as an example, the output timing of the type signals 1 to 3 is set after all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, that is, after all the reels are stopped. Specific information indicated by the type signal will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

The game number signal output from the pin CN2_6 is a signal for indicating information regarding the number of games to be executed, and is used for displaying the number of games on a specific external device (for example, a data display 1300 described later). .. For example, when the counter of the number of running games is to be increased by one game with respect to the specific external device, the game number signal is output (ON) once. It should be noted that the game number signal is an external output signal that is mainly used in the “second example of external output” described later, and is not used in the first example, the third example, and the fourth example. Good.

The security signal 1 output from the pin CN2_7 is a signal indicating the occurrence of an error or the like, and when the predetermined error or the like is detected in the slot machine 1, the security signal 1 is output. By outputting such a security signal 1, it is possible to notify an external device of the occurrence of the error or the like. For example, if the output of the security signal 1 is recorded by the hall computer 1200, the error history in the slot machine 1 can be recorded, which is useful for managing the gaming machine. If the data display 1300 is caused to emit light when the security signal 1 is output, the hall clerk can quickly detect the occurrence of an error. Since the security signal 1 is preferably output as soon as possible, it is output immediately when an error or the like is detected.

The security signal 2 output from the pin CN2_8 is a signal indicating that the door-shaped front member 200 is in an opened state (door open), and is a door opening detection switch for detecting the opened state of the door-shaped front member 200. In response to the detection, the security signal 2 is output. The security signal 2 is output immediately like the security signal 1.

[12-2. External output control example]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the external relay terminal board 131 to the outside can be varied by the main board 409 controlling the type of the external output signal output, the output condition, and the output timing. It is possible to realize a characteristic external output. Below, the characteristic external output by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to first to fourth examples.

[12-2-1. First example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a first example of external output, in the internal lottery of the winning combination, the winning combination (strong rare combination) having a relatively high degree of advantage is selected among the low winning combinations (rare combination). In this case, information that enables the winning of the strong rare combination to be determined is externally output. Hereinafter, such external output will be described in detail.

Here, the specific categories of winning combinations will be described. In the case of the winning combination shown in FIG. 49, "bell 1 (weak bell)", "bell 2 (strong bell)", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", "weak" The "chance chance", "strong chance chance", and "strongest chance" correspond to the "low winning role (rare role)" which is relatively difficult to be selected in the internal lottery of the winning role. Among these rare roles, bell, cherry, and watermelon each have strengths and weaknesses depending on the degree of advantage at the time of winning (excluding opportunities for explanation for convenience), and among the multiple types of low winning roles with different degrees of advantage, The winning combination with a higher degree of advantage (specifically, "bell 2 (strong bell)", "strong cherry", and "strong watermelon") is classified as a "high advantageous low winning combination (strong rare role)", Winners with a lower degree of advantage (specifically, "Bell 1 (weak bell)", "weak cherry", "weak watermelon") are classified as "low advantageous low wins (weak rare roles)". ..

FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the information indicated by the combination of the type signals. FIG. 147 shows an example of the combination of the type signals in the first example of external output for the type signals 1 to 3 of the external output signals shown in FIG. 146. Note that FIG. 147 shows an example of setting the type signal on the assumption that the BB bonus, the RB bonus, and the AT game are prepared as the advantageous game states of the slot machine 1.

According to FIG. 147, as the external output indicating that the BB game has started, an external output signal according to the combination of “information No. 1” (type signal 1 is ON and type signals 2 and 3 are OFF) is output. Further, as an external output indicating that the RB game has started, an external output signal by a combination of “information No. 2” (type signal 2 is ON and type signals 1 and 3 are OFF) is output.

The external output (information No. 1) indicating that the BB game has started is that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination (for example, the symbol combination of the two kinds BB shown in FIG. 53) is on the effective line 623 of the symbol display window 401. External output (information No. 2) indicating that the RB game has started is displayed when the symbol combination (not shown) corresponding to the RB combination is on the activated lines 623a and 623b of the symbol display window 401. Output when stopped.

In addition, when the target bonus combination (BB or RB) is not prepared in the slot machine 1, a combination of unnecessary type signals 1 to 3 may be used for transmitting other information.

Also, according to FIG. 147, as the external output indicating that the AT game has started, an external output signal by a combination of “information No. 3” (type signal 3 is ON and type signals 1 and 2 are OFF) is output. , As an external output indicating that the AT game is finished, an external output signal by a combination of “information No. 7” (type signals 1, 2, and 3 are all ON) is output.

The external output (information No. 3) indicating that the AT game has started is obtained when it is determined that the AT game start condition is satisfied (for example, after the AT flag ON shown in step S608 in FIG. 58 is performed. (When the game is executed). In addition, the external output (information No. 7) indicating that the AT game has ended is determined when it is determined that the AT game end condition is satisfied (for example, the AT flag OFF shown in step S1045 in FIG. 137 is performed. Output when the game is executed).

The method of determining the start of the AT game (or the method of determining the end of the AT game) is not limited to the method based on ON (or OFF) of the AT flag as described above, and other methods include, for example, A method of guessing the start (or end) of the AT game from the game situation (for example, reel display result) can be considered.

As a specific determination procedure, for example, an event that a stop operation in an appropriate push order is performed in a game in which a push order bell combination is won (9 coins are paid out in a bell combination prize) is a predetermined period. The start of the AT game can be estimated when a predetermined number of times (for example, twice in three games) occur. It is considered that an AT game is in progress because a situation in which the push order bell combination is won and a stop operation with an appropriate push order is frequently performed. Similarly, an event in which an improper push-down stop operation was performed in a game in which a push order bell was won (one or two payouts were made to win the bell role) was determined within a predetermined period. The end of the AT game can be inferred when the number of times of occurrence (for example, twice in five games) occurs. During the AT game, if the winning push order is won, the stopping operation in the proper pushing order is performed according to the instruction of the navigation, and it is considered that the stopping operation in the inappropriate pushing order does not occur frequently. is there. If such a determination procedure is adopted, the start (or end) of the AT game is estimated based on the game situation, and the information No. 3 and information No. 7 external outputs can be realized.

Further, in FIG. 147, when the start or end of the AT game is indicated, the information No. 3 and information No. 3 However, if the advantageous game state prepared for the slot machine 1 is not AT but ART, for example, the information No. 7 is output. 3 and information No. 3 7 may indicate the start/end of the ART game.

As a method of determining the start of the ART game, for example, a case can be considered in which a predetermined symbol combination indicating the start of the ART game (the symbol combination of the special replay that shifts to the upper RT mode) is stopped on the activated line 623. .. As a method of determining the end of the ART game, for example, a predetermined symbol combination indicating the end of the ART game (a symbol combination of special replay (falling replay) for shifting to the lower RT mode) is stopped on the activated line 623. You can think of the case. In addition, for example, when 9 coins are paid out when the push order bell is won in the game after the game that has transitioned to the upper RT mode (when the correct answer is made in the push order, the stop operation is performed in the proper push order. It may be determined that the ART game has started, and when one or two payouts are obtained when the push order bell is won in the game subsequent to the game that has transitioned to the lower RT mode (press It may be determined that the ART game has ended when the answer is incorrect in order or when the stop operation is performed by an improper pressing order). Furthermore, various specific determination conditions described above may be used in combination for the start/end determination of the ART game. Further, even when the advantageous game state of the slot machine 1 is RT, the start/end can be determined by using the same determination method as in the ART game, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, according to FIG. 147, a combination of “information No. 4” is output as an external output indicating that “strong cherry” is won in the internal lottery of the winning combination (type signals 1 and 2 are ON, and type signal 3 is OFF). An external output signal is output, and an external output signal is output as a combination of "Information No. 5" (type signals 1 and 3 are ON and type signal 2 is OFF) as an external output indicating that "strong watermelon" has been won. Then, as the external output indicating that the “strong bell” has been won, an external output signal by a combination of “information No. 6” (type signals 2 and 3 are ON and type signal 1 is OFF) is output. That is, when the external output signal indicating any one of “Information No. 4” to “Information No. 6” is output, the external device of the slot machine 1 is “strong rare combination” in the internal lottery of the winning combination. You can know that you have won.

The external output indicating “information No. 4” to “information No. 6” is that the symbol combination (see FIGS. 52 and 53) corresponding to each strong rare combination is stopped on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401. Will be output if In the present embodiment, in a game in which a strong rare combination has been won, a so-called "zero" symbol combination is stopped without a stop operation being performed at an appropriate stop timing corresponding to the winning combination. Also, it is assumed that the main board 409 can output an external output signal indicating the winning of the strong rare combination. In addition, when the strong rare combination is targeted for simultaneous winning with other winning combinations, even if the strong rare combination is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the strong rare combination does not always stop in the symbol display window 401. However, in such a case, for example, based on the operation of the condition device corresponding to the strong rare combination, whether or not to perform the external output indicating the winning information of the strong rare combination may be determined.

In addition, in FIG. 147, as the allocation of the external signal output related to the winning of the “strong chance” is not shown, in the present embodiment, the external signal output may not be allocated for the winning of all the strong rare hands. Which strong rare combination is to be assigned to the external signal output may be determined in consideration of the number of terminals of the external relay terminal board 131, the importance of the strong rare combination in the game, and the like.

As described above, by performing the output setting of the external output signal as illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined strong rare combination (specifically, in the internal lottery of the winning combination) (specifically, If you win (strong cherry, strong watermelon, strong bell), since the type signals 1 to 3 are output externally after all reels 301 have stopped in this game, based on the combination of the type signals 1 to 3, It becomes possible to discriminate the strong rare role won in the game outside the slot machine 1.

Then, in the external device that is the output destination of the external output, for example, not only the hall computer 1200 can obtain information on the winning of the strong rare combination, but also the data display can teach the player or the like the winning of the strong rare combination. Like

Here, a data display device 1300 installed above the slot machine 1 will be described as an external device other than the hall computer 1200. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining an example of the data display. The data display 1300 shown in FIG. 148 is a general data set that is communicably connected to the slot machine 1 (including a connection via the hall computer 1200 or the like) and is mainly installed above the slot machine 1. An external device for display, which receives an external output signal of the slot machine 1 via the external relay terminal board 131 and the hall computer 1200, and based on the external output signal, game information in the slot machine 1 (number of big hits) , The number of starts, the number of acquisitions, etc.) are external devices that can be displayed. In the first to fourth examples of external output, it is assumed that the hall computer 1200 and the data display 1300 are communicatively connected to the slot machine 1 as an example of external devices.

The configuration of the data display 1300 shown in FIG. 148 will be briefly described. The display contents and display methods in the light emitting area 1310, the number-of-wins display area 1320, the number-of-starts display area 1330, the number-of-acquired-number display area 1340, and the information display area 1350 described below are all functions provided in the data display device 1300. The hole side can be set appropriately within the range, and a specific display is controlled by a control unit (not shown) included in the data display 1300 and a control unit (not shown) of the hall computer 1200. Each display area is realized by a liquid crystal display panel, a dot display device, a segment display device, or the like.

The light emitting area 1310 is an area that can be appropriately turned on or blinked according to the game situation in the slot machine 1. For example, it lights up when a big hit is won to congratulate the player, or lights up when an error is detected to notify a clerk of the error. It also lights up when the player presses the call button. The light emitting area 1310 is mounted by a component including an LED, a lamp, and the like.

The number-of-wins display area 1320 is an area in which the number of transitions to the advantageous gaming state (number of wins) can be displayed. The hole side can appropriately select what kind of winning number of advantageous game states is shown. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by utilizing the display in the winning number display area 1320, it is possible to realize a novel display of the winning number in the advantageous gaming state in the third example of external output.

The start number display area 1330 is an area in which the number of times the game has been executed (the number of games) in a predetermined period in the slot machine 1 can be displayed. The "predetermined period" can be selected by the hall side or the player, and for example, the total number of games per day or the number of games executed during the advantageous game state can be displayed. In the following description, the number of games displayed in the start number display area 1330 may be referred to as “the number of displayed games (in the data display 1300)”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the display in the start count display area 1330, it is possible to realize the novel display of the number of display games in the second example of the external output.

The acquired number display area 1340 is an area in which the number of acquired game value in a predetermined period can be displayed. The hole side can be appropriately selected for a predetermined period, but in general, it is often in an advantageous game state, for example, the cumulative number of coins acquired during the BB bonus or the total number of coins acquired during the AT game is displayed. be able to. It should be noted that the "number of coins acquired in a predetermined period" can be the total amount of the game value (the number of medals paid out) paid out in the period, but in the present example, the game value paid out in the period concerned. The "difference" between the (medal payout number) and the consumed game value (medal insertion number).

For example, the difference number of medals (AT acquisition number) acquired during the AT game is a combination of the input signal, the payout signal, and the type signals 1 to 3 indicating the information regarding the AT among the external output signals (information in FIG. 147). No. 4 and information No. 7), and the data display 1300 displays the value calculated in this way in the acquired number display area 1340, whereby the AT acquired number is displayed to the player. Can teach. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by utilizing the display in the acquired number display area 1340 as described above, it is possible to realize a novel control regarding the display of the acquired number in the fourth example of the external output.

The information display area 1350 can provide teaching and notification using characters and images. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by utilizing the display in the information display area 1350, it is possible to teach the player to win a specific winning combination in the first example of external output.

The display of the data display 1300 in the first example will be further described. When such a data display 1300 is directly or indirectly communicatively connected to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the slot of the present embodiment is displayed. By the machine 1 performing the external output as shown in the first example of the external output, the data display 1300 displays, for example, “strong watermelon winning!” in the information display area 1350 in FIG. 148. It is possible to teach a predetermined low winning combination selected in the internal lottery in a manner in which the degree of advantage can be determined.

That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the external output as shown in the first example to display the external device (in this case, the data display 1300), and the low winning combination selected in the internal lottery. Can teach even the degree of advantage of the low winning combination. Even if it is difficult to determine the degree of advantage of the low winning combination from the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window 401 (for example, it is not known whether the watermelon is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon), the data display 1300. The degree of advantage of the low winning combination can be discriminated from the display content in. Further supplementing, according to such a slot machine 1, when the winning combination of the low winning combination can be detected from the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window 401, the winning information of the strong rare winning combination is taught via the external device. If not, it can be inferred that the winning combination in this game is a weak rare combination, and as a result, the degree of advantage of the winning combination (low winning combination) can be determined. As a specific example, if the player can recognize the winning of the watermelon role but does not display “strong watermelon winning” in the information display area 1350 of the data display 1300, it is presumed that the winning role is a weak watermelon. it can.

Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, a stop operation (so-called “pushing”) is performed aiming at a predetermined stop timing in order to determine the winning combination and surely stop the winning combination. Also, since it is possible to teach the advantageous degree of the low winning combination regardless of the skill of the player, it can be expected to eliminate the unfairness that may occur depending on the skill of the player.

In particular, even if the so-called "zeroth" symbol combination is stopped, by outputting an external output signal indicating the winning of a strong rare combination, the reel display (symbol combination) in the symbol display window 401 is enhanced. Even if it is difficult to recognize the winning of the rare role, the external device (hall computer 1200 or data display 1300) is notified that the strong rare role has been won, and the external device (data display 1300) notifies the It is possible to surely notify the player of the winning.

Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can determine the advantage degree of the low winning combination selected in the internal lottery from the player through the external device display by performing the external output as shown in the first example. However, by making the output timing of the external output signal (particularly the type signals 1 to 3) after stopping all reels, the enjoyment of the game by the variable display of the reel 301 performed in the symbol display window 401 is reduced. It is possible to provide the convenience that enables the winning combination determination without the need to do so. That is, by making it possible to execute the instruction of the strong rare winning combination by the external device only after all the reels 301 have stopped, first of all, the period for entertaining the game effect in the slot machine 1 main body is secured, and thereafter, It is possible to additionally or supplementally enhance the enjoyment of the game by teaching a strong rare winning combination by an external device.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when performing the external output as shown in the first example, the output timing of the type signals 1 to 3 indicating the winning information of the strong rare combination is “after all reels are stopped”. However, this is to secure an effective timing in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game by teaching the strong rare winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the output timing of the type signals 1 to 3 may be another timing (for example, when the starting lever 210 is operated). In such a case, before the reel 301 is stopped, it is possible to teach the strong rare winning combination through an external device, so that a so-called “advance notification” can be taught, and the reel 301 is stopped. Before the game result is shown, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the external output of the information regarding the winning of the strong rare combination in the first example of the external output, the range of playability can be widened by changing the condition for externally outputting the information. Is possible. In the following, some pattern examples regarding the condition of the external output will be specifically shown and described. In these explanations, the “watermelon role” is used as an example of the rare role, and for the sake of simplicity, an external output signal indicating the winning of the strong watermelon (type according to the combination of “information No. 5” shown in FIG. 147) is used. The signals 1 to 3) are called "strong watermelon winning signal".

(1) First condition pattern (complete notification)
First, in the first condition pattern, when a strong watermelon is won, a strong watermelon winning signal is always output. The strong watermelon winning signal is output even when the symbol combination due to zeroing is stopped.

In the case of the first condition pattern, if the winning combination of the watermelon (strong watermelon or weak watermelon) is won, it is completely determined whether the winning combination is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon depending on whether the strong watermelon winning signal is output or not. Can be determined.

Therefore, when the display based on the external output signal is displayed on the data display, the player can surely know the strength of the advantageous degree of the winning combination, and thus the game operation in which the strength of the watermelon role is usually conscious. It is not necessary to perform the operation (because it is sufficient to confirm the teaching by the data display), the operation fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the unfair feeling due to the difference in the skill of the player can be suppressed.

(2) Second condition pattern (incomplete notification)
Next, in the second condition pattern, a strong watermelon winning signal is output in some cases when the strong watermelon is won.

In the case of the second condition pattern, even if a strong watermelon role is won, the strong watermelon winning signal may not be output. Therefore, the strong watermelon winning signal is output, and the winning of the strong watermelon is taught through the external device display. If it is, you can be sure that you have won the strong watermelon, but even if the strong watermelon winning signal is not output, you may have won the strong watermelon (possibly the winning role was not a weak watermelon). Is left, so that the player can have hope.

In the second condition pattern that "a strong watermelon winning signal is output in a part when a strong watermelon is won", three specific examples of "partial" are shown.

For example, "a strong watermelon winning signal is output when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed among the symbol combinations corresponding to (the condition device of) the strong watermelon" may be used. Specifically, there are "watermelon design"-"watermelon design"-"watermelon design" and "watermelon design"-"watermelon design"-"BAR design" as symbol combinations that can be displayed when the strong watermelon is won. Assuming that, when the former symbol combination is displayed, the strong watermelon winning signal is output. Here, if the former symbol combination is a symbol combination that can be displayed even when a weak watermelon is won, when the "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol" is displayed, the strength of the watermelon role is weakened. Cannot be determined. At this time, if the strong watermelon winning signal is output, information that cannot be discriminated from the symbol combination can be taught to the player through the display of the external device.

Furthermore, when performing output control of the strong watermelon winning signal in this way, the other symbol combination (“watermelon symbol”-“watermelon symbol”-“BAR symbol”) corresponding to the strong watermelon is displayed only when the strong watermelon symbol is won. As for the symbol combination, when the symbol combination of “watermelon symbol”-“watermelon symbol”-“BAR symbol” is displayed, it is certain that the strong watermelon has been won and the player is delighted. On the other hand, even if a pattern combination of "watermelon design"-"watermelon design"-"watermelon design" with a possibility of weak watermelon winning is displayed, by having the possibility of winning strong watermelon, It is possible to make the player have expectations. Then, when a strong watermelon winning signal is output in such a situation that can give rise to such expectation, the strong watermelon winning is taught through the display of the external device, so that the player can enjoy and respond to the player's expectation. Can be improved. Further, when the "watermelon symbol" is stopped on the activated line of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, whether or not the "BAR symbol" is aimed on the activated line of the right reel 301c, the player's gaming style. According to the above, the teaching by the external device can be made selectable, so that the range of playability can be widened. Specifically, for example, if the player performs a game operation such as always stopping the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"BAR symbol" by pressing when strong watermelon is elected, the strong watermelon symbol Since the strong watermelon winning signal is not output even at the time of winning, the instruction of strong watermelon winning by the external device is not executed, and only the player himself can enjoy the game result without being noticed by the surrounding players. The playability can be selected. On the other hand, if the player does not make a special push, it is not known when the external device will teach the strong watermelon winning. Therefore, select the playability to enjoy the throb feeling including the surrounding players. You can

Alternatively, for example, “output a strong watermelon winning signal at a predetermined rate when winning a strong watermelon” may be used. If the strong watermelon winning signal is output at 50% of the strong watermelon winning, if the player is instructed to win the strong watermelon by the display of the external device at the time of winning the role of the watermelon, the strong watermelon is won. On the other hand, even if the strong watermelon winning signal is not output and the instruction is not given by the external device, the possibility of winning the strong watermelon remains, so that the player is not discouraged. be able to.

Alternatively, for example, “when a strong watermelon is won and a reel stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order, a strong watermelon winning signal is output”. If the specific push order is reverse push, the strong watermelon winning signal is output when the strong watermelon is won only when the game is played by the reverse push, and the strong watermelon is won through the display of the external device. Since it becomes possible to teach, the player who wants to receive the instruction can play the game by reversely pushing the game, and the player who does not need the teaching can perform the reel stop operation other than the backward pushing to realize the game playability selection.

In addition, if the player is guided to generate a push-order navigation and perform a reverse push in a specific game state such as a chance zone, when the strong watermelon is won in the specific game state, the win will be lost. Since the teaching can be surely given through the display of the device, it is possible to realize a gaming machine which has not been hitherto known, in which the winning information of the strong rare combination is externally output according to the gaming state. For example, when a rare role is won in the above chance zone, the expectation of transition to the advantageous game state is set to be high, and particularly when a strong rare role is elected, a very high transition expectation is set. By being instructed that the player has won a strong rare role in the chance zone, even a player with a skill that cannot fully push the game can greatly increase his/her expectation for a game advantageous state.

(3) Third condition pattern (incomplete notification)
Next, in the third condition pattern, the strong watermelon is won, and the strong watermelon winning signal is output in a part of the case where the symbol combination of the zeroth stops. That is, in the third condition pattern, when the stop operation is performed by an accurate press to prevent the zeroing, the strong watermelon winning signal is not output because the symbol combination of the zeroth does not stop. In addition, "a part of the case where the symbol combination of the zeroth pattern is stopped" may be, for example, a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%) when the symbol combination of the zeroth pattern of the strong watermelon is stopped. , It may be a case where the zero water symbol combination of the strong watermelon is stopped by a stop operation other than the forward pressing, or in addition, a predetermined symbol combination of the zero water symbol combination of the strong watermelon (for example, Alternatively, a case where a stop result that does not appear when the weak watermelon is eliminated is displayed may be displayed. Further, by combining these zeros, the zeros for outputting the strong watermelon winning signal may be set. ..

Here, in the case of a rare combination, such as a watermelon combination, in which zeroing occurs if a stop operation is not performed at an appropriate stop timing, when a zeroing occurs and the "zero" stops, The player may not notice that he or she has won the rare role. Even if it is possible to guess the winning of the rare role, it is often not easy to determine its strength (strong watermelon or weak watermelon).

Considering the background of the zero-thickness, since the strong watermelon winning signal is output according to the third condition pattern, the winning of the strong watermelon can be taught through the display of the external device. It is possible to make a player who is not aware of the winning or a player who is aware of the winning of the role of a watermelon but cannot distinguish the strength of the player to recognize the winning of the strong watermelon. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel function of teaching a winning combination through an external device, and it is possible to eliminate an unfair feeling with a player who has a high skill such as pressing.

In addition, in the case where the zero of the strong watermelon is a symbol combination that is unlikely to leave an impression on the player (for example, a symbol combination that can evoke a deviation), even if the zero is stopped, the player does not Since the winning is not noticed, it is possible to give surprise and joy by teaching through the external device based on the output of the strong watermelon winning signal. And from such a point of view that such teaching is given in part when the strong watermelon is elected, there is a possibility that the strong watermelon is elected even if the instruction is not given. That is, by recalling such a possibility to the player, if you have not won a strong watermelon (specifically, watermelon symbol arrangement, symbol combination by alternative symbol, zeroing point) Even if, etc. did not stop), it is possible to make the player feel that he or she may have won the role of a strong watermelon, and enhance the enjoyment of each game.

In addition, in the slot machine of the present embodiment according to the first example of external output, in addition to the condition pattern as described above, even if the strong watermelon is not won in the winning lottery, the limited specific condition is set. An external output condition may be provided such that a strong watermelon winning signal is output when the condition is satisfied (contradiction pattern).

The “limited specific condition” in such a contradiction pattern is, for example, that a high winning combination (for example, a pushing order bell, which may include a gap) is selected in the winning combination lottery, and an advantageous game in this game. It is conceivable that the strong watermelon winning signal is output to the outside when the player wins (for example, AT winning). By outputting a strong watermelon winning signal when such a “limited specific condition” is satisfied, by outputting a strong watermelon winning signal to the outside despite not winning the strong watermelon, "Strong watermelon winning!" can be displayed in the information display area 1350 of the data display 1300 (inconsistency display). When this contradiction is displayed, a privilege having a higher degree of advantage than the teaching content (strong watermelon winning) is given (AT winning in this case), so that a strong watermelon is given to the player. It can give more joy than winning. That is, according to the slot machine 1 capable of externally outputting the contradiction pattern, an external output signal that may indicate that a predetermined low winning combination is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination is output to the outside when the low winning combination is not won. By outputting the output and instructing the contradiction by the external device, it is possible to suggest the granting of a privilege that is more advantageous than when the low winning combination is won.

The "limited specific condition" in the contradiction pattern is not limited to the specific examples such as "winning a high winning combination" and "winning an advantageous game" as described above. For example, "after all reels 301 are stopped. A symbol combination in which medals are not paid out (or a symbol combination in which even if the medals are paid out, a relatively small payout such as one or two when the pushing order bell is out) is displayed" is added. Good. Note that in the present embodiment, a small amount of medals are paid out when the pushing order bell falls off (see FIG. 49), but even if the pushing order bell comes off at least partly, medals are not paid out. Good. Then, when such “display of symbol combinations with no (or few) medals paid out” is set as “limited specific conditions” in the contradiction pattern, the symbol combination is considered to be the zero of the strong watermelon. It is possible to give a contradiction instruction while preserving it, or to give a contradiction instruction while making the user think that the blemishes with a low degree of expectation have been displayed, and it is expected that an unexpected joy is given to the player.

Further, as the "limited specific condition" in the contradiction pattern, "winning a rare role other than strong watermelon" may be added instead of "winning an advantageous game". However, it is preferable that such a rare role is a rare role that has a higher degree of advantage than a strong watermelon (such as a high probability of winning in the AT lottery), and due to the contradiction teaching, a rare role that has such a high degree of advantage can be won. By expecting, it is possible to produce high expectations for advantageous games.

In addition, like the first condition pattern and the third condition pattern, when a strong watermelon winning signal is output externally when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped, in the symbol combination that clearly indicates the winning of the strong watermelon. No, rather, it is better to set the symbol combination that is difficult to determine the winning of the strong watermelon to a certain extent as the “predetermined symbol combination”, as described in the upper section, the winning of the strong watermelon can be taught even in the situation where it is difficult to distinguish the winning of the strong watermelon. Therefore, it is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the game.

Although the first to third condition patterns have been described above, in the first example of the external output in the present embodiment, the external output signal may be output according to conditions other than these. For example, the information indicating that the strong rare combination (strong watermelon) has been won has been output to the outside, but the information indicating that the weak rare combination has been won may be externally output.

Even when the winning information of the weak watermelon is output to the outside instead of the winning information of the strong watermelon, the external device is displayed by performing the external output based on the above-mentioned first to third condition patterns. Through this, the player can be instructed to win a weak watermelon. Then, by allowing the player to determine the winning of the weak watermelon, it is possible to produce an effect of expecting to win the strong watermelon when the winning of the weak watermelon cannot be determined.

[12-2-2. Second example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a second example of external output, a signal indicating the number of game media consumed by the execution of the game in the slot machine 1 (“input signal” shown in FIG. 146) A slot for an external device (for example, a data display 1300) having the purpose of teaching game information to a player or the like while accurately outputting the external information to an external device for managing game information (for example, a hall computer 1200). A signal based on the number of games executed by the machine 1 (“signal for game number” shown in FIG. 146) is partially output while being externally output. Hereinafter, such external output will be described in detail.

First, as described with reference to FIG. 146, the main board 409 has a throw-in signal for indicating the number of inserted medals consumed in the game, and a payout for indicating the number of paid-out medals in the game. Output the signal externally. Since the information about the insertion and payout of medals is important information for performing the business management of the hole, the accurate insertion signal and the payment signal for each game are sent to the hole computer 1200 that manages the game information of the slot machine 1. Output is required.

In addition to such an input signal, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game number signal for indicating information regarding the number of executed games is externally output. Conventionally, when the external device is notified of the consumption of three medals by an input signal externally output from the gaming machine, it is determined that the game is executed for one game, and a specific external device (hereinafter , The data display 1300) was used to display the number of games. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case of the second example of the external output, the game number signal is prepared as a new external output signal different from the input signal. The number of games is displayed on the data display 1300 based on the information indicated by.

Here, the "number of games" means the number of times the game is executed in a predetermined period satisfying a predetermined condition, for example, the total number of times the game is executed in one day (total number of games) or the most recent advantageous game state. Corresponds to the cumulative number of executions of the game (the number of games in the advantageous game state) since the end of. As described with reference to FIG. 148, what kind of game (display game number) is displayed in the start number display area 1330 in the data display 1300 depends on the setting in the data display 1300.

To give a specific example of the processing relating to the display of the number of games displayed on the data display 1300, for example, when the number of games between ATs is set to be displayed, the data display 1300 displays an external output signal indicating the end of AT. When receiving (see information No. 7 in FIG. 147), the counter for displaying the number of games between ATs in the data display 1300 is reset (displayed as “0”), and thereafter, an external output indicating AT start is output. Until the signal (see information No. 3 in FIG. 147) is received, the counter value is incremented by 1 each time the game number signal is received. By displaying the value of the counter controlled in this way in the start count display area 1330, the data display 1300 can display the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the previous AT game.

Then, in the second example of the external output, the game number signal corresponding to the game is output even if the game is played by causing the game number signal to be output externally when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is configured so that it can be limited (however, the input signal is externally output each time the game is played). Whether or not the external output signal including the game number signal and the input signal is externally output is controlled by the main board 409, and thus the above-described predetermined condition is set in the main board 409 in advance. Below, the predetermined conditions for the external output of the game number signal will be described in detail.

First, in the second example of external output, when the "predetermined low winning combination (rare combination)" is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination, the number-of-games signal indicating the execution of this game is always externally output. And Here, the "predetermined low winning combination" may be a plurality of types of rare combinations in general (cherry, watermelon, common bell, chance eyes, etc.), or a part thereof. Furthermore, among the rare roles, a “predetermined low winning combination” may be set depending on the difference in the degree of advantage (for example, among the watermelon roles, only strong watermelons are targeted). In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, all kinds of rare combinations are referred to as “predetermined low winning combinations”.

On the other hand, when a winning combination other than the “predetermined low winning combination” is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination, at least part of the external output of the game number signal indicating the execution of this game is limited.

As an example of limiting the external output of the game number signal, the game number signal is externally output until the number of games (games to be limited) other than the “predetermined low winning combination” is reached a predetermined number of times. For example, a predetermined counter may be provided on the main board 409 to count the number of times the games to be restricted are established, and to permit the output of the game number signal once when the games to be restricted are four games. For example, in the restricted game, the game number signal is externally output once every four times (1/4). As a result, the number of displayed games displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1330 of the data display 1300 is increased only once every four times when the restricted game is executed.

Also, as another example of limiting the external output of the number-of-games signal, for a game (game subject to the limitation) other than the “predetermined low winning combination”, it corresponds to the winning combination (or operating condition device) of the game. By setting the limiting ratio in advance, a game in which the game number signal is not output externally is created. When such a restriction is provided, the degree of contribution to the game number display in the start number display area 1330 of the data display 1300 can be varied depending on the winning combination (condition device) selected, that is, the game number signal The more difficult the winning combination (conditional device) whose output is limited, the more the number of games displayed in the start number display area 1330 can be affected (counted up), and the degree of contribution can be increased.

By limiting the external output of the game number signal as in the above-mentioned two examples, a game in which a "predetermined winning combination" is selected in the internal lottery (for example, a low winning combination winning game) and a "predetermined winning combination" The rate at which the game number signal is output is different for games other than those selected (for example, low-winning and non-winning games), and as a result, the number of games displayed on the external device (data display 1300) is It can be less than the actual number of games. Further, in the case of a low winning combination winning game, the number of games displayed on the data display 1300 is surely counted one by one, whereas in the case of a low winning combination non-winning game, the number of games displayed on the data display 1300. Is counted up to less than the actual number of executed games, the probability of winning the low winning combination based on the number of games counted on the data display 1300 is higher than the winning probability in the internal lottery of the winning combination. Get higher

This will be described using a simple numerical example. When the non-low winning combination is selected with the winning probability of the low winning combination being "predetermined winning combination" being 5% (1/20) and the winning probability of the non-low winning combination being 95% (19/20) It is assumed that the game number signal is externally output at a rate of once (20%) in five games. Assuming that 1000 times of games are executed and a winning combination is selected according to the probability, the winning number of the low winning combination is 50, and the winning number of the non-low winning combination is 950. At this time, the number of games (actual number of executed games) that the hall computer 1200 can count based on the input signal is 1000 games. On the other hand, as for the game number signal, a game number signal of 50 times is output to the outside based on the winning number of 50 times for a game that wins a low winning combination. 20% of the winning number of 950 times of the winning combination, that is, the game number signal of 190 times is externally output, so that the game number signal of 240 times in total is externally output. As a result, the number of games displayed on the data display device 1300 is 240 games (specifically, 50 games for low winning combinations and 190 games for non-low winning combinations).

Thus, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games (240 games) displayed on the external device (data display 1300) can be made smaller than the actual number of games (1000 games), and the advantageous gaming state is not won. Even if the game progresses, the number of games displayed can be shown to the player a little. In general, when the number of executions of the game increases without being able to win an advantageous game state such as a bonus or AT (so-called "hammered state"), the player's willingness to play decreases. In the case of the second example of external output, it is possible to expect an effect of suppressing a decrease in game motivation by suppressing the display of a large number of games even if the state is in a state of being hampered. Since it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation, an effect of increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine (slot machine 1) can be expected.

Considering further the number of games display of 240 games on the data display in the above example, since the number of games displayed by winning the low winning combination is 50 games, the low winning based on the number of games display on the data display 1300. The winning probability of the winning combination is about 20.9% (50/240), which is much higher than the winning probability (5%) of the low winning combination in the internal lottery of the winning combination. Thus, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the “predetermined winning combination (low winning combination)” can be made higher than the actual winning probability of the internal lottery on the display of the data display 1300. Thus, it is possible to give the player the impression that a low winning combination is relatively easy to win. Further, by giving the player the impression that a low winning combination is easily won, it can be expected that the set value of the slot machine 1 is higher than the actual set value.

In addition, in the slot machine, if the game is repeated without reaching the advantageous game state by the internal lottery based on the winning combination and the predetermined number of times is reached, the gaming state is advantageous regardless of the winning combination. It is generally known that the game number is released by shifting to the game state. Such a function is also called a so-called "ceiling function", and the "upper limit number" at which the number of games is canceled is also called "ceiling number". The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may also have such a ceiling function, but in the case of performing the external output according to the second example, it is indicated by the game number signal instead of the number of games actually executed. It is preferable to activate the “ceiling function” based on the number of games (the number of games displayed on the data display 1300).

The mounting of the ceiling function based on the count of the number of games (the number of displayed games) indicated by the number-of-games signal will be described in detail. For example, a counter that counts the number of times the number-of-games signal is output while the main board 409 is in the advantageous gaming state. (Also called a ceiling counter) is provided, and when the value of the counter exceeds a predetermined number of ceilings (for example, 240 times), the main board 409 controls the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state regardless of the winning combination. You can do this. By doing so, the main board 409 can grasp the number of games (display game number) that can be displayed on the external device (data display device 1300) even inside the slot machine 1, and based on the display game number. It is possible to activate the ceiling function with the number of ceilings.

According to the slot machine 1 as described above, the number of ceilings can be reduced as compared with the case where the number of ceilings is set by the actual number of game executions, even if the same number of ceilings is provided. Specifically, as calculated in the above specific example, if the number of displayed games based on the game number signal is 240 when 1000 games are executed, the actual number of game executions is As a ceiling function setting equivalent to the case where the ceiling number based on 1000 is set, the ceiling number based on the number of displayed games based on the game number signal can be set to 240 times.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the second example of the external output, by providing the ceiling function based on the number of displayed games indicated by the number-of-games signal, the payout rate of the gaming machine can be improved. The number of ceilings can be kept low without changing. By setting the number of ceilings to be significantly lower than the conventional number, the player is made to feel that the gaming machine is easy to win in the advantageous gaming state (hard to be addicted), and the impression to the slot machine 1 is improved. be able to. In addition, even if the situation becomes hammered, since the number of ceilings is low, it is possible to prevent motivation for games from being lost. In addition, by giving the player the impression of a gaming machine that is easy to play, it can be expected to maintain and improve the operating rate.

Further, as described above, in the second example of the external output, the game in which the “predetermined winning combination (for example, a low winning combination)” is selected is for the number of games more than the games in which the other winning combinations are selected. Since it greatly contributes to the external output of the signal, when the ceiling function based on the number of displayed games indicated by the number-of-games signal is provided, if the low winning combination is won, it is easy to approach the ceiling number. That is, when the low winning combination is won, the counter up to the ceiling number always increases, but when the low winning combination is not won, the counter up to the ceiling number does not necessarily advance. According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to further increase the significance of winning a low winning combination.

Furthermore, if there is a strong rare role and a weak rare role with a different degree of advantage among the low winning combinations, if a strong rare combination is won, it is easy to shift to the advantageous game state by the relevant winning. On the other hand, when a weak rare role is won, although there is a low winning role, there is a tendency that a transition to an advantageous gaming state cannot be expected so much. However, in the case of the ceiling function based on the number of displayed games indicated by the above-mentioned number-of-games signal, as long as you win the low winning combination, the number of games will be Since the use signal is output to the outside, even if the winning combination is a weak rare combination, it contributes to the approach to the number of ceilings. Thus, the value of the weak rare combination can be increased, and the player's expectation for all low winning combinations can be increased.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the second example of the external output, in the normal gaming state, as described above, the advancement of the counter (ceiling counter) up to the number of ceilings is made different depending on the winning combination. On the other hand, even if the "predetermined low winning combination" is not won, a new advantageous state (so-called chance zone) may be provided in which the counter up to the ceiling number always advances. In such a new advantageous state, no matter which winning combination is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination (including the case where the winning combination is selected), the counter up to the ceiling count is controlled to be always advanced. This makes it easier to approach the ceiling number of times than in the normal gaming state, so that it is possible to realize a gaming state in which a feeling of expectation for granting a privilege by reaching the ceiling is high. In addition, in such a new advantageous state, when the "predetermined low winning combination" is won, the ceiling counter progresses in the same manner as when the winning combination other than the "predetermined low winning combination" is won. The counter may be increased by a minute, or in the normal game state up to that point, in the form of supplementing the ceiling counter that did not progress when a winning combination other than the "predetermined low winning combination" was selected. The ceiling counter may be advanced more than in the case of winning the “predetermined low winning combination” in the normal gaming state. In any case, by providing such a new advantageous state, it is possible to realize a game state in which the progress of the ceiling counter is different, so as to prevent the player from getting bored and to improve the enjoyment of the game for the new advantageous state. Can be expected.

In the above description of the second example of the external output in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the output timing of the game number signal is set after all reels are stopped (see FIG. 146). This is to avoid the occurrence of such problems. For example, when the start lever 201 is pressed, the game number signal can be output immediately after the start operation is performed. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game number display is updated on the data display 1300, the game is displayed. There is a possibility that the player can determine whether or not he or she has won a "predetermined low winning combination", and the amusement of interest is reduced by being able to detect the winning combination even before the game result is issued in the slot machine 1. There is a risk that By setting the output timing of the game number signal after all the reels are stopped, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem and allow the player to enjoy the progress of the game in the main body of the slot machine 1. However, in the second example of external output, the output timing of the game number signal does not necessarily have to be after all reels are stopped. For example, by setting the timing at which the start lever 201 is pressed, the "predetermined low winning combination" is achieved. It may be possible to realize a gaming property that allows the player to know in advance that the winning of “” is won. Even in such a case, the number of games displayed on the external device 1300 can be made smaller than the number of games actually executed, so that the effect of the second example of external output can be obtained.

[12-2-3. Third example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a third example of external output, when a specific condition for controlling the transition to the advantageous game state is satisfied, a signal regarding the advantageous game state is externally output and the identification is performed. Even if a predetermined condition different from the above condition is satisfied, the signal can be output to the outside, so that the external device (for example, the data display 1300) having the purpose of teaching the game information to the player or the like, It is possible to display more winning times than the actual winning times in the advantageous gaming state.

Regarding the third example of such external output, the "advantageous game state" is "BB game" and the "establishment of a specific condition" is "symbol combination corresponding to a BB combination (for example, the two kinds of BB shown in FIG. 53). When the (symbol combination) is stopped on the active line 623 of the symbol display window 401", the "signal relating to the advantageous gaming state" is "external output indicating that the BB game has started (hereinafter referred to as BB winning information output)", An example in which "a predetermined condition is satisfied" that is different from the specific condition is defined as "when an external output indicating that a strong cherry has been won in the internal lottery of the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as strong cherry winning information output) is performed" It will be specifically described by using.

First, as described with reference to FIG. 147, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination stops on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401 (when a specific condition is satisfied). ), information No. The "BB winning information output" is realized by outputting the external output signals of the type signals 1 to 3 in the combination of 1. As a result, the external device (for example, the data display device 1300) communicatively connected to the slot machine 1 can increase the number of times of winning the BB by one and display it. As described with reference to FIG. 148, in the data display device 1300, the number of winnings in the advantageous game state is displayed in the winning number display area 1320.

Further, in the third example of the external output, when the strong cherry is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination, and the symbol combination (including the zero eye) corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped on the effective line 623 of the symbol display window 401. (When the predetermined condition is satisfied), the information No. By outputting the external output signals of the type signals 1 to 3 in the combination of 4 (the type signals 1 and 2 are ON and the type signal 3 is OFF), “strong cherry winning information output” is realized. At this time, Also, "output BB winning information" is performed. That is, the main board 409 is the information No. When the "strong cherry winning information output" of 4 is performed, "BB winning information output" is also performed as a set. However, in the order of external output, it is preferable that the BB winning information is output first. As a result, in the external device (for example, the data display device 1300) communicatively connected to the slot machine 1, the winning count of the BB shown in the winning count display area 1320 is set, even though the game does not actually shift to the BB game. It can be displayed once more.

According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, the number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state that can be displayed on the external device can be increased even in a gaming situation in which the number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state is relatively small. (Additional display of winning numbers).

Generally, a player may judge whether or not to play a game machine by referring to the history of game information displayed on the data display. Specifically, when the number of wins in the advantageous gaming state is small, the player does not have a good impression on the gaming machine, such as doubting that the setting value is low, and the motivation for playing the game tends to decrease. .. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give an impression that the set value of the slot machine is high by displaying a large number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state on the external device (data display device 1300). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Further, even when the number of games played by the slot machine 1 is relatively small, it is possible to display a relatively large number of winnings in the advantageous game state, so that it is felt that the operating rate is high or the set value is high. You can expect an effect that makes you feel.

From the perspective of the hall side, by displaying the number of winnings in the advantageous game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to communicate even if the slot machine 1 is set to a low setting value, so there is great expectation for improvement in operating rate and sales. it can.

In addition, the opportunity to increase the number of wins in the advantageous game state is not limited to when a predetermined strong rare role is won (when the strong cherry is won in the above example), for example, when all low winning combinations including weak rare roles are won. May be However, if the probability of establishment of the trigger becomes too high, it is assumed that the number of times of winning in the advantageous game state is increased to the extent that the player feels uncomfortable, and the effect of the additional display is rather reduced. Therefore, although it depends on the winning probability in the internal lottery, it is preferable that the opportunity to increase the number of winnings in the advantageous game state is at the time of winning a predetermined strong rare combination or around the time of winning all the strong rare combinations. It is also preferable to set an opportunity to increase the number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state on the condition of a probability within a predetermined range based on the winning probability in the advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability that the winning probability of the BB combination is not exceeded). ..

Further, when the "BB winning information output" is performed in combination with the "strong cherry winning information output" as in the above example, it is preferable that the order of external output is "BB winning information output" first. This is a problem in that, when the external output signal is continuously output, the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200 or the like) communicatively connected to the slot machine 1 does not correctly receive the subsequent external output signal. It takes into consideration the response when it occurs. By controlling the main board 409 in such an output order, the more important information “BB winning information output” can be reliably detected by the hall computer 1200, and the game information can be reliably managed by the hall computer 1200. Contribute to. For continuous output of the external output signal, the interval from the output of the first external output signal to the output of the second external output signal is predetermined to be within a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms). Good.

According to the third example of the external output, the external device (for example, the data display 1300) can display the number of winnings in the advantageous game state, but it is not necessary to display the additional display depending on the hall. The hope is also assumed. In order to meet such a desire, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the additional display of the winning number of the advantageous game state on the data display 1300 is displayed, or the hall computer 1200 (or the data display 1300 main body). It may be settable with.

A specific implementation method for enabling the above settings will be described. First, when performing "BB winning information output" along with "strong cherry winning information output", it is determined that "BB winning information output" is output first. Then, the upper limit (for example, 2000 ms) of the continuous output interval of the external output signal is determined.

In this way, when the winning information of BB is raised based on the winning of strong cherry, the hall computer 1200 receives the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 1) corresponding to “output of winning information of BB”. After that, the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 4) corresponding to “strong cherry winning information output” will be received within 2000 ms of the predetermined time. On the other hand, when the winning information of BB is raised based on the fact that the winning combination of BB is actually won, the hall computer 1200 receives the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 1) corresponding to “output of winning information of BB”. After that, the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 4) corresponding to “strong cherry winning information output” are not received within 2000 ms of the predetermined time.

Then, when the processing control in the hall computer 1200 is set to “If the type signal indicating the strong cherry winning information output is received within the upper limit predetermined time after receiving the type signal indicating the BB winning information output, If the "count up of the BB winning number display on the data display 1300" based on the received BB winning information is canceled (or the count up itself is not performed), the hall computer 1200 causes the advantageous game on the data display 1300. It is possible to control not to display the number of times the state is won. In addition, the processing control setting in the hall computer 1200 is, for example, “when the type signal indicating the strong cherry winning information output is not received within a predetermined upper limit time after receiving the type signal indicating the BB winning information output. Only when the display of the number of BB winnings on the data display is counted up", it is possible not to display the number of winnings in the advantageous game state on the data display 1300.

Further, regarding the "signal regarding the advantageous game state" output externally in the third example of the external output, in the above-mentioned specific example, the "advantageous game state" is referred to as "BB game", but this "advantageous game state" is There may be other advantageous game states that the slot machine 1 of the embodiment may have. For example, the AT may be set to the "advantageous game state". In such a case, an external output signal corresponding to the "signal regarding the advantageous game state" is prepared (AT winning information signal), and such AT winning information signal is A data indicator for directly or indirectly receiving the AT winning information signal by outputting the signal not only when the AT is won but also when another predetermined condition (for example, strong cherry winning) is satisfied. At 1300, the number of winnings of the AT game that can be displayed in the winning number display area can be increased.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the third example of the external output, even if the number of wins in the advantageous game state is relatively small, the number of wins in the advantageous game state that can be displayed by the external device is Since the number can be increased, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that amuses the player. Furthermore, by allowing the hall side to select whether or not to display the number of winnings, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can flexibly respond to the business policy of the hall.

[12-2-4. Fourth example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a fourth example of external output, a signal indicating the number of game media consumed by the start operation (start operation) of the game in the slot machine 1 (for example, input) The signal) is output to the outside, and the signal is controlled to be output at a timing later than the timing at which the start operation is performed. Hereinafter, such external output will be described in detail.

As described above, in the slot machine 1, as the game progresses, the information regarding the insertion and payout of medals is output to the outside of each game by the insertion signal and the payout signal. Here, FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the output of the input signal and the payout signal.

FIG. 149(A) shows the output timing of the input signal and the payout signal described in the first to third examples of the external output so far. In FIG. 149(A), first, triggered by the start operation (start operation) performed by pressing the start lever 201, the player inserts the number of medals consumed for this game (the number of inserted medals). The signal is output to the outside (three times in the example of FIG. 149). After that, when the game progresses and the payout of medals is performed with the establishment of the winning combination, the number of times indicating the number of medals (payout number) paid out as the prize of this game is triggered by the start of the payout process. The payout signal is externally output (9 times in the example of FIG. 149). The output timing as shown in FIG. 149(A) is also found in a conventional general slot machine.

On the other hand, FIGS. 149(B) and 149(C) show output timing examples of the input signal and the payout signal in the fourth example of the external output. In FIG. 149(B), the output timing of the closing signal is delayed, and the first stop button (for example, reel stop button 211a) that is executed not after the start lever 201 is pressed but after the start operation in terms of game progress. ) Is controlled so that a closing signal is output after the pressing operation is performed. The output timing of the payout signal is the same as in FIG. 149(A).

Further, in FIG. 149(C), the output timing of the input signal is further delayed than in the case of FIG. 149(B), and the input signal is controlled to be output at the start of the payout process. Then, the payout signal is output at a timing after the output of the input signal, for example, after the payout process is completed.

As described above, as illustrated in FIG. 149(B) or FIG. 149(C), in the fourth example of the external output, the insertion indicating the information on the gaming value consumed in the game (specifically, the number of inserted medals). The signal is controlled to be externally output at a game stage after the "timing at which the start operation (start operation) is performed" at which the consumption of the game value is confirmed. Since the output control of the external output signal is performed by the main board 409, the delay of the above output timing is also controlled by the main board 409.

Here, when the input signal and the payout signal shown in FIGS. 149(A) to (C) are output in a predetermined advantageous game state (for example, AT game), data connected to the slot machine 1 in a communicable manner. The display unit 1300 displays the number of acquired game value in the advantageous game state (for example, the difference between the medals acquired in the AT game and hereinafter referred to as “AT acquired number” for simplification). It can be displayed in area 1340.

Since the AT acquisition number displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 on the data display 1300 is the difference between the medals, it decreases when the medals are consumed for the game, and the medals are paid out based on the result of the game. And increase. Therefore, the AT acquisition number displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 is, as the AT game is executed over a plurality of games, repeatedly decreasing by the insertion number and increasing by the payout number in one game unit. , Often increasing

The display change of the AT acquisition number displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 will be specifically described in the case of FIG. 149(A). First, assuming that the number of AT acquisitions at the start of the game of the first game is 200, the number of AT acquisitions is displayed as "200" in the acquisition number display area 1340 until the start lever of the first game is pressed. To be done. Then, when the start lever is pressed, the closing signal is externally output three times in succession. Therefore, based on the closing signal, the data display device 1300 subtracts three AT acquisition numbers from the acquisition number display area 1340. Is displayed as "197".

After the AT acquisition number is subtracted based on the input signal, there is no change in the AT acquisition number displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 from the start of the payout to the external output of the payout signal. The number is "197", which is less than the start of the game. Then, if the payout process of, for example, nine medals is performed by stopping the winning combination, the payout signal is externally output nine times in succession. Therefore, based on the payout signal, the data display 1300 causes the AT indicator to acquire AT. The number in the acquired number display area 1340 is increased by adding 9 to the number “206”. As a result, the number of ATs acquired in the first game increases from "200" at the start to "206" at the end. When the payout number in the game is equal to or less than the inserted number (including the case where no payout is made), the AT acquisition number does not increase at the end of the first game, and is maintained or decreased.

By the way, in the case of FIG. 149(A), since the time from the start of the payout to the external output of the payout signal is relatively long, the data display 1300 is in spite of the advantageous game state of being in the AT game. The number of differences in the game value (AT acquisition number) displayed in is reduced and the displayed period becomes longer. Specifically, in the acquired number display area 1340 of the data display 1300, the period in which the AT acquired number subtracted to "197" based on the input signal of the first game is displayed is indicated by the diagonal line in FIG. 149(A). It is shown in sections. Since execution of a game in the slot machine 1 involves consumption of gaming value, it is unavoidable that the AT acquisition number temporarily decreases even in the advantageous gaming state, but nevertheless, the AT is in the advantageous gaming state. If the display that the number of acquired sheets decreases is seen, the impression given to the player is not good, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the fourth example of the external output, it is possible to suppress the period in which the difference in the gaming value is reduced and displayed as the gaming value is consumed. By doing so, it is possible to overcome the above-mentioned problem that the player may be given a bad impression and reduce the interest in the game, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Regarding the effect of the fourth example of such external output, how is the number of AT acquisitions displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 of the data display 1300 shown in FIGS. 149(B) and 149(C)? It will be described in detail by specifically explaining whether or not it changes. As in the case of FIG. 149(A), the condition is that the number of AT acquisitions at the start of the game of the first game is 200, three medals are consumed for the execution of the game, and the winning combination is stopped by 9 medals. Suppose that one medal has been paid out.

First, in the case of FIG. 149(B), the output timing of the closing signal is not immediately after the start lever 201 is pressed as in FIG. 149(A), but after that, after the first stop button (for example, reel stop). It is said that the button 211a) has been pressed. The output timing of the payout signal is the same as in FIG. 149(A). Therefore, in the case of FIG. 149(B), the period in which the AT acquisition number subtracted to “197” based on the input signal of the first game is displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 is the diagonal line of FIG. 149(B). As shown in the part, it is suppressed in a shorter period than that of FIG. 149(A).

In this way, the reduction display period of the AT acquisition number is suppressed for a short period as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. 149(B), so that it is difficult for the player to notice the reduction display of the AT acquisition number. It is possible to expect the effect of entertaining the game of the AT game without making the player have a bad impression and suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.

In particular, in the case of FIG. 149(B), since the AT acquisition number reduction display is performed after the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is started, in such a game stage, the player's line of sight is the symbol display window 401. In many cases, the possibility of noticing the subtraction display in the data display 1300 (acquired number display area 1340) can be further reduced. Further, although the output timing of the input signal is suppressed, the input signal is surely output in the target game (the first game in this case), which adversely affects the management of the game information in the hall computer 1200 or the like. Do not give.

Next, in the case of FIG. 149(C), the output timing of the input signal is later than that in the case of FIG. 149(B), and it is assumed that the payout processing is started. Also, the output timing of the payout signal is slightly later than that in the case of FIG. 149(A) or FIG. 149(B), for example, after the payout processing is completed, but the payout signal is output in the first game. It doesn't delay much because it starts before it ends. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 149(C), the period during which the AT acquisition number subtracted to “197” based on the input signal of the first game is displayed in the acquisition number display area 1340 is the diagonal line of FIG. 149(C). As shown in the portion, it is suppressed in a shorter period than in any of the cases of FIG. 149(A) and FIG. 149(B), and in the actual game progress image, there is almost no reduced display period.

In this manner, the reduction display period of the AT acquisition number is suppressed for a very short period as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. 149(C), which makes it difficult for the player to notice the reduction display of the AT acquisition number. Therefore, it is possible to expect the effect of entertaining the game of the AT game without giving a bad impression to the player and suppressing the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In particular, in the case of FIG. 149(C), after the reel operation of the first game in the slot machine 1 is finished and the payout process is started, a reduction display of the AT acquisition number is displayed, so in such a game stage Even if the player notices the subtraction display in the data display device 1300 (acquisition number display area 1340), immediately after that, the AT acquisition number increase display is displayed based on the output of the payout signal in a manner that looks almost continuous. Is done. Specifically, the display content of the AT acquisition number in the acquisition number display area 1340 is increased to “206” by the payout of medals, following the change of decreasing from “200” to “197” by the consumption of medals. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a series of display changes appear, and as a result, it is easy to give the player only the image that the number has increased from “200” to “206”.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the fourth example of the external output, the control for narrowing the output timing interval between the input signal and the payout signal externally output in the same game (particularly, , The control of delaying the output timing of the input signal) makes it possible to suppress the period during which the difference in the gaming value is reduced and displayed in an external device such as the data display 1300, The effect of suppressing a decrease in interest can be obtained.

In the specific example described above, the display of the difference in game value in the advantageous game state has been described, but the application of the fourth example of the external output is the difference in game value that can be displayed on the data display 1300. If it is a number display, it is not limited to the advantageous game state. For example, even in the case of displaying the difference value of the game value in the total game of one day, by applying the fourth example of the external output, the period of the subtraction display due to the medal consumption in each game can be suppressed to be short. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

By the way, the most important role of the external output signal externally output via the external relay terminal board 131 of the slot machine 1 is that the hall computer 1200, which is one of the external devices, grasps the game information of the slot machine 1. To help in sales management of the hall. In the fourth example of the external output, the control for changing the output timing of the external output signal is performed. However, in such a case, the output control of the external output signal is controlled so as not to cause a problem in management in the hall computer 1200. With regard to the above, it is preferable to employ at least one of the following first to third additional conditions together.

First, as the first additional condition, in the fourth example of the external output, the output timing of the insertion signal is a game stage after the "timing at which the start operation (start operation) is performed" at which the consumption of the medal is fixed. Although it is acceptable, when it is compared with the output timing of the payout signal, it is preferable that the throw-in signal is output first, and further, all the output of the throw-in signal in this game (for example, throwing three cards). It is preferable that the output of the payout signal in the same game is started after the completion of the output of the input signal three times in the case of indicating the number of sheets. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by doing so, it is possible to clearly manage with the hall computer 1200 etc. without confusing the insertion of the medal indicated by the insertion signal and the payout of the medal indicated by the payout signal. The sales on the hall side can be clearly understood.

In addition, as a second additional condition, in the fourth example of the external output, it is possible to perform control to delay the output timing of the input signal or the payout signal as compared with the conventional gaming machine, but the output of each signal is targeted. It is preferable to start it in the game. Strictly speaking, it corresponds to a series of signal outputs in which the same type of external output signal is continuously output (for example, the payout signal is continuously output nine times corresponding to the payout of nine medals). ), it is required that at least the first signal output (first output of the payout signal) be started during the target game. By doing so, when the hall side manages the game information by the hall computer 1200 or the like, it is possible to surely associate with the target game based on the output start timing of the external output signal regarding the insertion and payout of medals. It is possible to contribute to accurate management of game information of the slot machine 1 in the hall computer 1200.

In the above second additional condition, regarding the series of signal outputs in which the same type of external output signal is continuously output, at least the first signal output is always started during the target game. In such a case, a third additional condition can be provided as a preferable control for the remaining signal output of the series of signal outputs.

As a third additional condition, when a series of signal outputs by the same type of external output signal is performed and the series of signal outputs is not completed in the target game, a game relating to the next game in the hall computer 1200. It is preferable to perform control that does not affect the management of information. The control corresponding to such a third additional condition will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 149(C).

In the case of FIG. 149(C), the payout signal is continuously output nine times, but the second game medal can be inserted before the output of the ninth payout signal is completed. At this time, if an external output signal accompanying the progress of the game of the second game is output to the hall computer 1200, a problem may occur in the management of game information by the hall computer 1200. Controls suitable as the third additional condition for such a situation include the following first or second control.

As the first control, the main board 409 completes the payout process for the current game, or until the output of the payout signal for the current game is completed, or the payout process and the payout signal for the current game. It controls not to accept BET for the next game until both outputs are completed. More specifically, the control of not accepting BET means not accepting the operation of the one-insertion button 205 and the MAX bet button 206, and not performing the bet count by directly inserting medals.

In the case of performing the first control, the state as shown in FIG. 149(C) does not occur, and after the output of all the payout signals of the first game is completed, the second game medals are inserted (BETs are allowed). .. By performing such first control, the start of the second game is permitted in the slot machine 1 until, for example, the processing (payout processing and output processing of the payout signal) performed in the first game is completed. Since this is not done, the game information can be accurately managed by the hall computer 1200.

As the second control, the main board 409 can start the next game even if the output of the payout signal is not completed (for example, BET can be accepted). However, even if the next game is started, the completion is completed. Control to continue outputting the payout signal. Further, even on the side of the hall computer 1200 that receives the payout signal, when the payout signal is received, a signal that notifies the start of the next game is received until it is determined that the output of the payout signal by the series of signal groups has ended. Even if it does, the payout signal of the previous game is controlled to be continuously received and processed. For example, when the next payout signal is not received within a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) after the last payout signal is received in the first game, the output of the payout signal in the first game is completed. If the next payout signal is received before the predetermined time has elapsed, the payout signal may be processed as the payout signal for the first game.

When the second control is performed, the state shown in FIG. 149(C) is obtained, but even after the second game starts, the hall computer 1200 continuously processes the payout signal for the first game. By performing such second control, the hole computer 1200 can continuously process the payout process performed in the first game, separately from the game progress in the slot machine 1. It is possible to accurately manage the game information by the 1200.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the fourth example of the external output, by providing at least one of the first to third additional conditions, it is possible to accurately output the external output signal by the hall computer 1200. While ensuring the management of the game information, it is possible to improve the interest of the game through the display of the game information on the data display 1300.

The characteristic external output by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the first to fourth examples. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may be configured to have any one of the external outputs shown in the first to fourth examples alone, or to have a plurality of external outputs in combination. It may be configured. When a plurality of examples are combined, it can be expected that the effects of each example can be obtained together.

The slot machine 1 described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing an internal lottery related to a winning combination and repeatedly executing a game displaying a game result based on the result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 as described above, the main board 409 is an example of a winning combination lottery means for executing a winning combination lottery (a winning combination lottery) for selecting a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Further, the main board 409 and the external relay terminal board 131 are an example of an external output means capable of outputting an external signal indicating predetermined information regarding a game to an external device capable of communicating with the game machine, and externally each time a game is played. It is an example of a signal output limiting means capable of limiting the output of the game execution signal corresponding to the game even when the game is played, while outputting the consumption medium information signal corresponding to the game to the device. More specifically, the main board 409 controls the output of the external signal, and the external relay terminal board 131 relays the output of the external signal output by the control of the main board 409 to the external device. Here, the hall computer 1200 and the data display device 1300 correspond to an external device, and the data display device 1300 displays a display that allows the type of the low-frequency winning combination to be determined using an external signal output from the gaming machine. It is an example of an executable external device. The low-frequency winning combination is a combination (rare combination) that is less likely to be selected than the high-frequency winning combination (non-rare combination) that is relatively easy to be selected in the combination lottery. The explanation of these winning combinations is described in detail in [10-1] and the like. Further, the consumption medium information signal is an external signal indicating information based on the number of game media consumed when playing the game, and specifically corresponds to the input signal described with reference to FIG. 146. The game execution signal is an external signal indicating that a game has been played, and specifically corresponds to the game number signal described with reference to FIG. 146. Then, each time the game is played, the consumption medium information signal corresponding to the game is output to the external device, while the output of the game execution signal corresponding to the game can be limited even if the game is played. The output control of the external signal by the signal output limiting means is described in detail in [12-2-2] as the second example of the external output.

The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than the slot machine, for example, a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

1 Slot Machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent Plate 50 Model Unit 90 Front Opening/Closing Member 100 Outer Body 100a Rotating Shaft 101 Bottom Plate 102 Side Plate 102a Convex Surface 102b Guard Part 103 Top Plate 104a Heat Dissipation Port 104b Cord Exit 105 Partition Plate 106 Projection 107 Piece 108 Attachment piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharging device 110a Device main body 110b Hopper 110c Discharging port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Dispensing sensor 111 Game auxiliary storage box 111a Medal full sensor 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg 112i Vent space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Supporting cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay Terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door type front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal saucer 202 Operation part 203 Medal insertion slot 205 1 insertion button 206 MAX insertion button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage Release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Frame frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitting body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Recessed groove 300 Pattern variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 device case 303 drive means 304 bottom plate 305 top plate 305 top plate 306 right side plate 307 left side plate 308 rear plate 309 upper swash plate 310 lower swash plate 311 handle 312 reel substrate 313 cable 315 retaining portion 316 grips 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide portion 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main substrate 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Recessed step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 Collar 416 Hooking portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge metal fitting 420a Fixing member 420b times Moving member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlap area 420h Overlap area 420h Overlap area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench portion 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook portion 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 engagement Stop hole 443 Skylight 444 Reinforcing band 449 Main board 500 Image display 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Substrate 505 Light transmissive lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Light transmissive cover 508 Receiving part 509 Engaging part 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 600 Upper beam 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Reservation number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right downward line 623b Right upward line 700 Connection tool 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hooking wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 Input/Output Interface 1130 Input/Output Interface 1200 Hall Computer 1300 Data Display

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of repeatedly executing a game in which an internal lottery related to a winning combination is executed and a game result based on the result of the internal lottery is displayed.
A role lottery means for executing a role lottery to select a winning role from a plurality of roles,
External output means capable of outputting an external signal indicating predetermined information regarding a game to an external device capable of communicating with the game machine,
Equipped with
The plurality of winning combinations include at least a high-frequency winning combination that is relatively easy to be selected in the winning combination, and a low-frequency winning combination that is less likely to be selected than the high-frequency winning combination,
In the external signal output by the external output means, a consumption medium information signal indicating information based on the number of game media consumed when playing the game, and a game execution indicating that the game has been executed. Signal and at least included,
The external output means,
Each time the game is played, the consumption medium information signal corresponding to the game is output to the external device, while the output of the game execution signal corresponding to the game is limited even if the game is played. Possible signal output limiting means,
A gaming machine comprising: